diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.html index ea9cd06adb4..af2680ad4ec 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.html @@ -1,1333 +1,3237 @@ - - -Composer Help - - - - - - - - - -

Creating Web Pages with Composer

-

 

- - - - - -
-

In this section: -

Creating a New Page -

Saving and Browsing Your New Page -

- -

 

- - -

Creating a New Page

- -

Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor that allows - you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a WYSIWYG (What You See - Is What You Get) editor, so you can display how your page will look to the reader - as you're creating it. It is not necessary for you to know HTML, since most - of the basic HTML functions are available as commands from the toolbars and - menus. However, Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. -

To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. Once you've started - a page, you can add and edit text just as you would in a word processor.

-

To create a new page from the Navigator browser:

- -

To edit a page you're currently browsing in Navigator:

- -

To create a new page in Composer:

- -

To start from an HTML file stored on your local drive:

-
    -
  1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer window.
    2. -
  2. Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML File dialog box.
    3. -
  3. On your local drive, locate the file that you want to edit.
    4. -
  4. Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer window.
    5. -
-

Tip: You can also open JavaScript files so that you can edit them in - Composer. -

To edit a web page: -

    -
  1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Navigator. -
  2. Go to a web page by typing the URL of the page (for example, www.netscape.com) - in the Location Bar and pressing Enter (Return on Macintosh OS). -
  3. Open the File menu and choose Edit Page. -

    Note: Keep in mind that when you save this page, the HTML part of - the page is saved locally, on your hard drive. Other files, such as images - and sound files, are not saved. If an image location is static (starts with - "http://") and you are connected to the Internet, you will still - see that image in the document in Composer and Navigator. -

-

Tip: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most recent file - you've been working on by opening the File menu, choosing Recent Pages, and - then selecting the file you want from the list. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -

Saving and Browsing Your New Page

-

You can save Composer documents in HTML and text-only format. Saving a document - in HTML format preserves the document's formatting, such as text styles (for - example, bold or italic), tables, links, and images. Saving a document in text-only - format removes all the HTML tags but preserves the document's text. -

To save a document as an HTML file: -

-

To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:

- - -

To save a document as a text-only file: -

    -
  1. Open the File menu and choose Export to Text. -
  2. Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to save the file. -
-

Tip: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File menu to retrieve - the most recently saved copy of the document in which you're working. Keep in - mind that your current changes will be lost. -

Note: Images do not show in documents saved in the text-only format. -

-

To view your page in a browser window in order to test your links: -

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -
- -

Formatting Your Web Pages

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, and - Lists -

Working with Lists -

Changing Text Color, Style, and Font -

Removing or Discontinuing Text Styles -

Finding and Replacing Text -

Inserting Horizontal Lines -

Inserting Special Characters -

Inserting HTML Elements and Attributes -

Checking the Spelling -

Validating the HTML -

Choosing the Right Editing Mode -

-

 

- - -

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists

-

To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point (also known as the caret) where you want the format - to begin, or select the text you want to format. -
  2. Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar: - -
-

To format text as a heading: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text that you want to - format. -
  2. Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the level of heading - you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). For example, choose "Heading 1" - for your main heading, "Heading 2" for the next level, and so forth.
    3. -
-

To apply a list item format: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that you want to - format. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List. -
  3. Choose the list style: - -
-

Tip: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of text by selecting the text - and clicking the Numbered List - or Bulleted List - buttons on the Format toolbar. -

To change the style of bullets or numbers: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list item you - want to change, or select one or more items in the list if you want to apply - a new style to the entire list. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List Properties. -
  3. Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For numbered lists, - you can specify a starting number. For bulleted lists, you can change the - bullet style. -
-

To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, centering or aligning - to the left or right: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line of text you - want to align. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment option. -
-

Note: You can also use the Format toolbar to align text. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Working with Lists

-

To end a list and continue typing body text: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the end of the last list item and press Enter - (Return on Macintosh OS). -
  2. Press Enter again. Each time you press Enter, Composer outdents one level. -
-

To change one or more list items to body text: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or select the list - items. -
  2. In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a bulleted list, - click the bulleted list button) in the Format toolbar. The list buttons - act as a toggle. -
-

To position indented text below a list item: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item. -
  2. Press Shift-Enter to create the hanging indent. -
  3. Type the text you want to indent. -
  4. Press Shift-Enter to create another indented paragraph, or press Return - to create the next list item. -
-

To merge two adjacent lists: -

    -
  1. Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select all of the - elements in both lists. Note that any text in between the two lists will also - become part of the merged list. -
  2. Double-click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format toolbar. -
-

Tip: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list items, by - clicking on the Indent or Outdent button on the Format toolbar.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -

Changing Text Color, Style, and Font

-

To change the style, color, or font of selected text: -

    -
  1. Select the text you want to format.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
    3. - -
-

Tip: To quickly change the color of text to the color last used, select - the text, then press Shift + Click on the color picker. This is useful when - you want to use one color for separate lines of text.

-

You can also change the background color of the page, or use an image as a - background. See Setting Page Colors - and Backgrounds. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Removing or Discontinuing Text Styles

-

To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from selected text:

-
    -
  1. Select the text.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles. -
  3. Continue typing. -
-

To continue typing text with all text styles removed:

-
    -
  1. Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the text styles.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles. -
  3. Continue typing. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Finding and Replacing Text

-

To find text in the page you're currently working on: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point (also known as the caret) where you want - to begin your search. -
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and Replace dialog box. -
  3. Type the text you want to locatein the "Find what" field. To narrow the search, check one or more - of the following options: - -
  4. Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the first occurrence - of the text, click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. -
  5. Click Close when you are done. -
-

To find and replace text in the page you're currently working on: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point (also known as the caret) where you want - to begin your search. -
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and Replace dialog box. -
  3. Type the text you want to find and then - type the replacement text. -
  4. To narrow the search, check one or more of the following options: - -
  5. Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer selects the - next occurrence of the text. -
  6. Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement text. Click - Replace All to replace every occurrence in the document with the replacement - text. -
  7. Click Close when you are done. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Inserting Horizontal Lines

-

Horizontal lines are typically used to visually separate different sections - of a document. To insert a horizontal line (also called a rule) in your - page, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to appear.
    2. -
  2. Click the H. Line button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.
    3. -
- -

Setting Horizontal Line Properties

-

You can customize a line's height, length, width, alignment, and shading. -

    -
  1. Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties dialog box. -
  2. Edit any of these properties: - -
  3. Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the next time - you insert a horizontal line. -
  4. To manually edit the properties of a horizontal line, click Advanced Edit. - See the section, Advanced Property Editor, - for details. -
-

Tip: You can select "Show All Tags" from the View menu to - show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. You can double-click any yellow - box to display the Advanced Property Editor dialog box.

- -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Inserting Special Characters

-

To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, or currency - symbols: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the special character to appear. -
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see the Insert Character dialog box. -
  3. Select a category of characters. - -
  4. From the Character drop-down list, select the character you want to insert. -
  5. Click Insert. -

    You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose window) - while you keep this dialog box open, in case you want to use it again. -

  6. Click Close when you are done inserting special characters. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Inserting HTML Elements and Attributes

-

If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can insert additional - tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your page. If you are not sure how - to work with HTML source code, it's best not to change it. To work with HTML - code, use one of these methods: -

- -

Using the Advanced Property Editor

-

To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, images, and - horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property Editor. -

Note: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, or modify HTML - attributes and their associated values, it's best not to do so. -

If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor dialog box, follow - these steps: -

    -
  1. From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose Show All Tags. -
  2. Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its Advanced Property - Editor. The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, - each of which lists the current properties for the selected object: - -
  3. To edit a property or attribute any of the three lists, select the attribute - you want to edit. You can then edit the attribute's name or value using the - editable Attribute and Value fields at the bottom of the dialog box. To add - new attribute, type it in the Attribute field at the bottom of the dialog - box. The new attribute is automatically added when you click in the Value field. - To remove an attribute, select it in the list, and click Remove Attribute. -

    Note: Required attributes are highlighted in the Attribute list. -

  4. Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor dialog box. -
  5. Click OK again to exit the Properties dialog box.
    6. -
-

Composer automatically places quotation marks around any attribute text. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Checking the Spelling

- - -

Unlike Netscape, Mozilla does not come with a spell checker. Since -the spell checker that is bundled with Netscape is from another -company, and is a closed source project, it cannot be included with -Mozilla. - -

You can, however, add a spell checker to Mozilla easily, by -installing an open-source spell -checker at Mozdev.org. This project provides an "XPI" (cross -platform installable) file. Several versions of the XPI are -available, depending on which Mozilla version they work with. First -determine which Mozilla version you are using (by going to Help| About -Mozilla), and then click on the appropriate XPI link. You will be -asked to confirm that you want to install a piece of software. Click -OK to proceed. Once it has been successfully downloaded and installed, -restart Mozilla. Open Composer, and you should see the Spell button -added to the toolbar:

- - - -

When you click on the "Spell" button, you should see the following box pop up:

- - - -

Make sure you select your language before you begin. Then click Recheck Page. - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -

Validating the HTML

-

Before you put your document on a web server so that others can see it, you should first check the document's HTML formatting to make sure it conforms to web standards. Documents containing validated HTML are less likely to cause problems when viewed by different browsers. Just visually checking your web pages in Navigator doesn't ensure that your document will appear correctly when viewed in other web browsers. -

Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your document conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML standards. Composer uses the W3C HTML Validation Service, which checks your document's HTML syntax for correctness and provides information on how to correct errors. -

-Note: You must be connected to the Internet to use this feature. -

To validate your document's HTML syntax: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have unsaved changes, Composer asks you to save them before proceeding.
    2. -
  2. When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click "Validate this document".
    3. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

-

Typically, you won't need to change the editing mode from the default (Normal). - However, if you want to work with the document's HTML source code, you may want - to change editing modes. Composer allows you to quickly switch between four - "editing modes" or views. Each editing mode allows you to continue working - on your document, but displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag icons). -

Before you choose an editing mode: -

-

The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs: -

-

Note: JavaScript functions, frames, links, and animated GIF files are - not active in any of the editing modes. To display these items in their active - state, click the Browse button on the Composition toolbar to load the page into - a browser window.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -
- -

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Inserting a Table -

Changing a Table's Properties -

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells -

Selecting Table Elements -

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Tables -

Converting Text into a Table -

-

 

- -

Inserting a Table

-

Tables are useful for organizing text, pictures, and data into formatted rows - and columns. To insert a table: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to appear.
    2. -
  2. Click the Table button - on the Composition toolbar. The Insert Table dialog box appears. -
  3. Type the number of rows and columns you want. - -
  4. Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero for no border. -

    Note: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate tables with a - zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page is viewed in a browser. -

  5. To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  6. Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.
    7. -
-

To change additional properties for your new table, see Changing - a Table's Properties. -

Tip: To insert a table within a table, open the Insert - menu and choose Table.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Changing a Table's Properties

-

This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an entire table - as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells within a table. If you are - not currently viewing the Table Properties dialog box, follow these steps: -

    -
  1. Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.
    2. -
  2. Click the Table button - on the toolbar, or open the Table menu and choose Table Properties. The Table - Properties dialog box contains two tabs: Table and Cells. -
  3. Click the Table tab to edit these properties: - -
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  5. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or click - OK to confirm them. -
-

To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells: -

    -
  1. Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and choose Table - Properties. The Table Properties dialog box appears. -
  2. Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties: - -

    Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click - Advanced Edit to display the Advanced Property - Editor -

  3. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or click - OK to confirm them. -
-

Tip: To change the text color or background color of one or - more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or click anywhere - in the table and then click the text color or background color icon in the Format - toolbar. -

Tip: To change the color of cells to the color last used, select - the cell, then press Shift + Click on the background color picker. This is useful - when you want to use one color for individual cells.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells

-

Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells in your table. - In addition, you can set options that allow you to maintain the original rectangular - structure or layout of the table while you perform editing tasks. -

To add a cell, row, or column to your table:

-
    -
  1. Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or cells).
    2. -
  2. Open the Table menu and then choose Insert. -
  3. Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new table within - a table cell.)
    4. -
-

To delete a cell, row, or column:

-
    -
  1. Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or, select neighboring - cells to delete more than one row at a time. To select neighboring cells, - hold down the Ctrl key (Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh OS) - while dragging over the cells you want to select. To select individual cells - in a table, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the cells you want to select.
    2. -
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Delete. -
  3. Choose the item you want to delete.
    4. -
-

To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right: -

-

To join (or merge) adjacent cells: -

-

To split a joined cell back into two or more cells: -

-

Refer to Selecting Table Elements for information - on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and columns. - -

Changing the Default Table Editing Behavior

-

By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer preserves the table's - structure by adding cells at the end of a row, wherever needed. This allows - you to delete one or more cells but still maintain the table's original rectangular - layout, or structure. Otherwise, deleting cells can result in a table with empty - spaces, or whose outline appears irregular due to an uneven number of cells. -

To change the default table editing behavior, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose Composer. -
  2. Under Table Editing, set the following preferences: - -
  3. Click OK. -
-

See also Setting General Composer Preferences. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Selecting Table Elements

-

You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or group of cells: -

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Tables

-

-

To move table:

-
    -
  1. Click inside the table.
    2. -
  2. Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.
    3. -
- -

 

-

Moving the Contents of a Cell, Row, or Column

-

To move the contents of a cell, row, or column within a table: -

    -
  1. Select the text that you want to move. For more information, see - Selecting Table Elements. -
  2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Cut. -
  3. Click to place the insertion point in the new location. -
  4. Open the Edit menu, and choose Paste. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Converting Text into a Table

-

To convert text into a table: -

    -
  1. Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in mind that - Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in the selection. -
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You see the Convert to Table dialog box. -
  3. Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection into columns, - or specify a different character to use. If you choose Space as the separator for columns, choose whether or not you want Composer to - ignore multiple space and treat them as one space. -
  4. Leave "Delete separator character" checked to have Composer remove the separator - character when it converts the text into a table. If you don't want Composer - to delete the separator character, uncheck this option. -
  5. Click OK. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -
- -

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web Page

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Inserting an Image into Your Page -

Editing Image Properties -

-

 

- -

Inserting an Image into Your Page

-

You can insert GIF, JPEG, and PNG images into your web page. You can also use - them to create links. When you insert an image, - Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.

-

To insert an image:

-
    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to appear.
    2. -
  2. Click the Image button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Image. You see the Image Properties dialog box.
    3. -
  3. Type the location and filename of the image file, or click Choose File to - search for an image file on your hard drive or network. -
  4. Type alternate text that will appear in text-only browsers, and that will - appear in other browsers when an image is loading or when image loading is - disabled. -
  5. If needed, click More Properties so you can adjust the settings in the Image - Properties dialog box.
    6. -
-

Tip: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto your page. -

Tip: While typing in a paragraph that contains one or more images, if - you want to insert a line break after all images in the paragraph, choose Break - Below Images from the Insert menu. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Editing Image Properties

-

Once you've inserted an image into your page, you can edit its properties and - customize the layout in your page, such as the height, width, spacing, and text - alignment. If you are not currently viewing the Image Properties dialog box, follow - these steps: -

To edit the properties for a selected image: -

    -
  1. Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button - on the toolbar to display the Image Properties dialog box. Click More Properties - to expand the list of settings. To collapse the list of settings, click Fewer - Properties. - -
  2. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  3. Click OK to confirm your changes. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -
- -

Setting Page Properties

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Setting Page Properties and Meta - Tags -

Setting Page Colors and Backgrounds -

-

 

- - -

Setting Page Properties and Meta Tags

-

Use the Page Properties dialog box to enter properties such as the title, author, - and description of the document you're currently working on. This information - is useful if you plan to use the page on a web site, since search engines use - this type of information to index your page. You can view this information from - the browser window by choosing the View menu and choosing Page Info. -

    -
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties. - -
  2. Edit any of the following properties: - -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

-

 

- - -

Setting Page Colors and Background

-

You can change the background color or specify a background image for the page - you're currently working on. These choices affect the way text and links in - your page appear to people viewing the page through a browser. -

To set the colors and background for the current page, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background. - -
  2. Edit any of the following properties: - -
-

-Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced - Edit to display the Advanced Property Editor. -

You can also set the default page background - and colors for every new page you create in Composer. -

Tip: To quickly change the background color to the color last used, - select the cell, then press Shift + Click on the background color picker. -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

- - -
- -

Creating Links

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Creating Links Within the Same Page -

Creating Links to Other Pages -

Using Images as Links -

Removing or Discontinuing Links -

-

 

- -

Creating Links Within the Same Page

-

To create a link within the same page, for example a link that the reader - can use to jump from one section to another, you must create an anchor - (target location), and then create a link that points to the anchor. Anchors - are also called named anchors. -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line where you - want to create an anchor, or select some text.
    2. -
  2. Click the Anchor button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named Anchor Properties dialog box.
    3. -
  3. Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up to 30 characters). - If you include spaces, they will be converted to underscores (_). - If you selected some text in step #1, this box already contains a name.
    4. -
  4. Click OK. - An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the anchor's location:
    5. -
-

To create the link that the reader can click to jump to the anchor: -

    -
  1. Select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.
    2. -
  2. Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. - -
  3. Click OK. -
-

Note: To test the link you just created, open the File menu and choose - Browse Page, then click the link.

-

Tip: If you did not first create named anchors, you can use the Link - dialog box to create links to headings that already occur in the page.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Creating Links to Other Pages

-

You can create links from your page to local pages on your own computer or - on your workplace's network, or to remote pages on the Internet.

-

You can quickly create a link by dragging and dropping links and bookmarks - from other windows. For example, you can select a link from a web page, bookmark, - or Mail window and drag and drop it onto your page.

- -

To create a link to another page:

-
    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a link, or - select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.
    2. -
  2. Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. - -
  3. Define your link: - -
    -

    Hint: To copy a link on a web page, you can also right-click - (Control + Click on Macintosh OS) a link on a web page and choose Copy - Link Location.

    -
    -
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  5. Click OK.
    6. -
  6. To test the link you just created, open the File menu, choose Browse - Page, and then click the link.
    7. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Using Images as Links

-

You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave like links in - your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, the browser window displays - the page that the image is linked to.

-
    -
  1. Select an image on your page.
    2. -
  2. Click the Link button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Link.
    3. -
  3. Use the Link Properties dialog box to link the image to a named - anchor or heading within the page, or to a - separate local or remote page.
    4. -
-

Tip: Drag and drop a linked image from the Navigator window into a - Composer window to copy both the image and the link.

-

Note: To remove the blue border on images used as links, open the - Link Properties dialog box and enter 0 in the Solid Border field.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Removing or Discontinuing Links

-

To remove a link:

-
    -
  1. Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or image.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links. -
-

To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is not included - as part of the link:

-
    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to end.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -
- -

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

-

If your pages exists only on your local hard disk, you can browse your pages, but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your pages to a remote computer called a web server. When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies (uploads) your pages to a computer that lets others browse your pages. To find a web server where you can publish your pages, ask your ISP or system administrator.

- -

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: - -

Publishing a Document -

Updating a Published Document -

Changing the File Name or Publishing Location -

Creating a New Publishing Site -

Changing the Default Publishing Site -

Deleting a Publishing Site -

Publishing Settings - -

- - -

 

- -

Publishing a Document

-

To publish a document on a web server:

-
    -
  1. Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a new Composer document.
    2. -
  2. Open the File menu and choose Publish. If you have previously defined a default publishing location for this document, Composer uploads the document to the specified location.
    3. - - -
  3. To view your page, enter the page's HTTP address in Navigator's Location Bar. Test the page's links and make sure there are no missing images.
    4. - -
- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Tips for Avoiding Broken Links or Missing Images

-

- -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Updating a Published Document

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Changing the File Name or Publishing Location

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

 

- -

Creating a New Publishing Site

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -

 

- -

Changing the Default Publishing Site

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

 

- -

Deleting a Publishing Site

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -

 

- -

Publishing Settings

-

Also include link to global Publishing prefs.

- -

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: - -

Publish Page - Publish -

Publish Page - Settings -

Publish Settings -

- -

 

- -

Publish Page - Publish

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Publish Page - Settings

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Publish Settings

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -
- -

Composer Preferences

-

This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

-
    -
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. -
  2. Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.
    3. -
-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Composer Preferences - Composer -

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings -

Composer Preferences - Publishing -

-

 

- -

Composer Preferences - Composer

-

Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving - files and for table editing. These settings apply to every document you create. -

If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow these steps: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
  2. Click the Composer category.
    3. -
- -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

- -

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings

-

New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colors and background images - that apply to every document you create.

-

If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow these steps: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
  2. Open the Composer category and click New Page Settings. -
- - -

To change the author name for an individual page: Open the Format menu and - choose Page Title and Properties. -

To change the page colors and background image for an individual page: Open - the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background. -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

- - -

Composer Preferences - Publishing

-

text to come.

- -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

-
-

- 27 February 2002 -

- - + + + +Creating Web Pages with Mozilla Composer + + +

 

+ + + + + +

Creating Web Pages with Mozilla Composer

+ +

Mozilla Composer lets you create your own web pages and publish +them on the web. You don't have to know HTML to use Composer; it is +as easy to use as a word processor.

+ +

Toolbar buttons let you add lists, tables, images, links to +other pages, colors, and font styles. You can see what your +document will look like on the Web as you create it, and you can +easily share your document with other users, no matter what type of +browser or HTML-capable email program they use.

+ +

To start using Mozilla Composer:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
 Composer icon
+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Starting a New Page

+ +

Formatting Your Web Pages

+ +

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

+ +

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web +Page

+ +

Setting Page Properties

+ +

Creating Links in Composer

+ +

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

+ +

Composer Preferences

+
+ +


+

+ + +
+ +

Starting a New Page

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Creating a New Page

+ +

Saving and Browsing Your New +Page

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + + +

Creating a New Page

+ +

Mozilla Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor +that allows you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a +WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) editor, so you can +display how your page will look to the reader as you're creating +it. It is not necessary for you to know HTML, since most of the +basic HTML functions are available as commands from the toolbars +and menus.

+ +

Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. To view +or edit the HTML source code, open the View menu, and choose HTML +Source, or click the <HTML> Source tab in the Edit Mode +toolbar at the bottom of the Composer window.

+ +

To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. +Once you've started a page, you can add and edit text just as you +would in a word processor.

+ +

To create a new page from the Navigator browser:

+ + + + + +

To edit a page you're currently browsing in +Navigator:

+ + + +

To create a new page in Composer:

+ + + +

To start from an HTML file stored on your local +drive:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer +window.
    2. + +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML +File dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. On your local drive, locate the file that you want to +edit.
    4. + +
  4. Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer +window.
    5. +
+ +

To edit a web page:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Navigator.
    2. + +
  2. Go to a web page by typing the URL of the page (for example, +http://home.netscape.com) in the Location Bar and pressing Enter +(Return on Macintosh OS).
    3. + +
  3. Open the File menu and choose Edit Page.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most +recent file you've been working on by opening the File menu, +choosing Recent Pages, and then selecting the file you want from +the list.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Saving and Browsing Your New Page

+ +

You can save Composer documents in HTML or text-only format. +Saving a document in HTML format preserves the document's +formatting, such as text styles (for example, bold or italic), +tables, links, and images. Saving a document in text-only format +removes all the HTML tags but preserves the document's text.

+ +

To save a document as an HTML file:

+ + + +

To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:

+ + + +

When you save a page in Composer, all parts of the page (the +HTML, images and other files, such as sound files and style +sheets), are saved locally on your hard drive. If you only want to +save the HTML part of the page, you must change the Composer +preference for saving pages. See Composer Preferences - Composer +for more information on changing Composer's setting for saving +pages.

+ +

If an image location is absolute (starts with "http://") and you +are connected to the Internet, you will still see that image in the +document in Composer and Navigator. However, if the image location +is relative to the page location (starts with "file:///"), then you +won't see the image in the local version of the document.

+ +

To save a document as a text-only file:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Export to Text.
    2. + +
  2. Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to +save the file.
    3. +
+ +

Note: Images do not appear in documents saved in the +text-only format.

+ +

Tip: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File +menu to retrieve the most recently saved copy of the document in +which you're working. Keep in mind that your current changes will +be lost.

+ +

To view your page in a browser window in order to test your +links:

+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +


+

+ + +
+ +

Formatting Your Web Pages

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, +and Lists

+ +

Working with Lists

+ +

Changing Text Color, Style, and +Font

+ +

Removing or Discontinuing Text +Styles

+ +

Finding and Replacing Text

+ +

Inserting Horizontal Lines

+ +

Inserting Special +Characters

+ +

Inserting HTML Elements and +Attributes

+ +

Validating the HTML

+ +

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + + +

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists

+ +

To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the format to +begin, or select the text you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the +Format toolbar:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

To format text as a heading:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text +that you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the +level of heading you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). Choose +"Heading 1" for your main heading, "Heading 2" for the next level, +and so forth.
    3. +
+ +

To apply a list item format:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that +you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List.
    3. + +
  3. Choose the list style:
    4. + +
  4. + +
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of +text by selecting the text and clicking the Numbered List or +Bulleted List buttons on the Format toolbar.

+ +

To change the style of bullets or numbers:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list +item you want to change, or select one or more items in the list if +you want to apply a new style to the entire list.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List Properties.
    3. + +
  3. Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For +numbered lists, you can specify a starting number. For bulleted +lists, you can change the bullet style.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: You can also double-click on a bullet or +number in a list to display the List Properties dialog box.

+ +

To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, +centering or aligning to the left or right:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line +of text you want to align.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment +option.
    3. +
+ +

Note: You can also use the Format toolbar to +align text.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Working with Lists

+ +

To end a list and continue typing body text:

+ + + +

To change one or more list items to body text:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or +select the list items.
    2. + +
  2. In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a +bulleted list, click the bulleted list button) in the Format +toolbar.
    3. +
+ +

To position indented text below a list item:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item.
    2. + +
  2. Press Shift-Enter to create the hanging indent.
    3. + +
  3. Type the text you want to indent.
    4. + +
  4. Press Shift-Enter to create another indented paragraph, or +press Return to create the next list item.
    5. +
+ + + + +

Tip: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list +items by clicking anywhere in a list item and then clicking the +Indent or Outdent button on the Format toolbar. Alternatively, +click anywhere in a list item and press Tab to indent one level. +Press Shift+Tab to outdent one level.

+ +

To merge two adjacent lists:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select +all of the elements in both lists. Note that any text in between +the two lists will also become part of the merged list.
    2. + +
  2. Click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format +toolbar to merge the lists.
    3. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + +

Changing Text Color, Style, and Font

+ +

To change the style, color, or font of selected text:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

To change the background color of the page:

+ +
    +
  1. Click anywhere in the page.
    2. + +
  2. Click the background color block in the Format toolbar.
    3. + +
  3. Choose a background color from the Block Background Color +dialog box.
    4. + +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly change the color of text to the color +last used, select the text, then press Shift and click on the text +color block in the Format toolbar. This is useful when you want to +use one color for separate lines of text.

+ +

You can also use an image as a background. See Setting Page Colors and +Backgrounds.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Removing or Discontinuing Text Styles

+ +

To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from +selected text:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles.
    3. + +
  3. Continue typing.
    4. +
+ +

To continue typing text with all text styles removed:

+ +
    +
  1. Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the +text styles.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles.
    3. + +
  3. Continue typing.
    4. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Finding and Replacing Text

+ +

To find text in the page you're currently working on:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your +search.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the +Find and Replace dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Type the text you want to locate in the "Find what" field. To +narrow the search, check one or more of the following options: +


    + +
    4. + +
  4. Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the +first occurrence of the text, click Find Next to search for the +next occurrence.
    5. + +
  5. Click Close when you are done.
    6. +
+ +

To find and replace text in the page you're currently working +on:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your +search.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the +Find and Replace dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Type the text you want to find and then type the replacement +text.
    4. + +
  4. To narrow the search, check one or more of the following +options:
    5. + + + + +
  5. Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer +selects the next occurrence of the text.
    6. + +
  6. Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement +text. Click Replace and Find to replace the selected text and find +the next occurrence. Click Replace All to replace every occurrence +in the document with the replacement text.
    7. + +
  7. Click Close when you are done.
    8. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Inserting Horizontal Lines

+ +

Horizontal lines are typically used to separate different +sections of a document visually. To insert a horizontal line (also +called a rule) in your page, begin from the Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to +appear.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.
    3. +
+ +

 

+ + + +

Setting Horizontal Line Properties

+ +

You can customize a line's height, length, width, alignment, and +shading.

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties +dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Edit any of these properties:
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the +next time you insert a horizontal line.
    4. + +
  4. To edit the properties of a horizontal line manually, click +Advanced Edit. See the section, Advanced +Property Editor, for details.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can select "Show All Tags" from the View menu to +show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. Click any yellow box to +select everything within that HTML tag or element. Double-click any +yellow box to display the Advanced +Property Editor dialog box for that HTML tag or element.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + + +

Inserting Special Characters

+ +

To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, +or currency symbols:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the special +character to appear.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see +the Insert Character dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Select a category of characters.
    4. + + + + +
  4. From the Character drop-down list, select the character you +want to insert.
    5. + +
  5. Click Insert. + +

    You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose +window) while you keep this dialog box open, in case you want to +use it again.

    +
    6. + +
  6. Click Close when you are done inserting special +characters.
    7. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + +

Inserting HTML Elements and Attributes

+ +

If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can +insert additional tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your +page. If you are not sure how to work with HTML source code, it's +best not to change it. To work with HTML code, use one of these +methods:

+ + + +

 

+ + + + +

Using the Advanced Property Editor

+ +

To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, +images, and horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property +Editor.

+ +

Note: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, +or modify HTML attributes and their associated values, it's best +not to do so.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor +dialog box, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose Show All +Tags.
    2. + +
  2. Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its +Properties dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Click Advanced Edit to open the object's Advanced Property +Editor. The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, each of which +lists the current properties for the selected object:
    4. + + + + +
  4. To edit a property or attribute in any of the three lists, +select the attribute you want to edit. You can then edit the +attribute's name or value using the editable Attribute and Value +fields at the bottom of the dialog box. To add a new attribute, +type it in the Attribute field at the bottom of the dialog box. The +new attribute is automatically added when you click in the Value +field. To remove an attribute, select it in the list, and click +Remove Attribute. + +

    Note: Required attributes are highlighted in the +Attribute list.

    +
    5. + +
  5. Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor +dialog box.
    6. + +
  6. Click OK again to exit the Properties dialog box.
    7. +
+ +

Composer automatically places quotation marks around any +attribute text.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + + + + +

Validating the HTML

+ +

Before you put your document on a web server so that others can +see it, you should first check the document's HTML formatting to +make sure it conforms to web standards. Documents containing +validated HTML are less likely to cause problems when viewed by +different browsers. Just visually checking your web pages in +Navigator doesn't ensure that your document will appear correctly +when viewed in other web browsers.

+ +

Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your +document conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML +standards. Composer uses the W3C HTML Validation Service, which +checks your document's HTML syntax for compliance with HTML 4.01 standards. +This service also provides +information on how to correct errors.

+ +

Note: You must be connected to the Internet to use this +feature.

+ +

To validate your document's HTML syntax:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have +unsaved changes, Composer asks you to save them before +proceeding.
    2. + +
  2. When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click Browse +and locate the file on your hard disk that you want to +validate.
    3. + +
  3. Click "Validate this document".
    4. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

+ +

Typically, you won't need to change the editing mode from the +default (Normal). However, if you want to work with the document's +HTML source code, you may want to change editing modes.

+ +

Composer allows you to quickly switch between four editing modes +or views. Each editing mode allows you to continue working on your +document, but displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag +icons).

+ +

Before you choose an editing mode:

+ + + +

The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs:

+ + + +

Note: JavaScript functions, frames, links, and animated +GIF files are not active in any of the editing modes. To display +these items in their active state, click the Browse button on the +Composition toolbar to load the page into a browser window.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +
+ +

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Inserting a Table

+ +

Changing a Table's +Properties

+ +

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and +Cells

+ +

Selecting Table Elements

+ +

Moving, Copying, and Deleting +Tables

+ +

Converting Text into a Table

+
+ +

 

+ + + +

Inserting a Table

+ +

Tables are useful for organizing text, pictures, and data into +formatted rows and columns. To insert a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to +appear.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Table button on the Composition toolbar. The +Insert Table dialog box appears.
    3. + +
  3. Type the number of rows and columns you want.
    4. + + + + +
  4. Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero +for no border. + +

    Note: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate tables +with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page is +viewed in a browser.

    +
    5. + +
  5. To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    6. + +
  6. Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.
    7. +
+ +

To change additional properties for your new table, see Changing a Table's Properties.

+ +

Tip: To insert a table within a table, open the +Insert menu and choose Table.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Changing a Table's Properties

+ +

This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an +entire table as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells +within a table. If you are not currently viewing the Table +Properties dialog box, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Table button on the toolbar, or open the Table +menu and choose Table Properties. The Table Properties dialog box +contains two tabs: Table and Cells.
    3. + +
  3. Click the Table tab to edit these properties:
    4. + + + + +
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    5. + +
  5. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog +box, or click OK to confirm them.
    6. +
+ +

To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and +choose Table Properties. The Table Properties dialog box +appears.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties:
    3. + + + +

    Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript +events, click Advanced Edit to display the Advanced Property Editor

    + + +
  3. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog +box, or click OK to confirm them.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To change the text color or background color of one +or more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or +click anywhere in the table and then click the text color or +background color icon in the Format toolbar.

+ +

Tip: To change the color of cells to the color last used, +select the cell, then press Shift and click on the background color +picker. This is useful when you want to use one color for +individual cells.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells

+ +

Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells, +columns, or rows in a table. In addition, you can set options that +allow you to maintain the original rectangular structure or layout +of the table while you perform editing tasks.

+ +

To add a cell, row, or column to your table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or +cells).
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu and then choose Insert.
    3. + +
  3. Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new +table within a table cell.)
    4. +
+ +

To delete a cell, row, or column:

+ +
    +
  1. Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or, +select neighboring cells to delete more than one row at a time. To +select neighboring cells, drag over the cells you want to select. +To select individual cells in a table, hold down the Ctrl key +(Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh OS) and click on +the cells you want to select.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Delete.
    3. + +
  3. Choose the item you want to delete.
    4. +
+ +

To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right:

+ + + +

To join (or merge) adjacent cells:

+ + + +

To split a joined cell back into two or more cells:

+ + + +

Refer to Selecting Table Elements +for information on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and +columns.

+ +

 

+ + + +

Changing the Default Table Editing Behavior

+ +

By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer +preserves the table's structure by adding cells at the end of a +row, wherever needed. This allows you to delete one or more cells +but still maintain the table's original rectangular layout, or +structure. Otherwise, deleting cells can result in a table with +empty spaces, or whose outline appears irregular due to an uneven +number of cells.

+ +

To change the default table editing behavior, begin from the +Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose +Composer.
    2. + +
  2. Under Table Editing, set the following preference:
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

See also Setting General +Composer Preferences.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Selecting Table Elements

+ +

You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or +group of cells:

+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Tables

+ +

To move a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click inside the table.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.
    3. +
+ + + +

 

+ + + +

Converting Text into a Table

+ +

To convert text into a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in +mind that Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in +the selection.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You +see the Convert to Table dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection +into columns, or specify a different character to use. If you +choose Space as the separator for columns, choose whether or not +you want Composer to ignore multiple space and treat them as one +space.
    4. + +
  4. Leave "Delete separator character" checked to have Composer +remove the separator character when it converts the text into a +table. If you don't want Composer to delete the separator +character, uncheck this option.
    5. + +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
+ +

Note: Text formatting is removed when the +selected text is converted to a table.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +
+ + + +

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web Page

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Inserting an Image into Your +Page

+ +

Editing Image Properties

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + + +

Inserting an Image into Your Page

+ +

You can insert GIF, JPEG, BMP, and PNG (Portable Network +Graphics) images into your web page. You can also use them to create links. When you insert an image, +Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.

+ +

Note: If you plan to publish your pages to the web, it's best not to +use BMP images in your pages.

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your +page before you insert images into it. This allows Composer to +automatically use relative references to images once you insert +them.

+ +

To insert an image:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to +appear.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Image button on the toolbar, or open the Insert +menu and choose Image. You see the Image Properties dialog +box.
    3. + +
  3. Type the location and filename of the image file, or click +Choose File to search for an image file on your hard drive or +network.
    4. + +
  4. Type a simple description of your image as the alternate text +that will appear in text-only browsers (as well as other browsers) + when an image is loading or when image loading is +disabled. + +

    Alternatively, you can choose not to include alternate text.

    +
    5. + +
  5. If needed, click other tabs so you can adjust the settings (for +example, alignment) in the Image +Properties dialog box.
    6. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto +your page.

+ +

Tip: To insert a line break after all images in a +paragraph, choose Break Below Images from the Insert menu.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Editing Image Properties

+ +

Once you've inserted an image into your page, you can edit its +properties and customize the layout in your page, such as the +height, width, spacing, and text alignment. If you are not +currently viewing the Image Properties dialog box, follow these +steps:

+ +

To edit the properties for a selected image:

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button + on the toolbar to display the Image Properties dialog +box.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Location tab to edit these properties:
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click the Dimensions tab to edit these properties:
    4. + + + + +
  4. Click the Appearance Tab to edit these properties:
    5. + + + + +
  5. Click the Link tab to edit these properties:
    6. + + + + +
  6. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    7. + +
  7. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    8. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + +
+ +

Setting Page Properties

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Setting Page Properties +and Meta Tags

+ +

Setting Page Colors +and Backgrounds

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Setting Page Properties and Meta Tags

+ +

Use the Page Properties dialog box to enter properties such as +the title, author, and description of the document you're currently +working on. This information is useful if you plan to use the page +on a web site, since search engines use this type of information to +index your page. You can view this information from the browser +window by opening the View menu and choosing Page Info.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.
    2. + +
  2. Edit any of the following properties:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Setting Page Colors and Background

+ +

You can change the background color or specify a background +image for the page you're currently working on. These choices +affect the way text and links in your page appear to people viewing +the page through a browser.

+ +

To set the colors and background for the current page, begin +from the Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and +Background.
    2. + +
  2. Edit any of the following properties:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript +events, click Advanced Edit to display the Advanced Property Editor.

+ +

You can also set the default page +background and colors for every new page you create in +Composer.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +
+ +

Creating Links in Composer

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Creating Links Within the Same +Page

+ +

Creating Links to Other Pages

+ +

Using Images as Links

+ +

Removing or Discontinuing +Links

+
+ +

 

+ + + +

Creating Links Within the Same Page

+ +

To create a link within the same page, for example a link that +the reader can use to jump from one section to another, you must +create an anchor (target location), and then create a link +that points to the anchor. Anchors are also called named +anchors.

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line +where you want to create an anchor, or select some text.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named +Anchor Properties dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up +to 30 characters). If you include spaces, they will be converted to +underscores ( _ ). If you selected some text in step 1, this box +already contains a name.
    4. + +
  4. Click OK. An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the +anchor's location:
    5. +
+ +

To create the link on which readers can click to jump to the +anchor:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text or image that you want to link to the +anchor.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. +You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

Note: To test the link you just created, open the File +menu and choose Browse Page, then click the link.

+ +

Tip: If you did not first create named anchors, you can +use the Link dialog box to create links to headings that already +occur in the page.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +

Creating Links to Other Pages

+ +

You can create links from your page to local pages on your own +computer or on your workplace's network, or to remote pages on the +Internet.

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your +page before you create links to other pages. This allows Composer +to automatically use relative references for links once you create +them.

+ + + +

To create a link to another page:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a +link, or select the text or image that you want to link to the +anchor.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialog +box.
    3. + +
  3. Define your link:
    4. + + + + +
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    5. + +
  5. Click OK.
    6. + +
  6. To test the link you just created, click the Browse button and +then click the link to make sure it works as expected.
    7. +
+ +

Tip: You can copy a link quickly by clicking and dragging +the link from another window and then dropping it onto your page. +For example, you can click and drag a link from a web page, +bookmark, or Mail window and drop it onto your page. You can also +right-click (Control+click on Macintosh OS) a link on a web page +and choose Copy Link Location from the menu. Then you can paste the +link location into the Link Location field in the Link Properties +dialog box.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +

Using Images as Links

+ +

You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave +like links in your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, +the browser window displays the page that the image is linked +to.

+ +
    +
  1. Select an image on your page.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Link button on the toolbar, or open the Insert +menu and choose Link.
    3. + +
  3. Use the Link Properties dialog box to link the image to a named anchor or heading within the +page, or to a separate local or +remote page.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: Drag and drop a linked image from the Navigator +window into a Composer window to copy both the image and the +link.

+ +

Note: To remove the blue border on images used as links, +open the Link Properties dialog box, click the Link tab, and uncheck "Show border around linked image".

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +

Removing or Discontinuing Links

+ +

To remove a link:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or +image.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links.
    3. +
+ +

To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is +not included as part of the link:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to +end.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link.
    3. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + + + + +
+ +

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

+ +

If your pages exist only on your local hard disk, you can browse +your pages, but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your +pages to a remote computer called a web server.

+ +

When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies +(uploads) your pages to a computer that lets others browse your +pages. Most ISPs provide space on their web servers for web page +publishing. To find a web server where you can publish your pages, +ask your ISP, help desk, or system administrator.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Publishing a Document

+ +

Updating a Published Document

+ +

Changing the Filename or Publishing +Location

+ +

Creating a New Publishing Site

+ +

Changing the Default Publishing +Site

+ +

Deleting a Publishing Site

+ +

Solving Common Publishing +Problems

+ +

Publishing Settings

+
+ +

 

+ + + +

Publishing a Document

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your +page before you insert links or images into it. This allows +Composer to automatically use relative references for links and +images once you insert them.

+ +

To publish a document:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a +new Composer document.
    2. + +
  2. When you're ready to publish the document remotely, click the +Publish button.
    3. + +

    If you have published this document before, Composer remembers +the document's publishing settings and starts publishing the +document. While publishing is in progress, Composer displays a +publishing status dialog box.

    + + + + +
  3. To browse your published page, click the Browse button. Test +the page's links and make sure there are no missing images.
    4. + +
  4. Continue editing the page as necessary. When you're ready to +update the remote page with your changes, click the Publish +button.
    5. +
+ +

When you publish a document for the first time, Composer changes +the document's file:/// URL to an http:// URL to +indicate that you are now editing the published document. If you +want to save the document locally (on your computer's hard disk), +click the Save button. You'll be prompted to choose a filename and +location on your hard disk for the document.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Tips for Avoiding Broken Links or Missing Images

+ +


+

+ + + +

For more troubleshooting tips, see Solving Common Publishing Problems.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Updating a Published Document

+ +

To update a published document:

+ +
    +
  1. In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent +Pages, then select the document from the list.
    2. + +

    Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want +to update by entering the document's HTTP address (the document's +web address) in the Navigator browser's Location field.

    + + +
  2. Open the File menu, and choose Edit Page.
    3. + +
  3. Edit the document as necessary.
    4. + +
  4. When you're ready to update the remote page with your changes, +click Publish in Composer's toolbar.
    5. +
+ + + + + +

Tip: To delete a page or image you've published +on a web server, you must use an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) +program. You also must use an FTP program if you want to create +subdirectories or to rename files on the web server. Ask your +service provider if they recommend a particular FTP program. You +can usually find information on FTP programs in the Help or Support +sections of your service provider's web site. FTP programs are also +available from shareware sites such as ZDNet Downloads.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Changing the Filename or Publishing Location

+ +

To change a document's filename or publishing location:

+ +
    +
  1. In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent +Pages, then select the document from the list.
    2. + +

    Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want +to update by entering the document's HTTP address (the document's +web address) in the Navigator browser's Location field.

    + + +
  2. Open the File menu, and choose Edit Page.
    3. + +
  3. Edit the document as necessary.
    4. + +
  4. Open Composer's File menu and choose Publish As. Composer +displays the Publish tab in the Publish Page dialog box.
    5. + +
  5. Enter a different page title, if necessary.
    6. + +
  6. Enter a different filename for the page, if necessary.
    7. + +
  7. From the Site Name list, choose the publishing location you +want to use. To set up a new publishing location, click New Site. +See Publish Page - Settings for more +information.
    8. + +
  8. Click Publish to save the document to the new location.
    9. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Creating a New Publishing Site

+ +

If you plan to publish documents to more than one remote +location, you can set up Composer to save the publishing +information for each remote site you use, so that you don't have to +enter it each time you want to publish.

+ +

To create a new publishing site, begin from a Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Click New Site.
    3. + +
  3. For "Site Name," enter the nickname by which you want to refer +to this publishing site. + +

    For example, if you will use the new site to publish documents +related to the "Meteor" project, you might want to use the site +name "Meteor". Site names remind you about the types of documents +you publish at each site.

    +
    4. + +
  4. For "Publishing address," enter the complete URL provided to +you by your ISP, system administrator, or web hosting service. This +URL must begin with either ftp:// or http://. + +

    The publishing address specifies the location where documents +are published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to +enter, ask your ISP or system administrator.

    +
    5. + +
  5. For "HTTP address of your home page," enter the complete URL +that you would enter in the Navigator browser to view pages at this +site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as part of the URL. + + +

    This URL must always begin with http://. In some cases, +this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure +what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave +it blank.

    +
    6. + +
  6. For user name, enter the user name you use to log in to your +ISP or web hosting service.
    7. + +
  7. For password, enter the password for your user name.
    8. + +
  8. Select "Save Password" to save your password securely using +Password Manager so that you don't have to enter it each time you +publish pages at this site.
    9. + +
  9. Click OK.
    10. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Choosing the Default Publishing Site

+ +

If you have set up more than one publishing site, but you +typically use only one site for most of your publishing needs, you +can designate the site you use most often as the default publishing +site. Composer will use the default publishing site for all +documents that you publish, unless you specifically choose an +alternate site.

+ +

Regardless of how many sites you've set up, you can always +publish a document to a different site by choosing Publish As from +Composer's File menu. See Changing the +Filename or Publishing Location for more information.

+ +

To choose the default publishing site, begin from a Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Select a publishing site from the list. + +

    If you only have one publishing site set up, Composer uses that +one as the default site.

    +
    3. + +
  3. Click Set as Default.
    4. + +
  4. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Deleting a Publishing Site

+ +

Deleting a publishing site removes the site's settings from +Composer. If you later wish to publish to the site, you must +re-enter the site's settings.

+ +

To delete a publishing site's settings, begin from a Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Select a publishing site from the list.
    3. + +
  3. Click Remove Site.
    4. + +

    Composer only removes the site's settings; the remote site +itself is not affected.

    + + +
  4. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Solving Common Publishing Problems

+ +

If one or more of your files fail to publish, the Publishing +Status dialog box displays an error message that can help you +determine what went wrong and how to fix it. Click the +Troubleshooting button in the Publishing Status dialog box to get +help on solving your publishing problem.

+ +

If you are still unable to publish a file, save the file to your +hard disk by opening Composer's File menu, and choosing Save. You +can then open the file at a later time to try to publish it. To +quickly locate the file later, open Composer's File menu, and +choose Recent Pages.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Verifying Your Publishing +Settings

+ +

Checking Your Filenames

+ +

Fixing Publishing Errors

+
+ +
+

 

+ + + +

Verifying Your Publishing Settings

+ +

To verify your publishing settings:

+ +
    +
  1. Close the Publishing Status dialog box, if it is open.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.
    3. + +
  3. In the Publish Settings dialog box, confirm that the site +settings are correct for the site you are trying to publish to. If +you're not sure, check with your ISP or web hosting service.
    4. + +
  4. + +
    5. +
+ +


+

+ + + +

Checking Your Filenames

+ +

Examine the names of any files that failed to publish. Make sure +that the filenames:

+ + + +


+

+ + + +

Fixing Publishing Errors

+ +

If one or more of your files fails to publish, look at the +messages Composer displays in the Publishing Status area of the +Publishing dialog box. You can use these error messages to help +determine what went wrong and what to do to fix the problem.

+ +


+

+ + + + + +
+

Error Messages:

+ +

Filename not +found

+ +

X of Y files +failed to publish

+ +

The subdirectory directory +name doesn't exist on this site or the filename +filename is already in use by another +subdirectory

+ +

The filename filename +is already in use by another subdirectory

+ +

The server is not available. +Check your connection and try again later.

+ +

You do not have permission to +publish to this location.

+ +

You are currently offline. Click +the icon near the lower-right corner of any window to go +online.

+ +

There is not enough disk space +available to save the file filename.

+ +

The filename or subdirectory name +is too long.

+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
+Filename not found + +

or

+ +X of Y files failed to publish
+ +

Error Description: One or more image files or +CSS files failed to publish because Composer could not find them. +Some typical reasons might be:

+ + + +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
The +subdirectory directory name doesn't exist on this site or +the filename filename is already in use by another +subdirectory + +

or

+ +The filename filename is already in use by another +subdirectory
+ +

Error Description: You specified the name of a +remote subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing site. +Composer can only publish to a remote subdirectory that already +exists at the publishing location. Or, you specified a filename +that is identical to the name of an existing subdirectory at the +publishing site.

+ +

For example, in the Publish Page dialog box, under the Publish +tab:

+ + + +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
The server +is not available. Check your connection and try again +later.
+ +

Error Description: This error can have many +causes. For example:

+ + + +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
You do not have +permission to publish to this location.
+ +

Error Description: You are attempting to +publish to a location that you are not authorized to use. You can +only publish to sites where you have been granted access by your +ISP or web hosting service.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
You are + +currently offline. Click the icon near the lower-right corner of +any window to go online.
+ +

Error Description: You are attempting to +publish, but your Mozilla Internet connection is currently in the +"offline" state. Your Internet connection must be in the "online" +state (connected to the Internet) in order to publish your +pages.

+ +

Verify that your Internet connection is currently offline by +looking at the online/offline icon in the lower right corner of any +Mozilla window. If you are currently offline, the icon appears as +.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
There is not +enough disk space available to save the file +filename.
+ +

Error Description: The remote web server's hard +disk is full, or you may have exceeded the amount of disk space +allocated to you by your ISP or web hosting service.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
The filename or +subdirectory name is too long.
+ +

Error Description: The number of characters in +the filename or the subdirectory name is not supported by the web +server computer that you are trying to publish to.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +
+

 

+ + + + +

Publishing Settings

+ +

This section describes Composer's publishing settings. For +information on Composer's general and new page settings, see Composer Preferences.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Publish Page - Publish

+ +

Publish Page - Settings

+ +

Publish Settings

+
+ +
+

 

+ + + + +

Publish Page - Publish

+ +

The Publish Page - Publish tab lets you specify where you want +to publish a document. These settings apply to the current +document.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Publish tab, +follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page +dialog box appears.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Publish tab.
    3. +
+ + + +

Tip: To create remote subdirectories or delete +published pages or images, you must use an FTP (File Transfer +Protocol) program. Ask your service provider if they recommend a +particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP +programs in the Help or Support sections of your service provider's +web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such +as ZDNet Downloads.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +
+ + + +

Publish Page - Settings

+ +

The Publish Page - Settings tab lets you specify your login +information for the remote publishing site, as well as the +publishing settings for the remote site. These settings apply to +the current document and any other files you publish to this +location.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Settings tab, +follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page +dialog box appears.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Settings tab.
    3. +
+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +
+ + +

Publish Settings

+ +

The Publish Settings dialog box lets you create, edit, and +delete publishing site settings, and also lets you set the default +publishing site.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Settings dialog box, +follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. +
+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + + +
+ +

Composer Preferences

+ +

This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences +panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these +steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. + +

    (Mac OS X) Open the Mozilla menu and choose Preferences.

    + + +
  2. Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.
    3. +
+ +

For information on Composer's publishing settings, see Publishing Settings.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Composer

+ +

New Page Settings

+
+ +
+ + + +

Composer Preferences - Composer

+ +

Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving +files and for table editing. These settings apply to every document +you create.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow +these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Composer category.
    3. +
+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +
+ + +

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings

+ +

New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colors +and background images that apply to every document you create.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow +these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. + +
  2. Double-click the Composer category and click New Page +Settings.
    3. +
+ + + +

To change the author name for an individual page: Open the +Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.

+ +

To change the page colors and background image for an individual +page: Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and +Background.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +
+

20 June 2002 +

+ +
+

Copyright © 1994-2002 The Mozilla Organization.

+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.xhtml index ea9cd06adb4..af2680ad4ec 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/composer_help.xhtml @@ -1,1333 +1,3237 @@ - - -Composer Help - - - - - - - - - -

Creating Web Pages with Composer

-

 

- - - - - -
-

In this section: -

Creating a New Page -

Saving and Browsing Your New Page -

- -

 

- - -

Creating a New Page

- -

Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor that allows - you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a WYSIWYG (What You See - Is What You Get) editor, so you can display how your page will look to the reader - as you're creating it. It is not necessary for you to know HTML, since most - of the basic HTML functions are available as commands from the toolbars and - menus. However, Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. -

To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. Once you've started - a page, you can add and edit text just as you would in a word processor.

-

To create a new page from the Navigator browser:

- -

To edit a page you're currently browsing in Navigator:

- -

To create a new page in Composer:

- -

To start from an HTML file stored on your local drive:

-
    -
  1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer window.
    2. -
  2. Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML File dialog box.
    3. -
  3. On your local drive, locate the file that you want to edit.
    4. -
  4. Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer window.
    5. -
-

Tip: You can also open JavaScript files so that you can edit them in - Composer. -

To edit a web page: -

    -
  1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Navigator. -
  2. Go to a web page by typing the URL of the page (for example, www.netscape.com) - in the Location Bar and pressing Enter (Return on Macintosh OS). -
  3. Open the File menu and choose Edit Page. -

    Note: Keep in mind that when you save this page, the HTML part of - the page is saved locally, on your hard drive. Other files, such as images - and sound files, are not saved. If an image location is static (starts with - "http://") and you are connected to the Internet, you will still - see that image in the document in Composer and Navigator. -

-

Tip: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most recent file - you've been working on by opening the File menu, choosing Recent Pages, and - then selecting the file you want from the list. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -

Saving and Browsing Your New Page

-

You can save Composer documents in HTML and text-only format. Saving a document - in HTML format preserves the document's formatting, such as text styles (for - example, bold or italic), tables, links, and images. Saving a document in text-only - format removes all the HTML tags but preserves the document's text. -

To save a document as an HTML file: -

-

To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:

- - -

To save a document as a text-only file: -

    -
  1. Open the File menu and choose Export to Text. -
  2. Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to save the file. -
-

Tip: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File menu to retrieve - the most recently saved copy of the document in which you're working. Keep in - mind that your current changes will be lost. -

Note: Images do not show in documents saved in the text-only format. -

-

To view your page in a browser window in order to test your links: -

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -
- -

Formatting Your Web Pages

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, and - Lists -

Working with Lists -

Changing Text Color, Style, and Font -

Removing or Discontinuing Text Styles -

Finding and Replacing Text -

Inserting Horizontal Lines -

Inserting Special Characters -

Inserting HTML Elements and Attributes -

Checking the Spelling -

Validating the HTML -

Choosing the Right Editing Mode -

-

 

- - -

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists

-

To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point (also known as the caret) where you want the format - to begin, or select the text you want to format. -
  2. Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar: - -
-

To format text as a heading: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text that you want to - format. -
  2. Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the level of heading - you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). For example, choose "Heading 1" - for your main heading, "Heading 2" for the next level, and so forth.
    3. -
-

To apply a list item format: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that you want to - format. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List. -
  3. Choose the list style: - -
-

Tip: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of text by selecting the text - and clicking the Numbered List - or Bulleted List - buttons on the Format toolbar. -

To change the style of bullets or numbers: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list item you - want to change, or select one or more items in the list if you want to apply - a new style to the entire list. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List Properties. -
  3. Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For numbered lists, - you can specify a starting number. For bulleted lists, you can change the - bullet style. -
-

To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, centering or aligning - to the left or right: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line of text you - want to align. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment option. -
-

Note: You can also use the Format toolbar to align text. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Working with Lists

-

To end a list and continue typing body text: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the end of the last list item and press Enter - (Return on Macintosh OS). -
  2. Press Enter again. Each time you press Enter, Composer outdents one level. -
-

To change one or more list items to body text: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or select the list - items. -
  2. In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a bulleted list, - click the bulleted list button) in the Format toolbar. The list buttons - act as a toggle. -
-

To position indented text below a list item: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item. -
  2. Press Shift-Enter to create the hanging indent. -
  3. Type the text you want to indent. -
  4. Press Shift-Enter to create another indented paragraph, or press Return - to create the next list item. -
-

To merge two adjacent lists: -

    -
  1. Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select all of the - elements in both lists. Note that any text in between the two lists will also - become part of the merged list. -
  2. Double-click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format toolbar. -
-

Tip: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list items, by - clicking on the Indent or Outdent button on the Format toolbar.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -

Changing Text Color, Style, and Font

-

To change the style, color, or font of selected text: -

    -
  1. Select the text you want to format.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
    3. - -
-

Tip: To quickly change the color of text to the color last used, select - the text, then press Shift + Click on the color picker. This is useful when - you want to use one color for separate lines of text.

-

You can also change the background color of the page, or use an image as a - background. See Setting Page Colors - and Backgrounds. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Removing or Discontinuing Text Styles

-

To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from selected text:

-
    -
  1. Select the text.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles. -
  3. Continue typing. -
-

To continue typing text with all text styles removed:

-
    -
  1. Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the text styles.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles. -
  3. Continue typing. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Finding and Replacing Text

-

To find text in the page you're currently working on: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point (also known as the caret) where you want - to begin your search. -
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and Replace dialog box. -
  3. Type the text you want to locatein the "Find what" field. To narrow the search, check one or more - of the following options: - -
  4. Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the first occurrence - of the text, click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. -
  5. Click Close when you are done. -
-

To find and replace text in the page you're currently working on: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point (also known as the caret) where you want - to begin your search. -
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and Replace dialog box. -
  3. Type the text you want to find and then - type the replacement text. -
  4. To narrow the search, check one or more of the following options: - -
  5. Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer selects the - next occurrence of the text. -
  6. Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement text. Click - Replace All to replace every occurrence in the document with the replacement - text. -
  7. Click Close when you are done. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Inserting Horizontal Lines

-

Horizontal lines are typically used to visually separate different sections - of a document. To insert a horizontal line (also called a rule) in your - page, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to appear.
    2. -
  2. Click the H. Line button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.
    3. -
- -

Setting Horizontal Line Properties

-

You can customize a line's height, length, width, alignment, and shading. -

    -
  1. Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties dialog box. -
  2. Edit any of these properties: - -
  3. Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the next time - you insert a horizontal line. -
  4. To manually edit the properties of a horizontal line, click Advanced Edit. - See the section, Advanced Property Editor, - for details. -
-

Tip: You can select "Show All Tags" from the View menu to - show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. You can double-click any yellow - box to display the Advanced Property Editor dialog box.

- -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Inserting Special Characters

-

To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, or currency - symbols: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the special character to appear. -
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see the Insert Character dialog box. -
  3. Select a category of characters. - -
  4. From the Character drop-down list, select the character you want to insert. -
  5. Click Insert. -

    You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose window) - while you keep this dialog box open, in case you want to use it again. -

  6. Click Close when you are done inserting special characters. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Inserting HTML Elements and Attributes

-

If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can insert additional - tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your page. If you are not sure how - to work with HTML source code, it's best not to change it. To work with HTML - code, use one of these methods: -

- -

Using the Advanced Property Editor

-

To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, images, and - horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property Editor. -

Note: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, or modify HTML - attributes and their associated values, it's best not to do so. -

If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor dialog box, follow - these steps: -

    -
  1. From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose Show All Tags. -
  2. Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its Advanced Property - Editor. The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, - each of which lists the current properties for the selected object: - -
  3. To edit a property or attribute any of the three lists, select the attribute - you want to edit. You can then edit the attribute's name or value using the - editable Attribute and Value fields at the bottom of the dialog box. To add - new attribute, type it in the Attribute field at the bottom of the dialog - box. The new attribute is automatically added when you click in the Value field. - To remove an attribute, select it in the list, and click Remove Attribute. -

    Note: Required attributes are highlighted in the Attribute list. -

  4. Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor dialog box. -
  5. Click OK again to exit the Properties dialog box.
    6. -
-

Composer automatically places quotation marks around any attribute text. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Checking the Spelling

- - -

Unlike Netscape, Mozilla does not come with a spell checker. Since -the spell checker that is bundled with Netscape is from another -company, and is a closed source project, it cannot be included with -Mozilla. - -

You can, however, add a spell checker to Mozilla easily, by -installing an open-source spell -checker at Mozdev.org. This project provides an "XPI" (cross -platform installable) file. Several versions of the XPI are -available, depending on which Mozilla version they work with. First -determine which Mozilla version you are using (by going to Help| About -Mozilla), and then click on the appropriate XPI link. You will be -asked to confirm that you want to install a piece of software. Click -OK to proceed. Once it has been successfully downloaded and installed, -restart Mozilla. Open Composer, and you should see the Spell button -added to the toolbar:

- - - -

When you click on the "Spell" button, you should see the following box pop up:

- - - -

Make sure you select your language before you begin. Then click Recheck Page. - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -

Validating the HTML

-

Before you put your document on a web server so that others can see it, you should first check the document's HTML formatting to make sure it conforms to web standards. Documents containing validated HTML are less likely to cause problems when viewed by different browsers. Just visually checking your web pages in Navigator doesn't ensure that your document will appear correctly when viewed in other web browsers. -

Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your document conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML standards. Composer uses the W3C HTML Validation Service, which checks your document's HTML syntax for correctness and provides information on how to correct errors. -

-Note: You must be connected to the Internet to use this feature. -

To validate your document's HTML syntax: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have unsaved changes, Composer asks you to save them before proceeding.
    2. -
  2. When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click "Validate this document".
    3. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

-

Typically, you won't need to change the editing mode from the default (Normal). - However, if you want to work with the document's HTML source code, you may want - to change editing modes. Composer allows you to quickly switch between four - "editing modes" or views. Each editing mode allows you to continue working - on your document, but displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag icons). -

Before you choose an editing mode: -

-

The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs: -

-

Note: JavaScript functions, frames, links, and animated GIF files are - not active in any of the editing modes. To display these items in their active - state, click the Browse button on the Composition toolbar to load the page into - a browser window.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- - -
- -

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Inserting a Table -

Changing a Table's Properties -

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells -

Selecting Table Elements -

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Tables -

Converting Text into a Table -

-

 

- -

Inserting a Table

-

Tables are useful for organizing text, pictures, and data into formatted rows - and columns. To insert a table: -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to appear.
    2. -
  2. Click the Table button - on the Composition toolbar. The Insert Table dialog box appears. -
  3. Type the number of rows and columns you want. - -
  4. Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero for no border. -

    Note: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate tables with a - zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page is viewed in a browser. -

  5. To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  6. Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.
    7. -
-

To change additional properties for your new table, see Changing - a Table's Properties. -

Tip: To insert a table within a table, open the Insert - menu and choose Table.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Changing a Table's Properties

-

This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an entire table - as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells within a table. If you are - not currently viewing the Table Properties dialog box, follow these steps: -

    -
  1. Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.
    2. -
  2. Click the Table button - on the toolbar, or open the Table menu and choose Table Properties. The Table - Properties dialog box contains two tabs: Table and Cells. -
  3. Click the Table tab to edit these properties: - -
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  5. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or click - OK to confirm them. -
-

To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells: -

    -
  1. Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and choose Table - Properties. The Table Properties dialog box appears. -
  2. Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties: - -

    Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click - Advanced Edit to display the Advanced Property - Editor -

  3. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or click - OK to confirm them. -
-

Tip: To change the text color or background color of one or - more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or click anywhere - in the table and then click the text color or background color icon in the Format - toolbar. -

Tip: To change the color of cells to the color last used, select - the cell, then press Shift + Click on the background color picker. This is useful - when you want to use one color for individual cells.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells

-

Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells in your table. - In addition, you can set options that allow you to maintain the original rectangular - structure or layout of the table while you perform editing tasks. -

To add a cell, row, or column to your table:

-
    -
  1. Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or cells).
    2. -
  2. Open the Table menu and then choose Insert. -
  3. Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new table within - a table cell.)
    4. -
-

To delete a cell, row, or column:

-
    -
  1. Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or, select neighboring - cells to delete more than one row at a time. To select neighboring cells, - hold down the Ctrl key (Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh OS) - while dragging over the cells you want to select. To select individual cells - in a table, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the cells you want to select.
    2. -
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Delete. -
  3. Choose the item you want to delete.
    4. -
-

To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right: -

-

To join (or merge) adjacent cells: -

-

To split a joined cell back into two or more cells: -

-

Refer to Selecting Table Elements for information - on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and columns. - -

Changing the Default Table Editing Behavior

-

By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer preserves the table's - structure by adding cells at the end of a row, wherever needed. This allows - you to delete one or more cells but still maintain the table's original rectangular - layout, or structure. Otherwise, deleting cells can result in a table with empty - spaces, or whose outline appears irregular due to an uneven number of cells. -

To change the default table editing behavior, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose Composer. -
  2. Under Table Editing, set the following preferences: - -
  3. Click OK. -
-

See also Setting General Composer Preferences. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Selecting Table Elements

-

You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or group of cells: -

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Tables

-

-

To move table:

-
    -
  1. Click inside the table.
    2. -
  2. Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.
    3. -
- -

 

-

Moving the Contents of a Cell, Row, or Column

-

To move the contents of a cell, row, or column within a table: -

    -
  1. Select the text that you want to move. For more information, see - Selecting Table Elements. -
  2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Cut. -
  3. Click to place the insertion point in the new location. -
  4. Open the Edit menu, and choose Paste. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Converting Text into a Table

-

To convert text into a table: -

    -
  1. Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in mind that - Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in the selection. -
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You see the Convert to Table dialog box. -
  3. Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection into columns, - or specify a different character to use. If you choose Space as the separator for columns, choose whether or not you want Composer to - ignore multiple space and treat them as one space. -
  4. Leave "Delete separator character" checked to have Composer remove the separator - character when it converts the text into a table. If you don't want Composer - to delete the separator character, uncheck this option. -
  5. Click OK. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -
- -

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web Page

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Inserting an Image into Your Page -

Editing Image Properties -

-

 

- -

Inserting an Image into Your Page

-

You can insert GIF, JPEG, and PNG images into your web page. You can also use - them to create links. When you insert an image, - Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.

-

To insert an image:

-
    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to appear.
    2. -
  2. Click the Image button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Image. You see the Image Properties dialog box.
    3. -
  3. Type the location and filename of the image file, or click Choose File to - search for an image file on your hard drive or network. -
  4. Type alternate text that will appear in text-only browsers, and that will - appear in other browsers when an image is loading or when image loading is - disabled. -
  5. If needed, click More Properties so you can adjust the settings in the Image - Properties dialog box.
    6. -
-

Tip: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto your page. -

Tip: While typing in a paragraph that contains one or more images, if - you want to insert a line break after all images in the paragraph, choose Break - Below Images from the Insert menu. -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -

Editing Image Properties

-

Once you've inserted an image into your page, you can edit its properties and - customize the layout in your page, such as the height, width, spacing, and text - alignment. If you are not currently viewing the Image Properties dialog box, follow - these steps: -

To edit the properties for a selected image: -

    -
  1. Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button - on the toolbar to display the Image Properties dialog box. Click More Properties - to expand the list of settings. To collapse the list of settings, click Fewer - Properties. - -
  2. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  3. Click OK to confirm your changes. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

-

 

- -
- -

Setting Page Properties

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Setting Page Properties and Meta - Tags -

Setting Page Colors and Backgrounds -

-

 

- - -

Setting Page Properties and Meta Tags

-

Use the Page Properties dialog box to enter properties such as the title, author, - and description of the document you're currently working on. This information - is useful if you plan to use the page on a web site, since search engines use - this type of information to index your page. You can view this information from - the browser window by choosing the View menu and choosing Page Info. -

    -
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties. - -
  2. Edit any of the following properties: - -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

-

 

- - -

Setting Page Colors and Background

-

You can change the background color or specify a background image for the page - you're currently working on. These choices affect the way text and links in - your page appear to people viewing the page through a browser. -

To set the colors and background for the current page, begin from the Composer window: -

    -
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background. - -
  2. Edit any of the following properties: - -
-

-Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced - Edit to display the Advanced Property Editor. -

You can also set the default page background - and colors for every new page you create in Composer. -

Tip: To quickly change the background color to the color last used, - select the cell, then press Shift + Click on the background color picker. -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

- - -
- -

Creating Links

-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Creating Links Within the Same Page -

Creating Links to Other Pages -

Using Images as Links -

Removing or Discontinuing Links -

-

 

- -

Creating Links Within the Same Page

-

To create a link within the same page, for example a link that the reader - can use to jump from one section to another, you must create an anchor - (target location), and then create a link that points to the anchor. Anchors - are also called named anchors. -

    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line where you - want to create an anchor, or select some text.
    2. -
  2. Click the Anchor button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named Anchor Properties dialog box.
    3. -
  3. Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up to 30 characters). - If you include spaces, they will be converted to underscores (_). - If you selected some text in step #1, this box already contains a name.
    4. -
  4. Click OK. - An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the anchor's location:
    5. -
-

To create the link that the reader can click to jump to the anchor: -

    -
  1. Select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.
    2. -
  2. Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. - -
  3. Click OK. -
-

Note: To test the link you just created, open the File menu and choose - Browse Page, then click the link.

-

Tip: If you did not first create named anchors, you can use the Link - dialog box to create links to headings that already occur in the page.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Creating Links to Other Pages

-

You can create links from your page to local pages on your own computer or - on your workplace's network, or to remote pages on the Internet.

-

You can quickly create a link by dragging and dropping links and bookmarks - from other windows. For example, you can select a link from a web page, bookmark, - or Mail window and drag and drop it onto your page.

- -

To create a link to another page:

-
    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a link, or - select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.
    2. -
  2. Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. - -
  3. Define your link: - -
    -

    Hint: To copy a link on a web page, you can also right-click - (Control + Click on Macintosh OS) a link on a web page and choose Copy - Link Location.

    -
    -
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit - to display the Advanced Property Editor. -
  5. Click OK.
    6. -
  6. To test the link you just created, open the File menu, choose Browse - Page, and then click the link.
    7. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Using Images as Links

-

You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave like links in - your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, the browser window displays - the page that the image is linked to.

-
    -
  1. Select an image on your page.
    2. -
  2. Click the Link button - on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Link.
    3. -
  3. Use the Link Properties dialog box to link the image to a named - anchor or heading within the page, or to a - separate local or remote page.
    4. -
-

Tip: Drag and drop a linked image from the Navigator window into a - Composer window to copy both the image and the link.

-

Note: To remove the blue border on images used as links, open the - Link Properties dialog box and enter 0 in the Solid Border field.

-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Removing or Discontinuing Links

-

To remove a link:

-
    -
  1. Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or image.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links. -
-

To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is not included - as part of the link:

-
    -
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to end.
    2. -
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link. -
-

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -
- -

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

-

If your pages exists only on your local hard disk, you can browse your pages, but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your pages to a remote computer called a web server. When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies (uploads) your pages to a computer that lets others browse your pages. To find a web server where you can publish your pages, ask your ISP or system administrator.

- -

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: - -

Publishing a Document -

Updating a Published Document -

Changing the File Name or Publishing Location -

Creating a New Publishing Site -

Changing the Default Publishing Site -

Deleting a Publishing Site -

Publishing Settings - -

- - -

 

- -

Publishing a Document

-

To publish a document on a web server:

-
    -
  1. Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a new Composer document.
    2. -
  2. Open the File menu and choose Publish. If you have previously defined a default publishing location for this document, Composer uploads the document to the specified location.
    3. - - -
  3. To view your page, enter the page's HTTP address in Navigator's Location Bar. Test the page's links and make sure there are no missing images.
    4. - -
- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

Tips for Avoiding Broken Links or Missing Images

-

- -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Updating a Published Document

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Changing the File Name or Publishing Location

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

 

- -

Creating a New Publishing Site

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -

 

- -

Changing the Default Publishing Site

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - -

 

- -

Deleting a Publishing Site

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -

 

- -

Publishing Settings

-

Also include link to global Publishing prefs.

- -

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: - -

Publish Page - Publish -

Publish Page - Settings -

Publish Settings -

- -

 

- -

Publish Page - Publish

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Publish Page - Settings

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- -

 

- -

Publish Settings

- - -

[ Return to beginning of section ]

- - - -
- -

Composer Preferences

-

This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

-
    -
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. -
  2. Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.
    3. -
-

 

- - - - -
-

In this section: -

Composer Preferences - Composer -

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings -

Composer Preferences - Publishing -

-

 

- -

Composer Preferences - Composer

-

Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving - files and for table editing. These settings apply to every document you create. -

If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow these steps: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
  2. Click the Composer category.
    3. -
- -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

- -

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings

-

New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colors and background images - that apply to every document you create.

-

If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow these steps: -

    -
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
  2. Open the Composer category and click New Page Settings. -
- - -

To change the author name for an individual page: Open the Format menu and - choose Page Title and Properties. -

To change the page colors and background image for an individual page: Open - the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background. -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

- - -

Composer Preferences - Publishing

-

text to come.

- -

[ Return to beginning of section ] -

-
-

- 27 February 2002 -

- - + + + +Creating Web Pages with Mozilla Composer + + +

 

+ + + + + +

Creating Web Pages with Mozilla Composer

+ +

Mozilla Composer lets you create your own web pages and publish +them on the web. You don't have to know HTML to use Composer; it is +as easy to use as a word processor.

+ +

Toolbar buttons let you add lists, tables, images, links to +other pages, colors, and font styles. You can see what your +document will look like on the Web as you create it, and you can +easily share your document with other users, no matter what type of +browser or HTML-capable email program they use.

+ +

To start using Mozilla Composer:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
 Composer icon
+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Starting a New Page

+ +

Formatting Your Web Pages

+ +

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

+ +

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web +Page

+ +

Setting Page Properties

+ +

Creating Links in Composer

+ +

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

+ +

Composer Preferences

+
+ +


+

+ + +
+ +

Starting a New Page

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Creating a New Page

+ +

Saving and Browsing Your New +Page

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + + +

Creating a New Page

+ +

Mozilla Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor +that allows you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a +WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) editor, so you can +display how your page will look to the reader as you're creating +it. It is not necessary for you to know HTML, since most of the +basic HTML functions are available as commands from the toolbars +and menus.

+ +

Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. To view +or edit the HTML source code, open the View menu, and choose HTML +Source, or click the <HTML> Source tab in the Edit Mode +toolbar at the bottom of the Composer window.

+ +

To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. +Once you've started a page, you can add and edit text just as you +would in a word processor.

+ +

To create a new page from the Navigator browser:

+ + + + + +

To edit a page you're currently browsing in +Navigator:

+ + + +

To create a new page in Composer:

+ + + +

To start from an HTML file stored on your local +drive:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer +window.
    2. + +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML +File dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. On your local drive, locate the file that you want to +edit.
    4. + +
  4. Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer +window.
    5. +
+ +

To edit a web page:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Navigator.
    2. + +
  2. Go to a web page by typing the URL of the page (for example, +http://home.netscape.com) in the Location Bar and pressing Enter +(Return on Macintosh OS).
    3. + +
  3. Open the File menu and choose Edit Page.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most +recent file you've been working on by opening the File menu, +choosing Recent Pages, and then selecting the file you want from +the list.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Saving and Browsing Your New Page

+ +

You can save Composer documents in HTML or text-only format. +Saving a document in HTML format preserves the document's +formatting, such as text styles (for example, bold or italic), +tables, links, and images. Saving a document in text-only format +removes all the HTML tags but preserves the document's text.

+ +

To save a document as an HTML file:

+ + + +

To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:

+ + + +

When you save a page in Composer, all parts of the page (the +HTML, images and other files, such as sound files and style +sheets), are saved locally on your hard drive. If you only want to +save the HTML part of the page, you must change the Composer +preference for saving pages. See Composer Preferences - Composer +for more information on changing Composer's setting for saving +pages.

+ +

If an image location is absolute (starts with "http://") and you +are connected to the Internet, you will still see that image in the +document in Composer and Navigator. However, if the image location +is relative to the page location (starts with "file:///"), then you +won't see the image in the local version of the document.

+ +

To save a document as a text-only file:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Export to Text.
    2. + +
  2. Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to +save the file.
    3. +
+ +

Note: Images do not appear in documents saved in the +text-only format.

+ +

Tip: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File +menu to retrieve the most recently saved copy of the document in +which you're working. Keep in mind that your current changes will +be lost.

+ +

To view your page in a browser window in order to test your +links:

+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +


+

+ + +
+ +

Formatting Your Web Pages

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, +and Lists

+ +

Working with Lists

+ +

Changing Text Color, Style, and +Font

+ +

Removing or Discontinuing Text +Styles

+ +

Finding and Replacing Text

+ +

Inserting Horizontal Lines

+ +

Inserting Special +Characters

+ +

Inserting HTML Elements and +Attributes

+ +

Validating the HTML

+ +

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + + +

Formatting Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists

+ +

To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the format to +begin, or select the text you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the +Format toolbar:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

To format text as a heading:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text +that you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the +level of heading you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). Choose +"Heading 1" for your main heading, "Heading 2" for the next level, +and so forth.
    3. +
+ +

To apply a list item format:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that +you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List.
    3. + +
  3. Choose the list style:
    4. + +
  4. + +
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of +text by selecting the text and clicking the Numbered List or +Bulleted List buttons on the Format toolbar.

+ +

To change the style of bullets or numbers:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list +item you want to change, or select one or more items in the list if +you want to apply a new style to the entire list.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List Properties.
    3. + +
  3. Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For +numbered lists, you can specify a starting number. For bulleted +lists, you can change the bullet style.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: You can also double-click on a bullet or +number in a list to display the List Properties dialog box.

+ +

To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, +centering or aligning to the left or right:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line +of text you want to align.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment +option.
    3. +
+ +

Note: You can also use the Format toolbar to +align text.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Working with Lists

+ +

To end a list and continue typing body text:

+ + + +

To change one or more list items to body text:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or +select the list items.
    2. + +
  2. In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a +bulleted list, click the bulleted list button) in the Format +toolbar.
    3. +
+ +

To position indented text below a list item:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item.
    2. + +
  2. Press Shift-Enter to create the hanging indent.
    3. + +
  3. Type the text you want to indent.
    4. + +
  4. Press Shift-Enter to create another indented paragraph, or +press Return to create the next list item.
    5. +
+ + + + +

Tip: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list +items by clicking anywhere in a list item and then clicking the +Indent or Outdent button on the Format toolbar. Alternatively, +click anywhere in a list item and press Tab to indent one level. +Press Shift+Tab to outdent one level.

+ +

To merge two adjacent lists:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select +all of the elements in both lists. Note that any text in between +the two lists will also become part of the merged list.
    2. + +
  2. Click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format +toolbar to merge the lists.
    3. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + +

Changing Text Color, Style, and Font

+ +

To change the style, color, or font of selected text:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text you want to format.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

To change the background color of the page:

+ +
    +
  1. Click anywhere in the page.
    2. + +
  2. Click the background color block in the Format toolbar.
    3. + +
  3. Choose a background color from the Block Background Color +dialog box.
    4. + +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly change the color of text to the color +last used, select the text, then press Shift and click on the text +color block in the Format toolbar. This is useful when you want to +use one color for separate lines of text.

+ +

You can also use an image as a background. See Setting Page Colors and +Backgrounds.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Removing or Discontinuing Text Styles

+ +

To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from +selected text:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles.
    3. + +
  3. Continue typing.
    4. +
+ +

To continue typing text with all text styles removed:

+ +
    +
  1. Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the +text styles.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles.
    3. + +
  3. Continue typing.
    4. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Finding and Replacing Text

+ +

To find text in the page you're currently working on:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your +search.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the +Find and Replace dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Type the text you want to locate in the "Find what" field. To +narrow the search, check one or more of the following options: +


    + +
    4. + +
  4. Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the +first occurrence of the text, click Find Next to search for the +next occurrence.
    5. + +
  5. Click Close when you are done.
    6. +
+ +

To find and replace text in the page you're currently working +on:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your +search.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the +Find and Replace dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Type the text you want to find and then type the replacement +text.
    4. + +
  4. To narrow the search, check one or more of the following +options:
    5. + + + + +
  5. Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer +selects the next occurrence of the text.
    6. + +
  6. Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement +text. Click Replace and Find to replace the selected text and find +the next occurrence. Click Replace All to replace every occurrence +in the document with the replacement text.
    7. + +
  7. Click Close when you are done.
    8. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Inserting Horizontal Lines

+ +

Horizontal lines are typically used to separate different +sections of a document visually. To insert a horizontal line (also +called a rule) in your page, begin from the Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to +appear.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.
    3. +
+ +

 

+ + + +

Setting Horizontal Line Properties

+ +

You can customize a line's height, length, width, alignment, and +shading.

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties +dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Edit any of these properties:
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the +next time you insert a horizontal line.
    4. + +
  4. To edit the properties of a horizontal line manually, click +Advanced Edit. See the section, Advanced +Property Editor, for details.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can select "Show All Tags" from the View menu to +show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. Click any yellow box to +select everything within that HTML tag or element. Double-click any +yellow box to display the Advanced +Property Editor dialog box for that HTML tag or element.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + + +

Inserting Special Characters

+ +

To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, +or currency symbols:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the special +character to appear.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see +the Insert Character dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Select a category of characters.
    4. + + + + +
  4. From the Character drop-down list, select the character you +want to insert.
    5. + +
  5. Click Insert. + +

    You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose +window) while you keep this dialog box open, in case you want to +use it again.

    +
    6. + +
  6. Click Close when you are done inserting special +characters.
    7. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + +

Inserting HTML Elements and Attributes

+ +

If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can +insert additional tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your +page. If you are not sure how to work with HTML source code, it's +best not to change it. To work with HTML code, use one of these +methods:

+ + + +

 

+ + + + +

Using the Advanced Property Editor

+ +

To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, +images, and horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property +Editor.

+ +

Note: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, +or modify HTML attributes and their associated values, it's best +not to do so.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor +dialog box, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose Show All +Tags.
    2. + +
  2. Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its +Properties dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Click Advanced Edit to open the object's Advanced Property +Editor. The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, each of which +lists the current properties for the selected object:
    4. + + + + +
  4. To edit a property or attribute in any of the three lists, +select the attribute you want to edit. You can then edit the +attribute's name or value using the editable Attribute and Value +fields at the bottom of the dialog box. To add a new attribute, +type it in the Attribute field at the bottom of the dialog box. The +new attribute is automatically added when you click in the Value +field. To remove an attribute, select it in the list, and click +Remove Attribute. + +

    Note: Required attributes are highlighted in the +Attribute list.

    +
    5. + +
  5. Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor +dialog box.
    6. + +
  6. Click OK again to exit the Properties dialog box.
    7. +
+ +

Composer automatically places quotation marks around any +attribute text.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + + + + +

Validating the HTML

+ +

Before you put your document on a web server so that others can +see it, you should first check the document's HTML formatting to +make sure it conforms to web standards. Documents containing +validated HTML are less likely to cause problems when viewed by +different browsers. Just visually checking your web pages in +Navigator doesn't ensure that your document will appear correctly +when viewed in other web browsers.

+ +

Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your +document conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML +standards. Composer uses the W3C HTML Validation Service, which +checks your document's HTML syntax for compliance with HTML 4.01 standards. +This service also provides +information on how to correct errors.

+ +

Note: You must be connected to the Internet to use this +feature.

+ +

To validate your document's HTML syntax:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have +unsaved changes, Composer asks you to save them before +proceeding.
    2. + +
  2. When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click Browse +and locate the file on your hard disk that you want to +validate.
    3. + +
  3. Click "Validate this document".
    4. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

+ +

Typically, you won't need to change the editing mode from the +default (Normal). However, if you want to work with the document's +HTML source code, you may want to change editing modes.

+ +

Composer allows you to quickly switch between four editing modes +or views. Each editing mode allows you to continue working on your +document, but displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag +icons).

+ +

Before you choose an editing mode:

+ + + +

The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs:

+ + + +

Note: JavaScript functions, frames, links, and animated +GIF files are not active in any of the editing modes. To display +these items in their active state, click the Browse button on the +Composition toolbar to load the page into a browser window.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +
+ +

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Inserting a Table

+ +

Changing a Table's +Properties

+ +

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and +Cells

+ +

Selecting Table Elements

+ +

Moving, Copying, and Deleting +Tables

+ +

Converting Text into a Table

+
+ +

 

+ + + +

Inserting a Table

+ +

Tables are useful for organizing text, pictures, and data into +formatted rows and columns. To insert a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to +appear.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Table button on the Composition toolbar. The +Insert Table dialog box appears.
    3. + +
  3. Type the number of rows and columns you want.
    4. + + + + +
  4. Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero +for no border. + +

    Note: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate tables +with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page is +viewed in a browser.

    +
    5. + +
  5. To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    6. + +
  6. Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.
    7. +
+ +

To change additional properties for your new table, see Changing a Table's Properties.

+ +

Tip: To insert a table within a table, open the +Insert menu and choose Table.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Changing a Table's Properties

+ +

This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an +entire table as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells +within a table. If you are not currently viewing the Table +Properties dialog box, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Table button on the toolbar, or open the Table +menu and choose Table Properties. The Table Properties dialog box +contains two tabs: Table and Cells.
    3. + +
  3. Click the Table tab to edit these properties:
    4. + + + + +
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    5. + +
  5. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog +box, or click OK to confirm them.
    6. +
+ +

To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and +choose Table Properties. The Table Properties dialog box +appears.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties:
    3. + + + +

    Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript +events, click Advanced Edit to display the Advanced Property Editor

    + + +
  3. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog +box, or click OK to confirm them.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To change the text color or background color of one +or more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or +click anywhere in the table and then click the text color or +background color icon in the Format toolbar.

+ +

Tip: To change the color of cells to the color last used, +select the cell, then press Shift and click on the background color +picker. This is useful when you want to use one color for +individual cells.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Adding and Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells

+ +

Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells, +columns, or rows in a table. In addition, you can set options that +allow you to maintain the original rectangular structure or layout +of the table while you perform editing tasks.

+ +

To add a cell, row, or column to your table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or +cells).
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu and then choose Insert.
    3. + +
  3. Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new +table within a table cell.)
    4. +
+ +

To delete a cell, row, or column:

+ +
    +
  1. Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or, +select neighboring cells to delete more than one row at a time. To +select neighboring cells, drag over the cells you want to select. +To select individual cells in a table, hold down the Ctrl key +(Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh OS) and click on +the cells you want to select.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Delete.
    3. + +
  3. Choose the item you want to delete.
    4. +
+ +

To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right:

+ + + +

To join (or merge) adjacent cells:

+ + + +

To split a joined cell back into two or more cells:

+ + + +

Refer to Selecting Table Elements +for information on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and +columns.

+ +

 

+ + + +

Changing the Default Table Editing Behavior

+ +

By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer +preserves the table's structure by adding cells at the end of a +row, wherever needed. This allows you to delete one or more cells +but still maintain the table's original rectangular layout, or +structure. Otherwise, deleting cells can result in a table with +empty spaces, or whose outline appears irregular due to an uneven +number of cells.

+ +

To change the default table editing behavior, begin from the +Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose +Composer.
    2. + +
  2. Under Table Editing, set the following preference:
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

See also Setting General +Composer Preferences.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Selecting Table Elements

+ +

You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or +group of cells:

+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Tables

+ +

To move a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click inside the table.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.
    3. +
+ + + +

 

+ + + +

Converting Text into a Table

+ +

To convert text into a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in +mind that Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in +the selection.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You +see the Convert to Table dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection +into columns, or specify a different character to use. If you +choose Space as the separator for columns, choose whether or not +you want Composer to ignore multiple space and treat them as one +space.
    4. + +
  4. Leave "Delete separator character" checked to have Composer +remove the separator character when it converts the text into a +table. If you don't want Composer to delete the separator +character, uncheck this option.
    5. + +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
+ +

Note: Text formatting is removed when the +selected text is converted to a table.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +
+ + + +

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web Page

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Inserting an Image into Your +Page

+ +

Editing Image Properties

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + + +

Inserting an Image into Your Page

+ +

You can insert GIF, JPEG, BMP, and PNG (Portable Network +Graphics) images into your web page. You can also use them to create links. When you insert an image, +Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.

+ +

Note: If you plan to publish your pages to the web, it's best not to +use BMP images in your pages.

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your +page before you insert images into it. This allows Composer to +automatically use relative references to images once you insert +them.

+ +

To insert an image:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to +appear.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Image button on the toolbar, or open the Insert +menu and choose Image. You see the Image Properties dialog +box.
    3. + +
  3. Type the location and filename of the image file, or click +Choose File to search for an image file on your hard drive or +network.
    4. + +
  4. Type a simple description of your image as the alternate text +that will appear in text-only browsers (as well as other browsers) + when an image is loading or when image loading is +disabled. + +

    Alternatively, you can choose not to include alternate text.

    +
    5. + +
  5. If needed, click other tabs so you can adjust the settings (for +example, alignment) in the Image +Properties dialog box.
    6. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto +your page.

+ +

Tip: To insert a line break after all images in a +paragraph, choose Break Below Images from the Insert menu.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Editing Image Properties

+ +

Once you've inserted an image into your page, you can edit its +properties and customize the layout in your page, such as the +height, width, spacing, and text alignment. If you are not +currently viewing the Image Properties dialog box, follow these +steps:

+ +

To edit the properties for a selected image:

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button + on the toolbar to display the Image Properties dialog +box.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Location tab to edit these properties:
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click the Dimensions tab to edit these properties:
    4. + + + + +
  4. Click the Appearance Tab to edit these properties:
    5. + + + + +
  5. Click the Link tab to edit these properties:
    6. + + + + +
  6. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    7. + +
  7. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    8. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + +
+ +

Setting Page Properties

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Setting Page Properties +and Meta Tags

+ +

Setting Page Colors +and Backgrounds

+
+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Setting Page Properties and Meta Tags

+ +

Use the Page Properties dialog box to enter properties such as +the title, author, and description of the document you're currently +working on. This information is useful if you plan to use the page +on a web site, since search engines use this type of information to +index your page. You can view this information from the browser +window by opening the View menu and choosing Page Info.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.
    2. + +
  2. Edit any of the following properties:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Setting Page Colors and Background

+ +

You can change the background color or specify a background +image for the page you're currently working on. These choices +affect the way text and links in your page appear to people viewing +the page through a browser.

+ +

To set the colors and background for the current page, begin +from the Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and +Background.
    2. + +
  2. Edit any of the following properties:
    3. + +
  3. + +
    4. +
+ +

Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript +events, click Advanced Edit to display the Advanced Property Editor.

+ +

You can also set the default page +background and colors for every new page you create in +Composer.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +
+ +

Creating Links in Composer

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Creating Links Within the Same +Page

+ +

Creating Links to Other Pages

+ +

Using Images as Links

+ +

Removing or Discontinuing +Links

+
+ +

 

+ + + +

Creating Links Within the Same Page

+ +

To create a link within the same page, for example a link that +the reader can use to jump from one section to another, you must +create an anchor (target location), and then create a link +that points to the anchor. Anchors are also called named +anchors.

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line +where you want to create an anchor, or select some text.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named +Anchor Properties dialog box.
    3. + +
  3. Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up +to 30 characters). If you include spaces, they will be converted to +underscores ( _ ). If you selected some text in step 1, this box +already contains a name.
    4. + +
  4. Click OK. An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the +anchor's location:
    5. +
+ +

To create the link on which readers can click to jump to the +anchor:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text or image that you want to link to the +anchor.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. +You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. + + + + +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

Note: To test the link you just created, open the File +menu and choose Browse Page, then click the link.

+ +

Tip: If you did not first create named anchors, you can +use the Link dialog box to create links to headings that already +occur in the page.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +

Creating Links to Other Pages

+ +

You can create links from your page to local pages on your own +computer or on your workplace's network, or to remote pages on the +Internet.

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your +page before you create links to other pages. This allows Composer +to automatically use relative references for links once you create +them.

+ + + +

To create a link to another page:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a +link, or select the text or image that you want to link to the +anchor.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialog +box.
    3. + +
  3. Define your link:
    4. + + + + +
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click +Advanced Edit to display the Advanced +Property Editor.
    5. + +
  5. Click OK.
    6. + +
  6. To test the link you just created, click the Browse button and +then click the link to make sure it works as expected.
    7. +
+ +

Tip: You can copy a link quickly by clicking and dragging +the link from another window and then dropping it onto your page. +For example, you can click and drag a link from a web page, +bookmark, or Mail window and drop it onto your page. You can also +right-click (Control+click on Macintosh OS) a link on a web page +and choose Copy Link Location from the menu. Then you can paste the +link location into the Link Location field in the Link Properties +dialog box.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +

Using Images as Links

+ +

You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave +like links in your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, +the browser window displays the page that the image is linked +to.

+ +
    +
  1. Select an image on your page.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Link button on the toolbar, or open the Insert +menu and choose Link.
    3. + +
  3. Use the Link Properties dialog box to link the image to a named anchor or heading within the +page, or to a separate local or +remote page.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: Drag and drop a linked image from the Navigator +window into a Composer window to copy both the image and the +link.

+ +

Note: To remove the blue border on images used as links, +open the Link Properties dialog box, click the Link tab, and uncheck "Show border around linked image".

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + +

Removing or Discontinuing Links

+ +

To remove a link:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or +image.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links.
    3. +
+ +

To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is +not included as part of the link:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to +end.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link.
    3. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + + + + +
+ +

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

+ +

If your pages exist only on your local hard disk, you can browse +your pages, but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your +pages to a remote computer called a web server.

+ +

When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies +(uploads) your pages to a computer that lets others browse your +pages. Most ISPs provide space on their web servers for web page +publishing. To find a web server where you can publish your pages, +ask your ISP, help desk, or system administrator.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Publishing a Document

+ +

Updating a Published Document

+ +

Changing the Filename or Publishing +Location

+ +

Creating a New Publishing Site

+ +

Changing the Default Publishing +Site

+ +

Deleting a Publishing Site

+ +

Solving Common Publishing +Problems

+ +

Publishing Settings

+
+ +

 

+ + + +

Publishing a Document

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your +page before you insert links or images into it. This allows +Composer to automatically use relative references for links and +images once you insert them.

+ +

To publish a document:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a +new Composer document.
    2. + +
  2. When you're ready to publish the document remotely, click the +Publish button.
    3. + +

    If you have published this document before, Composer remembers +the document's publishing settings and starts publishing the +document. While publishing is in progress, Composer displays a +publishing status dialog box.

    + + + + +
  3. To browse your published page, click the Browse button. Test +the page's links and make sure there are no missing images.
    4. + +
  4. Continue editing the page as necessary. When you're ready to +update the remote page with your changes, click the Publish +button.
    5. +
+ +

When you publish a document for the first time, Composer changes +the document's file:/// URL to an http:// URL to +indicate that you are now editing the published document. If you +want to save the document locally (on your computer's hard disk), +click the Save button. You'll be prompted to choose a filename and +location on your hard disk for the document.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + + +

Tips for Avoiding Broken Links or Missing Images

+ +


+

+ + + +

For more troubleshooting tips, see Solving Common Publishing Problems.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + + +

Updating a Published Document

+ +

To update a published document:

+ +
    +
  1. In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent +Pages, then select the document from the list.
    2. + +

    Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want +to update by entering the document's HTTP address (the document's +web address) in the Navigator browser's Location field.

    + + +
  2. Open the File menu, and choose Edit Page.
    3. + +
  3. Edit the document as necessary.
    4. + +
  4. When you're ready to update the remote page with your changes, +click Publish in Composer's toolbar.
    5. +
+ + + + + +

Tip: To delete a page or image you've published +on a web server, you must use an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) +program. You also must use an FTP program if you want to create +subdirectories or to rename files on the web server. Ask your +service provider if they recommend a particular FTP program. You +can usually find information on FTP programs in the Help or Support +sections of your service provider's web site. FTP programs are also +available from shareware sites such as ZDNet Downloads.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Changing the Filename or Publishing Location

+ +

To change a document's filename or publishing location:

+ +
    +
  1. In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent +Pages, then select the document from the list.
    2. + +

    Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want +to update by entering the document's HTTP address (the document's +web address) in the Navigator browser's Location field.

    + + +
  2. Open the File menu, and choose Edit Page.
    3. + +
  3. Edit the document as necessary.
    4. + +
  4. Open Composer's File menu and choose Publish As. Composer +displays the Publish tab in the Publish Page dialog box.
    5. + +
  5. Enter a different page title, if necessary.
    6. + +
  6. Enter a different filename for the page, if necessary.
    7. + +
  7. From the Site Name list, choose the publishing location you +want to use. To set up a new publishing location, click New Site. +See Publish Page - Settings for more +information.
    8. + +
  8. Click Publish to save the document to the new location.
    9. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Creating a New Publishing Site

+ +

If you plan to publish documents to more than one remote +location, you can set up Composer to save the publishing +information for each remote site you use, so that you don't have to +enter it each time you want to publish.

+ +

To create a new publishing site, begin from a Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Click New Site.
    3. + +
  3. For "Site Name," enter the nickname by which you want to refer +to this publishing site. + +

    For example, if you will use the new site to publish documents +related to the "Meteor" project, you might want to use the site +name "Meteor". Site names remind you about the types of documents +you publish at each site.

    +
    4. + +
  4. For "Publishing address," enter the complete URL provided to +you by your ISP, system administrator, or web hosting service. This +URL must begin with either ftp:// or http://. + +

    The publishing address specifies the location where documents +are published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to +enter, ask your ISP or system administrator.

    +
    5. + +
  5. For "HTTP address of your home page," enter the complete URL +that you would enter in the Navigator browser to view pages at this +site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as part of the URL. + + +

    This URL must always begin with http://. In some cases, +this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure +what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave +it blank.

    +
    6. + +
  6. For user name, enter the user name you use to log in to your +ISP or web hosting service.
    7. + +
  7. For password, enter the password for your user name.
    8. + +
  8. Select "Save Password" to save your password securely using +Password Manager so that you don't have to enter it each time you +publish pages at this site.
    9. + +
  9. Click OK.
    10. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Choosing the Default Publishing Site

+ +

If you have set up more than one publishing site, but you +typically use only one site for most of your publishing needs, you +can designate the site you use most often as the default publishing +site. Composer will use the default publishing site for all +documents that you publish, unless you specifically choose an +alternate site.

+ +

Regardless of how many sites you've set up, you can always +publish a document to a different site by choosing Publish As from +Composer's File menu. See Changing the +Filename or Publishing Location for more information.

+ +

To choose the default publishing site, begin from a Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Select a publishing site from the list. + +

    If you only have one publishing site set up, Composer uses that +one as the default site.

    +
    3. + +
  3. Click Set as Default.
    4. + +
  4. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Deleting a Publishing Site

+ +

Deleting a publishing site removes the site's settings from +Composer. If you later wish to publish to the site, you must +re-enter the site's settings.

+ +

To delete a publishing site's settings, begin from a Composer +window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. + +
  2. Select a publishing site from the list.
    3. + +
  3. Click Remove Site.
    4. + +

    Composer only removes the site's settings; the remote site +itself is not affected.

    + + +
  4. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ + + +

Solving Common Publishing Problems

+ +

If one or more of your files fail to publish, the Publishing +Status dialog box displays an error message that can help you +determine what went wrong and how to fix it. Click the +Troubleshooting button in the Publishing Status dialog box to get +help on solving your publishing problem.

+ +

If you are still unable to publish a file, save the file to your +hard disk by opening Composer's File menu, and choosing Save. You +can then open the file at a later time to try to publish it. To +quickly locate the file later, open Composer's File menu, and +choose Recent Pages.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Verifying Your Publishing +Settings

+ +

Checking Your Filenames

+ +

Fixing Publishing Errors

+
+ +
+

 

+ + + +

Verifying Your Publishing Settings

+ +

To verify your publishing settings:

+ +
    +
  1. Close the Publishing Status dialog box, if it is open.
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.
    3. + +
  3. In the Publish Settings dialog box, confirm that the site +settings are correct for the site you are trying to publish to. If +you're not sure, check with your ISP or web hosting service.
    4. + +
  4. + +
    5. +
+ +


+

+ + + +

Checking Your Filenames

+ +

Examine the names of any files that failed to publish. Make sure +that the filenames:

+ + + +


+

+ + + +

Fixing Publishing Errors

+ +

If one or more of your files fails to publish, look at the +messages Composer displays in the Publishing Status area of the +Publishing dialog box. You can use these error messages to help +determine what went wrong and what to do to fix the problem.

+ +


+

+ + + + + +
+

Error Messages:

+ +

Filename not +found

+ +

X of Y files +failed to publish

+ +

The subdirectory directory +name doesn't exist on this site or the filename +filename is already in use by another +subdirectory

+ +

The filename filename +is already in use by another subdirectory

+ +

The server is not available. +Check your connection and try again later.

+ +

You do not have permission to +publish to this location.

+ +

You are currently offline. Click +the icon near the lower-right corner of any window to go +online.

+ +

There is not enough disk space +available to save the file filename.

+ +

The filename or subdirectory name +is too long.

+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
+Filename not found + +

or

+ +X of Y files failed to publish
+ +

Error Description: One or more image files or +CSS files failed to publish because Composer could not find them. +Some typical reasons might be:

+ + + +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
The +subdirectory directory name doesn't exist on this site or +the filename filename is already in use by another +subdirectory + +

or

+ +The filename filename is already in use by another +subdirectory
+ +

Error Description: You specified the name of a +remote subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing site. +Composer can only publish to a remote subdirectory that already +exists at the publishing location. Or, you specified a filename +that is identical to the name of an existing subdirectory at the +publishing site.

+ +

For example, in the Publish Page dialog box, under the Publish +tab:

+ + + +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
The server +is not available. Check your connection and try again +later.
+ +

Error Description: This error can have many +causes. For example:

+ + + +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
You do not have +permission to publish to this location.
+ +

Error Description: You are attempting to +publish to a location that you are not authorized to use. You can +only publish to sites where you have been granted access by your +ISP or web hosting service.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
You are + +currently offline. Click the icon near the lower-right corner of +any window to go online.
+ +

Error Description: You are attempting to +publish, but your Mozilla Internet connection is currently in the +"offline" state. Your Internet connection must be in the "online" +state (connected to the Internet) in order to publish your +pages.

+ +

Verify that your Internet connection is currently offline by +looking at the online/offline icon in the lower right corner of any +Mozilla window. If you are currently offline, the icon appears as +.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
There is not +enough disk space available to save the file +filename.
+ +

Error Description: The remote web server's hard +disk is full, or you may have exceeded the amount of disk space +allocated to you by your ISP or web hosting service.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +
+

Error Message:

+ + + + + +
The filename or +subdirectory name is too long.
+ +

Error Description: The number of characters in +the filename or the subdirectory name is not supported by the web +server computer that you are trying to publish to.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +
+

 

+ + + + +

Publishing Settings

+ +

This section describes Composer's publishing settings. For +information on Composer's general and new page settings, see Composer Preferences.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Publish Page - Publish

+ +

Publish Page - Settings

+ +

Publish Settings

+
+ +
+

 

+ + + + +

Publish Page - Publish

+ +

The Publish Page - Publish tab lets you specify where you want +to publish a document. These settings apply to the current +document.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Publish tab, +follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page +dialog box appears.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Publish tab.
    3. +
+ + + +

Tip: To create remote subdirectories or delete +published pages or images, you must use an FTP (File Transfer +Protocol) program. Ask your service provider if they recommend a +particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP +programs in the Help or Support sections of your service provider's +web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such +as ZDNet Downloads.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +
+ + + +

Publish Page - Settings

+ +

The Publish Page - Settings tab lets you specify your login +information for the remote publishing site, as well as the +publishing settings for the remote site. These settings apply to +the current document and any other files you publish to this +location.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Settings tab, +follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page +dialog box appears.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Settings tab.
    3. +
+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +
+ + +

Publish Settings

+ +

The Publish Settings dialog box lets you create, edit, and +delete publishing site settings, and also lets you set the default +publishing site.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Settings dialog box, +follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. +Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. +
+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ + + + +
+ +

Composer Preferences

+ +

This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences +panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these +steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. + +

    (Mac OS X) Open the Mozilla menu and choose Preferences.

    + + +
  2. Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.
    3. +
+ +

For information on Composer's publishing settings, see Publishing Settings.

+ +

 

+ + + + + +
+

In this section:

+ +

Composer

+ +

New Page Settings

+
+ +
+ + + +

Composer Preferences - Composer

+ +

Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving +files and for table editing. These settings apply to every document +you create.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow +these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. + +
  2. Click the Composer category.
    3. +
+ + + +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +

 

+ +
+ + +

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings

+ +

New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colors +and background images that apply to every document you create.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow +these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. + +
  2. Double-click the Composer category and click New Page +Settings.
    3. +
+ + + +

To change the author name for an individual page: Open the +Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.

+ +

To change the page colors and background image for an individual +page: Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and +Background.

+ +

[ Return to beginning of +section ]

+ +
+

20 June 2002 +

+ +
+

Copyright © 1994-2002 The Mozilla Organization.

+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.html index 036a8c77cbb..215f0d62a55 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -Mozilla Preferences Help +Mozilla Advanced Preferences Help @@ -8,23 +8,25 @@ -

- + +

Advanced Preferences

-

This section describes how to use the Advanced preference panel. If you are - not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+

This section describes how to use the Advanced preferences panel. If you are +not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
2. Click the Advanced category.

- +
@@ -32,7 +34,15 @@

In this section:

Advanced -

Scripts and Windows -

Cache -

Proxies -

HTTP Networking -

Software Installation + +

Scripts & Plugins +

Cache + +

Proxies +

HTTP Networking +

Software Installation

Mouse Wheel

System

 

-

+ + + + + + + + +

Advanced Preferences - Advanced

This section describes how to use the main Advanced preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps: @@ -41,143 +51,161 @@

The main Advanced preferences panel allows you to customize Java, FTP passwords, and Quick Launch:

-

 

+

 

+
+ - - -

Advanced Preferences - Scripts & Windows

-

This section describes how to use the Scripts & Windows preferences panel. +

Advanced Preferences - Scripts & Plugins

+

This section describes how to use the Scripts & Plugins preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
- 2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Windows. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

-

-

The Scripts & Windows preferences panel allows you to control how JavaScript - is used in Netcape:

+ 2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Plugins. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

+


+

The Scripts & Plugins preferences panel allows you to control how JavaScript +and plugins is used in Netcape:

+

For more information about plugins, see Managing +Different File Types.

+

 

+ +
+ + + +

Advanced Preferences - Cache

This section describes how to use the Cache preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
2. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, - double-click the category to expand the list.)

-

+ double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

+


The Cache preferences panel allows you to adjust the Mozilla memory and disk cache:

-

 

+

 

+ +
+ + -

Advanced Preferences - Proxies

This section describes how to use the Proxies preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
2. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are visible, - double-click the category to expand the list.)

-

+ double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

+


The Proxies preferences panel allows you to set up Mozilla to use a proxy:

Before you start: Ask your network administrator if you have a proxy configuration file or for the names and port numbers of the proxy.

+

 

+
@@ -209,20 +237,18 @@ delays loading web pages.

 

-
- - - +
+

Advanced Preferences - Software Installation

This section describes how to use the Software Installation preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
2. Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

-

-

The Software Installation preferences panel is ussed to enable software installation - and update notification:

+ are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

+


+

The Software Installation preferences panel is used to enable software installation +and update notification:

-

 

- - - +

 

+ +
+

Advanced Preferences - Mouse Wheel

-

+

This section describes how to use the Mouse Wheel preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
2. Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories are - visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

-

+ visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

+


The Mouse Wheel preferences panel allows you to control how the mouse wheel on your mouse (in between your mouse buttons) is used in Mozilla:

-
  • Scroll a page up or a page down: Choose this to scroll up or - down one page at a time. This settings allows faster, but less accurate - scrolling through a page with your mouse wheel..
    • +
  • Scroll a page up or a page down: Choose this to scroll up or down +one page at a time. This setting allows faster, but less accurate scrolling through +a page with your mouse wheel.
  • Move back and forward in the browsing history: Choose this to use the mouse wheel to navigate back or forward to previous pages you've visited.
    • @@ -281,36 +307,39 @@ delays loading web pages.
    -

     

    - - - +

     

    + +
    +

    Advanced Preferences - System

    -

    +

    This section describes how to use the System preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Advanced category, click System. (If no subcategories are visible, - double-click the category to expand the list.)

    + double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    Note: The System preferences panel appears only on Windows-based platforms.

    -

    +


    The System preferences panel allows you to specify what files and protocols are opened using Mozilla:

    -

     

    -

    6 March 2002

    - +

    Tip: To make Mozilla the default browser easily, see Navigator +Preferences - Navigator. Also select "Alert me if other application +change these settings" to know when other programs become the default programs +instead of Mozilla.

    +
    +

    19 June 2002

    +
    +

    Copyright 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

    - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml index 036a8c77cbb..215f0d62a55 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -Mozilla Preferences Help +Mozilla Advanced Preferences Help @@ -8,23 +8,25 @@ -

    - + +

    Advanced Preferences

    -

    This section describes how to use the Advanced preference panel. If you are - not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

    +

    This section describes how to use the Advanced preferences panel. If you are +not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Click the Advanced category.

    - +
    @@ -32,7 +34,15 @@

    In this section:

    Advanced -

    Scripts and Windows -

    Cache -

    Proxies -

    HTTP Networking -

    Software Installation + +

    Scripts & Plugins +

    Cache + +

    Proxies +

    HTTP Networking +

    Software Installation

    Mouse Wheel

    System

     

    -

    + + + + + + + + +

    Advanced Preferences - Advanced

    This section describes how to use the main Advanced preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps: @@ -41,143 +51,161 @@

    The main Advanced preferences panel allows you to customize Java, FTP passwords, and Quick Launch:

    -

     

    +

     

    +
    + - - -

    Advanced Preferences - Scripts & Windows

    -

    This section describes how to use the Scripts & Windows preferences panel. +

    Advanced Preferences - Scripts & Plugins

    +

    This section describes how to use the Scripts & Plugins preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Windows. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Scripts & Windows preferences panel allows you to control how JavaScript - is used in Netcape:

    + 2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Plugins. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Scripts & Plugins preferences panel allows you to control how JavaScript +and plugins is used in Netcape:

    +

    For more information about plugins, see Managing +Different File Types.

    +

     

    + +
    + + + +

    Advanced Preferences - Cache

    This section describes how to use the Cache preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, - double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    +


    The Cache preferences panel allows you to adjust the Mozilla memory and disk cache:

    -

     

    +

     

    + +
    + + -

    Advanced Preferences - Proxies

    This section describes how to use the Proxies preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are visible, - double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    +


    The Proxies preferences panel allows you to set up Mozilla to use a proxy:

    Before you start: Ask your network administrator if you have a proxy configuration file or for the names and port numbers of the proxy.

    +

     

    +
    @@ -209,20 +237,18 @@ delays loading web pages.

     

    -
    - - - +
    +

    Advanced Preferences - Software Installation

    This section describes how to use the Software Installation preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Software Installation preferences panel is ussed to enable software installation - and update notification:

    + are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Software Installation preferences panel is used to enable software installation +and update notification:

    -

     

    - - - +

     

    + +
    +

    Advanced Preferences - Mouse Wheel

    -

    +

    This section describes how to use the Mouse Wheel preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories are - visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    +


    The Mouse Wheel preferences panel allows you to control how the mouse wheel on your mouse (in between your mouse buttons) is used in Mozilla:

    -
  • Scroll a page up or a page down: Choose this to scroll up or - down one page at a time. This settings allows faster, but less accurate - scrolling through a page with your mouse wheel..
    • +
  • Scroll a page up or a page down: Choose this to scroll up or down +one page at a time. This setting allows faster, but less accurate scrolling through +a page with your mouse wheel.
  • Move back and forward in the browsing history: Choose this to use the mouse wheel to navigate back or forward to previous pages you've visited.
    • @@ -281,36 +307,39 @@ delays loading web pages.
    -

     

    - - - +

     

    + +
    +

    Advanced Preferences - System

    -

    +

    This section describes how to use the System preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Advanced category, click System. (If no subcategories are visible, - double-click the category to expand the list.)

    + double-click Advanced to expand the list.)

    Note: The System preferences panel appears only on Windows-based platforms.

    -

    +


    The System preferences panel allows you to specify what files and protocols are opened using Mozilla:

    -

     

    -

    6 March 2002

    - +

    Tip: To make Mozilla the default browser easily, see Navigator +Preferences - Navigator. Also select "Alert me if other application +change these settings" to know when other programs become the default programs +instead of Mozilla.

    +
    +

    19 June 2002

    +
    +

    Copyright 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

    - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.html index 07919a36b6a..3ae71c87955 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.html @@ -11,16 +11,18 @@

    Navigator Settings

    -

    The sections listed below describe the preferences panels related to Navigator, the browswer component of Mozilla. To see the preference panels, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    +

    The sections listed below describe the preferences panels related to Navigator, +the browser component of Mozilla. To see the preference panels, follow these +steps:

    +

    1. From any Navigator window, open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.

    - +
    -

    Related sections: +

    In this section:

    Appearance Preferences

    Navigator Preferences @@ -30,22 +32,19 @@

     

    - -

     

    - -

    -

    +

    Appearance Preferences

    This section describes how to use the Appearance preference panel. If you are not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Choose Appearance.

    - +2. Double-click Appearance to expand the list, then click the name for the preferences +you want to view.

    +
    -

    Related sections: -

    Appearance +

    In this section: +

    Appearance

    Fonts

    Colors

    Themes @@ -55,41 +54,37 @@

     

    - + + + +

    Appearance Preferences - Appearance

    -

    This section describes how to use the main Appearance preferences panel. - If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps: -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Click the Appearance category.

    -

    +

    This section describes how to use the Appearance preferences panels. If you're +not already viewing one of these panels, follow these steps: +

      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
      2. +
    2. Click the Appearance category.
      3. +
    +


    The Appearance preferences panel allows you set components that you want to use when you start up Mozilla:

     

    @@ -98,10 +93,13 @@ Web site icons are used to the left of the Location Bar and in your bookmark lis

    This section describes how to use the Fonts preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
      2. +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    The Fonts preferences panel allows you to set page font type and size, as well as the screen resolution.

    Note: Some font styles may not be selectable because the selected language does not have fonts available for that style.

    @@ -111,26 +109,28 @@ Web site icons are used to the left of the Location Bar and in your bookmark lis default fonts for the Western (Roman) character set, choose "Western."
  • Allow documents to use other fonts: If available, select this checkbox to keep a web page's font and size settings instead of your own preferences.
  • Display resolution: Select from the drop-down list the dots per inch - (dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the Calibrate - Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution by measuring - how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution may will - improve text readability on some screens.
    +(dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the Calibrate +Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution by measuring +how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution will improve +text readability on some screens.

    •  

    @@ -141,36 +141,32 @@ Web site icons are used to the left of the Location Bar and in your bookmark lis

    This section describes how to use the Colors preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Colors. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Colors. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    The Colors preferences panel allows you to set the background and text colors on web pages:

     

    @@ -179,40 +175,45 @@ Tip: To view the source of a web page, open the View menu in Navigator and c

    This section describes how to use the Themes preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Themes. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
      2. +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Themes. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    The Themes preferences panel allows you to change the look and style of Mozilla through different themes.

     

    +

    Appearance Preferences - Languages/Content

    -

    This section describes how to use the Languages/Content preferences panel. - If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps: -

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Languages/Content preferences panel allows you to select a content pack and/or language pack to use within Mozilla.

    +

    This section describes how to use the Language and Content Packs preferences +panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    +

    The Language and Content Packs preferences panel allows you to select a content +pack and/or language pack to use within Mozilla.

     

    -

    6 March 2002

    +

    19 June 2002

    +
    +

    Copyright 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml index 07919a36b6a..3ae71c87955 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml @@ -11,16 +11,18 @@

    Navigator Settings

    -

    The sections listed below describe the preferences panels related to Navigator, the browswer component of Mozilla. To see the preference panels, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    +

    The sections listed below describe the preferences panels related to Navigator, +the browser component of Mozilla. To see the preference panels, follow these +steps:

    +

    1. From any Navigator window, open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.

    - +
    -

    Related sections: +

    In this section:

    Appearance Preferences

    Navigator Preferences @@ -30,22 +32,19 @@

     

    - -

     

    - -

    -

    +

    Appearance Preferences

    This section describes how to use the Appearance preference panel. If you are not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Choose Appearance.

    - +2. Double-click Appearance to expand the list, then click the name for the preferences +you want to view.

    +
    -

    Related sections: -

    Appearance +

    In this section: +

    Appearance

    Fonts

    Colors

    Themes @@ -55,41 +54,37 @@

     

    - + + + +

    Appearance Preferences - Appearance

    -

    This section describes how to use the main Appearance preferences panel. - If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps: -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Click the Appearance category.

    -

    +

    This section describes how to use the Appearance preferences panels. If you're +not already viewing one of these panels, follow these steps: +

      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
      2. +
    2. Click the Appearance category.
      3. +
    +


    The Appearance preferences panel allows you set components that you want to use when you start up Mozilla:

     

    @@ -98,10 +93,13 @@ Web site icons are used to the left of the Location Bar and in your bookmark lis

    This section describes how to use the Fonts preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
      2. +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    The Fonts preferences panel allows you to set page font type and size, as well as the screen resolution.

    Note: Some font styles may not be selectable because the selected language does not have fonts available for that style.

    @@ -111,26 +109,28 @@ Web site icons are used to the left of the Location Bar and in your bookmark lis default fonts for the Western (Roman) character set, choose "Western."
  • Allow documents to use other fonts: If available, select this checkbox to keep a web page's font and size settings instead of your own preferences.
  • Display resolution: Select from the drop-down list the dots per inch - (dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the Calibrate - Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution by measuring - how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution may will - improve text readability on some screens.
    +(dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the Calibrate +Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution by measuring +how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution will improve +text readability on some screens.

    •  

    @@ -141,36 +141,32 @@ Web site icons are used to the left of the Location Bar and in your bookmark lis

    This section describes how to use the Colors preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Colors. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Colors. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    The Colors preferences panel allows you to set the background and text colors on web pages:

     

    @@ -179,40 +175,45 @@ Tip: To view the source of a web page, open the View menu in Navigator and c

    This section describes how to use the Themes preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Themes. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
      2. +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Themes. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    The Themes preferences panel allows you to change the look and style of Mozilla through different themes.

     

    +

    Appearance Preferences - Languages/Content

    -

    This section describes how to use the Languages/Content preferences panel. - If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps: -

    -

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    - 2. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Languages/Content preferences panel allows you to select a content pack and/or language pack to use within Mozilla.

    +

    This section describes how to use the Language and Content Packs preferences +panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      +
    2. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
      3. +
    +


    +

    The Language and Content Packs preferences panel allows you to select a content +pack and/or language pack to use within Mozilla.

     

    -

    6 March 2002

    +

    19 June 2002

    +
    +

    Copyright 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.html index 99966231ce8..1c3b4e92e46 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -Mozilla Preferences Help +Mozilla Navigator Preferences Help @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ - +

    Navigator Preferences

    @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Choose Navigator.

    - +

    In this section: @@ -27,13 +27,21 @@

    Smart Browsing

    Internet Search -

    Tabbed Browsing +

    Tabbed Browsing +

    Downloads

     

    + + + + + + + @@ -42,27 +50,51 @@ If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Click the Navigator category.

    -

    +


    The Navigator preferences panel allows you to customize three aspects of the browser.

     

    @@ -75,39 +107,30 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click History. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The History preferences panel allows you to configure three history settings on Navigator.

    For more information about history in Mozilla, see Retracing Your Steps.

     

    - + @@ -118,26 +141,22 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Languages. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The Languages preferences panel allows you to choose the languages and character coding for displaying web pages:

     

    @@ -152,33 +171,37 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Helper Applications. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The Helper Applications preferences panel allows you set up how different file types are opened by other applications in Mozilla:

    For more information about handling different file types in Mozilla, see Managing Different File Types.

     

    @@ -196,44 +219,39 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Smart Browsing. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Smart Browsing preferences panel allows you to better browse web pages using the What's Related Sidebar tab, Internet Keywords, and Location - bar autocomplete.

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Smart Browsing preferences panel allows you to better browse web pages +using Internet Keywords, and Location bar autocomplete.

     

    @@ -247,36 +265,30 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The Internet Search preferences panel allows you to configure how you search using Mozilla:

     

    - -

    Navigator Preferences - Tabbed Browsing

    @@ -285,29 +297,64 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Tabbed Browsing. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Tabbed Browsing preferences panel allows you to set up tabbed browsing:

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Tabbed Browsing preferences panel allows you to set up Tabbed Browsing:

    +

    Note: On Mac OS, where instructed to press Control (Ctrl), press Command +instead.

    -

    - -8 March 2002

    + + + + + +

    Navigator Preferences - Downloads

    +

    This section describes how to use the Downloads preferences panel. If you're +not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    +

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    +2. Under the Navigator category, click Downloads. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Downloads preferences panel allows you to set up how Mozilla handles +files you download from web pages:

    + +

    For more information about downloading files from web pages, see Managing +Different File Types.

    +

     

    +
    +

    7 October 2002

    +
    +

    Copyright 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml index 99966231ce8..1c3b4e92e46 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -Mozilla Preferences Help +Mozilla Navigator Preferences Help @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ - +

    Navigator Preferences

    @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Choose Navigator.

    - +

    In this section: @@ -27,13 +27,21 @@

    Smart Browsing

    Internet Search -

    Tabbed Browsing +

    Tabbed Browsing +

    Downloads

     

    + + + + + + + @@ -42,27 +50,51 @@ If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Click the Navigator category.

    -

    +


    The Navigator preferences panel allows you to customize three aspects of the browser.

     

    @@ -75,39 +107,30 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click History. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The History preferences panel allows you to configure three history settings on Navigator.

    For more information about history in Mozilla, see Retracing Your Steps.

     

    - + @@ -118,26 +141,22 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Languages. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The Languages preferences panel allows you to choose the languages and character coding for displaying web pages:

     

    @@ -152,33 +171,37 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Helper Applications. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The Helper Applications preferences panel allows you set up how different file types are opened by other applications in Mozilla:

    For more information about handling different file types in Mozilla, see Managing Different File Types.

     

    @@ -196,44 +219,39 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Smart Browsing. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Smart Browsing preferences panel allows you to better browse web pages using the What's Related Sidebar tab, Internet Keywords, and Location - bar autocomplete.

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Smart Browsing preferences panel allows you to better browse web pages +using Internet Keywords, and Location bar autocomplete.

     

    @@ -247,36 +265,30 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    The Internet Search preferences panel allows you to configure how you search using Mozilla:

     

    - -

    Navigator Preferences - Tabbed Browsing

    @@ -285,29 +297,64 @@

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. Under the Navigator category, click Tabbed Browsing. (If no subcategories - are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)

    -

    -

    The Tabbed Browsing preferences panel allows you to set up tabbed browsing:

    + are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Tabbed Browsing preferences panel allows you to set up Tabbed Browsing:

    +

    Note: On Mac OS, where instructed to press Control (Ctrl), press Command +instead.

    -

    - -8 March 2002

    + + + + + +

    Navigator Preferences - Downloads

    +

    This section describes how to use the Downloads preferences panel. If you're +not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    +

    1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    +2. Under the Navigator category, click Downloads. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Navigator to expand the list.)

    +


    +

    The Downloads preferences panel allows you to set up how Mozilla handles +files you download from web pages:

    + +

    For more information about downloading files from web pages, see Managing +Different File Types.

    +

     

    +
    +

    7 October 2002

    +
    +

    Copyright 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.html index e3c19ad819c..698904fe4b7 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.html @@ -9,13 +9,40 @@ - + +
    This document is provided by Mozilla for your information +only. It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security +of your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, +address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a recommendation +by Mozilla about what constitutes adequate privacy and security protection on +the Internet.
    +
    +

    Customizing Mozilla

    +

    You can customize Mozilla to better suit your needs using features like My +Sidebar, bookmarks, and Tabbed Browsing.

    +

    This section describes the customizable aspects of Mozilla's browser component, +Navigator.

    + + + + +
    +

    In this section:

    +

    My Sidebar

    +

    Tabbed Browsing

    +

    Changing Fonts, Colors, and Themes

    +

    Toolbars

    +

    Bookmarks

    +

    Specifying How Nestcape Starts Up

    +

    Navigator Settings

    +
    +

     

    +

    My Sidebar

     

    - - - -
    + + +

    In this section:

    What is My Sidebar?

    Using My Sidebar

    @@ -27,449 +54,641 @@
    - -

     

    - - +

    What is My Sidebar?

    - -

    My Sidebar is a customizable frame in your browser where you can keep items - that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address - book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other options you - can choose. My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that are continually - updated.

    - -

    Mozilla comes with some My Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can customize My Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs.

    - -

    -[ Return to beginning of section ] +

    My Sidebar is a customizable area in your browser where you can keep items +that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address +book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other available options. +My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that are continually updated.

    +

    Mozilla comes with some My Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can customize +My Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs.

    +

    [ Return to beginning of section ]

    - - -

      -

    - - +

     

    +

    Using My Sidebar

    - -

    Unless you have closed My Sidebar, it is always open at the left side of your browser. To view a tab:

    - +

    Unless you have closed My Sidebar, it +is always open at the left side of your browser. To view a tab:

      - -
    • Click a tab's title; for instance, click the words "What's Related." The What's Related tab opens, showing you a list of web pages related to the page you are currently viewing. - +
    • Click a tab's title; for instance, click the words "Search." The Search tab +opens, which allows you to search for web pages.
    - - - - - - - - - +
    If you don't see My Sidebar, it may be closed. To open it:
    -

     

    -
      -
    1. Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left hand border of the - Mozilla window. The pointer changes to a hand when it touches the "handle" - for My Sidebar, as shown in the picture. -

       

      -
    2. Click the handle to open My Sidebar. -

      Note: If My Sidebar is not selected from the View menu in - Navigator, you will not see the frame or its handle.

      -
    -
    + + + + + + +
    My Sidebar with handle + +

    My Sidebar
    +Handle

    +
    +

    If you don't see My Sidebar, it may be closed. To open it:

    +
      +
    1. Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left-hand border of the Mozilla +window. The pointer changes to a hand when it touches the "handle" of My Sidebar. +
    2. Click the handle to open My Sidebar. +

      Note: If My Sidebar is not selected from the View menu in Navigator +(within the Show/Hide submenu), you will not see the frame or its handle.

      +
    +
    -

    [ Return to beginning of section ]

    +

    Tip: To reload a My Sidebar tab, right-click on the tab title and choose +Reload from the pop-up menu.

    +

    [ Return to beginning of section ]

     

    Adding My Sidebar Tabs

    To add a new tab:

      -
    1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
    2. In the Customize My Sidebar dialog box, select a tab from the list on the - left. You can open and close folders by clicking the triangles. -
    3. Click Add. -
    4. Continue adding as many tabs as you like. -
    5. Click OK to finish. +
    6. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
    7. In the Customize My Sidebar dialog box, select a tab from the list on the +left. Double-click the folders to open or close folders. +
    8. Click Add. +
    9. Continue adding as many tabs as you want. +
    10. Click OK to finish.
    -

    Tip: To preview a My Sidebar tab before adding it, select a tab from - the list on the left side of the Customize My Sidebar dialog box and click Preview. - After a few seconds, the tab displays in the Tab Preview pop-up window.

    -

    Tip: To view an extensive and categorized list of Sidebar tabs available - for My Sidebar, click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select - Sidebar Directory.

    +

    Note: If you add more than eight tabs to My Sidebar, Mozilla hides +the remaining tabs to reduce clutter. To scroll through the hidden tabs, click +the down arrow button at the bottom of My Sidebar until you see the desired tab. +Click the up arrow button to once again scroll up.

    +

    Tips:

    +
      +
    • To preview a My Sidebar tab before adding it, select a tab from the list +on the left side of the Customize My Sidebar dialog box and click Preview. After +a few seconds, the tab displays in the Tab Preview pop-up window.
      • +
    • To view an extensive and categorized list of tabs available for My Sidebar, +click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select My Sidebar Directory.
      • +

    You can also turn My Sidebar tabs on and off.

      -
    1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar. Current tabs are listed in the lower - part of the menu. -
    2. Select the tabs you want displayed in My Sidebar. Remove the checkmark to - turn a tab off (it will still be available from the menu). +
    3. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar. Current tabs are listed in the lower +part of the menu. +
    4. Select the tabs you want displayed in My Sidebar. Remove the checkmark (deselect) +to turn a tab off (it will still be available from the menu).
    -

    Tip: To quickly turn off a My Sidebar tab, right-click on its name and - choose Hide Tab.

    -

    [ Return to beginning of section ]

    +

    Tip: To quickly turn off a My Sidebar tab, right-click on its name +and choose Hide Tab.

    +

    [ Return to beginning of section ] +

     

    Customizing Individual My Sidebar Tabs

    -

    Note: Not all tabs can be customized. -

    +

    Note: Not all tabs can be customized.

      -
    1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
    2. Select a tab from the list on the right. -
    3. Click Customize Tab. A window appears with information and options for customizing - the tab. -

      The instructions vary depending on the source of the tab—in addition - to Mozilla, tab providers can be any company, organization, or individual - who uses the Internet.

      -
    4. After you follow the tab provider's instructions, close the customization - window (or follow the provider's instructions to close it). -
    5. Click OK to finish. +
    6. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
    7. Select an available tab from the list on the right. +
    8. Click Customize Tab if it is enabled. A window appears with information and +options for customizing the tab. +

      The instructions vary depending on the source of the tab—in addition +to Mozilla, tab providers can be any company, organization, or individual who +uses the Internet.

      +
    9. After you follow the tab provider's instructions, close the customization +window (or follow the provider's instructions to close it). +
    10. Click OK to finish.
    -

    [ Return to beginning of section ]

    +

    [ Return to beginning of section ] +

     

    Reorganizing My Sidebar Tabs

    -

      -
    1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
    2. Select a tab from the list on the right. -
    3. Click Up and Down to change the tab's placement. -
    4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue reorganizing as many tabs as you like. -
    5. Click OK to finish. +


      +
        +
      1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
      2. Select a tab from the list on the right. +
      3. Click Up and Down to change the tab's placement. +
      4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue reorganizing as many tabs as you like. +
      5. Click OK to finish.
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

       

      Removing My Sidebar Tabs

      -

      +


        -
      1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
      2. Select a tab from the list on the right. -
      3. Click Remove. -
      4. Continue removing as many tabs as you like. -
      5. Click OK to finish. +
      6. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
      7. Select a tab from the list on the right. +
      8. Click Remove. +
      9. Continue removing as many tabs as you like. +
      10. Click OK to finish.
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

       

      +

      Opening, Closing, and Resizing My Sidebar

      - - - - - - - - -
      Use My Sidebar's handles to open, close, and resize My Sidebar's - frame:
      If My Sidebar is closed, you can still see its handle. If the handle - is missing, select View and then My Sidebar. Move the mouse pointer up and - down along the left edge of the Mozilla window. The pointer changes to - a hand when it touches the "handle" for My Sidebar, as shown in the picture. -

       

      -
        -
      • Click the handle to open and close My Sidebar. -
      • Click and drag the handle to resize My Sidebar. -
      -
      -

      To remove My Sidebar, including the handle:

      -
        -
      • Open the View menu, and uncheck the My Sidebar option. -
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Use My Sidebar's handles to open, close, and resize My Sidebar's +frame:
      image of sidebar with handle +

      My Sidebar
      +Handle

      +
      If My Sidebar is closed, you can still see its handle. If the +handle is missing, open the View menu , choose Show/Hide, and then My Sidebar. +Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left edge of the Mozilla window. +The pointer changes to a hand when it touches the "handle" for My Sidebar, as +shown in the picture.

       

      - +
        +
      • Click the "Open My Sidebar" icon open my sidebar icon +on the left side of the Personal Toolbar. +
      • Click the handle to open and close My Sidebar. +
      • Click and drag the handle to resize My Sidebar. +
      +
      +

      To remove My Sidebar, including the handle, do one of the following:

      +
        +
      • Click the "Close My Sidebar" icon close my sidebar icon +on the left side of the Personal Toolbar. +
      • Click the X in the upper-right corner of My Sidebar. +
      • Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and uncheck My Sidebar. +
      • Press F9. +
      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

      +

       

      +
      + + + + +

      Tabbed Browsing

       

      - - +
      -
      -

      In this section:

      What is Tabbed Browsing?

      Setting up Tabbed Browsing

      Opening Tabs

      +

      Bookmarking Tabs

      Closing Tabs

       

      +

      What is Tabbed Browsing?

      -

      [content to be provided]

      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ] -

      +

      Tabbed Browsing lets you open more than one web page in a single window. Each +web page has its own tab across the top of a single Navigator window. Each tab +appears on the Tab Bar. For example, you can visit netscape.com, +icq.com, and cnn.com within one window instead of three windows.

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Click this to open a new tab. 
      tab bar
      +
      Tab being viewed.
      +      		 +
      Click this to close the tab being viewed.
      +
      +
      Tab Bar
      +
      +

      You don't need to have several windows open to visit several web pages; thus, +freeing up more space on your desktop. Instead, you can open, close, and reload +web pages conveniently in one place without having to switch to another window.

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

       

      +

      Setting up Tabbed Browsing

      -

      [content to be provided]

      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ] -

      +

      There are several ways to customize Tabbed Browsing. For example, you can +change your preferences to open new Navigator tabs from the Location Bar. You +can set up Tabbed Browsing in other ways too, such as loading new Navigator tabs +in the background so the first page is kept on top while the second page is loading. +To learn more about setting up Tabbed Browsing in Mozilla, see Navigator +Preferences - Tabbed Browsing.

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

       

      + + +

      Opening Tabs

      -

      [content to be provided]

      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

      You can open a Navigator tab in the following ways:

      +

      Opening a New Blank Navigator Tab:

      +
        +
      • From the File menu: Open the File menu, choose New, and then New Navigator +Tab.
        • +
      • From the Tab Bar: If visible, click the "new tab" icon new tab icon +on the left side of the Tab Bar.
        • +
      • From a pop-up menu: If the Tab Bar is visible, right-click on it, +and choose New Tab from the pop.
        • +
      +

      Opening a Web Page Link in a Navigator Tab:

      +
        +
      • From a pop-up menu: Right-click on a web page link and choose Open +Link in New Tab. (To right-click on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse button.) +
        • +
      • From the Location Bar: Type a web page location in the Location Bar +and press Ctrl+Enter. (On Mac, press Cmd+Enter)
        +Note: You must set your Tabbed Browsing preferences to open a Navigator +tab from the Location Bar. See Navigator +Preferences - Tabbed Browsing for more information.
        • +
      +

      Tips:

      +
        +
      • To quickly open a new blank Navigator tab, press Ctrl+T.
        • +
      • To reload one or all Navigator tabs, right-click anywhere on the Tab Bar +and select Reload Tab or Reload All Tabs, respectively.
        • +
      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

       

      + + + + +

      Bookmarking Tabs

      +

      A bookmarked group of tabs is called a Groupmark. To bookmark the group of +Navigator tabs in the current window:

      +
        +
      1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose "Bookmark This Group of Tabs".
        +
        2. +
      2. Type a name for the bookmark group in the Name field.
        +
        3. +
      3. Choose from any of these options: +
          +
        • Create in: Choose a folder in which to create your Groupmark.
          +
          • +
        • New Folder: Click this button to create a new folder in which to create +your Groupmark.
          +
          • +
        • Use Default: Click this button to file the Groupmark in your designated +New Bookmark folder. For more information on designating your New Bookmark folders, +see Organizing Your Bookmarks.
          +
          • +
        +
        4. +
      4. Click OK to add the Groupmark.
        5. +
      +

      Tip: To learn how to use a group of tabs as your home page, see Navigator +Preferences - Navigator.

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

       

      + +

      Closing Tabs

      -

      [content to be provided]

      +

      You can close Navigator tabs in several ways:

      +

      Closing the Navigator Tab Being Viewed:

      +
        +
      • Open the File menu and choose Close Tab.
        • +
      • Click the "X" button on the right side of the Tab Bar.
        • +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Click this to open a new tab. 
      tab bar
      +
      Tab being viewed.
      +      		 +
      Click this to close the tab being viewed.
      +
      +
      Tab Bar
      +
      +

      Tips:

      +
        +
      • To close any Navigator tab, even if hidden, right-click on the tab and choose +Close Tab from the pop-up menu.
        • +
      • To keep only one Navigator tab open, while closing all other tabs, right-click +on the Navigator tab and choose Close Other Tabs.
        • +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      +

      Changing Fonts, Colors, and Themes

       

      - - - - +
      -

      In this section:

      -

      Changing the Default Fonts

      -

      Changing the Default Colors

      -

      Changing the Theme

      -
      + + +
      +

      In this section:

      +

      Changing the Default Fonts

      +

      Changing the Default Colors

      +

      Changing the Theme

      +

       

      - - + + + +

      Changing the Default Fonts

      -

      Normally, web pages are displayed in the default font set by your browser, - or in a font chosen by the web pages' authors.

      +

      Normally, web pages are displayed in the default font set by your browser +or in a font chosen by the web pages' authors.

      To change the default fonts:

        -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      2. Under the Appearance category, choose Fonts. (If no options are visible - in this category, click to expand the list.) -
      3. From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a character set. For instance, - to set default fonts for the Western (roman) character set, choose "Western." -
      4. Select whether proportional text should be serif or sans-serif. Then specify - the font size you want for proportional text. You can select either Serif - (like Times Roman) or Sans-serif (like Arial). -
      5. If an appropriate font is available for your language character set, select - fonts for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, Fantasy, and Monospace. You can also - specify what font size you want for monospace text. -
      6. Specify whether the default font should be serif or sans serif. -
      7. Select a fixed-width font and size. Certain types of text, such as equations - and formulas, are displayed in a fixed-width font. +
      8. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
      9. Under the Appearance category, choose Fonts. (If no options are visible in +this category, double-click Appearance to expand the list.) +
      10. From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a character set. For instance, +to set default fonts for the Western (roman) character set, choose "Western." +
      11. Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or sans-serif +(like Arial). Then specify the font size you want for proportional text. +
      12. If an appropriate font is available for your language character set, select +fonts for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, Fantasy, and Monospace. You can also specify +what font size you want for monospace text. +
      13. Specify whether the default font should be serif or sans serif. +
      14. Select a fixed-width font and size. Certain types of text, such as equations +and formulas, are displayed in a fixed-width font.

      Many web page authors choose their own fonts and font sizes. To allow fonts - other than the ones specified in your preferences, check "Allow documents - to use other fonts." +other than the ones specified in your preferences, check "Allow documents +to use other fonts."

      To adjust the readability of fonts, select from the drop-down list the dots - per inch (dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the - Calibrate Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution - by measuring how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution - may will improve text readability on some screens. +per inch (dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the +Calibrate Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution +by measuring how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution +may will improve text readability on some screens.

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      Changing the Default Colors

      Normally, the background and text colors on web pages are determined by the - default colors set by your browser, or by the pages' authors.

      +default colors set by your browser or by the pages' authors.

      To change the default colors:

        -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      2. Under the Appearance category, choose Colors. (If no options are visible - in this category, click to expand the list.) -
      3. Click the colored blocks next to "Text," "Background," "Unvisited Links," - and "Visited Links." Choose a color for each from the color chart. You can - also specify that links should be underlined. +
      4. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
      5. Under the Appearance category, choose Colors. (If no options are visible +in this category, click to expand the list.) +
      6. Click the colored blocks next to Text, Background, Unvisited Links, and Visited +Links. Choose a color for each from the color chart. You can also specify that +links should be underlined.

      Most web page authors choose their own colors. You can override the authors' - intentions by selecting "Use my chosen colors, ignoring the colors specified."

      -

      When viewing the source of a web page, you can see the HTML syntax of the source - of a web page highlighted in specific colors by selecting "Enable syntax - highlighting."

      +intentions by selecting "Use my chosen colors, ignoring the colors specified."

      +

      When viewing the source of a web page, you can see the HTML syntax of the +source of a web page highlighted in specific colors by selecting "Enable +syntax highlighting."

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      - + + +

      Changing the Theme

      -

      You can change the look and feel Mozilla by changing themes.

      +

      You can change the look and feel of Mozilla by changing themes.

        -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      2. Under the Appearance category, choose Themes. -
      3. Click to select the theme you want to use. -
      4. Click Apply, then click OK to adopt your selection as your theme. -

        Note: You need to quit and restart Mozilla after you apply a new - theme in order for the change to take effect.

        +
      5. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
      6. Under the Appearance category, choose Themes. +
      7. Click to select the theme you want to use. +
      8. Click OK to confirm your choice. +

        Note: You need to quit and restart Mozilla after you apply a new theme +in order for the change to take effect.

      Shortcut: You can also change themes by opening the View menu, choosing - Apply Themes, and then choosing the theme you want to use.

      +Apply Theme, and then choosing the theme you want to use.

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      - +
      +

      Toolbars

       

      - - - - +
      -

      In this section:

      -

      Navigation Toolbar

      -

      Personal Toolbar

      -

      Taskbar

      -

      Hiding a Toolbar

      -
      + + +
      +

      In this section:

      +

      Navigation Toolbar

      +

      Personal Toolbar

      +

      Status Bar

      +

      Component Bar

      +

      Hiding a Toolbar

      +

       

      - +

      Navigation Toolbar

      -

      The Navigation toolbar, pictured here, helps you move around the Web.

      - - - - - - - - - - +

      The Navigation Toolbar, pictured here, helps you move around the Web.

      +
      Back Forward Reload Stop
      + + + + + + + + +
      navigation toolbar +
      Back Forward Reload Stop
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

       

      - - + + +

      Personal Toolbar

      -

      The personal toolbar is completely customizable—you decide what you want - to keep there. The personal toolbar comes with some buttons already enabled, - including your My Netscape page, your home page, search, and shopping. You can - easily add, delete, and rearrange items in the personal toolbar.

      -

      +

      The Personal Toolbar is completely customizable—you decide what you want +to keep there. The Personal Toolbar comes with some buttons already enabled, +including your My Mozilla page, your home page, search, and mail.

      + + + + + + + +
      Personal Toolbar
      +
      Personal Toolbar
      +
      + +

      You can easily add, delete, and rearrange items in the Personal Toolbar.

      Turning Buttons On and Off

        -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      2. Click Navigator. -
      3. Under "Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars," to - choose the buttons that you want on your toolbar. -
      4. Click OK. +
      5. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
      6. Click Navigator. +
      7. Under "Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars," choose +the buttons that you want on your toolbar. +
      8. Click OK.
      - - - -

      -

      Adding Personal Toolbar bookmarks

      + +


      +

      Adding Personal Toolbar Bookmarks

      You can add buttons for your favorite bookmarks, or folders containing groups - of bookmarks. To create a new bookmark to add to the personal toolbar:

      +of bookmarks. To create a new bookmark to add to the Personal Toolbar:

        -
      1. Open a web page you want to bookmark. - -
      2. Drag the bookmark icon (located to the left of URL in the Location Bar) - to a desired place on the personal toolbar. You can drag the icon directly - to the personal toolbar, or to a folder on the personal toolbar. See "Adding Personal Toolbar bookmark folders" for more information on adding bookmark marks folder to the personal toolbar. +
      3. Open a web page you want to bookmark. +
      4. Drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon (located to the left of URL in the Location Bar) to a desired place +on the Personal Toolbar. You can drag the icon directly to the Personal Toolbar, +or to a folder on the Personal Toolbar. See Adding +Personal Toolbar Bookmark Folders" for more information on adding bookmark +marks folder to the Personal Toolbar.
      -

      Each item in the personal toolbar folder appears as a toolbar button. You may - need to enlarge the browser window to see them all.

      - - - -

      Adding Personal Toolbar bookmark folders

      -

      You can add bookmark folders to the personal toolbar in order to sort your favorite bookmarks into categories. For example, you can have one bookmark folder on the personal toolbar for hobby-related bookmarks and another bookmark folder for work-related bookmarks. To add a new bookmark to the personal toolbar:

      +

      Note: The bookmark icon image of bookmark icon may appear as another page-specific icon if you have checked Show Web Site +Icons in preferences. See Appearance +Preferences - Appearance for more information on changing this preferences.

      +

      Each item in the Personal Toolbar folder appears as a toolbar button. You +may need to enlarge the browser window to see them all.

      + +

      Adding Personal Toolbar Bookmark Folders

      +

      You can add bookmark folders to the Personal Toolbar to sort your favorite +bookmarks into categories. For example, you can have one folder on the Personal Toolbar for hobby-related bookmarks and another folder for work-related bookmarks. +To add a new bookmark to the Personal Toolbar:

        -
      1. Right-click on the personal toolbar where you want to create a new folder. Right-click on an existing folder to add your new folder on the right side of it.
        -A context-menu will appear.
        2. -
      2. Click "New Folder" from the pop-up menu.
        3. -
      3. Type a name for your new bookmark folder. By default, the name is "New Folder."
        4. -
      4. Click OK to confirm your new bookmark folder name.
        -
        5. +
      5. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
        6. +
      6. Select your designated "Personal Toolbar Folder."
        7. +
      7. Click New Folder on the toolbar.
        8. +
      8. Type a name for your new bookmark folder. By default, the name is "New +Folder."
        9. +
      9. Click OK to confirm your new bookmark folder name.
      -

      +

      The new bookmark folder will appear at the end of the Personal Toolbar.
      +

      +


      Designating a Bookmark Folder as Your Personal Toolbar Folder

      -

      -
        +


        +
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
        2. Select the bookmark folder whose items you want to appear on the toolbar. -
        3. From the View menu, choose Set as Personal Toolbar Folder.
        -

        The buttons in your personal toolbar now correspond to the bookmarks in the - folder you designated.

        -

        -

        Removing Bookmarks From the Personal Toolbar

        -

        +

        The buttons in your Personal Toolbar now correspond to the bookmarks in the +folder you designated.

        +


        +

        Removing Bookmarks from the Personal Toolbar

        +


          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
        2. Click the Personal Toolbar Folder. -
        3. Select the bookmark or folder you want to delete. -
        4. Press Delete on your keyboard. -
        5. Close the Manage Bookmarks window.
        -

        Tip: To quickly remove a bookmark placed on the personal toolbar (not - in a folder), right-click on the bookmark and select Delete.

        -

        +

        Tip: To quickly remove a bookmark placed on the Personal Toolbar (not +in a folder), right-click on the bookmark and select Delete.

        +


        Rearranging the Personal Toolbar

        -

        +


          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
        2. In your Bookmarks window, click the Personal Toolbar Folder. -
        3. Select a bookmark or folder and drag it to a new location. -
        4. When you are finished rearranging items, close your Bookmarks window.
        -

        Note: Buttons on the personal toolbar such as Search and Home Page cannot - be rearranged, but they can be turned off and on.

        -

        Tip: To quickly move a bookmark placed on the personal toolbar, or to - move it out of a folder, click and drag the bookmark to another location on - the personal toolbar or to a folder.

        +

        Note: Standard buttons on the Personal Toolbar such as Search and Home +Page cannot be rearranged, but they can be turned off +and on.

        +

        Tip: To move a bookmark placed on the Personal Toolbar quickly, click +and drag the bookmark to another location on the Personal Toolbar or to a folder.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        + + + + +

        Status Bar

        +

        The Status Bar is located at the bottom of any Mozilla window. It includes +the following:

        +
          +
        • Component Bar: Allows you to switch between components. For more information, +see Component Bar.
          • +
        • Status information: Displays information like the web-page URL and load status +information.
          • +
        • Cookie notification icon cookie notification icon: +Appears when a web site has used a cookie in a way that requires you to be notified. +For more information, see Cookie +Notification.
          • +
        • Work Offline work offline icon +or Work Online work online icon +icon: Click the icon to toggle working offline or online. Working offline prevents +Mozilla from attempting to connect to the Internet, for example to load images +on web pages or automatically check email.
          • +
        • Lock icon (Example: lock icon): +Indicates whether the entire contents of the page was encrypted while it was +being received by your computer. For more information, Checking +Security for a Web Page.
          • +
        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

        +

         

        -

        Taskbar

        -

        Use the taskbar at the bottom of the Mozilla window to switch between tasks - (such as browsing, mail, and instant messaging).

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        + + +

        Component Bar

        +

        Use the Component Bar at the bottom left of any Mozilla window to switch between +tasks (such as browsing or mail).

        +component bar +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

         

        Hiding a Toolbar

        There are two ways to hide the toolbars.

        To minimize a toolbar:

          -
        • Click the small triangle at the left of the toolbar. To show the toolbar, - click the triangle again. (Note: you cannot hide the taskbar using this method.) +click the triangle again. (Note: You cannot hide the Component Bar using this +method.)

        To completely hide a toolbar, including its triangle:

          -
        1. Open the View menu. -
        2. Choose Show/Hide and uncheck the toolbars you want to hide.

        To reverse this action, open the View menu, choose Show, and then select the - toolbars you want to show.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +toolbars you want to show.

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

         

        - +
        +

        Bookmarks

         

        - - +
        -
        -

        In this section:

        What Are Bookmarks?

        Using Bookmarks

        Creating New Bookmarks - -

        +

        Organizing Your Bookmarks

        Changing Individual Bookmarks

        Searching Your Bookmarks

        @@ -478,162 +697,175 @@ A context-menu will appear.

         

        - + + +

        What Are Bookmarks?

        Bookmarks are shortcuts to your favorite and most-visited web pages. Rather - than typing in long URLs (web addresses), you can create bookmarks that take - you directly to the pages you want to see. +than typing in long URLs (web addresses), you can create bookmarks that take +you directly to the pages you want to see.

        You access your bookmarks through the Bookmarks menu, the Bookmarks tab on - My Sidebar, and the Manage Bookmarks window. You can control what's listed in - the Bookmarks menu by adding bookmarks for your favorite web pages and organizing - your list of bookmarks any way you want.

        +My Sidebar, and the Manage Bookmarks window. You can control what's listed in +the Bookmarks menu by adding bookmarks for your favorite web pages and organizing +your list of bookmarks any way you want.

         

        Using Bookmarks

        -

        To use a bookmark: +

        Mozilla comes with some bookmarks already available. To use a bookmark:

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu. - -
        2. Choose a bookmark from the list. +
        3. Choose a bookmark from the list or from a folder in the list.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        + + + - + +

        Creating New Bookmarks

        You can bookmark your favorite web sites to make it easy to return to them.

        To bookmark the current page, perform one of these steps:

          -
        • To add a bookmark to the Bookmarks menu, open the Bookmarks menu and choose - Add Bookmark. - +Bookmark This Page.
        • To add a bookmark to a specific folder on the Bookmarks menu, or to provide - a specific name or URL for your bookmark: - +a specific name or URL for your bookmark:
            - -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose File Bookmark. Choose from any of - these options: - +
          2. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose File Bookmark. Choose from any of these +options:
              - -
            • Name: Type a name for the bookmark if you want a different - name.
              • -
            • URL: Type a URL for the bookmark if you want a different - URL.
              • +
            • Name: Type a name for the bookmark if you want a different name.
              • +
            • Location: Type a URL for the bookmark if you want a different URL.
            • Create in: Choose a folder in which to create your bookmark.
              • -
            • New Folder: Click this to create a new folder in which to - create your bookmark.
              • -
            • Default: Click this to file the boomark in your designated - New Bookmark folder.
              • +
            • New Folder: Click this to create a new folder in which to create your +bookmark.
              • +
            • Default: Click this to file the bookmark in your designated New Bookmark +folder.
          3. Click OK to add the bookmark.
          +

          Tip: If you have multiple Navigator tabs open in a window, you can +select "Bookmark this groups of tabs" to add a single bookmark that +will open all of the open tabs in the current window.
          +

          +
          • +
        • To add a bookmark to the Personal Toolbar, drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon next to the Location Bar to a place on the Personal Toolbar. You can drag a +bookmark to the following places: +
            +
          • In the Bookmarks folder on the Personal Toolbar.
            • +
          • In a bookmarks folder you've created on the Personal Toolbar.
            • +
          • To the Personal Toolbar itself, on the right side of all bookmarks folders.
            • +
          +

          For more information about adding bookmarks to the Personal Toolbar, see "Adding +Personal Toolbar bookmarks".

        + + + + + + + +
        Personal Toolbar
        +
        Personal Toolbar
        +
          - -
        • To add a bookmark to the personal toolbar, drag the bookmark icon next to - the Location Bar to a place on the personal toolbar. You can add a bookmark - to the personal toolbar or to a folder on the personal toolbar. For more information about adding bookmarks to the personal toolbar, see "Adding Personal Toolbar bookmarks".
        • To add a bookmark to the Bookmarks tab in My Sidebar, open My Sidebar, select - the Bookmarks tab, and drag the bookmark icon next to the Location Bar to - a place on the bookmark list in the Bookmarks tab.
          • +the Bookmarks tab, and drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon next to the Location Bar to a place on the bookmark list in the Bookmarks tab. + +
        +

        Notes:

        +
          +
        • The bookmark icon image of bookmark icon may appear as another page-specific icon if you have checked Show Web Site +Icons in preferences. See Appearance +Preferences - Appearance for more information on changing this preferences.
          • +
        • After adding a bookmark using any of the methods listed above, it can be +accessed using the My Sidebar Bookmarks tab, the Manage Bookmarks window, and +the Bookmarks menu.
        -

        Note: After adding a bookmark using any of the methods listed above, - it can be accessed using the My Sidebar Bookmarks tab, the Manage Bookmarks - window, and the Bookmarks menu.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + + + +

        Organizing Your Bookmarks

        To organize your bookmarks, open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - Perform any of the following tasks in your Manage Bookmarks window.

        +Perform any of the following tasks in your Manage Bookmarks window.

        Tip: You can open the Manage Bookmarks window from the Bookmarks tab - in My Sidebar. Click on Manage at the top of the Bookmarks tab.

        +in My Sidebar. Click on Manage at the top of the Bookmarks tab.

        To view bookmarks inside of folders:

          - -
        • Click the open/close triangles at the left of each folder to view its contents. +
        • Double-click a folder to view its contents.

        To move a bookmark or a folder to another location in the list:

          -
        • Drag the bookmark or folder that you want to move to the new location. To - put a bookmark in a folder, drag it to the folder. +put a bookmark in a folder, drag it to the folder.

        To create a new folder or separator:

          - -
        • In your Bookmarks window, click New Folder or New Separator. +
        • Click New Folder or New Separator at the top of the Bookmarks window. The +new folder or separator appears below the current selection.

        To remove a bookmark or a folder from the list:

          -
        1. Click to highlight the bookmark or folder that you want to remove. - -
        2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or click Delete in your Bookmarks - window. +
        3. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or click Delete in the Bookmarks window.
        -

        Handling New Bookmarks and Bookmarked Search Results.

        +

        To sort your bookmarks in the Manage Bookmarks window:

        +
          +
        • Open the View menu and select how you want the list sorted (such as Sort +by Name or Sort by Location).
          +Tip: To add more columns, open the View menu, open "Show columns," +and select a column header in the list.
          • +
        +


        +

        Designating a New Bookmark Folder

        When you create a new bookmark, Mozilla normally adds it to the bottom of - your bookmarks list. If you prefer to file your bookmarks in a folder, you can - designate a new bookmarks folder.

        +your bookmarks list. If you prefer to file your bookmarks in a folder, you can +designate a new bookmarks folder.

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
        2. In your Bookmarks window, select a folder to hold new bookmarks. -
        3. Open the View menu and choose Set as New Bookmark Folder.
        -

        If you use the My Sidebar Search tab to locate web pages, you can save your - search results by clicking the "Bookmark this Search" button in the - Search tab. Saved search results are placed in their own folder at the bottom - of the bookmarks list. For instance, if you searched for "parrots," and then - clicked "Bookmark this Search", a folder named "Search: parrots" would - be added to your bookmarks list. Each time you save search results, a new folder - is added.

        -

        If you prefer to file all your saved search results in a single folder, you - can designate an Internet search folder.

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
        2. In your Bookmarks window, select a folder to hold search results. - -
        3. Open the View menu and choose "Set as New Internet Search Folder." -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + + +

        Changing Individual Bookmarks

        You can change the information for any individual bookmark.

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
        2. In your Bookmarks window, click a bookmark.
        3. Click Properties.
        4. In the bookmark Properties dialog box window, click the Info tab.
        -

        You can rename the bookmark (the name appears in your bookmark list), add descriptive - information, or set a keyword. (You can type a bookmark's keyword into the location - field to go to the bookmarked site.) +

        You can rename the bookmark (the name appears in your bookmark list), add +descriptive information, or set a keyword. (You can type a bookmark's keyword +into the location field to go to the bookmarked site.)

        You can also set Mozilla to check bookmarked web sites for changes.

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
        2. In your Bookmarks window, click a bookmark.
        3. Click Properties.
        4. In the bookmark Properties dialog box, click the Schedule tab.
          5. -
        5. Use the pull down lists to specify how frequently you want Mozilla to - check the bookmarked page for changes.
          6. -
        6. If you want to be notified when the bookmarked page changes, choose a notification - option.
          7. +
        7. Use the pull down lists to specify how frequently you want Mozilla to check +the bookmarked page for changes.
          8. +
        8. If you want to be notified when the bookmarked page changes, click the Notify +tab and choose a notification option.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -641,104 +873,69 @@ A context-menu will appear.

        Searching Your Bookmarks

        To search the bookmarks list:

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
        2. In your Bookmarks window, open the Edit menu and choose Find Bookmarks. - You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
          3. +
        3. In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Search Bookmarks. +You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
        4. In the drop-down lists, choose options to define your search, and then click - Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed. - -
        5. Double-click a bookmark in the list to go to that page. - -
        6. Choose from the following Search options:
          7. -
        +Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed. Choose from the +following Search options:
          -
        • Choose "contains," "starts with," or "ends with" if you know only part of - the word or phrase for which you're searching. - +the word or phrase for which you're searching.
        • Choose "is" if you know exactly what you're searching for. -
        • Choose "is not" or "doesn't contain" to exclude pages.
        • Click the fill-in field and type all or part of name or URL (web address) - for the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude.
          • +for the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude. +
        • Select "Save query in bookmarks" to save this search for later +use.
        -

        Tip: If the list is hard to read, try expanding the search results window. -

        +
      1. Double-click a bookmark in the list to go to that page.
        2. +
      +

      Tip: If the list is hard to read, try expanding the search results +window.

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      Exporting or Importing a Bookmark List

      Your bookmarks are stored in a file named bookmarks.html. You can export a - copy of this file and save it in a folder of your choosing. You can then edit - it and treat it as you would any HTML file.

      +copy of this file and save it in a folder of your choosing. You can then edit +it and treat it as you would any HTML file.

        -
      1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
      2. In your Bookmarks window, open the File menu, and choose Export Bookmarks. - -
      3. In the "Export Bookmark file" dialog box, choose a folder. Your - bookmarks.html file will be copied into the folder you designate. - +
      4. In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu, and choose Export. +
      5. In the "Export bookmark file" dialog box, choose a folder. Your +bookmarks.html file will be copied into the folder you designate.
      6. Click Save.

      Your Mozilla bookmarks are not altered by this procedure.

      You can also import bookmarks files from other sources. For example, you can - import bookmarks files from earlier Mozilla versions, other browsers, or from - bookmark files that your friends send you. +import bookmarks files from earlier Mozilla versions, other browsers, or from +bookmark files that your friends send you.

      Before you start, make sure that the bookmark file you want to import is an - HTML file. +HTML file.

        -
      1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
      2. In your Bookmarks window, open the File menu and choose Import Bookmarks. - -
      3. In the "Import Bookmark file" dialog box, locate and select the - bookmark file you want to import. - +
      4. In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Import. +
      5. In the "Import bookmark file" dialog box, locate and select the +bookmark file you want to import.
      6. Click Save.
      -

      The imported bookmark file is treated as a group of new bookmarks, and added - to the bottom of your bookmarks list. If you have designated a new bookmark - folder, the imported bookmarks are added to that folder. +

      The imported bookmark file is treated as a group of new bookmarks and added +to the bottom of your bookmarks list. If you have designated a new bookmark folder, +the imported bookmarks are added to that folder.

      Note: Importing a bookmark file imports the bookmarks and folders from - that file. It does not create two bookmark files. -

      You can use any bookmarks file as your default Mozilla bookmarks, - as long as it is an HTML file and is named "bookmarks.html." -

      To replace your bookmarks.html file, close all Mozilla windows and exit - from Mozilla: -

        - -
      1. Go to the directory that contains Mozilla on your computer, and find - the Users subdirectory. - -
      2. In the Users subdirectory, open the directory for your current profile. - -
      3. In the directory for your profile, find the current bookmarks.html file - and rename it. (For instance, rename it "bookmarks.old.") - -
      4. Put the new bookmarks.html file in the directory containing your profile. - This replaces the file you just renamed. - -
      5. Restart Mozilla. Your new bookmarks file will be used as the default - bookmarks. -
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +that file. It does not create two bookmark files. +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      - +
      +

      Specifying How Mozilla Starts Up

       

      - - +
      -
      -

      In this section:

      Specifying a Starting Page

      Changing Your Home Page

      @@ -747,69 +944,63 @@ A context-menu will appear.

       

      +

      Specifying a Starting Page

      You can specify the page that loads when the browser starts:

        -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
      2. Under "When Navigator starts up display," choose whether you want a blank - page, your home page, or the last web page visited to open automatically when - you launch your browser. - +
      3. Under "When Navigator, starts up display," choose whether you want a blank +page, your home page, or the last web page visited to open automatically when +you launch your browser.

        Note: If you selected Home Page, type the URL in the Location field.
        -

        +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      - + +

      Changing Your Home Page

      Your home page is the page that opens when you click the Home button in the - personal toolbar. Depending on how your preferences are set, it may also be - the page that opens automatically when you launch Mozilla.

      +Personal Toolbar. Depending on how your preferences are set, it may also be the +page that opens automatically when you launch Mozilla.

      To specify your home page:

        -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      2. Click the Navigator category. -
      3. In the Home page section, perform one of the following: -
          - -
        • Type your home page's URL (web address) in the Location: field. - +
        • Type your home page's URL (web address) in the Location field.
        • Click Use Current Page to make the page currently displayed in the browser - window your home page. - +window your home page.
        • Click Choose File to select a file from your computer's hard drive. -
      -

      Tip: To specify your home page quickly, drag the bookmark icon from - the Location Bar to the Home Page button on the personal toolbar.

      +

      Tip: To specify your home page quickly, drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon from the Location Bar to the Home Page button on the Personal Toolbar.

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      +

      Specifying Which Components Open at Launch

      +

      You can choose components (such as Mail & Newsgroups and Composer) to +launch when you start Mozilla:

      + +
        - -
      1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
      2. Click the Appearance category. - -
      3. Select the components you want opened automatically each time you start - Mozilla. +
      4. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
        5. +
      5. Click the Appearance category.
        6. +
      6. Select the components you want opened automatically each time you start +Mozilla.

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

       

      +

      -

      - -12 March, 2002 -

      - +

      19 June 2002 +

      +


      +

      Copyright © 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

      diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.xhtml index e3c19ad819c..698904fe4b7 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/customize_help.xhtml @@ -9,13 +9,40 @@ - + +
      This document is provided by Mozilla for your information +only. It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security +of your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, +address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a recommendation +by Mozilla about what constitutes adequate privacy and security protection on +the Internet.
      +
      +

      Customizing Mozilla

      +

      You can customize Mozilla to better suit your needs using features like My +Sidebar, bookmarks, and Tabbed Browsing.

      +

      This section describes the customizable aspects of Mozilla's browser component, +Navigator.

      + + + + +
      +

      In this section:

      +

      My Sidebar

      +

      Tabbed Browsing

      +

      Changing Fonts, Colors, and Themes

      +

      Toolbars

      +

      Bookmarks

      +

      Specifying How Nestcape Starts Up

      +

      Navigator Settings

      +
      +

       

      +

      My Sidebar

       

      - - - -
      + + +

      In this section:

      What is My Sidebar?

      Using My Sidebar

      @@ -27,449 +54,641 @@
      - -

       

      - - +

      What is My Sidebar?

      - -

      My Sidebar is a customizable frame in your browser where you can keep items - that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address - book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other options you - can choose. My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that are continually - updated.

      - -

      Mozilla comes with some My Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can customize My Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs.

      - -

      -[ Return to beginning of section ] +

      My Sidebar is a customizable area in your browser where you can keep items +that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address +book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other available options. +My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that are continually updated.

      +

      Mozilla comes with some My Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can customize +My Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs.

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      - - -

        -

      - - +

       

      +

      Using My Sidebar

      - -

      Unless you have closed My Sidebar, it is always open at the left side of your browser. To view a tab:

      - +

      Unless you have closed My Sidebar, it +is always open at the left side of your browser. To view a tab:

        - -
      • Click a tab's title; for instance, click the words "What's Related." The What's Related tab opens, showing you a list of web pages related to the page you are currently viewing. - +
      • Click a tab's title; for instance, click the words "Search." The Search tab +opens, which allows you to search for web pages.
      - - - - - - - - - +
      If you don't see My Sidebar, it may be closed. To open it:
      -

       

      -
        -
      1. Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left hand border of the - Mozilla window. The pointer changes to a hand when it touches the "handle" - for My Sidebar, as shown in the picture. -

         

        -
      2. Click the handle to open My Sidebar. -

        Note: If My Sidebar is not selected from the View menu in - Navigator, you will not see the frame or its handle.

        -
      -
      + + + + + + +
      My Sidebar with handle + +

      My Sidebar
      +Handle

      +
      +

      If you don't see My Sidebar, it may be closed. To open it:

      +
        +
      1. Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left-hand border of the Mozilla +window. The pointer changes to a hand when it touches the "handle" of My Sidebar. +
      2. Click the handle to open My Sidebar. +

        Note: If My Sidebar is not selected from the View menu in Navigator +(within the Show/Hide submenu), you will not see the frame or its handle.

        +
      +
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

      Tip: To reload a My Sidebar tab, right-click on the tab title and choose +Reload from the pop-up menu.

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

       

      Adding My Sidebar Tabs

      To add a new tab:

        -
      1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
      2. In the Customize My Sidebar dialog box, select a tab from the list on the - left. You can open and close folders by clicking the triangles. -
      3. Click Add. -
      4. Continue adding as many tabs as you like. -
      5. Click OK to finish. +
      6. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
      7. In the Customize My Sidebar dialog box, select a tab from the list on the +left. Double-click the folders to open or close folders. +
      8. Click Add. +
      9. Continue adding as many tabs as you want. +
      10. Click OK to finish.
      -

      Tip: To preview a My Sidebar tab before adding it, select a tab from - the list on the left side of the Customize My Sidebar dialog box and click Preview. - After a few seconds, the tab displays in the Tab Preview pop-up window.

      -

      Tip: To view an extensive and categorized list of Sidebar tabs available - for My Sidebar, click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select - Sidebar Directory.

      +

      Note: If you add more than eight tabs to My Sidebar, Mozilla hides +the remaining tabs to reduce clutter. To scroll through the hidden tabs, click +the down arrow button at the bottom of My Sidebar until you see the desired tab. +Click the up arrow button to once again scroll up.

      +

      Tips:

      +
        +
      • To preview a My Sidebar tab before adding it, select a tab from the list +on the left side of the Customize My Sidebar dialog box and click Preview. After +a few seconds, the tab displays in the Tab Preview pop-up window.
        • +
      • To view an extensive and categorized list of tabs available for My Sidebar, +click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select My Sidebar Directory.
        • +

      You can also turn My Sidebar tabs on and off.

        -
      1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar. Current tabs are listed in the lower - part of the menu. -
      2. Select the tabs you want displayed in My Sidebar. Remove the checkmark to - turn a tab off (it will still be available from the menu). +
      3. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar. Current tabs are listed in the lower +part of the menu. +
      4. Select the tabs you want displayed in My Sidebar. Remove the checkmark (deselect) +to turn a tab off (it will still be available from the menu).
      -

      Tip: To quickly turn off a My Sidebar tab, right-click on its name and - choose Hide Tab.

      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

      Tip: To quickly turn off a My Sidebar tab, right-click on its name +and choose Hide Tab.

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

       

      Customizing Individual My Sidebar Tabs

      -

      Note: Not all tabs can be customized. -

      +

      Note: Not all tabs can be customized.

        -
      1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
      2. Select a tab from the list on the right. -
      3. Click Customize Tab. A window appears with information and options for customizing - the tab. -

        The instructions vary depending on the source of the tab—in addition - to Mozilla, tab providers can be any company, organization, or individual - who uses the Internet.

        -
      4. After you follow the tab provider's instructions, close the customization - window (or follow the provider's instructions to close it). -
      5. Click OK to finish. +
      6. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
      7. Select an available tab from the list on the right. +
      8. Click Customize Tab if it is enabled. A window appears with information and +options for customizing the tab. +

        The instructions vary depending on the source of the tab—in addition +to Mozilla, tab providers can be any company, organization, or individual who +uses the Internet.

        +
      9. After you follow the tab provider's instructions, close the customization +window (or follow the provider's instructions to close it). +
      10. Click OK to finish.
      -

      [ Return to beginning of section ]

      +

      [ Return to beginning of section ] +

       

      Reorganizing My Sidebar Tabs

      -

        -
      1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
      2. Select a tab from the list on the right. -
      3. Click Up and Down to change the tab's placement. -
      4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue reorganizing as many tabs as you like. -
      5. Click OK to finish. +


        +
          +
        1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
        2. Select a tab from the list on the right. +
        3. Click Up and Down to change the tab's placement. +
        4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue reorganizing as many tabs as you like. +
        5. Click OK to finish.
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

         

        Removing My Sidebar Tabs

        -

        +


          -
        1. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar, and select Customize Sidebar from - the menu. -
        2. Select a tab from the list on the right. -
        3. Click Remove. -
        4. Continue removing as many tabs as you like. -
        5. Click OK to finish. +
        6. Click "Tabs" at the top of My Sidebar and select Customize My Sidebar from +the menu. +
        7. Select a tab from the list on the right. +
        8. Click Remove. +
        9. Continue removing as many tabs as you like. +
        10. Click OK to finish.
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

         

        +

        Opening, Closing, and Resizing My Sidebar

        - - - - - - - - -
        Use My Sidebar's handles to open, close, and resize My Sidebar's - frame:
        If My Sidebar is closed, you can still see its handle. If the handle - is missing, select View and then My Sidebar. Move the mouse pointer up and - down along the left edge of the Mozilla window. The pointer changes to - a hand when it touches the "handle" for My Sidebar, as shown in the picture. -

         

        -
          -
        • Click the handle to open and close My Sidebar. -
        • Click and drag the handle to resize My Sidebar. -
        -
        -

        To remove My Sidebar, including the handle:

        -
          -
        • Open the View menu, and uncheck the My Sidebar option. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Use My Sidebar's handles to open, close, and resize My Sidebar's +frame:
        image of sidebar with handle +

        My Sidebar
        +Handle

        +
        If My Sidebar is closed, you can still see its handle. If the +handle is missing, open the View menu , choose Show/Hide, and then My Sidebar. +Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left edge of the Mozilla window. +The pointer changes to a hand when it touches the "handle" for My Sidebar, as +shown in the picture.

         

        - +
          +
        • Click the "Open My Sidebar" icon open my sidebar icon +on the left side of the Personal Toolbar. +
        • Click the handle to open and close My Sidebar. +
        • Click and drag the handle to resize My Sidebar. +
        +
        +

        To remove My Sidebar, including the handle, do one of the following:

        +
          +
        • Click the "Close My Sidebar" icon close my sidebar icon +on the left side of the Personal Toolbar. +
        • Click the X in the upper-right corner of My Sidebar. +
        • Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and uncheck My Sidebar. +
        • Press F9. +
        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

        +

         

        +
        + + + + +

        Tabbed Browsing

         

        - - +
        -
        -

        In this section:

        What is Tabbed Browsing?

        Setting up Tabbed Browsing

        Opening Tabs

        +

        Bookmarking Tabs

        Closing Tabs

         

        +

        What is Tabbed Browsing?

        -

        [content to be provided]

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        +

        Tabbed Browsing lets you open more than one web page in a single window. Each +web page has its own tab across the top of a single Navigator window. Each tab +appears on the Tab Bar. For example, you can visit netscape.com, +icq.com, and cnn.com within one window instead of three windows.

        + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Click this to open a new tab. 
        tab bar
        +
        Tab being viewed.
        +        		 +
        Click this to close the tab being viewed.
        +
        +
        Tab Bar
        +
        +

        You don't need to have several windows open to visit several web pages; thus, +freeing up more space on your desktop. Instead, you can open, close, and reload +web pages conveniently in one place without having to switch to another window.

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        +

        Setting up Tabbed Browsing

        -

        [content to be provided]

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        +

        There are several ways to customize Tabbed Browsing. For example, you can +change your preferences to open new Navigator tabs from the Location Bar. You +can set up Tabbed Browsing in other ways too, such as loading new Navigator tabs +in the background so the first page is kept on top while the second page is loading. +To learn more about setting up Tabbed Browsing in Mozilla, see Navigator +Preferences - Tabbed Browsing.

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        + + +

        Opening Tabs

        -

        [content to be provided]

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

        You can open a Navigator tab in the following ways:

        +

        Opening a New Blank Navigator Tab:

        +
          +
        • From the File menu: Open the File menu, choose New, and then New Navigator +Tab.
          • +
        • From the Tab Bar: If visible, click the "new tab" icon new tab icon +on the left side of the Tab Bar.
          • +
        • From a pop-up menu: If the Tab Bar is visible, right-click on it, +and choose New Tab from the pop.
          • +
        +

        Opening a Web Page Link in a Navigator Tab:

        +
          +
        • From a pop-up menu: Right-click on a web page link and choose Open +Link in New Tab. (To right-click on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse button.) +
          • +
        • From the Location Bar: Type a web page location in the Location Bar +and press Ctrl+Enter. (On Mac, press Cmd+Enter)
          +Note: You must set your Tabbed Browsing preferences to open a Navigator +tab from the Location Bar. See Navigator +Preferences - Tabbed Browsing for more information.
          • +
        +

        Tips:

        +
          +
        • To quickly open a new blank Navigator tab, press Ctrl+T.
          • +
        • To reload one or all Navigator tabs, right-click anywhere on the Tab Bar +and select Reload Tab or Reload All Tabs, respectively.
          • +
        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        + + + + +

        Bookmarking Tabs

        +

        A bookmarked group of tabs is called a Groupmark. To bookmark the group of +Navigator tabs in the current window:

        +
          +
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose "Bookmark This Group of Tabs".
          +
          2. +
        2. Type a name for the bookmark group in the Name field.
          +
          3. +
        3. Choose from any of these options: +
            +
          • Create in: Choose a folder in which to create your Groupmark.
            +
            • +
          • New Folder: Click this button to create a new folder in which to create +your Groupmark.
            +
            • +
          • Use Default: Click this button to file the Groupmark in your designated +New Bookmark folder. For more information on designating your New Bookmark folders, +see Organizing Your Bookmarks.
            +
            • +
          +
          4. +
        4. Click OK to add the Groupmark.
          5. +
        +

        Tip: To learn how to use a group of tabs as your home page, see Navigator +Preferences - Navigator.

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        + +

        Closing Tabs

        -

        [content to be provided]

        +

        You can close Navigator tabs in several ways:

        +

        Closing the Navigator Tab Being Viewed:

        +
          +
        • Open the File menu and choose Close Tab.
          • +
        • Click the "X" button on the right side of the Tab Bar.
          • +
        + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Click this to open a new tab. 
        tab bar
        +
        Tab being viewed.
        +        		 +
        Click this to close the tab being viewed.
        +
        +
        Tab Bar
        +
        +

        Tips:

        +
          +
        • To close any Navigator tab, even if hidden, right-click on the tab and choose +Close Tab from the pop-up menu.
          • +
        • To keep only one Navigator tab open, while closing all other tabs, right-click +on the Navigator tab and choose Close Other Tabs.
          • +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        +

        Changing Fonts, Colors, and Themes

         

        - - - - +
        -

        In this section:

        -

        Changing the Default Fonts

        -

        Changing the Default Colors

        -

        Changing the Theme

        -
        + + +
        +

        In this section:

        +

        Changing the Default Fonts

        +

        Changing the Default Colors

        +

        Changing the Theme

        +

         

        - - + + + +

        Changing the Default Fonts

        -

        Normally, web pages are displayed in the default font set by your browser, - or in a font chosen by the web pages' authors.

        +

        Normally, web pages are displayed in the default font set by your browser +or in a font chosen by the web pages' authors.

        To change the default fonts:

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Appearance category, choose Fonts. (If no options are visible - in this category, click to expand the list.) -
        3. From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a character set. For instance, - to set default fonts for the Western (roman) character set, choose "Western." -
        4. Select whether proportional text should be serif or sans-serif. Then specify - the font size you want for proportional text. You can select either Serif - (like Times Roman) or Sans-serif (like Arial). -
        5. If an appropriate font is available for your language character set, select - fonts for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, Fantasy, and Monospace. You can also - specify what font size you want for monospace text. -
        6. Specify whether the default font should be serif or sans serif. -
        7. Select a fixed-width font and size. Certain types of text, such as equations - and formulas, are displayed in a fixed-width font. +
        8. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
        9. Under the Appearance category, choose Fonts. (If no options are visible in +this category, double-click Appearance to expand the list.) +
        10. From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a character set. For instance, +to set default fonts for the Western (roman) character set, choose "Western." +
        11. Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or sans-serif +(like Arial). Then specify the font size you want for proportional text. +
        12. If an appropriate font is available for your language character set, select +fonts for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, Fantasy, and Monospace. You can also specify +what font size you want for monospace text. +
        13. Specify whether the default font should be serif or sans serif. +
        14. Select a fixed-width font and size. Certain types of text, such as equations +and formulas, are displayed in a fixed-width font.

        Many web page authors choose their own fonts and font sizes. To allow fonts - other than the ones specified in your preferences, check "Allow documents - to use other fonts." +other than the ones specified in your preferences, check "Allow documents +to use other fonts."

        To adjust the readability of fonts, select from the drop-down list the dots - per inch (dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the - Calibrate Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution - by measuring how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution - may will improve text readability on some screens. +per inch (dpi) for displaying web pages. Select "Other" to open the +Calibrate Resolution dialog box, which allows you to calibrate your resolution +by measuring how long a line appears on your screen. Increased screen resolution +may will improve text readability on some screens.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        Changing the Default Colors

        Normally, the background and text colors on web pages are determined by the - default colors set by your browser, or by the pages' authors.

        +default colors set by your browser or by the pages' authors.

        To change the default colors:

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Appearance category, choose Colors. (If no options are visible - in this category, click to expand the list.) -
        3. Click the colored blocks next to "Text," "Background," "Unvisited Links," - and "Visited Links." Choose a color for each from the color chart. You can - also specify that links should be underlined. +
        4. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
        5. Under the Appearance category, choose Colors. (If no options are visible +in this category, click to expand the list.) +
        6. Click the colored blocks next to Text, Background, Unvisited Links, and Visited +Links. Choose a color for each from the color chart. You can also specify that +links should be underlined.

        Most web page authors choose their own colors. You can override the authors' - intentions by selecting "Use my chosen colors, ignoring the colors specified."

        -

        When viewing the source of a web page, you can see the HTML syntax of the source - of a web page highlighted in specific colors by selecting "Enable syntax - highlighting."

        +intentions by selecting "Use my chosen colors, ignoring the colors specified."

        +

        When viewing the source of a web page, you can see the HTML syntax of the +source of a web page highlighted in specific colors by selecting "Enable +syntax highlighting."

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + +

        Changing the Theme

        -

        You can change the look and feel Mozilla by changing themes.

        +

        You can change the look and feel of Mozilla by changing themes.

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Appearance category, choose Themes. -
        3. Click to select the theme you want to use. -
        4. Click Apply, then click OK to adopt your selection as your theme. -

          Note: You need to quit and restart Mozilla after you apply a new - theme in order for the change to take effect.

          +
        5. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
        6. Under the Appearance category, choose Themes. +
        7. Click to select the theme you want to use. +
        8. Click OK to confirm your choice. +

          Note: You need to quit and restart Mozilla after you apply a new theme +in order for the change to take effect.

        Shortcut: You can also change themes by opening the View menu, choosing - Apply Themes, and then choosing the theme you want to use.

        +Apply Theme, and then choosing the theme you want to use.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - +
        +

        Toolbars

         

        - - - - +
        -

        In this section:

        -

        Navigation Toolbar

        -

        Personal Toolbar

        -

        Taskbar

        -

        Hiding a Toolbar

        -
        + + +
        +

        In this section:

        +

        Navigation Toolbar

        +

        Personal Toolbar

        +

        Status Bar

        +

        Component Bar

        +

        Hiding a Toolbar

        +

         

        - +

        Navigation Toolbar

        -

        The Navigation toolbar, pictured here, helps you move around the Web.

        - - - - - - - - - - +

        The Navigation Toolbar, pictured here, helps you move around the Web.

        +
        Back Forward Reload Stop
        + + + + + + + + +
        navigation toolbar +
        Back Forward Reload Stop
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ] +

         

        - - + + +

        Personal Toolbar

        -

        The personal toolbar is completely customizable—you decide what you want - to keep there. The personal toolbar comes with some buttons already enabled, - including your My Netscape page, your home page, search, and shopping. You can - easily add, delete, and rearrange items in the personal toolbar.

        -

        +

        The Personal Toolbar is completely customizable—you decide what you want +to keep there. The Personal Toolbar comes with some buttons already enabled, +including your My Mozilla page, your home page, search, and mail.

        + + + + + + + +
        Personal Toolbar
        +
        Personal Toolbar
        +
        + +

        You can easily add, delete, and rearrange items in the Personal Toolbar.

        Turning Buttons On and Off

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Click Navigator. -
        3. Under "Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars," to - choose the buttons that you want on your toolbar. -
        4. Click OK. +
        5. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. +
        6. Click Navigator. +
        7. Under "Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars," choose +the buttons that you want on your toolbar. +
        8. Click OK.
        - - - -

        -

        Adding Personal Toolbar bookmarks

        + +


        +

        Adding Personal Toolbar Bookmarks

        You can add buttons for your favorite bookmarks, or folders containing groups - of bookmarks. To create a new bookmark to add to the personal toolbar:

        +of bookmarks. To create a new bookmark to add to the Personal Toolbar:

          -
        1. Open a web page you want to bookmark. - -
        2. Drag the bookmark icon (located to the left of URL in the Location Bar) - to a desired place on the personal toolbar. You can drag the icon directly - to the personal toolbar, or to a folder on the personal toolbar. See "Adding Personal Toolbar bookmark folders" for more information on adding bookmark marks folder to the personal toolbar. +
        3. Open a web page you want to bookmark. +
        4. Drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon (located to the left of URL in the Location Bar) to a desired place +on the Personal Toolbar. You can drag the icon directly to the Personal Toolbar, +or to a folder on the Personal Toolbar. See Adding +Personal Toolbar Bookmark Folders" for more information on adding bookmark +marks folder to the Personal Toolbar.
        -

        Each item in the personal toolbar folder appears as a toolbar button. You may - need to enlarge the browser window to see them all.

        - - - -

        Adding Personal Toolbar bookmark folders

        -

        You can add bookmark folders to the personal toolbar in order to sort your favorite bookmarks into categories. For example, you can have one bookmark folder on the personal toolbar for hobby-related bookmarks and another bookmark folder for work-related bookmarks. To add a new bookmark to the personal toolbar:

        +

        Note: The bookmark icon image of bookmark icon may appear as another page-specific icon if you have checked Show Web Site +Icons in preferences. See Appearance +Preferences - Appearance for more information on changing this preferences.

        +

        Each item in the Personal Toolbar folder appears as a toolbar button. You +may need to enlarge the browser window to see them all.

        + +

        Adding Personal Toolbar Bookmark Folders

        +

        You can add bookmark folders to the Personal Toolbar to sort your favorite +bookmarks into categories. For example, you can have one folder on the Personal Toolbar for hobby-related bookmarks and another folder for work-related bookmarks. +To add a new bookmark to the Personal Toolbar:

          -
        1. Right-click on the personal toolbar where you want to create a new folder. Right-click on an existing folder to add your new folder on the right side of it.
          -A context-menu will appear.
          2. -
        2. Click "New Folder" from the pop-up menu.
          3. -
        3. Type a name for your new bookmark folder. By default, the name is "New Folder."
          4. -
        4. Click OK to confirm your new bookmark folder name.
          -
          5. +
        5. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
          6. +
        6. Select your designated "Personal Toolbar Folder."
          7. +
        7. Click New Folder on the toolbar.
          8. +
        8. Type a name for your new bookmark folder. By default, the name is "New +Folder."
          9. +
        9. Click OK to confirm your new bookmark folder name.
        -

        +

        The new bookmark folder will appear at the end of the Personal Toolbar.
        +

        +


        Designating a Bookmark Folder as Your Personal Toolbar Folder

        -

        -
          +


          +
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
          2. Select the bookmark folder whose items you want to appear on the toolbar. -
          3. From the View menu, choose Set as Personal Toolbar Folder.
          -

          The buttons in your personal toolbar now correspond to the bookmarks in the - folder you designated.

          -

          -

          Removing Bookmarks From the Personal Toolbar

          -

          +

          The buttons in your Personal Toolbar now correspond to the bookmarks in the +folder you designated.

          +


          +

          Removing Bookmarks from the Personal Toolbar

          +


            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
          2. Click the Personal Toolbar Folder. -
          3. Select the bookmark or folder you want to delete. -
          4. Press Delete on your keyboard. -
          5. Close the Manage Bookmarks window.
          -

          Tip: To quickly remove a bookmark placed on the personal toolbar (not - in a folder), right-click on the bookmark and select Delete.

          -

          +

          Tip: To quickly remove a bookmark placed on the Personal Toolbar (not +in a folder), right-click on the bookmark and select Delete.

          +


          Rearranging the Personal Toolbar

          -

          +


            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
          2. In your Bookmarks window, click the Personal Toolbar Folder. -
          3. Select a bookmark or folder and drag it to a new location. -
          4. When you are finished rearranging items, close your Bookmarks window.
          -

          Note: Buttons on the personal toolbar such as Search and Home Page cannot - be rearranged, but they can be turned off and on.

          -

          Tip: To quickly move a bookmark placed on the personal toolbar, or to - move it out of a folder, click and drag the bookmark to another location on - the personal toolbar or to a folder.

          +

          Note: Standard buttons on the Personal Toolbar such as Search and Home +Page cannot be rearranged, but they can be turned off +and on.

          +

          Tip: To move a bookmark placed on the Personal Toolbar quickly, click +and drag the bookmark to another location on the Personal Toolbar or to a folder.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          + + + + +

          Status Bar

          +

          The Status Bar is located at the bottom of any Mozilla window. It includes +the following:

          +
            +
          • Component Bar: Allows you to switch between components. For more information, +see Component Bar.
            • +
          • Status information: Displays information like the web-page URL and load status +information.
            • +
          • Cookie notification icon cookie notification icon: +Appears when a web site has used a cookie in a way that requires you to be notified. +For more information, see Cookie +Notification.
            • +
          • Work Offline work offline icon +or Work Online work online icon +icon: Click the icon to toggle working offline or online. Working offline prevents +Mozilla from attempting to connect to the Internet, for example to load images +on web pages or automatically check email.
            • +
          • Lock icon (Example: lock icon): +Indicates whether the entire contents of the page was encrypted while it was +being received by your computer. For more information, Checking +Security for a Web Page.
            • +
          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ] +

          +

           

          -

          Taskbar

          -

          Use the taskbar at the bottom of the Mozilla window to switch between tasks - (such as browsing, mail, and instant messaging).

          - -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          + + +

          Component Bar

          +

          Use the Component Bar at the bottom left of any Mozilla window to switch between +tasks (such as browsing or mail).

          +component bar +

          [ Return to beginning of section ] +

           

          Hiding a Toolbar

          There are two ways to hide the toolbars.

          To minimize a toolbar:

            -
          • Click the small triangle at the left of the toolbar. To show the toolbar, - click the triangle again. (Note: you cannot hide the taskbar using this method.) +click the triangle again. (Note: You cannot hide the Component Bar using this +method.)

          To completely hide a toolbar, including its triangle:

            -
          1. Open the View menu. -
          2. Choose Show/Hide and uncheck the toolbars you want to hide.

          To reverse this action, open the View menu, choose Show, and then select the - toolbars you want to show.

          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +toolbars you want to show.

          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ] +

           

          - +
          +

          Bookmarks

           

          - - +
          -
          -

          In this section:

          What Are Bookmarks?

          Using Bookmarks

          Creating New Bookmarks - -

          +

          Organizing Your Bookmarks

          Changing Individual Bookmarks

          Searching Your Bookmarks

          @@ -478,162 +697,175 @@ A context-menu will appear.

           

          - + + +

          What Are Bookmarks?

          Bookmarks are shortcuts to your favorite and most-visited web pages. Rather - than typing in long URLs (web addresses), you can create bookmarks that take - you directly to the pages you want to see. +than typing in long URLs (web addresses), you can create bookmarks that take +you directly to the pages you want to see.

          You access your bookmarks through the Bookmarks menu, the Bookmarks tab on - My Sidebar, and the Manage Bookmarks window. You can control what's listed in - the Bookmarks menu by adding bookmarks for your favorite web pages and organizing - your list of bookmarks any way you want.

          +My Sidebar, and the Manage Bookmarks window. You can control what's listed in +the Bookmarks menu by adding bookmarks for your favorite web pages and organizing +your list of bookmarks any way you want.

           

          Using Bookmarks

          -

          To use a bookmark: +

          Mozilla comes with some bookmarks already available. To use a bookmark:

            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu. - -
          2. Choose a bookmark from the list. +
          3. Choose a bookmark from the list or from a folder in the list.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          + + + - + +

          Creating New Bookmarks

          You can bookmark your favorite web sites to make it easy to return to them.

          To bookmark the current page, perform one of these steps:

            -
          • To add a bookmark to the Bookmarks menu, open the Bookmarks menu and choose - Add Bookmark. - +Bookmark This Page.
          • To add a bookmark to a specific folder on the Bookmarks menu, or to provide - a specific name or URL for your bookmark: - +a specific name or URL for your bookmark:
              - -
            1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose File Bookmark. Choose from any of - these options: - +
            2. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose File Bookmark. Choose from any of these +options:
                - -
              • Name: Type a name for the bookmark if you want a different - name.
                • -
              • URL: Type a URL for the bookmark if you want a different - URL.
                • +
              • Name: Type a name for the bookmark if you want a different name.
                • +
              • Location: Type a URL for the bookmark if you want a different URL.
              • Create in: Choose a folder in which to create your bookmark.
                • -
              • New Folder: Click this to create a new folder in which to - create your bookmark.
                • -
              • Default: Click this to file the boomark in your designated - New Bookmark folder.
                • +
              • New Folder: Click this to create a new folder in which to create your +bookmark.
                • +
              • Default: Click this to file the bookmark in your designated New Bookmark +folder.
            3. Click OK to add the bookmark.
            +

            Tip: If you have multiple Navigator tabs open in a window, you can +select "Bookmark this groups of tabs" to add a single bookmark that +will open all of the open tabs in the current window.
            +

            +
            • +
          • To add a bookmark to the Personal Toolbar, drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon next to the Location Bar to a place on the Personal Toolbar. You can drag a +bookmark to the following places: +
              +
            • In the Bookmarks folder on the Personal Toolbar.
              • +
            • In a bookmarks folder you've created on the Personal Toolbar.
              • +
            • To the Personal Toolbar itself, on the right side of all bookmarks folders.
              • +
            +

            For more information about adding bookmarks to the Personal Toolbar, see "Adding +Personal Toolbar bookmarks".

          + + + + + + + +
          Personal Toolbar
          +
          Personal Toolbar
          +
            - -
          • To add a bookmark to the personal toolbar, drag the bookmark icon next to - the Location Bar to a place on the personal toolbar. You can add a bookmark - to the personal toolbar or to a folder on the personal toolbar. For more information about adding bookmarks to the personal toolbar, see "Adding Personal Toolbar bookmarks".
          • To add a bookmark to the Bookmarks tab in My Sidebar, open My Sidebar, select - the Bookmarks tab, and drag the bookmark icon next to the Location Bar to - a place on the bookmark list in the Bookmarks tab.
            • +the Bookmarks tab, and drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon next to the Location Bar to a place on the bookmark list in the Bookmarks tab. + +
          +

          Notes:

          +
            +
          • The bookmark icon image of bookmark icon may appear as another page-specific icon if you have checked Show Web Site +Icons in preferences. See Appearance +Preferences - Appearance for more information on changing this preferences.
            • +
          • After adding a bookmark using any of the methods listed above, it can be +accessed using the My Sidebar Bookmarks tab, the Manage Bookmarks window, and +the Bookmarks menu.
          -

          Note: After adding a bookmark using any of the methods listed above, - it can be accessed using the My Sidebar Bookmarks tab, the Manage Bookmarks - window, and the Bookmarks menu.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - + + + + +

          Organizing Your Bookmarks

          To organize your bookmarks, open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - Perform any of the following tasks in your Manage Bookmarks window.

          +Perform any of the following tasks in your Manage Bookmarks window.

          Tip: You can open the Manage Bookmarks window from the Bookmarks tab - in My Sidebar. Click on Manage at the top of the Bookmarks tab.

          +in My Sidebar. Click on Manage at the top of the Bookmarks tab.

          To view bookmarks inside of folders:

            - -
          • Click the open/close triangles at the left of each folder to view its contents. +
          • Double-click a folder to view its contents.

          To move a bookmark or a folder to another location in the list:

            -
          • Drag the bookmark or folder that you want to move to the new location. To - put a bookmark in a folder, drag it to the folder. +put a bookmark in a folder, drag it to the folder.

          To create a new folder or separator:

            - -
          • In your Bookmarks window, click New Folder or New Separator. +
          • Click New Folder or New Separator at the top of the Bookmarks window. The +new folder or separator appears below the current selection.

          To remove a bookmark or a folder from the list:

            -
          1. Click to highlight the bookmark or folder that you want to remove. - -
          2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or click Delete in your Bookmarks - window. +
          3. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or click Delete in the Bookmarks window.
          -

          Handling New Bookmarks and Bookmarked Search Results.

          +

          To sort your bookmarks in the Manage Bookmarks window:

          +
            +
          • Open the View menu and select how you want the list sorted (such as Sort +by Name or Sort by Location).
            +Tip: To add more columns, open the View menu, open "Show columns," +and select a column header in the list.
            • +
          +


          +

          Designating a New Bookmark Folder

          When you create a new bookmark, Mozilla normally adds it to the bottom of - your bookmarks list. If you prefer to file your bookmarks in a folder, you can - designate a new bookmarks folder.

          +your bookmarks list. If you prefer to file your bookmarks in a folder, you can +designate a new bookmarks folder.

            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. -
          2. In your Bookmarks window, select a folder to hold new bookmarks. -
          3. Open the View menu and choose Set as New Bookmark Folder.
          -

          If you use the My Sidebar Search tab to locate web pages, you can save your - search results by clicking the "Bookmark this Search" button in the - Search tab. Saved search results are placed in their own folder at the bottom - of the bookmarks list. For instance, if you searched for "parrots," and then - clicked "Bookmark this Search", a folder named "Search: parrots" would - be added to your bookmarks list. Each time you save search results, a new folder - is added.

          -

          If you prefer to file all your saved search results in a single folder, you - can designate an Internet search folder.

          -
            - -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
          2. In your Bookmarks window, select a folder to hold search results. - -
          3. Open the View menu and choose "Set as New Internet Search Folder." -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - + + + +

          Changing Individual Bookmarks

          You can change the information for any individual bookmark.

            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
          2. In your Bookmarks window, click a bookmark.
          3. Click Properties.
          4. In the bookmark Properties dialog box window, click the Info tab.
          -

          You can rename the bookmark (the name appears in your bookmark list), add descriptive - information, or set a keyword. (You can type a bookmark's keyword into the location - field to go to the bookmarked site.) +

          You can rename the bookmark (the name appears in your bookmark list), add +descriptive information, or set a keyword. (You can type a bookmark's keyword +into the location field to go to the bookmarked site.)

          You can also set Mozilla to check bookmarked web sites for changes.

            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
          2. In your Bookmarks window, click a bookmark.
          3. Click Properties.
          4. In the bookmark Properties dialog box, click the Schedule tab.
            5. -
          5. Use the pull down lists to specify how frequently you want Mozilla to - check the bookmarked page for changes.
            6. -
          6. If you want to be notified when the bookmarked page changes, choose a notification - option.
            7. +
          7. Use the pull down lists to specify how frequently you want Mozilla to check +the bookmarked page for changes.
            8. +
          8. If you want to be notified when the bookmarked page changes, click the Notify +tab and choose a notification option.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          @@ -641,104 +873,69 @@ A context-menu will appear.

          Searching Your Bookmarks

          To search the bookmarks list:

            -
          1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
          2. In your Bookmarks window, open the Edit menu and choose Find Bookmarks. - You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
            3. +
          3. In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Search Bookmarks. +You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
          4. In the drop-down lists, choose options to define your search, and then click - Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed. - -
          5. Double-click a bookmark in the list to go to that page. - -
          6. Choose from the following Search options:
            7. -
          +Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed. Choose from the +following Search options:
            -
          • Choose "contains," "starts with," or "ends with" if you know only part of - the word or phrase for which you're searching. - +the word or phrase for which you're searching.
          • Choose "is" if you know exactly what you're searching for. -
          • Choose "is not" or "doesn't contain" to exclude pages.
          • Click the fill-in field and type all or part of name or URL (web address) - for the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude.
            • +for the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude. +
          • Select "Save query in bookmarks" to save this search for later +use.
          -

          Tip: If the list is hard to read, try expanding the search results window. -

          +
        1. Double-click a bookmark in the list to go to that page.
          2. +
        +

        Tip: If the list is hard to read, try expanding the search results +window.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        Exporting or Importing a Bookmark List

        Your bookmarks are stored in a file named bookmarks.html. You can export a - copy of this file and save it in a folder of your choosing. You can then edit - it and treat it as you would any HTML file.

        +copy of this file and save it in a folder of your choosing. You can then edit +it and treat it as you would any HTML file.

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
        2. In your Bookmarks window, open the File menu, and choose Export Bookmarks. - -
        3. In the "Export Bookmark file" dialog box, choose a folder. Your - bookmarks.html file will be copied into the folder you designate. - +
        4. In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu, and choose Export. +
        5. In the "Export bookmark file" dialog box, choose a folder. Your +bookmarks.html file will be copied into the folder you designate.
        6. Click Save.

        Your Mozilla bookmarks are not altered by this procedure.

        You can also import bookmarks files from other sources. For example, you can - import bookmarks files from earlier Mozilla versions, other browsers, or from - bookmark files that your friends send you. +import bookmarks files from earlier Mozilla versions, other browsers, or from +bookmark files that your friends send you.

        Before you start, make sure that the bookmark file you want to import is an - HTML file. +HTML file.

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. - -
        2. In your Bookmarks window, open the File menu and choose Import Bookmarks. - -
        3. In the "Import Bookmark file" dialog box, locate and select the - bookmark file you want to import. - +
        4. In your Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Import. +
        5. In the "Import bookmark file" dialog box, locate and select the +bookmark file you want to import.
        6. Click Save.
        -

        The imported bookmark file is treated as a group of new bookmarks, and added - to the bottom of your bookmarks list. If you have designated a new bookmark - folder, the imported bookmarks are added to that folder. +

        The imported bookmark file is treated as a group of new bookmarks and added +to the bottom of your bookmarks list. If you have designated a new bookmark folder, +the imported bookmarks are added to that folder.

        Note: Importing a bookmark file imports the bookmarks and folders from - that file. It does not create two bookmark files. -

        You can use any bookmarks file as your default Mozilla bookmarks, - as long as it is an HTML file and is named "bookmarks.html." -

        To replace your bookmarks.html file, close all Mozilla windows and exit - from Mozilla: -

          - -
        1. Go to the directory that contains Mozilla on your computer, and find - the Users subdirectory. - -
        2. In the Users subdirectory, open the directory for your current profile. - -
        3. In the directory for your profile, find the current bookmarks.html file - and rename it. (For instance, rename it "bookmarks.old.") - -
        4. Put the new bookmarks.html file in the directory containing your profile. - This replaces the file you just renamed. - -
        5. Restart Mozilla. Your new bookmarks file will be used as the default - bookmarks. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +that file. It does not create two bookmark files. +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - +
        +

        Specifying How Mozilla Starts Up

         

        - - +
        -
        -

        In this section:

        Specifying a Starting Page

        Changing Your Home Page

        @@ -747,69 +944,63 @@ A context-menu will appear.

         

        +

        Specifying a Starting Page

        You can specify the page that loads when the browser starts:

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under "When Navigator starts up display," choose whether you want a blank - page, your home page, or the last web page visited to open automatically when - you launch your browser. - +
        3. Under "When Navigator, starts up display," choose whether you want a blank +page, your home page, or the last web page visited to open automatically when +you launch your browser.

          Note: If you selected Home Page, type the URL in the Location field.
          -

          +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + +

        Changing Your Home Page

        Your home page is the page that opens when you click the Home button in the - personal toolbar. Depending on how your preferences are set, it may also be - the page that opens automatically when you launch Mozilla.

        +Personal Toolbar. Depending on how your preferences are set, it may also be the +page that opens automatically when you launch Mozilla.

        To specify your home page:

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Click the Navigator category. -
        3. In the Home page section, perform one of the following: -
            - -
          • Type your home page's URL (web address) in the Location: field. - +
          • Type your home page's URL (web address) in the Location field.
          • Click Use Current Page to make the page currently displayed in the browser - window your home page. - +window your home page.
          • Click Choose File to select a file from your computer's hard drive. -
        -

        Tip: To specify your home page quickly, drag the bookmark icon from - the Location Bar to the Home Page button on the personal toolbar.

        +

        Tip: To specify your home page quickly, drag the bookmark icon image of bookmark icon from the Location Bar to the Home Page button on the Personal Toolbar.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        +

        Specifying Which Components Open at Launch

        +

        You can choose components (such as Mail & Newsgroups and Composer) to +launch when you start Mozilla:

        + +
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Click the Appearance category. - -
        3. Select the components you want opened automatically each time you start - Mozilla. +
        4. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          5. +
        5. Click the Appearance category.
          6. +
        6. Select the components you want opened automatically each time you start +Mozilla.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        +

        -

        - -12 March, 2002 -

        - +

        19 June 2002 +

        +


        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

        diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/help-toc.rdf b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/help-toc.rdf index ca98cdb9949..3dd2c49cf0f 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/help-toc.rdf +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/help-toc.rdf @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - +?xml version="1.0"?> @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ - @@ -58,7 +58,6 @@ - @@ -166,14 +165,6 @@ - - - - - - - - @@ -190,14 +181,6 @@ - - - - - - - - @@ -417,13 +400,21 @@ + + + + + + + + - + @@ -431,7 +422,7 @@ - + @@ -445,14 +436,6 @@ - - - - - - - - @@ -494,6 +477,7 @@ + @@ -518,6 +502,15 @@ + + + + + + + + + @@ -530,7 +523,7 @@ - + @@ -538,7 +531,7 @@ - + @@ -575,6 +568,17 @@ + + + + + + + + + @@ -604,11 +608,20 @@ - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -701,7 +714,6 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -713,7 +725,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -803,15 +815,6 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - - - - - - - - - @@ -871,6 +874,22 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -926,6 +945,23 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -962,6 +998,24 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -1065,7 +1119,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1073,7 +1127,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1082,7 +1136,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1090,11 +1144,20 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + + + + + + + + + + @@ -1107,7 +1170,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1146,6 +1209,22 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -1165,7 +1244,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1173,7 +1252,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1181,7 +1260,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1326,6 +1405,15 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + @@ -1379,6 +1467,15 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + @@ -1463,7 +1560,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1471,13 +1568,13 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + - + @@ -1485,7 +1582,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1584,14 +1681,6 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - - - - - - - - @@ -1822,7 +1911,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -1835,6 +1924,39 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -2001,6 +2123,14 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + @@ -2053,7 +2183,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -2069,7 +2199,15 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + + + + + + + + + @@ -2346,7 +2484,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -2371,6 +2509,17 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + @@ -2380,6 +2529,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + @@ -2389,6 +2539,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + @@ -2399,6 +2550,8 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + @@ -2420,15 +2573,6 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - - - - - - - - - @@ -2451,7 +2595,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -2460,8 +2604,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - + @@ -2577,6 +2720,26 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -2794,7 +2957,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -2865,7 +3028,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -2998,6 +3161,16 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + @@ -3140,6 +3313,36 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -3280,16 +3483,6 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - - - - - - - - - @@ -3399,7 +3592,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -3436,6 +3629,15 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + @@ -3469,16 +3671,6 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - - - - - - - - - @@ -3494,7 +3686,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -3504,7 +3696,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -3514,7 +3706,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -3524,7 +3716,7 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> - @@ -3565,6 +3757,160 @@ nc:link="chrome://help/locale/mail_help.html#delete_POP_IMAP" /> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.html index 3673f3b3a9b..14208187e19 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.html @@ -1,2933 +1,5953 @@ - - -Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups Help Contents - - - - - - - -

        Getting Started with Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Using the Mail Account Setup Wizard -

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News Accounts -

        Changing the Settings for an Account -

        -

         

        - - - - - - - - - - -

        Using the Mail Account Setup Wizard

        - -

        The very first time you launch Mail & Newsgroups, if you have not already set up an account, - Mail & Newsgroups displays the Account Wizard so you can create an account. Later, you can - add additional mail and newsgroup accounts - from the File menu of the Mail window by choosing New, then Account. -

        The Wizard asks you to provide required information, such as your user name - and email address. If you do not know a setting, you can exit the Wizard and - ask your Internet service provider (ISP) or help desk. - - - -

        Setting Up Mail Accounts with an ISP or Email Provider

        -

        To set up a mail account with an ISP or email provider, you'll need to provide: -

          -
        • your user name
          • -
        • your email address
          • -
        • the incoming and outgoing mail server names
          • -
        • the incoming server type (IMAP or POP)
          • -
        -

        To set up a newsgroup account, you'll need to provide: -

          -
        • your name -
        • your email address
          • -
        • newsgroup server name
          • -
        • account name -
        -

        To set up a new mail or newsgroup account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Click Add Account to start the Account wizard.
          3. -
        3. Choose the type of account you want to set up, and click Next. The information - the wizard asks you to provide depends on the type of account you are setting - up. The rest of the steps in this section assume you are setting up an account - with an ISP or email provider.
          4. -
        4. In the Identity section, enter your name (as you would like it to appear - in the "From" field of messages you send) and email address, and click Next.
          5. -
        5. In the Server Information section, select the type of incoming mail server - (IMAP or POP). Enter the incoming server name - and the outgoing (SMTP) server name (this is the name of the mail server that - sends your messages, and is also known as your SMTP host). Then click Next.
          6. -

          Note: Only one outgoing mail server (SMTP) needs to be specified, - even if you have several mail accounts. The name of your SMTP host may not - have been reported to you in your ISP information or by your system administrator. - Your SMTP host may be the same as your POP or IMAP host. If in doubt, contact - your ISP or system administrator. -

          -

        6. In the User Name section, enter your user name and click Next.
          7. -
        7. In the Account Name section, assign a name for this account (for example, - "Work" or "Family"), and click Next.
          8. -
        8. Verify that the information you entered is correct. If necessary, verify - the information you entered with your ISP or system administrator. -
        9. Click Finish to set up your account.
          10. -
        -

        You are now ready to retrieve messages from your account.

        - -

        You can add additional mail and newsgroup accounts - from the File menu of the Mail window by choosing New, then Account. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News Accounts

        -

        You use the Account Settings dialog box to add a new account or to change - information for an existing account, including: -

          -
        • mail and newsgroup server settings (for example, message deletion and download - preferences)
          • -
        • storage settings for message copies and folders
          • -
        • your reply-to address, organization name, and signature
          • -
        -

        To add a new account or change settings for an existing account, begin from - the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
            -
          • To set up a new mail or news account using the Account Wizard, click Add - Account. Be sure to type the account exactly as it is given to you. Click - Next or Back to move through the screens. To cancel your account creation, - click Cancel.
            • -
          • To specify an account as your default account, select it and then click - the Set as Default button. Your changes will take affect the next time you - start Mail & Newsgroups. After you restart, your default account appears as the first - account in your list of accounts in the Mail window. -

            The default account - is the one that you want to log into when you first start Mail & Newsgroups. Also, Mozilla - Mail & Newsgroups automatically checks the default account for new messages when you - first start Mail & Newsgroups. (For POP accounts, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't download the new messages - until you click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.)

            • -
          • To remove an account and its settings, click the Remove Account button.
            • -
          • To modify information for the outgoing mail server, click the Outgoing - Server (SMTP) item. See Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) for more information. -
          -
        2. Click OK to save your changes.
          3. -
        -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        - -

         

        - -

        Changing the Settings for an Account

        -

        To view or change information for an existing mail or newsgroup account, begin - from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Click the account name in the left-hand side of the Account Settings dialog - box. You see information about the account, such as your email address and - signature file, in the right side of the dialog box.
          3. -
        3. Click the Server Settings category (beneath the name of your account). You - see the Server Settings section, where you can edit mail or newsgroup server - settings. The settings available depend on the type of server (IMAP, POP, - or newsgroup server). For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings. -

          Important: If you need to change the server type (for example, from POP to IMAP) you must first remove the existing account. Next, you must quit Mozilla - and restart it. You can then reopen the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog - box and recreate the account with the new server type by clicking Add Account. -

          -

          4. -
        4. Click the Copies & Folders category. You see the Copies & Folders - section, where you can specify whether to send automatic (blind carbon copies) - messages and where you want to store copies of outgoing messages, message - drafts, and message templates. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders.
          5. -
        5. Click the Addressing category. You see the Addressing section, where you - can choose addressing settings for this account that override the global directory server settings - specified for all address books in the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing. - -
        6. Click the Offline & Disk Space category (IMAP and News accounts only). You see the Offline & Disk - Space section, where you can specify settings that apply when you are working - offline (disconnected from the Internet) or that save download time and conserve disk space. For more information, see Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP) or Offline and Disk Space Settings (News). -
          7. -
        7. Click the Disk Space category (POP accounts only). You see the Disk - Space section, where you can prevent messages larger than a specified size from being downloaded to your hard disk. For more information, see Disk Space Settings (POP).
          8. - -
        8. Click the Security category. You see the Security section, where you can configure your mail account for signing and encrypting mail messages that you send. Digital Signing settings enable you to identify yourself to others in mail messages that you send. Encryption settings let you ensure that your mail messages remain private while they are in transit. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security. -
          9. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - - -
        -

        Reading Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Getting New Messages -

        Choosing How You View the Mail Window -

        Sorting and Threading Messages -

        Saving and Printing Messages -

        -

         

        - -

        Getting New Messages

        -

        When you start Mail & Newsgroups, if your default account is an IMAP account, Mail & Newsgroups automatically - gets new messages and displays them in the Inbox (the primary message folder). - For a POP account, you must click Get Msgs to retrieve your messages. By default, when you retrieve messages from your POP account, the messages are deleted from the POP server. You can change your POP server settings to store a copy of messages on the server in addition to downloading them to your computer. -

        You can - also set up Mail & Newsgroups to get new messages at startup and to check for new messages - at timed intervals. -

        The Mail & Newsgroups icon on the status bar displays a green arrow to notify you when new - messages have arrived. -

        - - - - - - - - -
          New mail notification
        -

        -

        To set up Mail & Newsgroups to automatically check for new messages, begin from the Mail - window: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. If you have multiple accounts, select an account and click the Server Settings - category for that account.
          3. -
        3. Select from the following options: -
            -
          • In the Server Settings section, select "Check for new mail at startup" - if you want Mail & Newsgroups to check this account automatically for new messages - whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP accounts, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't download new messages - until you click Get Msgs or unless you choose "Automatically download any - new messages".
            • -
          • Select "Check for new messages every ___ minutes" and then specify the number - of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you - can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail - window.
            • -
          -
        4. Click OK. Your settings take affect the next time you start Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups.
          5. -
        -

        You can always retrieve messages manually at any time. To get new messages - for the selected account or newsgroup, do one of the following: -

          -
        • Click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.
          • -
        • Open the File menu (in the Mail window) and choose Get New Messages.
          • -
        -

        To get new messages for all your mail accounts, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button in the Mail toolbar. -
        2. Choose Get All New Messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups retrieves new messages for all - your mail accounts. If you are not currently logged into one of your mail - accounts, Mail & Newsgroups first prompts you to enter your user name and password before - retrieving new messages for that account. (If you have already stored your - user name and password using the Password Manager, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't prompt you - for this information.) -
        -

        -Note: You can also open the File menu (in the Mail window) and choose "Get New Messages for". - -

        To get new messages for a specific mail account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button on the Mail toolbar. -
        2. Choose the account for which you want to retrieve mail. -
        - - - - - - - - -
          Mail & Newsgroups icon
        -

        Note: Mail & Newsgroups prompts you for your password the first time you retrieve messages for an account. -You can choose to have Mail & Newsgroups store your - password in the Password Manager at that time. -

        Password Manager can save all your user names and passwords on your own computer - in a file that's difficult, but not impossible, for an intruder to read. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Choosing How You View the Mail Window

        -

        You can customize the layout of the Mail window (the window you see when you - choose Mail & Newsgroups from the Tasks menu): -

          -
        • Open the View menu and choose Toolbars to show or hide the Mail toolbar - or the status bar.
          • -
        • Open the View menu and uncheck My Sidebar to hide My Sidebar.
          • -
        • Expand and collapse any pane to switch between a three-pane or two-pane - view. Choose a default view in the Mail and - Newsgroup Preferences panel. If you change the default view, you must exit - Mail & Newsgroups and then restart to have your change take effect.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Sorting and Threading Messages

        -

        To sort messages by categories such as subject, sender, date, or priority, - begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        • Click the appropriate column heading in the message list window. - Or, open the View menu, choose Sort, and then select the column you want to - sort by.
          • -
        - -

        To reorder column headings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        • Click and drag a column heading to the left or right to reposition the column.
          • -
        -

        To group messages by threading (subject), so each message is grouped with all - its responses: -

          -
        • Click the thread button to the left of the Subject, Sender, and Date column - headings.
          • -
        -

        -

        - - - - - - - - -
              -
          Thread button
        -

        Tip: To help you identify unread messages in a collapsed thread where you've read - the parent message, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups underlines the parent message. -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Saving and Printing Messages

        -

        To save a mail message as a plain-text or HTML file: -

          -
        1. In the Mail window, select the message.
          2. -
        2. Open the File menu and choose Save As, and then choose File.
          3. -
        3. Choose a file name and location and click Save.
          4. -
        -

        To print a selected message: -

          -
        • Click Print.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -
        -

        Sending Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup Messages -

        Using the Message Composition Window -

        Addressing a Message -

        Selecting Message Sending Options -

        Replying to a Message -

        Forwarding a Message -

        Saving and Editing a Message Draft -

        Creating and Using Templates -

        -

         

        - -

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup Messages

        -

        You can address, compose, reply to, or send a new message by doing one of the - following: -

          -
        • In any Mozilla window, open the File menu and choose New, then Message. -
        • Click Compose on the Mail toolbar. -
        • While displaying a message, click Reply, Forward, or Reply All on the Mail - toolbar.
          • -
        • From the Address Book window, select an address and click Compose on the Address Book.
          • -
        -

        Tip: Use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings command on the Edit menu to - specify the HTML text editor for composing messages. In the Account Settings - dialog box, select the account, and check "Compose messages in HTML format" - to use the HTML text editor for all messages. If you want to use the plain-text - editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the plain-text editor on an as-needed basis. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Using the Message Composition Window

        -

        Use the Compose window to address, compose, and send mail and newsgroup messages. - First specify whether you want to compose messages in plain text or HTML in - the Account Settings Preferences - panel (Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings). -

        To view the Compose window, click on the Compose button on the Mail toolbar.

        -

        The Compose window contains the following: -

          -
        • Compose Toolbar
          • -

          You can click the following buttons:

          -
            -
          • Send: To send a completed message.
            • -
          • Address: To search for names in your address books.
            • -
          • Attach: To attach a file to a message.
            • -
          • Spell: To check the spelling of your message text.
            • -
          • Save: To save the message as a draft.
            • -
          -

          -

        • Attachments field: When you attach files to a message, the file names are - listed in the Attachments field to the right of the Addressing area.
          • -
        -

        If you've chosen to compose messages using the HTML editor, you see an additional - toolbar with text formatting buttons similar to those in Mozilla Composer. -

        For help using the HTML editor, see the Composer - online help. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Addressing a Message

        -

        To address a mail message: -

          -
        1. Type the name in the address field.
          2. -

          If you have address autocompletion enabled (it's - enabled by default), simply type the first few letters of the recipient's - name and wait for Mail & Newsgroups to complete the address. (Or you can type part of the - name and immediately press Enter to have Mail & Newsgroups try to complete the address.) -

        2. If multiple addresses are found, select an address and press Enter.
          3. -

          Note: Use a comma to separate multiple addresses on the same line. - Do not use a comma to separate first or last names. (example: emailaddress1@netscape.com, - emailaddress2@netscape.com, emailaddress3@netscape.com) -

        3. If you want this message to be sent from a different - account, click the "From" field to select the account you want.
          4. -
        4. If necessary, click "To" to choose a different recipient type:
          5. -
            -
          • To: For primary recipients of your message.
            • -
          • Cc: For secondary recipients (carbon copy).
            • -
          • Bcc: For secondary recipients not identified to the other recipients, - including those in the cc list (blind carbon copy).
            • -
          • Reply-To: For recipients to reply to a different email address - other than the one the message is sent from.
            • -
          • Newsgroup: For posting to a newsgroup.
            • -
          • Followup-To: For redirecting a newsgroup posting, so that subsequent - replies go directly to the redirected newsgroup instead of the original - newsgroup.
            • -
          -
        -

        Tip: You can quickly address a message by right-clicking the email - address contained in a message you're reading, and then selecting Send Mail - To from the pop-up menu.

        - -

        Changing the Account From Which a Message is Sent -

        If you have multiple mail accounts, the account listed in the From field is - based on the account (or server) you selected when you choose - to create a new message. However, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also allows you to change the - account a message is sent from while you're composing a message. Click the From - field to view a list of your accounts and then select the account you want. - A copy of the message is saved in the Sent folder of the account where you sent the message. -

        About Address Autocompletion -

        Address autocompletion allows you to address mail easily from the Compose - window without having to search for names or type complete names. Mail & Newsgroups automatically - checks your address books and an LDAP directory server (if available) and completes - the name if it finds a unique match. It also prevents mistakes by showing all - possible choices with additional information if it finds multiple matches. Address - autocompletion is enabled by default. -

        If you don't want to use an address that Mail & Newsgroups provides, simply press Backspace - or Delete to erase the address and then enter an alternate address. -

        To disable address autocompletion: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If no options - are visible in this category, double-click the category to expand the list). -
        3. In the Address Autocompletion section, deselect "Local Address - Books" and "Directory Server." -
        4. Click OK. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Selecting Message Sending Options

        -

        While you're composing a message, you can select these additional message sending - options from the Options menu: -

          -
        • Select Addresses: The Select Addresses option lets you choose the - recipient's email address from your Address Books. Select an address and then - click To:, Cc:, or Bcc: to address your message.
          • -
        • Check Spelling: Checks the spelling of the message text. You can - also click Spell.
          • -
        • Rewrap: If you are composing a message using the plain-text editor, - you can use the Rewrap command to rewrap long lines of quoted text to fit - the Compose window. This command rewraps selected quoted text to the window - width, or rewraps all quoted text if no text is selected. This command is - primarily useful when you are replying to a message where the original message - is quoted in your reply, and the original message contains long lines.
          - You use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings command on the Edit menu to specify - that you want to use the plain-text editor for composing messages. In the - Account Settings dialog box, select the account, and uncheck "Compose messages - in HTML format" to use the plain-text editor for all messages. If you only - want to use the plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift - key while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the plain-text editor - on an as-needed basis.
          • -
        • Format: Send the message as plain text, or HTML (formatted), or both. - If you choose "Auto-Detect," Mail & Newsgroups asks you for the format to use if it's unknown - whether the recipient's mail program can display an HTML message. The format - you choose here overrides the send format you specified using the Preferences - command on the Edit menu.
          • -
        • Priority: Choose a priority to indicate whether the message - has lowest, low, normal, high, or highest priority.
          • -
        • Copy Message To: Choose this if you want to file an additional - copy of the sent message in a different folder than your default Sent folder. - Then select the folder you want.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Replying to a Message

        -

        To reply to a mail message: -

          -
        • Select the message.
          • -
        • Click Reply to respond to the sender alone.
          • -
        • Click Reply All to respond to all addressees in the message.
          • -
        -

        To include the original message each time you reply to any message: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message - Composition.
          3. -
        3. Select "Automatically quote the original message when replying."
          4. -
        4. Click OK.
          5. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Forwarding a Message

        -

        When you forward a message, you can specify how to place new text relative - to the original text: inline (in the body of the message; this - is the default), or as an attachment. -

        To forward a message: -

          -
        1. Select the message and click Forward.
          2. -
        2. Type the name or email address of the recipient.
          3. -
        3. Click Send.
          4. -
        -

        To set the default for forwarding messages: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message - Composition. (If necessary, double-click the Mail & Newsgroups category - to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Click OK.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Saving and Editing a Message Draft

        -

        To save a mail message as a draft so you can complete it later: -

          -
        • In the Compose window, click Save, or open the File menu and choose Save - as Draft. By default, the message is saved in the Drafts folder for the current - account. -

          Note: Your mail message will stay open after you save it as a draft.

          -
          • -
        -

        To edit or send a message draft: -

          -
        1. From the Mail & Newsgroups window, click the Drafts folder for the account where you - created the message draft.
          2. -
        2. Click the message that you want to edit.
          3. -
        3. In the top-right corner of the message, click the Edit Draft button. (Alternatively, - from the Edit menu, choose Edit Draft.)
          4. -
        4. Edit the message as necessary.
          5. -
        5. Click Send to send the message or click Save to save the message so you - can complete it later.
          6. -
        -

        -Tip: You can also double-click the message to open it for editing. - This is especially useful if the message pane is closed.
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Creating and Using Templates

        -

        Templates are useful for formatting messages that you send regularly, such - as weekly status reports. You can save a message as a template from any window - in which it is displayed, including from within a Mail compose window. -

        To save a message as a template: -

          -
        • While displaying a message: open the File menu, choose Save As, then Template. - The template file is stored in the Templates folder.
          • -
        -

        To edit or use a template file: -

          -
        1. In the Mail window, select the Templates folder for the account where you created the message template.
          2. -
        2. Double-click the message you want to edit.
          3. -
        3. Edit the message, then save it or send it.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -
        -

        Creating HTML Mail Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Using HTML in Your Messages -

        Choosing HTML Message Sending Options -

        Specifying Recipients for HTML Messages -

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML Messages -

        Using the HTML Mail Question Dialog Box -

        -

         

        - -

        Using HTML in Your Messages

        -

        HTML messages can include formatted text, links, images, and tables—just like - a web page. However, some recipients may not be able to receive HTML messages. - Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups allows you to compose mail and newsgroup messages using either - the HTML (rich-text) formatting editor or the plain-text editor for each mail - account you have. In addition, you can choose whether your addressees should - receive HTML or plain-text messages by default, and how Mail & Newsgroups should handle messages - when it's not known if an addressee can receive HTML formatted mail. -

        To specify whether to use the HTML editor as the default for composing messages, - begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the mail or newsgroup account you want to use.
          3. -
        3. Select "Compose messages in HTML format." You see the Formatting toolbar - in the Compose window. Leave this box unchecked to use the plain-text editor - for this account.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Choosing HTML Mail Sending Options

        -

        You can choose the default method Mail & Newsgroups uses to handle sending HTML messages - when it's not known whether the recipient's mail program can display formatted messages. -

        To choose HTML sending options for mail messages, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. (If no options are visible in - this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. -

          Note: This preference applies only to mail messages, not to newsgroup - messages. -

          -

          3. -
        3. Select the option you want and then click OK.
          4. -
        -

        If while composing a message you realize that one or more recipients may not - be able to receive HTML-formatted mail, you can easily convert the message to - a different format when you click Send: -

        -

          -
        1. In the Compose window, open the Options menu and choose Format. -
        2. Select the format you want to use for sending the message: -
            -
          • Auto Detect: Mail & Newsgroups chooses the appropriate format. -
          • Plain Text Only: May lose formatting such as bold text. -
          • Rich Text (HTML) Only: Some mail programs may have trouble displaying - the message. -
          • Plain and Rich (HTML) Text: This uses more disk space. -
          -
        3. When you've finished composing the message, click Send. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Specifying Recipients for HTML Messages

        -

        You can save time by indicating whether individuals in your address books prefer - to receive either HTML messages or plain text messages. -

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Address Book.
          2. -
        2. Select the address book on the left and then select the individual's card - on the right.
          3. -
        3. Click Properties to display the "Card for" dialog box.
          4. -
        4. In the Name tab, use the "Prefers to receive messages formatted as" drop-down - list to select HTML if you know this recipient can read HTML-formatted messages - (such as messages that include links, images, or tables). If this - recipient can only read messages sent as plain text (no formatting), then - choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not sure, choose Unknown. If you - choose Unknown, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups determines the sending format based on the Send - Format settings for Mail & Newsgroups in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & Newsgroups still can't - determine the correct format, it will prompt you to choose a sending format - when you send the message.
          5. -
        5. Click OK.
          6. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML Messages

        -

        You can quickly view the HTML and other code that generates an HTML message - you've received: -

          -
        1. Open the message.
          2. -
        2. Open the View menu and choose Message Source.
          3. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Using the HTML Mail Question Dialog Box

        -

        The HTML Mail Question dialog box appears when you try to send a message to - someone who does not want to receive HTML messages or when Mail & Newsgroups cannot determine - whether your recipient can display HTML messages. If you are in doubt, send - a plain-text message. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -
        -

        Using Attachments

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Attaching a File or Web Page -

        Viewing and Opening Attachments -

        Saving Attachments -

        -

         

        - -

        Attaching a File or Web Page

        -

        To attach a file to an outgoing mail message: -

          -
        1. In the Compose window, click Attach or open the File menu and choose Attach - File. You see the "Enter file to attach" dialog box.
          2. -

          Tip: You can also click inside the Attachments area to attach a file. -

        2. Type the name of the file you want to attach, or select a file from your - hard drive that you want to attach.
          3. -
        3. Click Open. The file name appears in the Attachments area.
          4. -
        -

        Tip: You can also drag and drop one or more files from your desktop into the Attachments area in the Compose window. -

        To attach a web page to an outgoing mail message: -

          -
        1. In the Compose window, open the File menu and choose Attach Web Page.
          2. -
        2. In the dialog box, enter the URL of the page and then click OK. The web - page URL appears in the Attachments area.
          3. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Viewing and Opening Attachments

        -

        If you receive a mail attachment that consists of a file type that Mozilla - can display (such as graphic files and HTML files), you see the attachment displayed - inline (in the body of the message). For other file types, Mail & Newsgroups lets - you open the attachment using another application, or you can save the - attachment on your hard disk. -

        To open the attachment, make sure you have a program on your computer that - can open files of the same type as the attachment's file format. For example, - if you want to open a GIF file, make sure you have a program on your computer - that can open GIF files. -

        To open an attachment: -

          -
        1. Double-click the attachment you want (if there is more than one).
          2. -
        2. In the Downloading dialog box, choose what you want Mozilla to do with the attachment:
          3. -
            -
          • If Mozilla finds an application on your hard disk that can open the attachment, you can open the attachment using that application. Click "Choose" to use a different application to open the attachment.
            • -
          • If Mozilla can't find an application on your hard disk that can open the attachment, you can save the attachment. You won't be able to open the attachment, but at least you can save it on your hard disk until you can install an application that can open it.
            • -
          • Click "Advanced" to add a new file type to the list of helper applications. Mozilla uses helper applications to determine how different file types are opened by other applications from within Mozilla. -
          -
        3. Click OK. -
        -

        Note: If you are viewing your mail using an IMAP mail server, all attachments remain on the server. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Saving Attachments

        -

        To save an attachment:

        -
          -
        1. In the right side of the message envelope, select the attachment that you - want to save. -
        2. Right-click (Control + Click on Mac) the attachment and choose Save As from the - pop-up menu. -
        3. Choose a file name and location for the attachment on your hard disk and - then click OK. Mail & Newsgroups downloads the attachment and saves it to the specified - location.
          4. -
        -

        Tip: To save all attachments, right-click the first one in the attachment - list, and choose Save All. You can then specify the location where you want - all the attachments to be saved. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -
        -

        Deleting Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Moving Messages to and from the Trash -

        -

         

        -

        How you delete messages depends on your mail server type: IMAP or POP. Deleted - POP messages are automatically moved to the Trash folder. IMAP users can set - different options for deleting messages. -

        To delete IMAP messages from your Inbox or other folders, begin from the Mail - window: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete. By default, - Mail & Newsgroups moves the selected messages to the Trash folder.
          2. -
        2. To delete messages permanently, open the File menu and choose Empty Trash. -
          3. -
        -

        To set deletion preferences for IMAP messages: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Locate the IMAP account you want, and then click the Server Settings category - under the account name.
          3. -
        3. Select the options you want for deleting messages and click OK.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Moving Messages To and From the Trash

        -

        If you use a POP server to deliver your mail, or if you set up IMAP to use the Trash - folder, follow these steps to delete messages from your Inbox or other folders: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select the messages you want to delete.
          2. -
        2. Click Delete. Mail & Newsgroups moves the messages to the Trash folder.
          3. -
        -

        To recover messages from the Trash: -

          -
        1. Click the Trash folder.
          2. -
        2. Select the messages you want to recover, and drag them to another folder. -
          3. -
        -

        To delete messages permanently: -

          -
        • Open the File menu and choose Empty Trash.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - - - - - -
        -

        Using Address Books

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        About Address Books -

        Adding Entries to Your Address Books -

        Creating a New Address Book -

        Creating a New Address Book Card -

        Creating a Mailing List -

        Editing a Mailing List -

        Searching Address Books and Directories -

        Importing Address Books -

        Exporting Address Books -

        Syncing Entries with Your WebMail or AOL Address Book -

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories - -

        -

         

        - -

        About Address Books

        -

        Address books store email addresses and contact information for people you - typically send mail to, such as colleagues, friends, and family. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups - provides you with two address books: the Personal Address Book and the Collected - Addresses Book—and you can create additional address books as well. The - contents of these address books are stored locally on your hard disk. Your address - book may also list email addresses from an LDAP directory, which is located - on an LDAP directory server. The directory server stores email addresses of - people that are not included in your locally-stored address books. -

        Personal Address Book

        -

        Use the Personal Address Book to add specific names of your choice, or to - import address books from other mail programs and previous versions of Mozilla. - You can create mailing lists, edit individual address entries, and create additional - address books. - -

        Collected Addresses

        -

        The Collected Addresses Book automatically collects the email addresses contained - in incoming and outgoing messages, as well as the screen names for buddy lists - migrated from Mozilla. For incoming mail messages, the Collected - Addresses Book saves the sender's address in each message as soon as you open - it. Addresses from outgoing messages are stored as soon as you click Send. You - can choose which addresses you want to collect (only addresses from mail messages - or addresses from both mail and newsgroup messages) by changing the - preferences for email address collection. -

        LDAP Directory (if available)

        -

        An LDAP directory (also known as an address lookup service) stores email addresses - of recipients who are not in your locally-stored address books. LDAP directories - offer you access to large, centrally maintained databases of email addresses, - which is especially useful with address autocompletion.

        -

        To enable automatic address collection, begin in the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If no options - are visible in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Under Email Address Collection, choose whether you want to:
          4. -
            -
          • Use this feature for incoming or outgoing messages, or both.
            • -
          • Use this feature for newsgroup messages.
            • -
          • Limit the size of the Collected Address book. The default size is 700 cards. - If you add a new card that exceeds the limit, the oldest card is removed and - the new card is added, keeping the total number of cards the same.
            • -
          -
        4. Click OK.
          5. -
        -

        -

        Opening the Address Book Window

        -

        To open the Address Book window: -

          -

          -

        • Open the Tasks menu and choose Address Book, or click the Address Book - icon on the status bar.
          • - - - - - - - - -
          -
            Address Book icon
          -
        -

        -

        Changing the Address Book Window Display

        -

        -

        To customize how the Address Book window and the cards are displayed: -

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Address Book. You see the Address Book window. -
          2. -
        2. In the Address Book window, open the View menu and choose from the following - display options:
          3. -
            -
          • Choose Show Name As, and then select how you want card names displayed - (first/last, last/first, or Display Name).
            • -
          • Choose Sort, and then select a sort option (sort by Name, Email, Work - Phone, or Organization).
            • -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Adding Entries to Your Address Books

        -

        You can use any of the following ways to add entries to your address books: -

          -
        • Click a name in the From or recipient fields (for example, To or Cc) in - a message you've received, and then select "Add to Address Book" from the - drop-down list.
          • -
        • In the Address Book window, click New Card to create a new address book - card.
          • -
        • Open a message, which automatically adds the sender's address to your Collected - Addresses Book (if enabled).
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a New Address Book

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides a default personal address book, but you can create - additional address books. -

        To create a new address book: -

          -
        1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the Tasks menu and - choose Address Book. You see the Address Book window.
          2. - - - - - - - - -
          -
          Address Book icon
          -

          -

        2. In the Address Book window, open the File menu, choose New, and choose - Address Book. You see the New Address Book dialog box.
          3. -
        3. Type the name of the new address book, and click OK.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a New Address Book Card

        -

        Address book cards can be used to store names, postal addresses, email addresses, - phone numbers, and information such as whether the addressee prefers to receive - plain-text or HTML-formatted messages. -

        To create an address book card for an individual: -

          -
        1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the Tasks menu and - choose Address Book.
          2. -
        2. Click New Card. (If you have multiple address books, select the one to - which you want to add a card.)
          3. -
        3. Each New Card dialog box has four tabs: -

          -
            -
          • Name tab: Enter the following information: -
              -
            • First and Last (first and last name of person as you want it to - appear in the address book). -
            • Display name (the name that appears in the "To" field of the Compose - window). -
            • Nickname (a shortcut or alias for the real name).
              • -
            • Email address (primary and additional address). -
            • Prefers to receive messages formatted as: If you know this recipient - can read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that include links, - images, or tables), choose HTML. If this recipient can only read messages - sent as plain text (no formatting), then choose Plain Text. If you - don't know or are not sure, choose Unknown. If you choose Unknown, - Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups determines the sending format based on the Mail & Newsgroups Send Format settings in the Preferences dialog box. If - Mail & Newsgroups still can't determine the correct format, Mail & Newsgroups will prompt you to - choose a sending format when you send the message.
              • -
            • Phones (enter phone number information for this person) -
            -
          • Address tab: Type additional information such as street address, - phone number, and URL.
            • -

            Tip: If you enter address information, Mozilla displays a Get Map button next to the address when you view this entry's address book card in your address book. Clicking the Get Map button displays a web page that contains a map to the address.

            -
          • Instant Messenger tab: Type the person's screen name and choose - a Buddy List grouping.
            - Note: You must be logged on to Instant Messenger in order to enter - information from this tab.
            • -
          • Other tab: Store any additional information you want.
            • -
          -
        -

        Tip: To quickly add entries to your address book, right-click any mail - address in messages you receive and select Add to Address Book from the drop-down - list. The New Card dialog box appears where you can complete the information. -

         

        - -

        Viewing or Editing Card Properties

        -

        To view or edit the properties for an individual card: -

          -
        • Select the card in the Address List window and click Properties.
          • -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a Mailing List

        -

        If you regularly send messages to a group of recipients, you can quickly address - a message by using a mailing list that contains the names you want. -

        To create a mailing list and add it to your address book: -

          -
        1. In the Address Book window, click New List.
          2. -
        2. Enter the following information in the Mailing List dialog box: -
            -
          • Click the drop-down list at "Add to" to choose an address book in which - to store the list. -
          • List name: When you enter the list name in the "To" field of a message, - everyone on the list receives your message. -
          • List nickname: Alias (or shortcut) for the list name. -
          • Description: Appears after the list name in the address line of the - Compose window. -
          -
        3. Drag entries from the Address Book window into the list, or type in addresses. -
        4. Click OK. -
        5. The list appears in the left and right sides of the Address Book window. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Editing a Mailing List

        -

        Mailing lists are stored in the address book in which you created them. -

        To remove a member from the list, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open Tasks menu and choose Address Book. -
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by clicking the small - triangle beside the address book title. -
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. The list members appear - to the right of the mailing list name. -
        4. Click the entry you wish to delete. -
        5. Click the Delete button. -
        -

        To add members to a mailing list:

        -
          -
        1. Open Tasks menu and choose Address Book. -
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by clicking the small - triangle beside the address book title. -
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. -
        4. Click Properties. -
        5. Add or remove entries as necessary. -
        6. Click OK when you are done. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        Searching Address Books and Directories

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly search an address book or directory by subject or sender, or use a combination - of criteria to perform a thorough search through an address book or directory. - -

        To quickly search an address book or directory by subject or sender, begin from the Address Book window:

        -
          -
        1. In the Address Book window, in the list of address books, select the address - book or directory that you want to search. -
        2. To the right of "Subject or Sender contains:", type the subject text or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part of the subject or sender, or you can type the exact word or name that you want to find.
          3. -

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups displays only those entries where the subject or sender contains the search text you entered.

          -
        3. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all entries.
          4. -
        -

        - -

        Searching for Specific Entries

        -

        You can search address books or directories for specific entries. If you are not already viewing the Advanced Address Book Search dialog box, begin from the - Address Book window: - -

          -
        1. Open the Search menu and choose Search Addresses. You see the - Advanced Address Book Search dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Next to "Search in", choose the address book or directory through which you want - to search.
          3. -
        3. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search for entries either that match all - or at least one of the conditions (criteria) that you choose.
          4. -
        4. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          5. -
        5. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. The search - results appear in lower part of the dialog box. -
        6. To sort the entries in a different order, click the column that you want - to sort by. -
        7. To view the card for an entry, select the entry and click Properties. -
        8. To compose a message to selected recipients, select one or more entries and click Compose.
          9. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        Importing Address Books

        -

        If you have a Mozilla address book from another user profile or -computer, or if you have an address book from a previous version of -Mozilla - or another mail program, you can import its entries into the Address Book window as a new address book. You can import - address book files that are in these formats: Communicator 4.x (pab.na2), Mozilla (.ldif), tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) formats. - When you import an address book, Mail & Newsgroups creates a new address book with the - imported entries.

        -

        You can also import mail messages and settings from Netscape Communicator, Eudora, Outlook, and Outlook Express.

        - -

        To import an address book into Mozilla, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Mozilla Mail Import Wizard.
          -
          2. -
        2. Follow the instructions to import address books.
          3. -

          Tip: Communicator address book files (pab.na2) are stored in your user profile directory (for example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla\Users, where \Users contains the user profiles directories).

          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Exporting Address Books

        -

        You can export a Mozilla address book if you later want to import it into another user profile, move it to another computer, or use it with another program that can import address books. You can export an address book to one of these file formats: Communicator 4.x or Mozilla (.ldif), tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) formats.

        - -

        To export an address book, begin from the Address Book window:

        -
          -
        1. Select the address book that you want to export.
          2. -
        2. Open the File menu, and choose Export.
          3. -
        3. In the Export Address Book dialog box, browse to the location where you want to save the address book file.
          4. -
        4. Choose the file format for the exported address book (.ldif, comma-separated, or tab-delimited).
          5. -
        5. Enter a name for the address book file. Be sure to include the appropriate file extension (.ldif, .csv, .tab, or .txt).
          6. -
        6. Click Save.
          7. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories

        -

        In general, you add or remove directory servers using instructions provided - by your system administrator. Check with your system administrator for the information - you will need in order to add a new directory server. -

        To add a new directory server: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog box, click - Edit Directories. -
        4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, click Add. -
        5. Type the following information in the Directory Server Properties dialog - box General tab: -
            -
          • Name: Enter the name of the directory service (for example, InfoSpace - Directory). -
          • Host Name: Enter the name of the server, such as ldap.infospace.com. -
          • Base DN: This setting is used to set the Base Distinguished Name. - Enter codes to restrict searching to a specific country or organization. - For example, c=JP restricts the search to Japan only. Base DN also specifies - the organization to search on within the directory (for instance, o=Mozilla - Communications Corporation, c=US). -
          -
        6. Click the Advanced tab to configure LDAP directory server settings. -
        7. Type the following information: -
            -
          • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP server. The default - is 389. -
          • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you limit the number - of autocompletion matches returned by the directory server. Enter the - maximum number of email address matches to display for autocompletion. -
          • Scope: Defines the limits of the search. Choose one of the following: -
              -
            • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - and one level below the base DN. -
            • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the least restrictive - search. -
            • Search Filter: Enter the search filter to apply to matching results that are within the specified scope of the search. -
            -
          -
        8. Click OK to close the Directory Server Properties dialog box. -
        9. Click OK to close the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box. -
        -

        To delete a directory server: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog box, click - Edit Directories. -
        4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, select the directory that you - want to delete and click Delete. -
        5. Click OK, then click OK again to close the Preferences dialog box. -
        - -

         

        - - - - - -

        Directory Server Settings

        -

        If you are not already viewing the Directory Server Settings dialog box, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu, and choose Address Book. -
        2. In the list of address books, select a directory. -
        3. Click Properties. -
        - -

        General Tab

        -

        -
          -
        • Name: The name of the directory service (for example, InfoSpace - Directory). -
        • Host Name: The name of the server, such as ldap.infospace.com. -
        • Base DN: The Base Distinguished Name. Codes entered here restrict searching to a specific country or organization. - For example, c=JP restricts the search to Japan only. Base DN also specifies - the organization to search on within the directory (for instance, o=Mozilla - Communications Corporation, c=US). -
        - -

        Advanced Tab

        -

        -
          -
        • Port Number: The port number for the LDAP server. The default - is 389. -
        • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you limit the number - of autocompletion matches returned by the directory server. Specify the - maximum number of email address matches to display for autocompletion. -
        • Scope: Defines the limits of the search: -
            -
          • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - and one level below the base DN. -
          • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the least restrictive - search. -
          • Search Filter: Specifies the search filter to apply to matching results that are within the specified scope of the search. -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - -
        -

        Organizing Your Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Creating a Folder -

        Renaming a Folder -

        Moving or Copying a Folder -

        Filing Messages in Folders -

        Labeling Messages -

        Marking or Flagging Messages -

        Creating Message Filters -

        Searching Through Messages -

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a Folder

        -

        To create a message folder, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose New, and then Folder. You see the New Folder - dialog box. -
        2. Type the name of the folder.
          3. -
        3. Click the drop-down list and choose a folder location and click OK. Your - new folder appears in your Mail Folders list.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Renaming a Folder

        -

        To rename an existing folder, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select the folder you want to rename.
          2. -
        2. Open the File menu and choose Rename Folder. You see the Rename Folder dialog box.
          3. -
        3. Type the new name and click OK.
          4. -
        -

        Note: If you rename a folder that you've been using to store filtered - messages, the filter will automatically update to use the renamed folder.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Moving or Copying a Folder

        -

        You can copy a folder and its contents to another mail account, or move a folder - within the same mail account. -

        To move or copy a folder, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select the folder you want to move or copy.
          2. -
        2. Do one of the following: -
            -
          • To move the folder under another folder within the same account, drag - the folder over the name of the other folder. The folder you moved becomes - a subfolder of the other folder.
            • -
          • To copy the folder to another account, drag the folder over the name - of another account. -
          • To copy the folder under another folder in another account, drag the - folder over the name of another folder in another account. The folder - you copied becomes a subfolder of the other folder. -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Filing Messages in Folders

        -

        You can move messages from one folder to another by using either of these methods: -

          -
        • Select the message, click the File button on the toolbar, and choose the - destination folder.
          • -
        • Drag and drop messages into the desired folder.
          • -

          Note: If you drag and drop a message from an IMAP or POP mail server - folder to a local folder on your hard drive, the message is moved to the local - folder and removed from the server folder. -

        -

        -

        To copy a message from one folder to another: -

          -
        1. Select the message and right-click to display the pop-up menu.
          2. -
        2. Select "Copy To" and then select the destination account and folder from - the drop-down list.
          3. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Labeling Messages

        -

        You can apply labels to messages to help you organize and prioritize them. You can apply a standard color and text label to messages, or you can customize the label colors or label text to suit your needs.

        -

        One powerful way to use labels is to use a message filter to automatically label incoming messages. For example, you can set up a message filter so that incoming messages from your boss are labeled "Important" and appear in red. See Creating Message Filters for more information.

        - - -

        Applying a Label

        -

        To apply a label to a message, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Select the message you want to label.
          2. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. -
        3. Choose the label you want to apply from the list.
          4. -
        -

        The message header changes to the label color you chose. To see the label text, you must display the Label column in the Mail window.

        - -

        To display the Label column, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        • Click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the list.
          • -
        - -

        Note: Message labels apply on a per-account basis. For example, if you move or copy a labeled message to another mail account, the label is not preserved. Similarly, if you forward a labeled message to another recipient, the label is not preserved. For IMAP mail accounts, if your IMAP server supports user-defined keywords, message labels will persist when you log in to your mail account from a different location. In an AOL mail acount, when a labeled message is automatically moved from New Mail to the Old Mail folder, it loses its label.

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Customizing Labels

        -

        You can customize label colors or text to suit your needs.

        -

        To customize labels, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Labels. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Edit the label text, or replace it with your own label text. The label can be up to 32 characters long.
          4. -
        4. To change the label color, click the color chip next to that label and select a new color.
          5. -
        5. Click OK.
          6. -
        -

        Your changes are immediately applied to all labeled messages in all your mail accounts.

        - -

        Tip: To restore the default label text and colors, follow the steps above to display the label settings, and click Restore Defaults.

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Sorting Messages by Label

        -

        To sort messages by label, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. To display the Label column if it is hidden, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the list.
          2. -
        2. Click the Label column to sort messages by color, and within each color, to sort messages alphabetically by label text.
          3. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Removing Labels

        -

        To remove a message label, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Select one or more labeled messages.
          2. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. -
        3. Choose "None" for the message label.
          4. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Marking or Flagging Messages

        -

        You might want to mark a message you've read as unread if you later want to re-read the message or respond to it.

        -

        To mark a message as unread, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Click in the Read column of each message you want to mark as unread. Messages marked as unread display a symbol in the Read column. Messages marked as read display a symbol in the Read column. If the Read column is not visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Read from the list. -
        -

        - - - - - - - - -
        -
        Read column
        - - -

        You can flag messages that you later want to download for offline use.

        -

        To flag messages, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Click in the Flag column of each message you want to download. A flag appears - where you clicked to indicate that the message has been flagged. If the Flag column is not visible, click the - Show/Hide Columns icon and select Flag from the list. -
        -

        - - - - - - - - -
        -
        Flag column
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Creating Message Filters

        -

        Message filters allow you to manage and organize your messages. You can create - message filters that Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups uses to automatically perform certain actions - on incoming messages based on criteria you specify. For example, you can create - a message filter that automatically moves incoming messages to a particular - folder. Message filters operate on a per-account basis. -

        If you are not already viewing the Message Filters dialog box, begin from the - Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Message Filters. You see the Message Filters - dialog box.
          2. -
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you want to - apply the filter.
          3. -
        3. Click New. You use the Filter Rules dialog box to specify the types of - messages to act on, and the action you want the filter to perform.
          4. -
        4. Type a name for the filter.
          5. -
        5. Select the matching option you want Mail & Newsgroups to use: "all of the following - conditions" (criteria) you choose, or "at least one" of the conditions. -
        6. Use the drop-down lists to choose the search criteria (for example, "Subject," - "Sender," "contains," "doesn't contain") and then type the text or phrase - you want to match.
          7. -

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching entries.

          -
        7. To restrict your filter to messages that only match a certain priority, - choose "Priority" from the drop-down list. -
        8. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          9. -
        9. Use the drop-down list to choose the action you want the filter to perform - on the messages (for example, Move to Folder).
          10. -

          Tip: To automatically label incoming messages, choose "Label the message" from the drop-down list.

          -
        10. Choose a destination folder in which to store the messages, or create a - new folder.
          11. -
        11. Click OK to confirm your settings.
          12. -
        12. Click OK in the Message Filters dialog box. The filter begins filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK.
          13. -
        - -

        To manage your filters, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Message Filters. You see the Message Filters - dialog box.
          2. -
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you want to - apply the filter.
          3. -
        3. Choose from the following:
          4. -
            -
          • To turn a filter on or off: Click the checkbox to the right of the filter - name to enable it, or click it again to turn it off.
            • -
          • To edit a filter: Select the filter name and click Edit (or double-click - the filter name). Use the Filter Rules dialog box to make your changes.
            • -
          • To delete a filter: Select the filter name and click Delete.
            • -
          • To change the order in which filters are applied: In the filter - list, click a filter's name, and click "Move Up" or "Move - Down" to move it.
            • -

            Note: Filters are applied to each incoming message in the order - you choose, until a filter action results in the message being deleted or - moved to a different folder. -

          -
        4. Click OK when you are done managing your filters. If you created a new filter, - it begins filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK. -
        -

        Note: If you delete a folder that you've been using - to store filtered messages, the filter will no longer work. Incoming messages that match the filter criteria will appear in your Inbox. If you rename or move the folder, the filter will automatically update to use the renamed or moved folder. - -

        -

        Tip: Filters don't apply to existing messages. If you have existing - messages that you want to move to another folder, you can search - for those messages and then file them into the - other folder. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - -

        Filtering Messages From a Specific Sender

        -

        Mozilla lets you quickly create a filter for messages from a particular sender. For example, if you want to automatically move all incoming messages from your child's teacher into a folder called "School", Mozilla lets you quickly set up a filter to do this.

        - -

        To create a filter for messages from a specific sender, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Select a message from a specific sender.
          2. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Create Filter. You see the Filter Rules dialog box. Using the sender's email address, Mozilla prefills the filter name, the filter matching criteria, and the filter action (Move to folder).
          3. -
        3. Choose a destination folder in which to store the incoming messages from the specified sender, or create a - new folder.
          4. -
        4. Click OK to confirm your settings. You see the Message Filters dialog box, where you can create, delete, or edit message filters.
          5. -
        5. Click OK. The filter begins filtering incoming messages from the specified sender as soon as you click OK.
          6. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - -

         

        - - -

        Searching Through Messages

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly find text in a single message, search messages by subject or sender, or use a combination - of criteria to perform a thorough search through all messages in a specific - mail folder, newsgroup, or account. -

        To locate text in a single message, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select the message, open the Search menu, and choose Find in This Message. -
        2. Type the text that you want to locate. -
        3. Click Find to locate the first occurrence of the text. -
        4. Continue clicking Find to locate additional occurrences, or click Cancel - when you are done. -
        5. Choose Find Again from the Search menu to continue searching for the text - throughout the rest of the message.
          6. -
        -

        To quickly search for messages by subject or sender, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. To the right of "Subject or Sender contains:", type the subject text or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part of the subject or sender, or you can type the exact word or name that you want to find.
          2. -

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups displays only those messages where the subject or sender contains the search text you entered.

          -
        2. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all messages.
          3. -
        -

        - -

        Searching for Specific Messages

        -

        You can search mail folders or newsgroups for specific messages. If you are not already viewing the Search Messages dialog box, begin from the - Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Search menu and choose Search Messages. You see the - Search Messages dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Next to "Search for messages in", choose the account, newsgroup, or folder through which you want - to search.
          3. -
        3. Click "Search subfolders" to include all subfolders - in the search.
          4. -
        4. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search for messages either that match all - or at least one of the conditions (criteria) that you choose.
          5. - -
        5. Use the drop-down lists to indicate the search criteria (for example, "Subject" and "contains") and then type the text or phrase - that you want to match.
          6. -

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching entries.

          -
        6. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          7. -
        7. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. The search - results appear in lower part of the Search Messages dialog box. To open a - message so you can read it, select the message and click Open, or double-click - the message.
          8. -
        8. To sort the messages in a different order, click the column that you want - to sort by. -
        9. To move or copy a message in the Results area to another folder, select - the message and then choose the destination folder from the File drop-down - list. If the destination folder is within the same account, the message is - moved to that folder. If the destination folder is within a different account, - the message is copied to that folder. -
        10. To delete a message in the Results area, select the message - and then click Delete. -
        11. To open the folder where the message is stored, select the message and click Open Message Folder.
          12. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -
        - -

        Importing Mail from Other Programs

        -

        This section describes how to import mail messages and settings -from Netscape Communicator, Outlook, Outlook Express, and Eudora. To import address books from these programs, see Importing Address Books.

        - -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Importing Mail Messages -

        Importing Mail Settings -

        -

         

        - -

        Importing Mail Messages

        -

        To import mail messages from Netscape Communicator, Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Open the File menu, and choose Import. You see the Mozilla Mail Import Wizard.
          -
          2. -
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail messages.
          3. -
        -

        For Netscape Communicator, the wizard imports all Communicator mail folders included under Local Folders. Imported mail is added as a new folder under Local Folders in the Mozilla Mail window.

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Importing Mail Settings

        -

        To import mail settings from Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the File menu, and choose Import. You see the Mozilla Mail Import Wizard.
          -
          2. -
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail settings.
          3. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -
        - -

        Getting Started With Newsgroups

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Subscribing to Newsgroups -

        Reading Newsgroup Messages -

        Posting Newsgroup Messages -

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions -

        Monitoring Threads -

        Removing a Newsgroup -

        Adding a Newsgroup Server -

        -

         

        - -

        Subscribing to Newsgroups

        -

        If you have set up an account on a newsgroup server, - you can join (subscribe) to newsgroups (also called discussion groups). -

        To subscribe to a newsgroup, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe dialog box.
          2. -
        2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose another newsgroup account.
          3. -
        3. Select a newsgroup. -
        4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the newsgroup. - You see a checkmark next to each newsgroup to which you subscribe. Click - Unsubscribe to cancel a selection. -
        5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed newsgroups appears in the Mail window. -
          6. -
        -

        If you are an IMAP mail user, you can also subscribe to message folders located - on an IMAP server. (Your Inbox is a type of message folder.) Follow the instructions - above for subscribing, but select a mail server from the Server drop-down list. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Reading Newsgroup Messages

        -

        When you open your newsgroup server, you see the list of newsgroups to which - you subscribe. The server downloads the headers of new messages in each - newsgroup.

        -

        To read newsgroup messages, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Double-click a newsgroup server icon to see its newsgroups. (If there are - no newsgroups, you may need to subscribe to one.)
          2. -
        2. Click a newsgroup name to see its messages.
          3. -
        3. Click a message to read it. Click the thread button to display all the - responses below the original message. You can click any header to display - its message. You can start a new thread or post - a message in response.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Posting Newsgroup Messages

        -

        To start new threads (discussions): -

          -
        1. From the list of your subscribed newsgroups in the Mail window, select a - newsgroup.
          2. -
        2. Click Compose.
          3. -
        3. Compose your message, and click Send - to post it.
          4. -
        4. Click Get Msgs to see your posting on the newsgroup.
          5. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions

        -

        To post a response to the newsgroup: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. -
        2. Click Reply.
          3. -
        3. Compose your message, and click Send - to post it.
          4. -
        -

        To reply to an individual as well as post a response to the group: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. -
        2. Click Reply All.
          3. -
        3. Compose your message, and click Send to post it.
          4. -
        -

        To redirect a posting to another newsgroup: -

          -
        • Click Reply and choose "Followup-To" from the "Recipient type" drop-down - list. Subsequent responses will be posted to the newsgroup you specified.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -

        Monitoring Threads

        -

        To monitor unread messages in threads that are of interest to you: -

          -
        1. Select a message in a thread. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Watch Thread. -
        3. If you want to monitor additional threads, repeat steps 1 and 2 for messages - in additional threads. -
        4. When you're ready to monitor messages in these threads, Open the View menu, - choose Messages, and then choose Watched Threads with Unread. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups - only displays the watched threads that contain unread messages. -
        5. Open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose All to return to viewing - all messages in the newsgroup. -
        -

        To ignore a message thread: -

          -
        1. Select a message in the thread. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Ignore Thread. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups marks all messages - in the thread as read, and new replies posted to the thread will appear as - read. -
        3. To view ignored threads, open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose - Ignored Threads. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Removing a Newsgroup

        -

        To remove a newsgroup from your list: -

          -
        • Select the newsgroup icon and press Delete.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Adding a Newsgroup Server

        -

        If the newsgroup you want to subscribe to is on a different server, you must - first set up access to that server.

        -

        To set up an additional newsgroup server, open the File menu in the Mail window - and choose New, then Account. -

          -
        • Using the Account Wizard, indicate that the new account you want to - set up is a newsgroup account.
          • -
        -

        Once you've set up access to the new server, you can subscribe - to newsgroups on that server. In the Mail window, open the File menu, and choose - Subscribe. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - - -
        -

        Working Offline

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline -

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline Use -

        Downloading an Individual Folder for Offline - Use -

        Downloading Selected or Flagged Messages for - Offline Use -

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working Offline -

        Selecting Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups - for Offline Viewing -

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages -

        Working Offline and Reconnecting Later -

        -

         

        - -

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' offline feature lets you download your mail and read it offline - (while disconnected from the Internet). If you use a dial-up (modem) connection - to access your mail and you want to reduce the time you are connected, or, - if you need to temporarily disconnect from your company's network while traveling - or switching locations, you can download your mail so that you can read it - offline. The offline feature can automatically download incoming - messages and then later send all your outgoing messages when you reconnect. -

        If you occasionally want to work offline, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you easily: -

          -
        • Download your Inbox for offline use. -
        • Download an individual folder for offline use. -
        • Download only selected or flagged messages for offline use. -
        -

        If you frequently work offline, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also lets you: -

          -
        • Set up one or more of your accounts for offline use. -
        • Set offline and disk space preferences for each account. -
        • Select the items (accounts, folders, and newsgroups) that you want to view - offline. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline Use

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups can automate the offline process for your Inbox messages. You - can tell Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to automatically download your Inbox messages for offline - use. Later, when you go back online, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes - your Inbox messages with the server. -

        To automatically download your Inbox for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. In the left side of the dialog box, choose the account you want to use offline, - and select Offline & Disk Space. (This category is not available for POP accounts.) -
        3. Check the box labeled "Make the messages in my Inbox available when I am - working offline." -
        4. Click OK. -
        5. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -
        6. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all messages in your Inbox so you can - read and respond to them while working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla - Mail & Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your messages.

        -

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online: -

          -
        • Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online. -
        -

        When you go back online, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes your Inbox - messages with the server, by replicating any changes you made while working - offline. -

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you send while working offline - in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose - Send Unsent Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at once. - To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, - use the Preferences command on the Edit menu to change your offline - preferences. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading an Individual Folder for Offline Use

        -

        To download a specific folder for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. In the left side of the Mail window, select the folder that you want to - download for offline use. -
        2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Properties. -
        3. Click the Offline tab. -
        4. Check "Select this folder for offline use". -
        5. Click Download Now if you want to immediately begin downloading the folder's - messages. Alternatively, you can continue working, and when you are ready - to go offline, proceed to the next step. -
        6. From the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -
        7. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all messages in the selected folder so you -can read and respond to them while working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla -Mail & Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your messages. -

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading offline - display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon. -

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online. -
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then "Download/Sync Now," - from the submenu. -
        3. Click OK. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes the offline folders with the server, - by replicating any changes you made while working offline. -

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you sent while working offline - in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose - Send Unsent Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at once. - To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, - use the Preferences command on the Edit menu to change your offline - preferences. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading Selected or Flagged Messages for Offline Use

        -

        To download selected messages for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Select the messages you want to download, as follows: -
            -
          • To select a group of adjacent messages, click the first message, and - then Shift-click to select the last message in the group. -
          • To select messages anywhere in the message list, hold down the Ctrl - key (Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh) and click each - message. -
          -
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Selected Messages - from the submenu. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups downloads the selected messages. -
        4. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline from the - submenu. -
        5. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        To download flagged messages for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Click in the flag column of each message you want to download. A flag appears - where you clicked to indicate that the message has been marked. If the flag column is not visible, click the - Show/Hide Columns icon and select Flag from the list. -
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Flagged Messages. - Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups downloads the flagged messages. -
        4. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline from the - submenu. -
        5. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        After you disconnect, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work - with your messages. -

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading offline - display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon. -

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online: -

          -
        • Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online from the - submenu. -
        -

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you sent while working offline - in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose - Send Unsent Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at once. - To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, - use the Preferences command on the Edit menu to change your offline - preferences. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working Offline

        -

        To set up one or more accounts for working offline, you use the Offline and - Disk Space preferences in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. Once set, - you don't need to change these preferences each time you want to work offline. - The offline and disk space preferences you can set for an account depend on - the type of account (IMAP, POP, or Newsgroup). -

        Here's a summary of the steps you will follow to set up your accounts for - offline use: -

          -
        1. For each account that you want to work with while offline, use the Mail & Newsgroups - Account Settings dialog box to set the Offline & Disk Space preferences - for that account. You must select the items (accounts, folders, newsgroups) - that you want to download for offline use. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. -

          Once set, you don't need to change these settings. See the sections below - for information on setting offline and disk space preferences for IMAP, - POP, and Newsgroup - accounts. -

          Tip: To set the Offline & Disk Space preferences for the current - account, open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Offline Settings. -

        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now from - the submenu. -
        3. Select the type of messages (mail or newsgroup or both) that you want to download. -

          Important: You must select at least one category (Mail messages, Newsgroup - messages) in order for the download to work. -

        4. In the Download/Sync Now dialog box, click OK to download the selected items. - See Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages - for more information. -
        5. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -
        6. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        For subsequent offline sessions, you can skip step 1. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Selecting Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing

        -

        Before you can read mail and newsgroup messages while offline, you must first - select them for downloading. You can set up an entire account for offline use. - You can also choose which folders and newsgroups that you want to use offline. -

        Note: Keep in mind that selecting more items may increase download time - and disk space used. -

        To select accounts, folders, and newsgroups for offline viewing, begin from - the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for the account you want to change. -
        3. Click Select. You see your accounts, mail folders, and subscribed newsgroups. -

          Note: You see only the newsgroups and folders that you've already - subscribed to. -

          -
        4. Select the items (folders, newsgroups) that you want to make available - for offline use. -

          Note: POP accounts and local mail folders don't appear in the list. - Your AOL account is not included in the list because working offline with - your AOL account is not available. -

          -
        5. Click OK. -
        -

        Once set, you don't need to change these settings each time you want to go - offline. However, if you do want to change them, you can easily do so before - going offline, since the same Select button is available when using the Download - and Sync command. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages

        -

        If you have already selected mail folders and newsgroups for offline - use, you are now ready to download and synchronize them. If you haven't yet - selected items to download, you can choose them before you go offline. -

        If you are not already viewing the Download/Sync Now dialog box, follow these - steps: -

        To download and synchronize your messages, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now. -
        2. Select the categories (mail messages or newsgroup messages) that you want - to download. -

          Important: You must select at least one category (Mail messages, - Newsgroup messages) in order for the download to work. If the checkboxes - are disabled, it means that you haven't yet selected items to download. - Use the Select button to select items to download. -

          -
        3. To send messages in your Unsent Messages folder before going offline, check - "Send Unsent Messages". -
        4. To go offline immediately after Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups finishes downloading, select - "Work offline once download and/or sync is complete". -
        5. To set or change the items to download, click Select. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. - You can skip this step if you've already selected items for download. -
        6. Click OK. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups begins downloading the selected items. -
        -

        If you chose to work offline once the download completes, then Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups - immediately switches to offline mode. Otherwise, when you are ready to go offline, - open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Working Offline and Reconnecting Later

        -

        To work offline and reconnect later, begin from the Mail window. -

        When you are ready to work offline: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. Mail & Newsgroups prompts - you to download messages, if you want, before going offline. -
        2. Click Download to download messages before going offline. If you want to - work offline without downloading messages, click Don't Download. -
        -

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading offline - display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon. -

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' download behavior when going offline, open - the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose the Offline & Disk Space category. You - can choose to have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to download messages when - going offline, to automatically download messages, or to not download any messages. -

        To reconnect and synchronize your messages: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online. -
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups synchronizes your messages with the server by replicating any - changes you made while working offline. -

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' behavior when going online, open the Edit - menu, choose Preferences, and then choose the Offline & Disk Space category. You can choose - to have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to send unsent messages, to automatically - send unsent messages, or to not send unsent messages. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -
        - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings

        -

        This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. This dialog box lets you specify settings for each individual account. Unlike the Preferences dialog box, which applies settings to all accounts, the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box lets you specify settings on a per-account basis. If you are not currently viewing the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box, follow these steps:

        - -
          -
        1. Begin from the Mail window.
          2. -
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings.
          3. -
        3. Select the name of the account whose settings you want to view or change.
          4. -
        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account Settings -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Offline & Disk Space - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local Folders - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account Settings

        -

        This section describes how to view or change your Account Settings, such as - your user name, reply-to address, and signature file. If you are not already - viewing the Account Settings, begin from the Mail window: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Select the name of the account to display the Account Settings panel.
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Account Name: The name for this account. -
        • Identity: Stores your name, email address, reply-to address (only if different from your email address), and organization (optional).
          • -
        • Attach this signature: Lets you choose the signature - file you want to attach to your outgoing messages. Click Choose to locate the signature - file (optional).
          • -
        • Compose messages in HTML format: Lets you create formatted - text for mail and newsgroup messages using the built-in HTML editor. Leave this item - unchecked to use the plain-text editor. HTML messages can include formatted - text, links, images, and tables, just like a web page. However, some recipients - may not be able to receive HTML messages.
          • -

          Tip: If you select this option, but you later want to compose a message - or reply to a message using the plain-text editor, hold down the Shift key - and click Compose or Reply in the Mail toolbar to temporarily choose the plain-text - editor. Shift-clicking the Compose button or the Reply button switches to - the other editor.

          - -
        • Advanced: Lets you choose a different outgoing server (SMTP) for outgoing messages from this account. - -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups can work with two types of mail servers: IMAP and POP. If you are not sure which server type your Internet service provider supports, ask your service provider. If your - Internet service provider supports both, the following descriptions may help you choose - which one to use. - -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        About Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) -

        About Internet Post Office Protocol (POP) -

        IMAP Server Settings -

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings -

        POP Server Settings -

        News Server Settings -

        -

         

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        About Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)

        -

        Advantages: Your messages and any changes to them stay on your server, - saving local disk space. Also, you always have access to an updated mailbox, - and you can get your mail from multiple locations. Performance on a modem is - faster, since you initially download message headers only. -

        Disadvantages: Not all ISPs support IMAP. - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        About Post Office Protocol (POP)

        -

        Advantages: Your messages are downloaded to your local computer all - at once, but you can also specify whether to keep copies of the messages on - the server. Most ISPs currently support POP. -

        Disadvantages: You must synchronize your local Inbox with your server's - mailbox. This can result in downloading new messages over and over each time - you connect. If you use more than one computer, messages might reside on one - or the other, but not both. POP doesn't work as well as IMAP over a slow link - connection. Also, you can't access all mail folders from multiple locations. - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        IMAP Server Settings

        - -

        If you are not already viewing the IMAP server settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category name. (If - you chose an IMAP server when you set up this account, you see your IMAP server - settings.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Server Type: The server type (IMAP Mail Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change the server type associated with this account, you must delete the account and then re-create it.
          • -
        • Server Name: The server name that you specified when you created this account. If you are having problems getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider or system administrator that the server name you entered is correct.
          • -
        • User Name: The user name that you specified when you created this account.
          • -
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting unchanged.
          • -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive encrypted mail. If you are unsure, contact your service provider or system administrator.
          • -
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically - check this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups.
          • -
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • -
        • When I delete a message: Choose the behavior you want for deleted messages. "Move it to the Trash folder" is recommended unless you are instructed to use a different setting by your system administrator or service provider. Messages marked as deleted are removed only when you compact folders.
          • -
        • Clean up (Expunge) Inbox on Exit: Removes deleted messages from - the Inbox when you exit Mail & Newsgroups. Choose this if you chose to mark messages - as deleted.
          • -
        • Empty Trash on Exit: empties the Trash folder whenever you quit - Mail & Newsgroups.
          • -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        - -

        -

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings

        -

        In most cases, advanced IMAP server settings are automatically - supplied by the server. If you are unsure about the settings for this dialog - box, contact your ISP or system administrator. -

        If you are not already viewing the advanced IMAP server settings, begin from the Mail window.

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category.
          3. -
        3. If the mail server type is an IMAP server, you can click Advanced to set additional IMAP options, such as: -

          -
            -
          • the IMAP server directory path
            • -
          • showing only "subscribed folders"
            • -
          • support for subfolders
            • -
          • any personal and public (shared folder) namespaces for this directory
            • -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - -

        POP Server Settings

        -

        If you are not already viewing the POP server settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category name. (If - you chose a POP server when you set up this account, you see your POP server - settings.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Server Type: The server type (POP Mail Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change the server type associated with this account, you must delete the account and then re-create it.
          • -
        • Server Name: The server name that you specified when you created this account. If you are having problems getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider or system administrator that the server name you entered is correct.
          • -
        • User Name: The user name that you specified when you created this account.
          • -
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting unchanged.
          • -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive encrypted mail. If you are unsure, contact your service provider or system administrator.
          • -
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically - check this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP accounts, - Mail & Newsgroups doesn't download the new messages until you click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.
          • -
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          -
          • -
        • Automatically download any new messages: Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to retrieve messages immediately each time it checks the server.
          • -
        • Leave messages on server: Choose this setting to store a copy of messages on the mail server in addition to downloading them to your computer.
          • -
        • Delete messages on server when they are deleted locally: Choose this setting to remove messages from the server once you delete them from your computer.
          • -
        • Empty Trash on Exit: Choose this setting to empty the Trash folder whenever you quit Mail & Newsgroups.
          • -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        News Server Settings

        -

        This section describes how to change news server settings. If you are not already viewing news server settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. (If you - chose a newsgroup server when you set up this account, you see your newsgroup - server settings.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Server Type: The server type (IMAP Mail Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change the server type associated with this account, you must delete the account and then re-create it.
          • -
        • Server Name: The server name that you specified when you created this account. If you are having problems getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider or system administrator that the server name you entered is correct.
          • -
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting unchanged.
          • -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive encrypted mail. If you are unsure, contact your service provider or system administrator.
          • -
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • -
        • Ask me before downloading more than ___ messages: Choose this setting to conserve - disk space and download time, by setting a limit for the number of messages - you can retrieve at one time.
          • -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        -
        -

        Note: The path to the newsrc file is displayed for your information. - The newsrc file stores information about the newsgroups to which you are - subscribed, and the messages you have read in each newsgroup.

        -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders

        -

        This section describes the settings for sending automatic copies, and for storing copies of outgoing messages, message drafts, and message templates. -

        By default, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups stores copies of your outgoing messages in the Sent - folder for the current account. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also stores message drafts in - the Drafts folder and message templates in the Templates folder for the current - account. -

        If you are not already viewing the settings for Copies & Folders, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account, and click Copies & Folders. You see the Copies & Folders section.
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Place a copy in: Select where to store copies of your outgoing mail and newsgroup messages. - If you don't want to use the default Sent folder for the current account, - click Other and then choose an account and then choose the folder for storing - copies.
          • -
        • Bcc: Select whether you want to always send a blind carbon copy (bcc) to yourself. -
        • Bcc another address: Select whether you want to always send a blind carbon copy (bcc) to another addressee, and enter the address.
          • -
        • Keep message drafts in: Select where to store message drafts. If you don't want to use the default - Drafts folder for the current account, click Other and then choose another - account and folder for storing drafts.
          • -
        • Keep message templates in: Select where to store message templates. If you don't want to use the - default Templates folder for the current account, click Other and then choose - another account and folder for storing templates.
          • -
        • Show confirmation dialog when messages are saved: Choose this option if you want Mail & Newsgroups to display a confirmation dialog box when you save a - draft message or a template. If checked, a dialog box will appear when you save a draft or - template to remind you where Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups is saving the draft or template. -
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing

        -

        You use Addressing settings to override the global LDAP server settings specified - for all address books in the - Preferences dialog box. LDAP server settings affect the behavior of address - autocompletion, and you can change these settings for each account if necessary. Address autocompletion uses your address books to find matching entries when - you type email addresses in the addressing area of the Compose window. - -

        If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account and click the Addressing category.
          3. -
        - -
          -
        • Use my global LDAP server preferences for this account: This - is the default. Select this if you don't want to override the global LDAP - server preferences for this account. -
        • Use a different LDAP server: Select this option and then choose - another LDAP server from the list if you want to use a different LDAP - directory server for address autocompletion with this account. If necessary, click Edit Directories to edit individual directory server - settings, add a directory server, or delete a directory server. For more information, - see Adding and Removing LDAP Directories. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Offline & Disk Space

        -

        Offline & Disk Space settings let you conserve disk space or set up an account so that you - can use it while offline (disconnected from the Internet). The settings available - depend on the mail server type (IMAP, POP, or News) associated with the account. - -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP) -

        Disk Space Settings (POP) -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (News) -

        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP)

        -

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space preferences for an - IMAP account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for an IMAP account. -
        -
          - -
        • Make the messages in my Inbox available when I am working offline: Select this option - so that messages in your Inbox will be available when you are working offline. -
        • When I create new folders, select them for offline: Select this option so that - new folders you create are automatically selected for offline use. If - left unchecked, new folders won't be automatically selected for offline use. - You can manually select folders for offline use using the Download/Sync - Now command (available from the File menu, under Offline) or by clicking - the Select button. -
        • Select: Click to select the items (accounts, folders, newsgroups) - that you want to make available for offline use. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. - -
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than _KB: - Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large messages from - being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for downloaded messages. -
        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Disk Space Settings (POP)

        -

        Messages from POP accounts are always downloaded to your local machine. This - section describes how you can save disk space for a POP account. If you are - not already viewing the Disk Space preferences for a POP account, - follow these steps: -

        Begin from the Mail window. -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Click the Disk Space category for a POP account. -
        -
          -
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than _KB: - Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large messages from - being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for downloaded messages. -
        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (News)

        -

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space settings for a News account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for a News account. -
        -
          -
        • Select: Click to select the items (accounts, folders, newsgroups) - that you want to make available for offline use. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. - -
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than: - Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large messages from - being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for downloaded messages. -
        • Download only unread message bodies: Select this option to download only the messages - you haven't read. -
        • Download message bodies for messages since _ days ago: Select this option to download only messages - that were posted within the time period you enter. -
        • When it is time to clean up messages: Click one of the three choices - to specify when newsgroup messages should be deleted. Unless you choose - "Keep all messages," enter the number of days to keep messages or the - number of newest messages to keep. -
        • Keep only unread messages: Select this option to delete messages immediately - after you read them. - -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - - - - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security

        - -

        This section describes how to configure the Mail & Newsgroup Account Settings that control message security. Before you do so, however, you must obtain one or more email certificates. For details, see Signing & Encrypting Messages. - -

        If you are not already viewing the Security settings for your mail account, begin from the Mail window: - -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. -
        2. Click Security under the name of the mail account whose security settings you want to configure. -
        - -

          - - - - - -
        -

        In this section:

        -

        About Certificates

        -

        Digital Signing

        -

        Encryption

        - -

          -

        About Certificates

        - -

        The main purpose of the Security panel is to select two certificates: -

          -
        • The email certificate you want to use for signing email messages you send to other people. -
        • The email certificate you want other people to use when they encrypt messages they send to you. -
        - -

        Depending on the policies of the certificate authority (CA) that issues your certificate(s), you can use one certificate for both purposes or two different certificates. Even if you use just one, you must specify it twice, once for digital signing and once for encryption. - -

        The certificates you select here are included with every signed message you send. These certificates allow your recipients to verify your digital signature and to encrypt messages that they send to you. - -

          -

        Digital Signing

        - -

        If you have an email certificate intended for signing messages, you can use it to sign either email messages or newsgroup messages. - -

        You use the Digital Signing area in the Security panel to specify how you want to sign your messages: - -

          -
        • Digitally sign messages: Select this checkbox if you want to digitally sign all the messages you send. (A personal certificate must be specified below before you can select this checkbox.)
          • - -
        • Use the following personal certificate: If this field is empty or if it displays the wrong certificate, click Select to choose from those you have on file. -
        - -

        Regardless of whether the "Digitally sign messages" checkbox is selected here, you can change your mind before you send an individual message. -

          - -

        Encryption

        - -

        You use the Encryption area in the Security panel to specify how you routinely want to use encryption when sending your messages: - -

          -
        • Never: Select this option if you never want to use encryption, or only occasionally. -
        • If possible: Select this option if you want to use encryption whenever you have certificates for all the recipients. If you don't have all the necessary certificates, the message will be sent unencrypted. -
        • Always: Select this option if you always want to use encryption. If you don't have all the necessary certificates, the message won't be sent unless you explicitly turn off encryption for that message only. -
        - -

        Regardless of which encryption option you select, you can change your mind before you send an individual message. - - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local Folders

        -

        Local Folders is the account where Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you send while working offline. Messages you send while working offline are saved in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. Any folders you create under the Local Folders account reside on your hard disk, so Local Folders is a good place to save messages that you want to keep.

        - -

        If you are not already viewing the Local Folders settings, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the Local Folders category.
          3. -
        - -
          -
        • Account Name: The name associated with the Local Folders account. -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP)

        - -

        Even if you have multiple mail or news accounts, you generally need to specify - only one outgoing (SMTP) server to handle the delivery of your outgoing mail. -

        If you are not already viewing the Outgoing Server (SMTP) settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the Outgoing Server (SMTP) category.
          3. -
        - -
          -
        • Server name: Mail & Newsgroups uses the outgoing (SMTP) server name that you - entered using the Account Wizard. To change the outgoing (SMTP) server - name, type it in Server Name field. -
        • Use name and password: If your SMTP server requires authentication - to send mail, select this option to be prompted to enter your user name - and authentication password. Then enter your - user name. The first time you send mail, you will be prompted to enter your - authentication password. -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): If your outgoing SMTP server is configured - to send encrypted mail, you can choose how often you want to use SSL (Secure - Sockets Layer). If you are not sure which option to choose, check with your - ISP or system administrator. -
        • Advanced: Click this option to set up additional outgoing SMTP - servers. Keep in mind that using more than one SMTP server can cause errors - in sending mail.
          • -
        -

         

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -
        - - -

        Mail & Newsgroup Preferences

        -

        This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Double-click the Mail & Newsgroups category to expand the list.
          3. -
        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & Newsgroups -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message Display -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Labels -

        Offline & Disk Space Preferences -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & Newsgroups

        -

        Mail & Newsgroups preferences allows you - to set general preferences that apply to all accounts. If you are not already - viewing the Mail & Newsgroups preferences, follow these steps: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Click the Mail & Newsgroups category. -
        -

        -
          - -
        • General Settings: Choose the type of three-pane layout to use for the Mail window. Choose to allow Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you before deleting folders. Select Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the default mail application for Windows and from within other applications such as Microsoft Word.
          • -

          Note: Setting Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the default mail application may disable another mail application. To restore it, deselect this option. -

        • Mail Start Page: Select this to set the Start Page. The Start Page appears in your Inbox when you first open Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups. This page is the default page, but you can enter a different web page or - URL of your choice. To disable the Start Page, deselect this option. Click Restore - Default to return to the original page provided by Mozilla. -

        • When a new message arrives: Select this if you want Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to play the default system sound whenever a new message arrives. -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message Display

        -

        Message Display preferences allow you to choose how messages are displayed - (for example, font style and color) in all accounts. If you are not already - viewing the Message Display settings, follow these steps: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message Display. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        -
          -

        • Plain-Text Messages: Select the font you prefer for viewing plain-text messages: fixed width - or variable width. Choosing a font style, size, and color for quoted plain-text messages can help you more easily - distinguish quoted text (usually a message that's been forwarded to you or - by you).

          -
        • Wrap text to fit window width: Select this so that incoming messages are word-wrapped to fit the width of your Mail window.
          • -
        • Display emoticons as graphics: Select this so that when you receive messages - that contain emoticons (also called smiley faces) Mail & Newsgroups can convert them to - graphics, for example: -

          - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
          This:Converts to:
          :-)
          :)
          :-(
          :(
          ;-)
          ;-p
          - -

        • Languages: Click the Character Coding drop-down list to select the language you want Mail & Newsgroups to use - as the default for incoming mail and newsgroup messages. This is recommended - if it's likely you might receive messages in which the character set is not - indicated, such as when reading messages in international newsgroups. -

        • Apply default to all messages: Select this to apply the default character coding to all messages. -

          Tip: You can later view or change the character set coding (language) - for a specific folder. In the Mail window, select a folder from the list of - Mail folders. Open the View menu, and choose Folder Character Coding. - -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition

        -

        Composition preferences affect how you create messages - (for example, forwarding options and address autocompletion) in all accounts. -If you are not already - viewing the Composition settings, follow these steps:: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Composition. (If - no options are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the - list.) -
        -
          -
        • Forwarding and Replying to Messages: Use the Forward Messages drop-down list to choose how you want forwarded message text to - appear: as an attachment or inline (in the body of your message).
          • -
        • Automatically quote the original message when replying: Select this to include the original message text in your reply. Then use the drop-down list to select - where you want to place your reply in the message area.
          • -
        • Composing Messages: Select to have Mail & Newsgroups always check the spelling - of your messages when you click Send. Choose to have Mail & Newsgroups use "quoted printable" MIME encoding when - sending regular messages that use an 8-bit character set (for example, Latin - ISO88359).
          • -
        • Wrap plain text messages at __ characters: Enter a number - to set the right margin for text in the message area.
          • -
        • Character Coding: Select the language you want - Mail & Newsgroups to use as the default for outgoing mail and newsgroup messages.
          • -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format

        - -

        Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format your outgoing messages. If you are not already viewing the Send Format settings, follow these steps: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Ask me what to do: This option requires Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you to choose a format before you send - the message.
          • -
        • Convert the message to plain text: This option may cause your message to lose formatting such as bold text.
          • -
        • Send the message in HTML anyway: If you select this option, keep in mind that some mail programs may have trouble - displaying the message.
          • -
        • Send the message in both plain text and HTML: This option uses more disk space.
          • - -
          -

          You can always override these preferences for an individual message by using - the Options menu in the Mail Compose window.

          -
        • HTML and Plain Text Domains: Use the Add button to add the domain names that you typically - send mail to, if you know which domains can display HTML-formatted mail messages, - and which domains can only display plain text.

          -
        -

        For example, if you typically send mail to multiple recipients that have - the same domain name (for example, your colleagues all have email addresses - that end in "netscape.net"), and you know that this domain name is capable - of displaying HTML messages, then you can add the netscape.net domain to the - list of HTML Domains so that Mail & Newsgroups will automatically send messages in HTML - format to these recipients. Similarly, if you typically send mail to recipients - at a domain that you know can only receive Plain Text messages, you can add - that domain name to the list of Plain Text domains, so that Mail & Newsgroups automatically - sends messages to that domain in plain-text format.

        - -

        Note: If you regularly compose HTML (formatted) mail messages, keep in mind that - sometimes not all recipients use mail programs that can display HTML formatting - properly. Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format messages that - go to recipients who cannot display HTML-formatted mail. You can convert messages to plain text, format them only as HTML, - or format them as both HTML and plain text. These preferences apply to all your - mail accounts, but only to mail messages and not to newsgroup messages. -

        Whenever you add a person or address card to your address book, you can specify - whether that addressee can receive HTML-formatted messages. However, when this - information is unknown, you can set Send Format preferences for how Mail & Newsgroups formats - these messages. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing

        -

        Addressing preferences allow you to control the settings for Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups address books - (for example, email address collection and address autocompletion). If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, follow these steps: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        -
          -
        • Email Address Collection: Select how Mail & Newsgroups will add senders' and recipients' addresses to your Collected Addresses book (from incoming, outgoing, or newsgroup messages). - -

          Note: If multiple matches are found, Mail & Newsgroups shows you a list of all possible choices. In addition to your Personal Address Book, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides you with - a Collected Addresses Book that can automatically store email addresses from - your incoming or outgoing messages, or both. For incoming mail messages, Mail & Newsgroups - stores the addresses in each message as soon as you open it. Addresses from - outgoing messages are stored as soon as you click Send. Your changes take effect the next time you start Mozilla. - -

        • Address Autocompletion: Address autocompletion allows you to quickly address mail without having to - search for names or type names completely. Select from which location Mail & Newsgroups will search for matching addresses: "Local Address Books" (Personal Address Book, Collected Addresses Book, or any other local address book) or "Directory Server" (an available LDAP directory server). -

          Note: If multiple matches are found, Mail & Newsgroups displays a list of all possible choices. - -

          If you select Directory Server, choose a directory server from the list. A directory server lets you look up addresses that are not stored - in one of your local address books. See Adding and Removing - LDAP Directories for information on setting LDAP directory server settings. -

          Note: Directory server settings you enter from the Preferences dialog - box apply to all your mail accounts. You can override these settings for - individual accounts by specifying different LDAP directory servers or server - settings using the Addressing settings for an account in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - dialog box. - -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Labels

        -

        This section describes how to use the Labels preferences panel. You use the Labels preferences to define the label text and colors for message labels. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Labels. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        -
          -
        • Customize Labels: Specifies the label text and the color for each label. You can edit or replace the default label text with your own text (up to 32 characters). To change the label color, click the color chip next to that label and select a new color.
          • -
        • Restore Defaults: Restores the default label text and colors.
          • -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - - - -

        Offline & Disk Space Preferences

        -

        This section describes how to use the Offline & Disk Space preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Click Offline & Disk Space.
          3. -
        - -

        The Offline & Disk Space preferences allow you to set preferences for startup mode, working offline, -going online, and disk space.

        -
          -
        • Offline: Select whether you want Mail & Newsgroups to remember the state (offline or online) in - which you last exited the program, or if you want to be asked which mode to - start in each time you start the program. Select how you want Mail & Newsgroups to handle messages - when going online or offline. -
        • Disk Space: Select this to conserve - disk space by automatically compacting message folders when it will save the - amount of disk space you enter. - -
        -

        See Working Offline for information on working - offline.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -
        -

        - 20 March 2002 -

        - - + + + +Using Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups + + + + + + + + +
        This document is provided by Mozilla for your information +only. It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security +of your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, +address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a recommendation +by Mozilla about what constitutes adequate privacy and security protection +on the Internet.
        +
        +

        Using Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you conveniently manage all +your Internet communications from one place. You can set up and +maintain multiple business and personal mail accounts and Internet +newsgroups, all from one window — the Mail & Newsgroups window. +

        + +

        To start using Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Mail & Newsgroups icon in the lower-left corner +of the Mozilla Navigator window.
          • +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
         Mail & Newsgroups icon
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Getting Started with Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups

        + +

        Reading Messages

        + +

        Sending Messages

        + +

        Creating HTML Mail Messages

        + +

        Using Attachments

        + +

        Deleting Messages

        + +

        Using Address Books

        + +

        Organizing Your Messages

        + +

        Importing Mail from Other +Programs

        + +

        Getting Started with +Newsgroups

        + +

        Working Offline

        + +

        Signing & +Encrypting Messages

        + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings

        + +

        Mail & Newsgroup +Preferences

        +
        + + + +
        + +

        Getting Started with Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Using the Mail Account Setup +Wizard

        + +

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News +Accounts

        + +

        Changing the Settings for an +Account

        + +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Using the Mail Account Setup Wizard

        + + + +

        To set up a mail or newsgroup account, first open the Window +menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups. If you haven't already set +up an account, the Account Wizard appears automatically, enabling +you to set up an account.

        + +

        The Account Wizard guides you through the process of creating a +new account. If you don't know a setting, click Cancel and ask your +Internet service provider (ISP) or help desk.

        + +

        If an account already exists, the Account Wizard doesn't appear +automatically when the Mail window opens. Instead, after opening +the Mail window, open the File menu and choose New, then Account. +For more details, see Setting Up +Additional Mail & News Accounts.

        + +

         

        + +

        Setting Up Mail Accounts with an ISP or Email Provider

        + +

        Before you set up a mail account, your ISP or email provider +should give you the following information:

        + +
          +
        • your user name
          • + +
        • your email address
          • + +
        • the incoming and outgoing mail server names
          • + +
        • the incoming server type (IMAP or POP)
          • +
        + +

        Before you set up a newsgroup account, your ISP or email +provider should give you the following information:

        + +
          +
        • your email address
          • + +
        • newsgroup server name
          • + +
        • account name
          • +
        + +

        To set up a new mail or newsgroup account, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click Add Account to start the Account Wizard. + +

          The information requested by the Account Wizard depends on the +type of new account you specify in its first window. The boldface +headings that follow correspond to the windows you'll see when +you're setting up an ISP or email provider account.

          +
          3. + +
        3. New Account Setup: Choose the type of account you want +to set up, then click Next.
          4. + +
        4. Identity: Enter the name and email address appropriate +for this account, then click Next.
          5. + +
        5. Server Information: Indicate whether you want a POP +account or an IMAP account. Not all service providers can support +both options. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server +Settings. + + +

          You must also provide the name of your incoming mail server and your outgoing +(SMTP) server here. This is the name of the mail server that sends your messages +(also known as the SMTP host). Click Next to continue.

          + + +

          Note: You need to specify only one outgoing mail server +(SMTP), even if you have several mail accounts. The name of your +SMTP host may not have been explicitly listed in the account setup +information provided to you. For example, your SMTP host may be the +same as your POP or IMAP host. If in doubt, contact your ISP or +system administrator.

          +
          6. + +
        6. User Name: Enter the user name provided by your ISP or +email provider, then click Next.
          7. + +
        7. Account Name: Enter whatever name you want to use to +refer to this account, then click Next.
          8. + +
        8. Congratulations! Verify that the information you entered +is correct. If necessary, verify the information you entered with +your ISP or system administrator. When you are sure that it's +correct, click Finish to set up your account.
          9. + +
        9. You see your new account listed in the left side of the Mail +& Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. Click OK to start +using your new account.
          10. +
        + +

        You are now ready to retrieve messages from your account. For +detailed instructions, see Getting New +Messages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News Accounts

        + +

        You use the Account Settings dialog box to add a new account or +to change information for an existing account, including:

        + +
          +
        • mail and newsgroup server settings (for example, message +deletion and download preferences)
          • + +
        • storage settings for message copies and folders
          • + +
        • your reply-to address, organization name, and signature
          • +
        + +

        To add a new account or change settings for an existing account, +begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box. You can perform these tasks:
          2. + +
            +
          • Add Account: Click this button to set up a new mail or +news account. Be sure to type the account information exactly as it +is given to you. Click Next or Back to move through the screens, or +click Cancel to stop account creation.
            • + +
          • Set as Default: Select an account, then click this +button to make the selected account appear at the top of your list +of accounts in the Mail Window. The change takes effect the next +time you open Mail & Newsgroups. + +

            The default account is the one that you want to log into and +(for IMAP accounts only) automatically check for new messages when +you first start Mail & Newsgroups. (For POP accounts, you must +always click the Get Msg button to get new messages.)

            +
            • + + + + +
          • Remove Account: Select an account, then click this +button to remove it completely from your Mail window.
            • + +
          • Outgoing Server (SMTP): Click this (at the bottom +of the list of accounts) to modify information about the outgoing +mail server. See Mail & +Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) for more +information.
            • +
          + + +
        2. Click headings under any account's name and modify the +corresponding settings in the panel on the right.
          3. + +
        3. Click OK to save your changes.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + +

         

        + +

        Changing the Settings for an Account

        + +

        To view or change information for an existing mail or newsgroup +account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the account name in the left-hand side of the Account +Settings dialog box. You see information about the account, such as +your email address and signature file, in the right side of the +dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Click any of these items beneath the name of an account to see +the corresponding settings:
          4. + +
            +
          • Server Settings: The settings available depend on the +type of server (IMAP, POP, or newsgroup server). For more +information, see Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings - Server Settings. + +

            Important: If you need to change the server type (for +example, from POP to IMAP) you must first remove the existing +account. Next, you must exit Mozilla and restart it. You can then +reopen the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box and +recreate an account with the new server type by clicking Add +Account.

            +
            • + +
          • Copies & Folders: These settings determine whether +to send automatic messages (blind carbon copies) and where you want +to store copies of outgoing messages, message drafts, and message +templates. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings - Copies & Folders.
            • + +
          • Addressing: These settings allow you to override the +global directory server settings specified for all address books in +the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - +Addressing.
            • + +
          • Offline & Disk Space (IMAP and News accounts only): +These settings apply when you are working offline (disconnected +from the Internet) or need to save download time and conserve disk +space. For more information, see Offline +and Disk Space Settings (IMAP) or Offline and Disk Space Settings (News).
            • + +
          • Disk Space (POP accounts only): This setting determines +the maximum size of messages that you are willing to download to +your hard disk. For more information, see Disk Space Settings (POP).
            • + +
          • Security: These settings determine which certificates are used to digitally +sign and encrypt mail messages that you send. Digital signatures +allow you to identify yourself reliably to others in mail messages +that you send. Encryption helps ensure that your messages remain +private while they are in transit over the Internet. For more +information, see Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings - Security.
            • +
          + + +
        4. Click OK to save your changes.
          5. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +
        + +

        Reading Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Getting New Messages

        + +

        Keeping Messages As New

        + +

        Choosing How You View the Mail +Window

        + +

        Sorting and Threading Messages

        + +

        Saving and Printing Messages

        + +

        Controlling Images, Scripts, and +Plugins

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Getting New Messages

        + +

        For an IMAP account, you can retrieve new messages automatically +and display them in the Inbox by opening Mail & Newsgroups and +selecting the Inbox for the IMAP account.

        + +

        For a POP account, you must select the Inbox and click Get Msgs +to retrieve your messages. By default, messages from your POP +account are deleted from the POP server when you retrieve them. You +can change your POP server settings to +store a copy of messages on the server in addition to downloading +them to your computer.

        + +

        You can also set up Mail & Newsgroups to get new messages at +startup and to check for new messages at timed intervals.

        + + + + + + + + + + +
         Mail & Newsgroups icon
        + +

        The Mail & Newsgroups icon on the status bar displays a +green arrow to notify you when new messages have arrived.

        + + + + + + + + + + +
         New mail notification
        + +

        To set up a mail account to automatically check for new +messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. If you have multiple accounts, select an account and click the +Server Settings category for that account.
          3. + +
        3. Select one or both of the following options in the Server +Settings section:
          4. + +
            +
          • Check for new mail at startup: Select this +checkbox if you want to check this account automatically for new +messages whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP +accounts, Mail & Newsgroups checks for new mail, but doesn't +download new messages until you click Get Msgs or unless you choose +"Automatically download any new messages".
            • + +
          • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Select this checkbox if you want to specify the number of minutes +between mail checks. You can also check for new messages at any +time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
            • +
          + + +
        4. Click OK. Your settings take effect the next time you start +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups.
          5. +
        + +

        To set up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to play a sound or +display an alert when new mail arrives, see Mail & Newsgroups Preferences +- Mail & Newsgroups.

        + +

        You can always retrieve messages manually at any time. To get +new messages for the selected account or newsgroup, do one of the +following:

        + +
          +
        • Click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.
          • + +
        • Open the File menu (in the Mail window) and choose Get New +Messages.
          • +
        + +

        To get new messages for all your mail accounts, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button in the Mail +toolbar.
          2. + +
        2. Choose Get All New Messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +retrieves new messages for all your mail accounts. + +

          If you are not currently logged into one of your mail accounts, +Mail & Newsgroups first prompts you to enter your user name and +password before retrieving new messages for that account. (If you +have already stored your user name and password using the Password +Manager, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't prompt you for this +information.)

          +
          3. +
        + +

        Note: You can also open the File menu (in the +Mail window) and choose "Get New Messages for".

        + +

        To get new messages for a specific mail account, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button on the Mail +toolbar.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the account for which you want to retrieve mail.
          3. +
        + +

        Note: Mail & Newsgroups prompts you for your password +the first time you retrieve messages for an account. You can choose +to have Mail & Newsgroups store your password in the Password +Manager at that time.

        + +

        Password Manager can save all your user names and passwords on +your own computer and enter them for you automatically. For more +information, see Using the Password +Manager.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Choosing How You View the Mail Window

        + +

        You can customize the layout of the Mail window (the window you +see when you choose Mail & Newsgroups from the Window +menu):

        + +
          +
        • Open the View menu and choose Show/Hide to show or hide the +Mail toolbar, search bar, or the status bar.
          • + +
        • Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then choose My +Sidebar to uncheck (hide) My Sidebar.
          • + +
        • Expand and collapse any pane to switch between a three-pane or +two-pane view. Choose a default view +in the Mail and Newsgroup Preferences panel. If you change the +default view, you must exit Mail & Newsgroups and then restart +Mozilla to have your changes take effect.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Sorting and Threading Messages

        + +

        To sort messages by categories such as subject, sender, date, or +priority, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        • Click the appropriate column heading in the message list +window. Or, open the View menu, choose Sort by, and then select the +column you want to sort by.
          • +
        + +

        To reorder column headings, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        • Click and drag a column heading to the left or right to +reposition the column.
          • +
        + +

        To group messages by threading (subject), so each message is +grouped with all its responses:

        + +
          +
        • Click the thread button to the left of the Subject, Sender, and +Date column headings.
          • +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
             
         Thread button
        + +

        Tip: To help you identify unread messages in a +collapsed thread where you've read the parent message, Mozilla +Mail & Newsgroups underlines the parent message.

        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + +

        Saving and Printing Messages

        + +

        To save a mail message as a plain-text, HTML, or Outlook Express +file:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Mail window, select the message.
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu and choose Save As, and then choose +File.
          3. + +
        3. For "Save as type", choose a file type (HTML, Text, or Mail +file). Choose Mail file if you want to save the message so it can +be opened by Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express.
          4. + +
        4. Change the filename's extension to end in .html, .txt, or .eml, +depending on the file type you chose in step 3.
          5. + +
        5. Choose a destination for the file and click Save.
          6. +
        + +

        To print a selected message:

        + +
          +
        • Click Print.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of section +]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Controlling Images, Scripts, and Plugins

        + +

        By default, you can view remote images in the mail messages you +receive. To avoid downloading images embedded in web pages sent as +message attachments:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Images. (If no +subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to +expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Check "Do not load remote images in Mail & Newsgroup +messages".
          4. + +
        4. Click OK to have your change take affect.
          5. +
        + +

        By default, JavaScript is not enabled and plugins are enabled +for mail messages you receive. To change these settings:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Plugins. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the +list.)
          3. + +
        3. Under "Enable JavaScript for", check "Mail & Newsgroups" to +enable JavaScript for web pages viewed in mail messages.
          4. + +
        4. Under "Enable Plugins for", uncheck "Mail & Newsgroups" to +disable plugins.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK to have your changes take affect.
          6. +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of section +]

        + +

         

        + +
        + + + + +

        Sending Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup +Messages

        + +

        Using the Message Composition +Window

        + +

        Addressing a Message

        + +

        Selecting Message Sending +Options

        + +

        Replying to a Message

        + +

        Forwarding a Message

        + +

        Confirming That Your Message +Was Opened

        + +

        Saving and Editing a Message +Draft

        + +

        Creating and Using Templates

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        You can address, compose, reply to, or send a new message by +doing one of the following:

        + +
          +
        • In any Mozilla window, open the File menu and choose New, then +Message.
          • + +
        • Click Compose on the Mail toolbar.
          • + +
        • While displaying a message, click Reply, Forward, or Reply All +on the Mail toolbar.
          • + +
        • From the Address Book window, select an address and click +Compose on the Address Book.
          • +
        + +

        Tip: Use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings +dialog box to specify the HTML text editor to use for +composing messages sent from this account. (You can specify a +different editor for each of your accounts.) Select the account, and check "Compose +messages in HTML format" to use the HTML text editor for all +messages. See Changing the Settings for an +Account for more information.

        + +

        Composing messages in HTML format allows you to use +different fonts, text styles (such as bold or italic) and text +colors, tables, numbered or bulleted lists, and pictures in your +messages. However, some recipients may only be able to read +messages composed in plain text format. If you want to use the +plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key +while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the +plain-text editor on an as-needed basis.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Using the Message Composition Window

        + +

        Use the Compose window to address, compose, and send mail and +newsgroup messages. First specify whether you want to compose +messages in plain text or HTML in the Account Settings Preferences +panel (open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings).

        + +

        To view the Compose window, click the Compose button on the +Mail toolbar.

        + +

        The Compose window contains the following:

        + +
          +
        • Mail Toolbar
          • + +
        • +

          You can click the following buttons:

          + +
            +
          • Send: To send a completed message.
            • + +
          • Address: To search for names in your address books.
            • + +
          • Attach: To attach a file to a message. See Using Attachments for more +information.
            • + +
          • Security: To display information about whether your +message will be sent encrypted or digitally signed (or both).
            • + +
          • Save: To save the message as a draft.
            • +
          +
          • + +
        • Addressing area: Where you enter the email addresses of +recipients.
          • + +
        • Attachments area: When you attach files to a message (by +clicking in this area or by clicking the Attach button), the +filenames will be listed in the Attachments area to the right of +the Addressing area.
          • + +
        • Message body area: Where you type the contents of your +message.
          • +
        + +

        If you've chosen to compose messages using the HTML editor, you +see an additional toolbar with text formatting buttons similar to +those in Mozilla Composer.

        + +

        For help using the HTML editor, see Formatting Your Web Pages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Addressing a Message

        + +

        To address a mail message:

        + +
          +
        1. Type the name in the addressing area.
          2. + + +

          If you have address autocompletion +enabled (it's enabled by default), type the first few letters of +the recipient's name and wait for Mail & Newsgroups to complete +the address. (Or you can type part of the name and immediately +press Enter to have Mail & Newsgroups try to complete the +address.)

          + + +
        2. If multiple addresses are displayed, select an address and +press Enter.
          3. + + +

          Note: Use a comma to separate multiple addresses on the +same line. Do not use a comma to separate first or last names. +For example, multiple entries might be:

          +

          user1@netscape.net,user2@netscape.net

          + + +
        3. If you want this message to be sent from a different account, +click the "From" field to select the account you want. See Changing the Account From Which a Message is Sent +for more information.
          4. + +
        4. If necessary, click "To" to choose a different recipient +type:
          5. + +
        5. +
            +
          • To: For primary recipients of your message.
            • + +
          • Cc: For secondary recipients (carbon copy).
            • + +
          • Bcc: For secondary recipients not identified to the +other recipients, including those in the cc list (blind carbon +copy).
            • + +
          • Reply-To: For recipients to reply to a different email +address other than the one the message is sent from.
            • + +
          • Newsgroup: For posting to a newsgroup.
            • + +
          • Followup-To: For redirecting a newsgroup posting, so +that subsequent replies go directly to the redirected newsgroup +instead of the original newsgroup.
            • +
          +
          6. +
        + +

        Tip: You can quickly address a message by clicking the +email address contained in a message you're reading, and then +selecting Compose Mail To from the pop-up menu.

        + + + +

        Changing the Account From Which a Message is Sent

        + +

        If you have multiple mail accounts, the account listed in the +From field is based on the account (or server) you selected when +you choose to create a new message. However, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups also allows you to change the account a message is sent +from while you're composing a message. Click the From field to view +a list of your accounts and then select the account you want. A +copy of the message is saved in the Sent folder of the account +where you sent the message from.

        + +

        About Address Autocompletion

        + +

        Address autocompletion allows you to address mail easily from +the Compose window without having to search for names or type +complete names. Mail & Newsgroups automatically checks your +address books and an LDAP +directory server (if available) and completes the name if it finds +a unique match. It also prevents mistakes by showing all possible +choices with additional information if it finds multiple matches. +Address autocompletion is enabled by default.

        + +

        If you don't want to use an address that Mail & Newsgroups +provides, press Backspace or Delete to remove characters and then +enter an alternate address.

        + +

        To disable address autocompletion:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list).
          3. + +
        3. In the Address Autocompletion section, deselect "Local Address +Books" and "Directory Server."
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Selecting Message Sending Options

        + +

        While you're composing a message, you can select these +additional message sending options from the Options menu:

        + +
          +
        • Select Addresses: The Select Addresses option lets you +choose the recipient's email address from your Address Books or a +remote directory. To look up an address in an address book or +directory, enter the first few letters of the recipient's first or +last name to start the search. Select an address and then click +To:, Cc:, or Bcc: to address your message.
          • + +
        • Rewrap: If you are composing a message using the +plain-text editor, you can use the Rewrap command to rewrap long +lines of quoted text to fit the Compose window. This command +rewraps selected quoted text to the number of characters specified +by the Composition +preferences. This command is primarily useful when you are replying +to a message where the original message is quoted in your reply, +and the original message contains long lines. + +

          You use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings command on +the Edit menu to specify that you want to use the plain-text editor +for composing messages. In the Account Settings dialog box, select +the account, and uncheck "Compose messages in HTML format" to use +the plain-text editor for all messages. If you only want to use the +plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key +while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the +plain-text editor on an as-needed basis.

          +
          • + +
        • Return Receipt: Choose this option to request a +confirmation message when the recipient displays (opens) the +message. Keep in mind that the recipient may choose not to send you +a return receipt. This option lets you enable or disable return +receipt requests on a per-message basis. To automatically request +return receipts for all messages you send, use the return receipts +preferences. See Mail +& Newsgroups Preferences - Return Receipts for more +information.
          • + +
        • Format: Send the message as plain text, or HTML +(formatted), or both. If you choose "Auto-Detect," Mail & +Newsgroups prompts you for the format to use if it's unknown +whether the recipient's mail program can display an HTML message. +The format you choose here overrides the send format you specified +using the Preferences command on the Edit menu.
          • + +
        • Priority: Choose a priority to indicate whether the +message has lowest, low, normal, high, or highest priority.
          • + +
        • Send a Copy To: Choose this if you want to file an +additional copy of the sent message in a different folder than your +default Sent folder. Then select the folder you want.
          • + +
        • Security: Choose this to change the default +security options for this message.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + +

        Replying to a Message

        + +

        To reply to a mail message:

        + +
          +
        • Select the message.
          • + +
        • Click Reply to respond to the sender alone.
          • + +
        • Click Reply All to respond to all addressees in the +message.
          • +
        + +

        To include the original message each time you reply to any +message, and to specify how to place the original message in the +reply:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the +list.)
          3. + +
        3. Select "Automatically quote the original message when +replying."
          4. + +
        4. Specify where in the message to place your reply. "Start my +reply above the quoted text" is the default.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Forwarding a Message

        + +

        When you forward a message, you can specify how to place new +text relative to the original text: inline (in the body of +the message; this is the default), or as an attachment.

        + +

        To forward a message:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message and click Forward.
          2. + +
        2. Type the name or email address of the recipient.
          3. + +
        3. Click Send.
          4. +
        + +

        To set the default for forwarding messages:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the +list.)
          3. + +
        3. For forwarding messages, choose Inline (in the message body) or +As Attachment.
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        Tip: To override the default for forwarding a +message, select the message, open the Message menu, and choose +Forward As, then choose Inline or Attachment.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Confirming That Your Message Was Opened

        + +

        You can use return receipts to notify you when a recipient has +displayed (opened) your message. The recipient must be using a mail +program that supports the Message Disposition Notification (MDN) +standard. Keep in mind that the recipient may choose not to send +you a return receipt, even if you've requested one. Messages you +send to a newsgroup address will not include a return receipt +request, since news servers don't support this feature.

        + +

        To request return receipts for all messages you send, you can +enable the global Return Receipt preferences. You also use the +global Return Receipt preferences to specify how to manage requests you +receive for return receipts. You can override these global +preferences for individual accounts.

        + +

        To request a return receipt on a per-message basis:

        + +
          +
        • From a Mail Compose window, open the Options menu, and choose +Return Receipt.
          • +
        + +

        To automatically request return receipts when sending messages +from each of your mail accounts:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Return Receipts. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to +expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Select "When sending messages, always request a return +receipt."
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        For more information on setting return receipt preferences, see +Mail & Newsgroups +Preferences - Return Receipts.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Saving and Editing a Message Draft

        + +

        To save a mail message as a draft so you can complete it +later:

        + +
          +
        • In the Compose window, click Save, or open the File menu and +choose Save as Draft. By default, the message is saved in the +Drafts folder for the current account. + +

          Note: Your mail message will stay open after you save it +as a draft.

          +
          • +
        + +

        To edit or send a message draft, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Drafts folder +for the account where you created the message draft.
          2. + +
        2. Click the message that you want to edit.
          3. + +
        3. In the top-right corner of the message, click the Edit Draft +button.
          4. + +
        4. Edit the message as necessary.
          5. + +
        5. Click Send to send the message or click Save to save the +message so you can complete it later.
          6. + +
        6. +

          Note: Sending the message removes it from the Drafts +folder.

          +
          7. +
        + +

        Tip: You can also double-click the message to open it for +editing. This is especially useful if the message pane is +closed.
        +

        + +

        To delete one or more unwanted message drafts, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Drafts folder +for the account where you created the message drafts.
          2. + +
        2. Select the message drafts that you want to delete.
          3. + +
        3. Click Delete in the Mail toolbar.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Creating and Using Templates

        + +

        Templates are useful for setting the default format for messages +that you send regularly, such as weekly status reports. You can +save a message as a template from any window in which it is +displayed, including from within a Mail compose window.

        + +

        To save a message to use as a template:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Mail window, click Compose to create a new message and +then set the default font, text size, text color, background color, +and any other default formatting you want.
          2. + +

          Alternatively, open an existing message that already has the +formatting you want.

          + +
        2. While displaying the message, open the File menu, choose Save +As, then choose Template. The message is stored as a template in +the Templates folder for the current mail account.
          3. +
        + +

        To compose a message using a template:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Mail window, select the Templates folder for the account +where you created the message template.
          2. + +
        2. Double-click the message template to open it.
          3. + +
        3. Edit the message, then save it (to put it in the Drafts folder) +or send it.
          4. + +
        4. +

          Note: Sending the message does not remove the template +from the Templates folder. The template is preserved for future +use.

          +
          5. +
        + +

        To delete one or more unwanted message templates, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Templates +folder for the account where you created the message +templates.
          2. + +
        2. Select the message templates that you want to delete.
          3. + +
        3. Click Delete in the Mail toolbar.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of section +]

        + +

         

        + + + + +
        + +

        Creating HTML Mail Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Using HTML in Your Messages

        + +

        Choosing HTML Message Sending +Options

        + +

        Specifying Recipients for HTML +Messages

        + +

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML +Messages

        + +

        Using the HTML Mail Question +Dialog Box

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Using HTML in Your Messages

        + +

        HTML messages can include formatted text, links, images, and +tables—just like a web page. However, some recipients may not +be able to receive HTML messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +allows you to compose mail and newsgroup messages using either the +HTML (rich-text) formatting editor or the plain-text editor for +each mail account you have. In addition, you can choose whether +your addressees should receive HTML or plain-text messages by +default, and how Mail & Newsgroups should handle messages when +it's not known if an addressee can receive HTML-formatted mail.

        + +

        To specify whether to use the HTML editor as the default for +composing messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the mail or newsgroup account you want to use.
          3. + +
        3. Select "Compose messages in HTML format." You see the +Formatting toolbar in the Compose window. Leave this box unchecked +to use the plain-text editor for this account.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Editing or Inserting HTML Elements

        + +

        If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can +edit or insert additional HTML tags, style attributes, and +JavaScript in your mail message. If you are not sure how to work +with HTML source code, it's best not to change it. To work with +HTML code, use one of these methods:

        + +
          +
        • Place the insertion point where you want to insert the HTML +code, then open the Insert menu and choose HTML. In the Insert HTML +dialog box, enter HTML tags and text, and then click Insert to +insert your changes.
          • + +
        • Select the HTML source code that you want to edit, then open +the Insert menu and choose HTML. In the Insert HTML dialog box, +edit HTML tags and text, and then click Insert to insert your +changes.
          • + +
        • Select an element such as a table, named anchor, image, link, +or horizontal line. Double-click the element to open the associated +properties dialog box for that item. Click Advanced Edit to open +the Advanced Property Editor. You can use the Advanced Property +Editor to add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects.
          • +
        + +

        For more information on editing HTML source code, see Using the Advanced Property +Editor.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Choosing HTML Mail Sending Options

        + +

        By default, Mail & Newsgroups prompts you before sending +HTML messages when it's not known whether the recipient's mail +program can display HTML-formatted messages.

        + +

        To choose sending-format options for mail messages, begin from +the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to +expand the list). + +

          Note: This preference applies only to mail messages, not +to newsgroup messages.

          +
          3. + +
        3. Select the option you want and then click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        If while composing a message you realize that one or more +recipients may not be able to receive HTML-formatted mail, you can +easily convert the message to a different format when you click +Send:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Compose window, open the Options menu and choose +Format.
          2. + +
        2. Select the format you want to use for sending the message from the submenu:
          3. + +
            +
          • Auto Detect: Mail & Newsgroups chooses the +appropriate format for the message text. If it can't determine the +format, it asks you to choose a format.
            • + +
          • Plain Text Only: The message may not display +formatting such as bold text, but all mail programs will be able to +display the message.
            • + +
          • Rich Text (HTML) Only: Some mail programs may +have trouble displaying an HTML-formatted message. Choose this +option only if you are sure the recipient's mail program can +display HTML-formatted mail.
            • + +
          • Plain and Rich (HTML) Text: This uses more +disk space, but may be the best choice if you are not sure whether +the recipient's mail program can display HTML-formatted mail.
            • +
          + + +
        3. When you've finished composing the message, click Send.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Specifying Recipients for HTML Messages

        + +

        You can save time by indicating whether individuals in your +address books prefer to receive either HTML messages or plain text +messages.

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Select the address book on the left and then select the +individual's card on the right.
          3. + +
        3. Click Properties to display the "Card for" dialog box.
          4. + +
        4. In the Name tab, use the "Prefers to receive messages formatted +as" drop-down list to select HTML if you know this recipient can +read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that include links, +images, or tables).
          5. + +

          If this recipient can only read messages sent as plain text (no +formatting), then choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not +sure, choose Unknown.

          + +

          If you choose Unknown, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups determines +the sending format based on the Send Format settings for Mail & +Newsgroups in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & Newsgroups +still can't determine the correct format, it will prompt you to +choose a sending format when you send the message.

          + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML Messages

        + +

        You can quickly view the HTML and other code that generates an +HTML message you've received:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list window, open the message.
          2. + +
        2. Open the View menu and choose Message Source.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Using the HTML Mail Question Dialog Box

        + +

        The HTML Mail Question dialog box appears when you try to send a +message to someone whose mail program may not be able to display +HTML messages or when Mail & Newsgroups cannot determine +whether your recipient can display HTML messages. If you are in +doubt, send the message in both HTML and plain-text formats.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +
        + +

        Using Attachments

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Attaching a File or Web Page

        + +

        Viewing and Opening +Attachments

        + +

        Saving Attachments

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Attaching a File or Web Page

        + +

        To attach a file to an outgoing mail message:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Compose window, click Attach or open the File menu and +choose Attach File. You see the "Enter file to attach" dialog +box. + +

          Tip: You can also click inside the Attachments area to +attach a file.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Type the name of the file you want to attach, or select a file +from your hard drive that you want to attach.
          3. + +
        3. Click Open. The filename appears in the Attachments area.
          4. +
        + +

        Tip: You can also drag and drop one or more files from +your desktop into the Attachments area in the Compose window.

        + +

        To attach a web page to an outgoing mail message:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Compose window, open the File menu and choose Attach Web +Page.
          2. + +
        2. In the dialog box, enter the URL of the page and then click OK. +The web page URL appears in the Attachments area.
          3. +
        + +

        Tip: When you are viewing a page in the Navigator +browser, you can send the page to someone by opening the File menu +and choosing Send Page.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Viewing and Opening Attachments

        + +

        If you receive a mail attachment that consists of a file type +that Mozilla can display (such as graphic files and HTML files), +you see the attachment displayed inline (in the body of the +message). For other file types, Mail & Newsgroups lets you open +the attachment using another application, or you can save the +attachment on your hard disk.

        + +

        To open the attachment, make sure you have a program on your +computer that can open files of the same type as the attachment's +file format. For example, if you want to open a .DOC file, make +sure you have a program on your computer that can open .DOC +files.

        + +

        To open an attachment:

        + +
          +
        1. Double-click the attachment you want (if there is more than +one).
          2. + +
        2. In the Downloading dialog box, choose what you want Mozilla to +do with the attachment: +


          +
            +
          • If Mozilla finds an application on your hard disk that can +open the attachment, you can open the attachment using that +application. Click "Choose" to use a different application to open +the attachment.
            • + +
          • If Mozilla can't find an application on your hard disk that +can open the attachment, you can save the attachment. You won't be +able to open the attachment, but at least you can save it on your +hard disk until you can install an application that can open +it.
            • + +
          • Click "Advanced" to add a new file type to the list of helper +applications. Mozilla uses helper applications to determine how +different file types are opened by other applications from within +Mozilla. For more information, see Managing Different File +Types.
            • +
          +
          3. + +
        3. Click OK.
          4. + +
        + +

        Note: If you are viewing your mail using an IMAP mail +server, all attachments remain on the server.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Saving Attachments

        + +

        To save an attachment:

        + +
          +
        1. In the right side of the message envelope, under "Attachments," select the +attachment that you want to save.
          2. + +
        2. Right-click (Control-click on Macintosh) the attachment and +choose Save As from the pop-up menu.
          3. + +
        3. Choose a filename and location for the attachment on your hard +disk and then click OK. Mail & Newsgroups downloads the +attachment and saves it to the specified location.
          4. +
        + +

        Tip: To save all attachments, right-click the first one +in the attachment list, and choose Save All. You can then specify +the location where you want all the attachments to be saved.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +
        + +

        Deleting Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Deleting POP or IMAP Messages

        + +

        Moving Messages to and from the +Trash

        + +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        Deleting POP or IMAP Messages

        + +

        How you delete messages depends on your mail server type: POP or +IMAP. Deleted POP messages are automatically moved to the Trash +folder. IMAP users can set different options for deleting +messages.

        + +

        To delete messages from your Inbox or other folders, begin from +the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete. By +default, Mail & Newsgroups moves the selected messages to the +Trash folder.
          2. + +
        2. To delete messages permanently, open the File menu and choose +Empty Trash.
          3. +
        + +

        To delete messages without opening them, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the View menu and choose Show/Hide, and then uncheck +Message Pane. + +

          Alternatively, click the Message Pane handle (the ridged area +centered at the bottom of the message list) to close the message +pane.

          +
          2. + +
        2. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete.
          3. +
        + +

        To set deletion preferences for IMAP messages:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Locate the IMAP account you want, and then click the Server +Settings category under the account name.
          3. + +
        3. Select the options you want for +deleting messages and click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Moving Messages To and From the Trash

        + +

        If you use a POP server to deliver your mail, or if you set up +IMAP to use the Trash folder, follow these steps to delete messages +from your Inbox or other folders:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select the messages you want to +delete.
          2. + +
        2. Click Delete. Mail & Newsgroups moves the messages to the +Trash folder.
          3. +
        + +

        To recover messages from the Trash:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Trash folder.
          2. + +
        2. Select the messages you want to recover and drag them to +another folder.
          3. +
        + +

        To delete messages permanently:

        + +
          +
        • Open the File menu and choose Empty Trash.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + +

         

        + + + +
        + +

        Using Address Books

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        About Address Books

        + +

        Adding Entries to Your Address +Books

        + +

        Creating a New Address Book

        + +

        Creating a New Address Book +Card

        + +

        Creating a Mailing List

        + +

        Editing a Mailing List

        + +

        Searching Address Books and +Directories

        + +

        Importing Address Books

        + +

        Exporting Address Books

        + +

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories

        +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        About Address Books

        + +

        Address books store email addresses and contact information for +people you typically send mail to, such as colleagues, friends, and +family. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides you with two +address books: the Personal Address Book and the Collected +Addresses Book—and you can create additional address books as +well. You can also import address books from other mail programs +and previous versions of Mozilla. The contents of these address +books are stored locally on your hard disk.

        + +

        Your address book may also list email addresses from an LDAP +directory, which is located on an LDAP directory server. The +directory server stores email addresses of people that are not +included in your locally-stored address books. The Lightweight +Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an industry-standard method for +accessing Internet or intranet directory services such as corporate address +books.

        + +

        Personal Address Book

        + +

        Use the Personal Address Book to add specific names of your +choice. You can create mailing lists and edit individual address +entries.

        + +

        Collected Addresses

        + +

        By default, the Collected Address Book automatically collects the email +addresses contained in outgoing mail messages. Addresses from outgoing messages +are stored in the Collected Address Book as soon as you click Send. The Collected +Address Book can also save the sender's address in each incoming message. +To enable this feature, you must change the preferences for email address +collection. +The preferences also let you choose which types of addresses you want to +collect (only addresses from mail messages or addresses from both mail and +newsgroup messages).

        + +

        LDAP Directory (if available)

        + +

        An LDAP directory (also known as an address lookup service) +stores email addresses of recipients who are not in your +locally-stored address books. LDAP directories offer you access to +large, centrally maintained databases of email addresses, which is +especially useful with address +autocompletion.

        + +

        Automatic address collection is enabled by default. To change automatic address collection settings, begin in the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Under Email Address Collection, choose whether you want +to: +


          +
            +
          • Use this feature for incoming or outgoing messages, or +both.
            • + +
          • Use this feature for newsgroup messages.
            • + +
          • Limit the size of the Collected Address book. The default size +is 700 cards. If you add a new card that exceeds the limit, the +oldest card is removed and the new card is added, keeping the total +number of cards the same.
            • +
          +
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        +


        +

        Opening the Address Book Window

        + +

        To open the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        • Open the Window menu and choose Address Book, or click the +Address Book icon in the lower-left corner of any Mozilla window.
          • + +
        • + + + + + + + + + +
           Address Book icon
          +
          • +
        +


        +

        Changing the Address Book Window Display

        + +

        To customize how the Address Book window and the cards are +displayed:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book. You see the +Address Book window.
          2. + +
        2. In the Address Book window, open the View menu and choose from +the following display options:
          3. + +
        3. +
            +
          • Choose Show/Hide, and then select the item you wish to uncheck +(hide) or check (show).
            • + +
          • Choose Show Name As, and then select how you want card names +displayed (first/last, last/first, or Display Name).
            • + +
          • Choose Sort by, and then select a sort option.
            • +
          +
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Adding Entries to Your Address Books

        + +

        You can use any of the following ways to add entries to your +address books:

        + +
          +
        • Click a name in the From or recipient fields (for example, To +or Cc) in a message you've received, and then select "Add to +Address Book" from the drop-down list.
          • + +
        • In the Address Book window, click New Card to create a new +address book card.
          • + +
        • Open a message, which automatically adds the sender's address +to your Collected Addresses Book (if enabled).
          • + +
        • In the Address Book window, copy entries to another address +book by selecting the entries and dragging them over the name of +the address book you want to copy them to.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Creating a New Address Book

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides a default personal +address book, but you can create additional address books.

        + +

        To create a new address book:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Address Book icon in the lower-left corner of any Mozilla window, +or open the Window menu and choose Address Book. You see the Address Book +window. + + + + + + + + +
          Address Book icon
          +
          2. + +
        2. In the Address Book window, open the File menu, choose New, and +choose Address Book. You see the New Address Book dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Type the name of the new address book, and click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Creating a New Address Book Card

        + +

        Address book cards can be used to store names, postal addresses, +email addresses, phone numbers, and information such as whether the +addressee prefers to receive plain-text or HTML-formatted +messages.

        + +

        To create an address book card for an individual:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the +Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Click New Card. (If you have multiple address books, select the +one to which you want to add a card.)
          3. + +
        3. Each New Card dialog box has four tabs:
          4. + +
        4. +
            +
          • Name: Enter the following information: +


            +
              +
            • First and Last (first and last name of person as you want it to +appear in the address book).
              • + +
            • Display name (the name that appears in the "To" field of the +Compose window).
              • + +
            • Nickname (a shortcut or alias for the real name).
              • + +
            • Email address (primary and additional address).
              • + +
            • Prefers to receive messages formatted as: If you know this +recipient can read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that +include links, images, or tables), choose HTML. If this recipient +can only read messages sent as plain text (no formatting), then +choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not sure, choose +Unknown. If you choose Unknown, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +determines the sending format based on the Mail & Newsgroups +Send Format settings in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & +Newsgroups still can't determine the correct format, Mail & +Newsgroups will prompt you to choose a sending format when you send +the message.
              • + +
            • Phones (enter phone numbers for this person)
              • +
            +
            • + +
          • Address: Type additional information such as street +address, phone number, and URL. + + + + + + +

            Tip: If you enter address information, Mozilla +displays a Get Map button next to the address when you view this +entry's address book card in your address book. Clicking the Get +Map button displays a web page that contains a map to the +address.

            +
            • + +
          • Other: Store any additional information you +want.
            • +
          +
          5. +
        + +

        Tip: To quickly add entries to your address book, click +any email address in messages you receive and select Add to Address +Book from the drop-down list. The New Card dialog box appears where +you can complete the information.

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Viewing or Editing Card Properties

        + +

        To view or edit the properties for an individual card:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the card from the list of entries in the Address Book +window.
          2. + +
        2. Click Properties.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Creating a Mailing List

        + +

        If you regularly send messages to a group of recipients, you can +quickly address a message by using a mailing list that contains the +names you want.

        + +

        To create a mailing list and add it to your address book:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Address Book window, click New List.
          2. + +
        2. Enter the following information in the Mailing List dialog +box: + +
            +
          • Click the drop-down list at "Add to" to choose an address book +in which to store the list.
            • + +
          • List name: When you enter the list name in the "To" field of a +message, everyone on the list receives your message.
            • + +
          • List nickname: Alias (or shortcut) for the list name.
            • + +
          • Description: Appears after the list name in the address line of +the Compose window.
            • +
          +
          3. +
        3. Type email addresses to add them to the mailing list.
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        In the left side of the Address Book window, the mailing list +appears underneath the address book you added it to.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Editing a Mailing List

        + +

        Mailing lists are stored in the address book in which you +created them.

        + +

        To remove a member from the list, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by +clicking the small triangle beside the address book title.
          3. + +
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. The list +members appear to the right of the mailing list name.
          4. + +
        4. Click the entry you wish to delete.
          5. + +
        5. Click the Delete button.
          6. +
        + +

        To add members to a mailing list:

        + +
          +
        1. Open Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by +clicking the small triangle beside the address book title.
          3. + +
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name.
          4. + +
        4. Click Properties.
          5. + +
        5. Add or remove entries as necessary.
          6. + +
        6. Click OK when you are done.
          7. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching Address Books and Directories

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly search an +address book or directory by name or email address, or use a +combination of criteria to perform a more specific search through +an address book or directory.

        + +

        To quickly search an address book or directory for a name or +email address, begin from the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Address Book window, in the list of address books, +select the address book or directory that you want to search.
          2. + +
        2. In the "Name or Email contains" field, type the name or +email address that you want to find. You can type only part of the +name or email address, or you can type the exact text that you want +to find. + +

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +displays only those entries where the name or email address +contains the search text you entered.

          +
          3. + +
        3. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all entries.
          4. +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching for Specific Entries

        + +

        You can search address books or directories for specific +entries. If you are not already viewing the Advanced Address Book +Search dialog box, begin from the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Search Addresses. You see the +Advanced Address Book Search dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Next to "Search in", choose the address book or directory +through which you want to search.
          3. + +
        3. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search +for entries either that match all or at least one of the conditions +(criteria) that you choose.
          4. + +
        4. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          5. + +
        5. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. +The search results appear in lower part of the dialog box.
          6. + +
        6. To sort the entries in a different order, click the column that +you want to sort by.
          7. + +
        7. To view the card for an entry, select the entry and click +Properties.
          8. + +
        8. To compose a message to selected recipients, select one or more +entries and click Compose.
          9. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + +

        Importing Address Books

        + +

        If you have a Mozilla 6 address book from another user profile +or computer, or if you have an address book from a previous version +of Mozilla Communicator or another mail program, you can import +its entries into the Address Book window as a new address book. +Keep in mind that when you upgrade a user profile from an earlier +version of Mozilla, your address books are automatically included, +so there's no need to import them.

        + +

        You can import address books from Communicator, Mozilla 6, +Eudora, Outlook, Outlook Express, or text files (LDIF, +tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) +formats). When you import an address book, Mail & Newsgroups +creates a new address book with the imported entries.

        + +

        You can also import mail messages and +settings from Communicator, Eudora, Outlook, and Outlook +Express.

        + +

        To import an address book, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Mail Import +Wizard.
          +
          2. + +
        2. Follow the instructions to import address books.
          3. + +
        3. +

          Tip: Communicator address book files (pab.na2) +are stored in your user profile directory (for example, C:\Program +Files\Mozilla\Users, where \Users contains the user profiles +directories).

          +
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Exporting Address Books

        + +

        You can export a Mozilla address book if you later want to +import it into another user profile, move it to another computer, +or use it with another program that can import address books. You +can export an address book to one of these file formats: Mozilla +(.ldif), tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text +(.txt) formats.

        + +

        To export an address book, begin from the Address Book +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the address book that you want to export.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Tools menu, and choose Export.
          3. + +
        3. In the Export Address Book dialog box, browse to the location +where you want to save the address book file.
          4. + +
        4. Choose the file format for the exported address book (.ldif, +comma-separated, or tab-delimited).
          5. + +
        5. Enter a name for the address book file. Be sure to include the +appropriate file extension (.ldif, .csv, .tab, or .txt).
          6. + +
        6. Click Save.
          7. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories

        + +

        Adding an LDAP directory to your address book allows you to +search the directory for email addresses and other contact +information. You can also use the directory for address + +autocompletion when addressing mail messages.

        + +

        You typically add or remove LDAP directories using instructions +provided by your system administrator. Check with your system +administrator for the information you will need in order to add a +new directory to your address book.

        + +

        To add a new directory, begin from the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu, and choose New, and then choose LDAP +Directory. You see the Directory Server Properties dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Type the following information in the Directory Server +Properties dialog box General tab: +


          +
            +
          • Name: Enter the name of the directory service (for +example, InfoSpace Directory).
            • + +
          • Host Name: Enter the name of the host name server, such +as ldap.infospace.com.
            • + +
          • Base DN: This setting is used to set the Base +distinguished name. Enter codes to restrict searching to a specific +country or organization. For example, c=JP restricts the search to +Japan only. Base DN also specifies the organization to search on +within the directory (for instance, o=Mozilla Communications +Corporation, c=US).
            • + +
          • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP server. +The default is 389.
            • + +
          • Bind DN: The distinguished name that is used to authenticate (log +in) to the LDAP server. If left blank, the LDAP server binds anonymously.
            • + +
          • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your +LDAP server supports secure (encrypted) connections. If you are +unsure, contact your system administrator.
            • +
          +
          3. + +
        3. Click the Advanced tab to configure LDAP directory server +settings.
          4. + +
        4. Type the following information: +


          +
            +
          • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you +limit the number of autocompletion matches returned by the +directory server. Enter the maximum number of email address matches +to display for autocompletion.
            • + +
          • Scope: Defines the limits of the search. Choose one of +the following: +


            +
              +
            • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN and one level below the base DN.
              • + +
            • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the +least restrictive search.
              • +
            +
            • + +
          • Search filter: Enter the search filter to apply to +matching results that are within the specified scope of the +search.
            • +
          + +
        5. Click OK to close the Directory Server Properties dialog +box.
          6. + +
        6. Click OK to close the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box.
          7. + +
        7. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
          8. +
        + +

        The directory you added appears in the list of address books in +the Address Book window.

        + +

        To delete a directory:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog +box, click Edit Directories.
          4. + +
        4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, select the directory +that you want to delete and click Delete.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK, then click OK again to close the Preferences dialog +box.
          6. +
        + +

        For information on downloading or synchronizing a directory for +offline use so that you can search it or use it for address book +autocompletion while working offline, see Downloading Directory Entries for Offline +Use.

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Directory Server Settings

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Directory Server Settings +dialog box, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Window menu, and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. In the list of address books, select a directory.
          3. + +
        3. Click Properties.
          4. +
        + +

        General Tab

        + +
          +
        • Name: The name of the directory service (for example, +InfoSpace Directory).
          • + +
        • Host Name: The name of the host name server, such as +ldap.infospace.com.
          • + +
        • Base DN: The Base Distinguished Name. Codes entered here +restrict searching to a specific country or organization. For +example, c=JP restricts the search to Japan only. Base DN also +specifies the organization to search on within the directory (for +instance, o=Netscape Communications Corporation, c=US).
          • + +
        • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP server. +The default is 389.
          • + +
        • Bind DN: The distinguished name that is used to authenticate (log +in) to the LDAP server. If left blank, the LDAP server binds anonymously.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your +LDAP server supports secure (encrypted) connections. If you are +unsure, contact your system administrator.
          • +
        + +

        Advanced Tab

        + +
          +
        • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you +limit the number of autocompletion matches returned by the +directory server. Specify the maximum number of email address +matches to display for autocompletion.
          • + +
        • Scope: Defines the limits of the search:
          • + +
        • +
            +
          • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN and one level below the base DN.
            • + +
          • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the +least restrictive search.
            • +
          +
          • + +
        • Search filter: Specifies the search filter to apply to +matching results that are within the specified scope of the +search.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +
        + +

        Organizing Your Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Creating a Folder

        + +

        Renaming a Folder

        + +

        Moving or Copying a Folder

        + +

        Filing Messages in Folders

        + +

        Sharing Folders With Other Users +(IMAP Only)

        + +

        Labeling Messages

        + +

        Marking or Flagging Messages

        + +

        Creating Message Filters

        + +

        Searching Through Messages

        +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        Creating a Folder

        + +

        To create a message folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu, choose New, and then Folder. You see the +New Folder dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Type the name of the folder.
          3. + +
        3. Click the drop-down list and choose a folder location and click +OK. Your new folder appears in your Mail Folders list.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Renaming a Folder

        + +

        To rename an existing folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the folder you want to rename.
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu and choose Rename Folder. You see the Rename +Folder dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Type the new name and click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        Note: If you rename a folder that you've been using to +store filtered messages, the filter +will automatically update to use the renamed folder.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Moving or Copying a Folder

        + +

        You can copy a folder and its contents to another mail account, +or move a folder within the same mail account.

        + +

        To move or copy a folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the folder you want to move or copy.
          2. + +
        2. Do one of the following: +


          +
            +
          • To move the folder under another folder within the same +account, drag the folder over the name of the other folder. The +folder you moved becomes a subfolder of the other folder.
            • + +
          • To copy the folder to another account, drag the folder over the +name of another account.
            • + +
          • To copy the folder under another folder in another account, +drag the folder over the name of another folder in another account. +The folder you copied becomes a subfolder of the other folder.
            • +
          +
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + +

        Filing Messages in Folders

        + +

        You can move messages from one folder to another by using either +of these methods:

        + +
          +
        • Select the message, click the File button on the toolbar, and +choose the destination folder.
          • + +
        • Drag and drop messages into the desired folder.
          • + +
        • +

          Note: If you drag and drop a message from an IMAP or POP +mail server folder to a local folder on your hard drive, the +message is moved to the local folder and removed from the server +folder.

          +
          • +
        + +

        To copy a message from one folder to another:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message and right-click to display the pop-up +menu.
          2. + +
        2. Select "Copy To" and then select the destination account and +folder from the drop-down list.
          3. +
        + +

        Tip: Alternatively, you can copy a message +between folders by holding down the Shift key while dragging the +message from the message list over another folder.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Sharing Folders With Other Users (IMAP Only)

        + +

        Users with IMAP mail accounts can share mail folders with other +users on the same network. Sharing folders allows several users to +see and work with the same messages, similar to a newsgroup. To use +shared folders, your IMAP mail server must support Access Control +List (ACL) management. Check with your system administrator or help +desk if you are not sure that shared folders are supported by your +IMAP mail server.

        + +

        To share a mail folder with other users on your network, or to +view sharing information for a folder, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Within an IMAP account, select a folder that you want to share, +or select a folder whose sharing privileges you want to view. + +

          Folders listed under Local Folders, or folders listed under a +POP mail account cannot be shared.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Folder Properties.
          3. + +
        3. Click the Sharing tab.
          4. + +
        4. Click Privileges. You may be prompted to enter your network +user name and password. + +

          The Privileges button is only available if the IMAP mail server +allows you to set folder sharing privileges. If this button is not +available, you can view the folder sharing privileges for this +folder but cannot change them.

          +
          5. + +
        5. Follow the instructions on the screen to add users and to set +their folder access privileges. +


          +
            +
          • Read privileges: Users can read messages and +copy their contents, but they cannot modify or delete messages, or +copy messages into the folder. Users can flag messages as read or +unread. See Marking or Flagging Messages +for instructions on flagging messages.
            • + +
          • Read and Write privileges: In addition to Read +privileges, users can modify and delete messages. Users can also +copy or move messages into the folder.
            • + +
          • Manage privileges: In addition to Read and +Write privileges, users can add and remove users and change their +folder permissions.
            • +
          +
          6. + +
        6. Click OK to confirm your changes.
          7. + +
        7. Click OK to close the Folder Properties dialog box.
          8. +
        + +

        In the list of folders for your mail account, a shared folder +displays a distinctive folder icon to indicate that it is +shared.

        + +

        To send a message that tells others how they can subscribe to +your shared folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the shared folder.
          2. + +
        2. Right-click to display a pop-up menu, and choose Copy Folder +Location.
          3. + +
        3. Click Compose to display a Mail compose window.
          4. + +
        4. Click in the message body, open the Edit menu, and choose +Paste.
          5. + +
        5. Address the message, type a subject, and type the message text. +Tell message recipients that they can subscribe to the shared +folder by clicking the link you pasted into the message. + +

          Only message recipients who share the same network will be able +to subscribe to your shared folder.

          +
          6. + +
        6. Click Send.
          7. +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Subscribing to a Shared Folder

        + +

        Subscribing to a shared folder is similar to subscribing to a +newsgroup. To subscribe to a shared folder, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe +dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose +another IMAP mail account.
          3. + +
        3. Select the folder that you want to subscribe to.
          4. + +
        4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the +folder. You see a checkmark next to each folder to which you +subscribe. Click Unsubscribe to cancel a selection.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed folders appears in the +Mail window.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Labeling Messages

        + +

        You can apply labels to messages to help you organize and +prioritize them. You can apply a standard color and text label to +messages, or you can customize the label colors or label text to +suit your needs.

        + +

        One powerful way to use labels is to set up a message filter to +automatically label incoming messages from a specific sender. For +example, you can set up a message filter so that incoming messages +from your boss are labeled "Important" and appear in red. See Creating Message Filters for more +information.

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Applying a Label

        + +

        To apply a label to a message, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message you want to label.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. + +
        3. Choose the label you want to apply from the list.
          4. +
        + +

        The message header changes to the label color you chose. To see +the label text, you must display the Label column in the Mail +window.

        + +

        Tip: To quickly label messages or remove a +label, select one or more messages and press 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 on +your keyboard. Press 0 to remove a label.

        + +

        To display the Label column, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
          • + +
        • Click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the +list.
          • +
        + +

        Note: Message labels apply on a per-account +basis. For example, if you move or copy a labeled message to +another mail account, the label is not preserved. Similarly, if you +forward a labeled message to another recipient, the label is not +preserved. For IMAP mail accounts, if your IMAP server supports +user-defined keywords, message labels will persist when you log in +to your mail account from a different location.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Customizing Labels

        + +

        You can customize label colors or text to suit your needs.

        + +

        To customize labels, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Labels. (If no +subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to +expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Edit the label text, or replace it with your own label text. +The label can be up to 32 characters long.
          4. + +
        4. To change the label color, click the color block next to that +label and select a new color.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        Your changes are immediately applied to all labeled messages in +all your mail accounts.

        + +

        Tip: To restore the default label text and +colors, follow the steps above to display the label settings, and +click Restore Defaults.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Sorting Messages by Label

        + +

        To sort messages by label, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. To display the Label column if it is hidden, click the +Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the list.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Label column to sort messages by label, and within +each label type, to sort messages by date.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Removing Labels

        + +

        To remove a message label, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select one or more labeled messages.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. + +
        3. Choose "None" for the message label.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Marking or Flagging Messages

        + +

        You might want to mark a message you've read as unread if you +later want to re-read the message or respond to it.

        + +

        To mark a message as unread, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Click in the Read column of each message you want to mark as +unread. Messages marked as unread display a symbol in the Read column. Messages marked as +read display a symbol in the Read +column. If the Read column is not visible, click the Show/Hide +Columns icon and select Read from the list.
          3. +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
        Read column
        + +

        You can flag messages that you later want to download for offline use.

        + +

        To flag messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Click in the Flag column of each message you want to download. +A flag appears where you clicked to +indicate that the message has been flagged. If the Flag column is +not visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and +select Flag from the list.
          3. +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
        Flag column
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Creating Message Filters

        + +

        Message filters allow you to manage and organize your messages. +You can create message filters that Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +uses to automatically perform certain actions on incoming messages +based on criteria you specify. For example, you can create a +message filter that automatically moves incoming messages to a +particular folder. Message filters operate on a per-account +basis.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Message Filters dialog box, +begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Message Filters. You see the +Message Filters dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you +want to apply the filter.
          3. + +
        3. Click New. You use the Filter Rules dialog box to specify the +types of messages to act on, and the action you want the filter to +perform.
          4. + +
        4. Type a name for the filter.
          5. + +
        5. Select the matching option you want Mail to use: "all of +the following conditions" (criteria) you choose, or "at least +one" of the conditions.
          6. + +
        6. Use the drop-down lists to choose the search criteria (for +example, "Subject," "Sender," "contains," "doesn't contain") and +then type the text or phrase you want to match. + +

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a +header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you +want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), +choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the +drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching +entries. Make sure you enter the custom header correctly, since +Mail will only find entries that exactly match what you type.

          +
          7. + +
        7. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          8. + +
        8. Use the drop-down list to choose the action you want the filter +to perform on the messages (for example, Move to Folder). + +

          Tip: To automatically label incoming messages, +choose "Label the message" from the drop-down list.

          +
          9. + +
        9. Choose a destination folder in which to store the messages, or +create a new folder.
          10. + +
        10. Click OK to confirm your settings.
          11. + +
        11. Click OK in the Message Filters dialog box. The filter begins +filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK.
          12. +
        + + + +

        To manage your filters, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Message Filters. You see the +Message Filters dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you +want to apply the filter.
          3. + +
        3. Choose from the following:
          4. + +
            +
          • To turn a filter on or off: Click the checkbox to the +right of the filter name to enable it, or click it again to turn it +off.
            • + +
          • To edit a filter: Select the filter name and click Edit +(or double-click the filter name). Use the Filter Rules dialog box +to make your changes.
            • + +
          • To delete a filter: Select the filter name and click +Delete.
            • + +
          • To change the order in which filters are applied: In the +filter list, click a filter's name, and click "Move Up" or "Move +Down" to move it.
            • + + +

            Note: Filters are applied to each incoming message in the +order you choose, until a filter action results in the message +being deleted or moved to the Inbox folder.

            + +
          + + +
        4. Click OK when you are done managing your filters. If you +created a new filter, it begins filtering incoming messages as soon +as you click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        Note: If you delete a folder that you've been using to +store filtered messages, the filter will no longer work. Incoming +messages that match the filter criteria will appear in your Inbox. +If you rename or move the folder, the filter will automatically +update to use the renamed or moved folder.

        + +

        Tip: Filters don't apply to existing messages. If you +have existing messages that you want to move to another folder, you +can search for those messages and +then file them into the other folder.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Filtering Messages From a Specific Sender

        + +

        You can quickly create a filter for messages from a particular +sender. For example, if you want to automatically move all incoming +messages from your child's teacher into a folder called "School", +you can quickly set up a filter to do this.

        + +

        To create a filter for messages from a specific sender, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a message from a specific sender.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Create Filter From Message. +You see the Filter Rules dialog box. Using the sender's email +address, Mozilla prefills the filter name, the filter matching +criteria, and the filter action (Move to folder).
          3. + +
        3. Choose a destination folder in which to store the incoming +messages from the specified sender, or create a new folder.
          4. + +
        4. Click OK to confirm your settings. You see the Message Filters dialog box, where you can +create, delete, or edit message filters.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK. The filter begins filtering incoming messages from +the specified sender as soon as you click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching Through Messages

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly find text in a +single message, search messages by subject or sender, or use a +combination of criteria to perform a thorough search through all +messages in a specific mail folder, newsgroup, or account.

        + +

        To locate text in a single message, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message, open the Edit menu, and choose Find in This +Message.
          2. + +
        2. Type the text that you want to locate in the dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Click Find to locate the first occurrence of the text.
          4. + +
        4. Continue clicking Find to locate additional occurrences, or +click Cancel when you are done.
          5. + +
        5. Choose Find Again from the Edit menu to continue searching for +the text throughout the rest of the message.
          6. +
        + +

        To quickly search for messages in a selected folder by subject +or sender, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. To the right of "Subject or Sender contains:", type the subject +text or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part +of the subject or sender, or you can type the exact word or name +that you want to find. + +

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +displays only those messages in the selected folder where the +subject or sender contains the search text you entered.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all messages in +the selected folder.
          3. +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching for Specific Messages

        + +

        You can search mail folders or newsgroups for specific messages. +If you are not already viewing the Search Messages dialog box, +begin from the Mail window:

        +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Search Messages. You see the +Search Messages dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Next to "Search for messages in", choose the account, +newsgroup, or folder through which you want to search.
          3. + +
        3. Select "Search subfolders" to include all subfolders in the +search.
          4. + +
        4. Select which matching option Mail & Newsgroups will use to search +for messages that match all or at least one of the +conditions (criteria) that you choose.
          5. + +
        5. Use the drop-down lists to indicate the search criteria (for +example, "Subject" and "contains") and then type the text or phrase +that you want to match. + +

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a +header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you +want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), +choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the +drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching +entries. Make sure you enter the custom header correctly, since +Mail will only find entries that exactly match what you type.

          +
          6. + +
        6. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          7. + +
        7. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. +The search results appear in lower part of the Search Messages +dialog box.
          8. + +
            +
          • To open a message so you can read it, select the +message and click Open, or double-click the message.
            • + +
          • To sort the messages in a different order, click the column +that you want to sort by.
            • + +
          • To move or copy a message in the Results area to another +folder, select the message and then choose the destination folder +from the File drop-down list. If the destination folder is within +the same account, the message is moved to that folder. If the +destination folder is within a different account, the message is +copied to that folder.
            • + +
          • To delete a message in the Results area, select the message and +then click Delete.
            • + +
          • To open the folder where the message is stored, select the +message and click Open Message Folder.
            • +
          +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + +
        + + + + + + +

        Importing Mail from Other Programs

        + +

        This section describes how to import mail messages and settings +from Mozilla Communicator, Outlook, Outlook Express, and Eudora. +To import address books from these programs, see Importing Address Books.

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Importing Mail +Messages

        + +

        Importing Mail +Settings

        +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        Importing Mail Messages

        + +

        To import mail messages from Mozilla Communicator, Outlook, +Outlook Express, or Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Import +Wizard.
          2. + +
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail messages.
          3. +
        + +

        For Mozilla Communicator, the wizard imports a copy of all Communicator +mail folders included under Local Folders. Imported mail is added +as a new folder under Local Folders in the Mail window. (The Communicator mail folders still remain in their original location).

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Importing Mail Settings

        + +

        To import mail settings from Outlook, Outlook Express, or +Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Import +Wizard.
          2. + +
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail settings.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + +
        + + + +

        Getting Started With Newsgroups

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Subscribing to Newsgroups

        + +

        Reading Newsgroup +Messages

        + +

        Posting Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions

        + +

        Monitoring Threads

        + +

        Removing a Newsgroup

        + +

        Adding a Newsgroup Server

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Subscribing to Newsgroups

        + +

        If you have set up an account on a +newsgroup server, you can join (subscribe) to newsgroups (also +called discussion groups).

        + +

        To subscribe to a newsgroup, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe +dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose +another newsgroup account.
          3. + +
        3. Select a newsgroup. To select more than one newsgroup, +Ctrl+click (Windows and Linux) or Command+click (Macintosh OS) each +additional newsgroup.
          4. + +
        4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the +newsgroup. You see a checkmark next to each newsgroup to which you +subscribe. Click Unsubscribe to cancel a selection.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed newsgroups appears in the +Mail window.
          6. +
        + +

        If you are an IMAP mail user, you can also subscribe to message +folders located on an IMAP server. (Your Inbox is a type of message +folder.) Follow the instructions above for subscribing, but select +an account from the Account drop-down list. For more information +on sharing folders and subscribing to folders, see Sharing Folders With Other Users (IMAP +Only).

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Reading Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        When you open your newsgroup server, you see the list of +newsgroups to which you subscribe. The server downloads the +headers of new messages in each newsgroup.

        + +

        To read newsgroup messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Double-click a newsgroup server icon to see its newsgroups. (If +there are no newsgroups, you may need to subscribe to one.)
          2. + +
        2. Click a newsgroup name to see its messages.
          3. + +
        3. Click a message to read it. Click the thread button to display +all the responses below the original message. You can click any +header to display its message. You can start a new thread or post +a message in response.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Posting Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        To start new threads (discussions):

        + +
          +
        1. From the list of your subscribed newsgroups in the Mail window, +select a newsgroup.
          2. + +
        2. Click Compose.
          3. + +
        3. Compose your message, and +click Send to post it.
          4. + +
        4. Click Get Msgs to see your posting on the newsgroup.
          5. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions

        + +

        To post a response to the newsgroup:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. + +
        2. Click Reply.
          3. + +
        3. Compose your message, and +click Send to post it.
          4. +
        + +

        To reply to an individual as well as post a response to the +group:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. + +
        2. Click Reply All.
          3. + +
        3. Compose your message, and click Send to post it.
          4. +
        + +

        To redirect a posting to another newsgroup:

        + +
          +
        • Click Reply and choose "Followup-To" from the "Newsgroup" +drop-down list. Subsequent responses will be posted to the +newsgroup you enter.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Monitoring Threads

        + +

        To monitor unread messages in threads that are of interest to +you:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a message in a thread.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Watch Thread.
          3. + +
        3. If you want to monitor additional threads, repeat steps 1 and 2 +for messages in additional threads.
          4. + +
        4. When you're ready to monitor messages in these threads, open +the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose Watched Threads +with Unread. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups only displays the +watched threads that contain unread messages.
          5. + +
        5. Open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose All to +return to viewing all messages in the newsgroup.
          6. +
        + +

        To ignore a message thread:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a message in the thread.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Ignore Thread. Mozilla Mail +& Newsgroups marks all messages in the thread as read, and new +replies posted to the thread will appear as read.
          3. + +
        3. To view ignored threads, open the View menu, choose Messages, +and then choose Ignored Threads.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Removing a Newsgroup

        + +

        To remove a newsgroup from your list:

        + +
          +
        • Select the newsgroup icon and press Delete.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Adding a Newsgroup Server

        + +

        If the newsgroup you want to subscribe to is on a different +server, you must first set up access to that server.

        + +

        To set up an additional newsgroup server, open the File menu in +the Mail window and choose New, then Account.

        + +
          +
        • Using the Account Wizard, indicate that the new account you +want to set up is a newsgroup account.
          • +
        + +

        Once you've set up access to the new server, you can subscribe to newsgroups on that server. +In the Mail window, open the File menu, and choose Subscribe.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + +
        + +

        Working Offline

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups to Work Offline

        + +

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline +Use

        + +

        Downloading an Individual Folder for +Offline Use

        + +

        Downloading Selected or Flagged +Messages for Offline Use

        + +

        Downloading Directory Entries for +Offline Use

        + +

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working +Offline

        + +

        Selecting Items for Offline +Viewing

        + +

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your +Messages

        + +

        Working Offline and Reconnecting +Later

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' offline feature lets you +download your mail and read it offline (while disconnected from the +Internet). If you use a dial-up (modem) connection to access your +mail and you want to reduce the time you are connected, or, if you +need to temporarily disconnect from your company's network while +traveling or switching locations, you can download your mail so +that you can read it offline. The offline feature can automatically +download incoming messages and then later send all your outgoing +messages when you reconnect.

        + +

        If you occasionally want to work offline, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups lets you easily:

        + +
          +
        • Download your Inbox for offline use.
          • + +
        • Download an individual folder for offline use.
          • + +
        • Download only selected or flagged messages for offline +use.
          • + +
        • Download directory entries in your address book for offline +use.
          • +
        + +

        If you frequently work offline, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +also lets you:

        + +
          +
        • Set up one or more of your accounts for offline use.
          • + +
        • Set offline and disk space preferences for each account.
          • + +
        • Select the folders and newsgroups that you want to view +offline.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline Use

        + +

        You can tell Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups to automatically download your Inbox messages for +offline use. Later, when you go back online, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups automatically synchronizes your Inbox messages with the +server.

        + +

        To automatically download your Inbox for offline use, begin from +the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. In the left side of the dialog box, under the name of the +account you want to use offline, select Offline & Disk Space. +(This category is not available for POP accounts.)
          3. + +
        3. Check the box labeled "Make the messages in my Inbox available +when I am working offline."
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. + +
        5. In the folder pane, under the name of the account you want to +use offline, click any folder other than the Inbox. For example, +click the Sent or the Drafts folder. Then click the Inbox folder to +start downloading its messages.
          6. + +
        6. Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline +indicator in +the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left of the +Cookie icon) to go offline.
          7. +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all +messages in your Inbox so you can read and respond to them while +working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your +messages.

        + +

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right +corner of the Mail window (to the left of the Cookie icon) to go +back online.
          +
          +
          • +
        + +

        When you go back online, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +automatically synchronizes your Inbox messages with the server, by +replicating any changes you made while working offline.

        + +

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages +that you send while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder +under Local Folders. To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the +Preferences command on the Edit menu to change the offline preferences for all +your accounts.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Downloading an Individual Folder for Offline Use

        + +

        To download a specific folder for offline use, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. In the left side of the Mail window, select the folder that you +want to download for offline use.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Folder Properties. You see the Properties dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Click the Offline tab.
          4. + +
        4. Check "Select this folder for offline use".
          5. + +
        5. Click Download Now if you want to immediately begin downloading +the folder's messages. Alternatively, you can continue working, and +when you are ready to go offline, proceed to the next step.
          6. + +
        6. Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right corner of the Mail window +to go offline.
          7. + +
        7. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download.
          8. +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all +messages in the selected folder so you can read and respond to them +while working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your +messages.

        + +

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for +reading offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup +icon.

        + +

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right +corner of the Mail window (to the left of the Cookie icon) to go +back online.
          +
          +
          • +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes the +offline folders with the server, by replicating any changes you +made while working offline.

        + +

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages +that you sent while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder +under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose Send Unsent +Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at +once. To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send +your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the Preferences +command on the Edit menu to change your offline preferences.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Downloading Selected or Flagged Messages for Offline Use

        + +

        To download selected messages for offline use, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Select the messages you want to download, as follows: +


          +
            +
          • To select a group of adjacent messages, click the first +message, and then Shift-click to select the last message in the +group.
            • + +
          • To select messages anywhere in the message list, hold down the +Ctrl key (Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh OS) and +click each message.
            • +
          +
          3. + +
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get +Selected Messages from the submenu. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +downloads the selected messages.
          4. + +
        4. Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline +indicator in the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left +of the Cookie icon) to go offline.
          5. +
        + +

        To download flagged messages for offline use, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Click in the flag column of each message you want to download. +A flag appears where you clicked to indicate that the message has +been marked. If the flag column is not visible, click the Show/Hide +Columns icon and select Flag from the list.
          3. + +
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Flagged +Messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups downloads the flagged +messages.
          4. + +
        4. Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline icon in +the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left of the +Cookie icon) to go offline.
          5. +
        + +

        After you disconnect, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups remains +open so you can continue to work with your messages.

        + +

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for +reading offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup +icon.

        + +

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right +corner of the Mail window to go online.
          • +
        + +

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages +that you sent while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder +under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose Send Unsent +Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at +once. To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send +your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the Preferences +command on the Edit menu to change your offline preferences.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + +

        Downloading Directory Entries for Offline Use

        + +

        You can download (replicate) the entries in a directory server +to your computer so that they are available when you work offline. +Once you've downloaded directory entries, you can use the same +procedure to update your local copy of the entries with the latest +entries on the directory server.

        + +

        To download or update an address book LDAP directory for offline +use:

        + +
          +
        1. Make sure you're online.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Window menu, and choose Address Book.
          3. + +
        3. In the Address Book window, select the directory that you want +to download (replicate).
          4. + +
        4. Click Properties in the Address Book toolbar. The Directory +Server Properties dialog box appears.
          5. + +
        5. Click the Offline tab.
          6. + +
        6. Click Download Now to start copying the entries to your +computer.
          7. + +
        7. If prompted, enter your network user name and password, and +click OK to start the download.
          8. + +
        8. +

          Depending on the number of directory entries, the download +process may take a while, so please be patient.

          +
          9. +
        + +

        After the download finishes, you can work offline and search the +directory or use it for address autocompletion when composing +messages. After you've been using your local copy of the directory +for a while, you may wish to update it to get the latest entries +from the directory server. To update your local copy, use the +procedure described above.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working Offline

        + +

        To set up one or more accounts for working offline, you use the +Offline and Disk Space preferences in the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box. Once set, you don't need to change +these preferences each time you want to work offline. The offline +and disk space preferences you can set for an account depend on the +type of account (IMAP, POP, or Newsgroup).

        + +

        Here's a summary of the steps you will follow to set up your +accounts for offline use:

        + +
          +
        1. For each account that you want to work with while offline, use +the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box to set the +Offline & Disk Space preferences for that account. You must +select the items (folders and newsgroups) that you want to download +for offline use. See Selecting Items for +Offline Viewing for more information. + +

          Once set, you don't need to change these settings. See the +sections below for information on setting offline and disk space +preferences for IMAP, POP, and Newsgroup +accounts.

          + +

          Tip: To set the Offline & Disk Space preferences for +the current account, open the File menu, choose Offline, and then +choose Offline Settings.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose +Download/Sync Now from the submenu.
          3. + +
        3. Select the type of messages (mail or newsgroup or both) that +you want to download. + +

          Important: You must select at least one category (mail +messages or newsgroup messages) in order for the download to +work.

          +
          4. + +
        4. Select "Work offline once download and/or sync is +complete."
          5. + +
        5. Click OK to download the selected items and then go offline. +See Downloading and Synchronizing Your +Messages for more information.
          6. +
        + +

        For subsequent offline sessions, you can skip step 1.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Selecting Items for Offline Viewing

        + +

        Before you can read mail and newsgroup messages while offline, +you must first select them for downloading. You can set up an +entire account for offline use. You can also choose which folders +and newsgroups that you want to use offline.

        + +

        Note: Keep in mind that selecting more items may increase +download time and disk space used.

        + +

        To select accounts, folders, and newsgroups for offline viewing, +begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for the account +you want to change.
          3. + +
        3. Click Select. You see your IMAP accounts, mail folders, and +subscribed newsgroups. + +

          Note: You see only the newsgroups and folders that you've +already subscribed to. POP +accounts and local mail folders don't appear in the list.

          +
          4. + +
        4. Select the items (folders, newsgroups) that you want to make +available for offline use.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        Once set, you don't need to change these settings each time you +want to go offline. However, if you do want to change them, you can +easily do so before going offline, since the same Select button is +available when using the Download and +Sync command.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages

        + +

        If you have already selected mail folders and newsgroups for +offline use, you are now ready to download and synchronize them. If +you haven't yet selected items to download, you can choose them +before you go offline.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Download/Sync Now dialog box, +follow these steps:

        + +

        To download and synchronize your messages, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose +Download/Sync Now.
          2. + +
        2. Select the categories (mail messages or newsgroup messages) +that you want to download. + +

          Important: You must select at least one category (Mail +messages, Newsgroup messages) in order for the download to work. If +the checkboxes are disabled, it means that you haven't yet selected +items to download. Use the Select button to select items to +download.

          +
          3. + +
        3. To send messages in your Unsent Messages folder before going +offline, check "Send Unsent Messages".
          4. + +
        4. To go offline immediately after Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +finishes downloading, select "Work offline once download and/or +sync is complete".
          5. + +
        5. To set or change the items to download, click Select. See Selecting Items for Offline Viewing for +more information. You can skip this step if you've already selected +items for download.
          6. + +
        6. Click OK. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups begins downloading the +selected items.
          7. +
        + +

        If you chose to work offline once the download completes, then +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups immediately switches to offline +mode. Otherwise, when you are ready to go offline, click the +Online/Offline indicator in the lower right corner of the Mail window to go +offline.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Working Offline and Reconnecting Later

        + +

        To work offline and reconnect later, begin from the Mail +window.

        + +

        When you are ready to work offline:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the online/offline indicator in the lower-right corner of the Mail +window. Mail & Newsgroups prompts you to download messages, if +you want, before going offline.
          2. + +
        2. Click Download to download messages before going offline. If +you want to work offline without downloading messages, click Don't +Download.
          3. +
        + +

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for +reading offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup +icon.

        + +

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' download +behavior when going offline, open the Edit menu, choose +Preferences, and then click the Offline & Disk Space category. +You can choose to have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to +download messages when going offline, to automatically download +messages, or to not download any messages.

        + +

        To reconnect and synchronize your messages:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the online/offline indicator in the lower-right +corner of any Mozilla window.
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose +Download/Sync Now.
          3. +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups synchronizes your messages with +the server by replicating any changes you made while working +offline.

        + +

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' behavior when +going online, open the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then +choose the Offline & Disk Space category. You can choose to +have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to send unsent +messages, to automatically send unsent messages, or to not send +unsent messages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +
        + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings

        + +

        This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box. Unlike the Preferences dialog box, +which applies settings to all accounts, the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box lets you specify settings on a +per-account basis.

        + +

        If you are not currently viewing the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Begin from the Mail window.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings.
          3. + +
        3. Select the name of the account whose settings you want to view +or change.
          4. +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Account +Settings

        + +

        Server Settings

        + +

        Copies & +Folders

        + +

        Addressing

        + +

        Offline & Disk Space

        + +

        Return Receipts

        + +

        Security

        + +

        Local Folders

        + +

        Outgoing Server +(SMTP)

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account Settings

        + +

        This section describes how to view or change your Account +Settings, such as your user name, reply-to address, and signature +file. If you are not already viewing the Account Settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the name of the account to display the Account Settings +panel.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Account Name: The name for this account.
          • + +
        • Identity: Stores your name, email address, +reply-to address (only if different from your email address), and +organization (optional).
          • + +
        • Attach this signature: Lets you choose the +signature file (in text or HTML format) you want to attach to your +outgoing messages. Click Choose to locate the signature file +(optional).
          • + +
        • Compose messages in HTML format: Lets you +create formatted text for mail and newsgroup messages using the +built-in HTML editor. Leave this item unchecked to use the +plain-text editor. HTML messages can include formatted text, links, +images, and tables, just like a web page. However, some recipients +may not be able to receive HTML messages.
          • + +
        • +

          Tip: If you select this option, but you later want to +compose a message or reply to a message using the plain-text +editor, hold down the Shift key and click Compose or Reply in the +Mail toolbar to temporarily choose the plain-text editor. +Shift-clicking the Compose button or the Reply button switches to +the other editor.

          +
          • + +
        • Advanced: Lets you choose a different outgoing +server (SMTP) for outgoing messages from this account.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups can work with two types of mail +servers: IMAP and POP. If you are not sure which server type your +Internet service provider supports, ask your service provider. If +your Internet service provider supports both, the following +descriptions may help you choose which one to use.

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        About Internet Message Access Protocol +(IMAP)

        + +

        About Internet Post Office Protocol +(POP)

        + +

        IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        POP Server Settings

        + +

        News Server +Settings

        +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        About Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)

        + +

        Advantages: Your messages and any changes to them stay on +your server, saving local disk space. Also, you always have access +to an updated mailbox, and you can get your mail from multiple +locations. Performance on a modem is faster, since you initially +download message headers only.

        + +

        Disadvantages: Not all ISPs support IMAP.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        About Post Office Protocol (POP)

        + +

        Advantages: Your messages are downloaded to your local +computer all at once, but you can also specify whether to keep +copies of the messages on the server and delete messages on the +server when they are deleted locally. Most ISPs currently support +POP.

        + +

        Disadvantages: If you use more than one computer, +messages might reside on one or the other, but not both. POP +doesn't work as well as IMAP over a slow link connection. Also, you +can't access all mail folders from multiple locations.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the IMAP server settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. (If you +chose an IMAP server when you set up this account, you see your IMAP server +settings.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server Type: The server type (IMAP Mail +Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change +the server type associated with this account, you must delete the +account and then re-create it.
          • + +
        • Server Name: The server name that you +specified when you created this account. If you are having problems +getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider +or system administrator that the server name you entered is +correct.
          • + +
        • User Name: The user name that you specified +when you created this account.
          • + +
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by +your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting +unchanged.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this +setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive +encrypted messages. If you are unsure, contact your service +provider or system administrator.
          • + +
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this +setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically check +this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & +Newsgroups.
          • + +
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and +then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do +not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time +by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • + +
          • + +
        • When I delete a message: Choose the behavior you want for deleted +messages. "Move it to the Trash folder" is recommended unless you +are instructed to use a different setting by your system +administrator or service provider. Messages marked as deleted are +removed only when you compact folders.
          • + +
        • Clean up (Expunge) Inbox on Exit: Removes +deleted messages from the Inbox when you exit Mail & +Newsgroups. Choose this if you chose to mark messages as +deleted.
          • + +
        • Empty Trash on Exit: Empties the Trash folder +whenever you quit Mail & Newsgroups.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        In most cases, advanced IMAP server settings are automatically +supplied by the server. If you are unsure about the settings for +this dialog box, contact your ISP or system administrator.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the advanced IMAP server +settings, begin from the Mail window.

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings +category.
          3. + +
        3. If the mail server type is an IMAP server, you can click +Advanced to set additional IMAP options, such as: +


          +
            +
          • the IMAP server directory path
            • + +
          • showing only "subscribed folders"
            • + +
          • support for subfolders
            • + +
          • any personal and public (shared folder) namespaces for this +directory
            • + +
          +
          4. +
        + +

        For more information, see Adding and +Removing LDAP Directories.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        POP Server Settings

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the POP server settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category +name. (If you chose a POP server when you set up this account, you +see your POP server settings.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server Type: The server type (POP Mail Server) +that you specified when you created this account. To change the +server type associated with this account, you must delete the +account and then re-create it.
          • + +
        • Server Name: The server name that you +specified when you created this account. If you are having problems +getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider +or system administrator that the server name you entered is +correct.
          • + +
        • User Name: The user name that you specified +when you created this account.
          • + +
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by +your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting +unchanged.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this +setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive +encrypted messages. If you are unsure, contact your service +provider or system administrator.
          • + +
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this +setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically check +this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & +Newsgroups. For POP accounts, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't +download the new messages until you click Get Msgs on the Mail +toolbar.
          • + +
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and +then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do +not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time +by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          +
          • + +
        • Automatically download any new messages: +Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to retrieve +messages immediately each time it checks the server.
          • + +
        • Leave messages on server: Choose this setting +to store a copy of messages on the mail server in addition to +downloading them to your computer.
          • + +
        • Delete messages on server when they are deleted +locally: Choose this setting to remove messages from the +server once you delete them from your computer.
          • + +
        • Empty Trash on Exit: Choose this setting to +empty the Trash folder whenever you quit Mail & +Newsgroups.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        News Server Settings

        + +

        This section describes how to change news server settings. If +you are not already viewing news server settings, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. +(If you chose a newsgroup server when you set up this account, you +see your newsgroup server settings.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server Type: The server type (NNTP) that you +specified when you created this account.
          • + +
        • Server Name: The server name that you +specified when you created this account. If you are having problems +receiving messages from this account, verify with your service +provider or system administrator that the server name you entered +is correct.
          • + +
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by +your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting +unchanged.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this +setting if your news server is configured to send and receive +encrypted messages. If you are unsure, contact your service +provider or system administrator.
          • + +
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and +then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do +not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time +by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • + +
        • Ask me before downloading more than ___ +messages: Choose this setting to conserve disk space and +download time, by setting a limit for the number of messages you +can retrieve at one time.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +
        +

        Note: The path to the newsrc file is displayed for your +information. The newsrc file stores information about the +newsgroups to which you are subscribed, and the messages you have +read in each newsgroup.

        +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & +Folders

        + +

        This section describes the settings for sending automatic +copies, and for storing copies of outgoing messages, message +drafts, and message templates.

        + +

        By default, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups stores copies of your +outgoing messages in the Sent folder for the current account. +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also stores message drafts in the +Drafts folder and message templates in the Templates folder for the +current account.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the settings for Copies & +Folders, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account, and click Copies & Folders. You see the +Copies & Folders panel.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Place a copy in: Select where to store copies +of your outgoing mail and newsgroup messages. If you don't want to +use the default Sent folder for the current account, click Other +and then choose an account and then choose the folder for storing +copies.
          • + +
        • Bcc: Select whether you want to always send a +blind carbon copy (bcc) to yourself.
          • + +
        • Bcc another address: Select whether you want +to always send a blind carbon copy (bcc) to another addressee, and +enter the address.
          • + +
        • Keep message drafts in: Select where to store +message drafts. If you don't want to use the default Drafts folder +for the current account, click Other and then choose another +account and folder for storing drafts.
          • + +
        • Keep message templates in: Select where to +store message templates. If you don't want to use the default +Templates folder for the current account, click Other and then +choose another account and folder for storing templates.
          • + +
        • Show confirmation dialog when messages are +saved: Choose this option if you want Mail & +Newsgroups to display a confirmation dialog box when you save a +draft message or a template. If checked, a dialog box will appear +when you save a draft or template to remind you where Mozilla Mail +& Newsgroups is saving the draft or template.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing

        + +

        You use Addressing settings to override the global LDAP server +settings specified for all address books in the +Preferences dialog box. LDAP server settings affect the behavior of +address autocompletion, and you can +change these settings for each account if necessary.

        + +

        Address autocompletion uses your address books to find matching +entries when you type email addresses in the addressing area of the +Compose window.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account and click the Addressing category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Use my global LDAP server preferences for this account: +This is the default. Select this if you don't want to override the +global LDAP server preferences for this account.
          • + +
        • Use a different LDAP server: Select this option and then +choose another LDAP server from the list if you want to use a +different LDAP directory server for address autocompletion with +this account. If necessary, click Edit Directories to edit +individual directory server settings, add a directory server, or +delete a directory server. For more information, see Adding and Removing LDAP Directories.
          • +
        + +

        The directory you select will also be searched for matching +certificates when you attempt to send an encrypted message to one +or more recipients for whom you don't have certificates on +file.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Offline & Disk +Space

        + +

        Offline & Disk Space settings let you conserve disk space or +set up an account so that you can use it while offline +(disconnected from the Internet). The settings available depend on +the mail server type (IMAP, POP, or News) associated with the +account.

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings +(IMAP)

        + +

        Disk Space Settings (POP)

        + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings +(News)

        +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP)

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space +preferences for an IMAP account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for an IMAP +account.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Make the messages in my Inbox available when I am working +offline: Select this option so that messages in your Inbox will +be available when you are working offline.
          • + +
        • When I create new folders, select them for offline: +Select this option so that new folders you create are automatically +selected for offline use. If left unchecked, new folders won't be +automatically selected for offline use. You can manually select +folders for offline by choosing the Download/Sync Now command +(available from the File menu, under Offline). Click the Select +button in the Download/Sync Messages dialog box to select the +folders.
          • + +
        • Select: Click to select the items (folders or +newsgroups) that you want to make available for offline use. See Selecting Items for Offline Viewing for +more information.
          • + +
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than +_KB: Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing +large messages from being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for +downloaded messages.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Disk Space Settings (POP)

        + +

        Messages from POP accounts are always downloaded to your local +machine. This section describes how you can save disk space for a +POP account. If you are not already viewing the Disk Space +preferences for a POP account, follow these steps:

        + +

        Begin from the Mail window.

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Disk Space category for a POP account.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than +_KB: Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing +large messages from being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for +downloaded messages.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (News)

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space +settings for a News account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for a News +account.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Select: Click to select the items (accounts, +folders, newsgroups) that you want to make available for offline +use. See Selecting Items for Offline +Viewing for more information.
          • + +
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than: +Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large +messages from being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for +downloaded messages.
          • + +
        • Download only unread message bodies: Select this option +to download only the messages you haven't read.
          • + +
        • Download message bodies for messages since _ days ago: +Select this option to download only messages that were posted +within the time period you enter.
          • + +
        • When it is time to clean up messages: Click +one of the three choices to specify when newsgroup messages should +be deleted. Unless you choose "Keep all messages," enter the number +of days to keep messages or the number of newest messages to +keep.
          • + +
        • Keep only unread messages: Select this option to delete +messages immediately after you read them.
          • + +
        • Remove message bodies only older than __ days: Select this option to delete +messages after the number of days you specify.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Return Receipts

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Return Receipts account +settings. If you are not currently viewing the Return Receipts +settings, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Return Receipts category for your mail account.
          3. +
        + +

        You use the Return Receipts settings to define return receipt +settings for outgoing messages from this mail account. You also use +the Return Receipt settings to specify how to manage requests you +receive for return receipts. These settings override global return +receipt preferences you specified using Mail & Newsgroups Preferences +- Return Receipts.

        + +
          +
        • Use my global return receipt preferences for this +account: By default, this account uses the return receipt +preferences specified by Mail & Newsgroups Preferences +- Return Receipts.
          • + +
        • Customize return receipts for this account: +Lets you change the return receipt preferences for this +account.
          • + +
        • +
            +
          • When sending messages, always request a return +receipt: Enables automatic return receipt requests for all +outgoing messages from this mail account.
            • + +
          • Leave it in my Inbox: Return receipt +confirmation messages are delivered to the Inbox for this +account.
            • + +
          • +

            Tip: Choose this option if you want to use a +filter that automatically moves return receipt confirmation +messages to a folder you specify. For information on creating and +using filters, see Creating Message +Filters.

            +
            • + +
          • Move it to my Sent Mail folder: Incoming +return receipt confirmation messages are moved to the Sent mail +folder for this account.
            • + +
          • Never send a return receipt: Choose this +option if you do not want to send a return receipt in response to +requests for return receipts from others.
            • + +
          • Allow return receipts for some messages: +Choose how you want to respond to requests you receive for return +receipts.
            • +
          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security

        + +

        This section describes how to configure the Mail & Newsgroup +Account Settings that control mail message security. Before you do +so, however, you must obtain one or more mail certificates. For +details, see Signing & Encrypting +Messages.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Security settings for your +mail account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings.
          2. + +
        2. Click Security under the name of the mail account whose +security settings you want to configure.
          3. +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        +

        In this section:

        + +

        About Certificates

        + +

        Digital Signing

        + +

        Encryption

        +
        + +

         

        + +

        About Certificates

        + +

        The main purpose of the Security panel in Mail & Newsgroup +Account Settings is to select two certificates:

        + +
          +
        • The email certificate you want to use for signing mail messages +you send to other people.
          • + +
        • The email certificate you want other people to use when they +encrypt messages they send to you.
          • +
        + +

        Depending on the policies of the certificate authority +(CA) that issues your certificate(s), you can use one +certificate for both purposes or two different certificates. Even +if you use just one, you must specify it twice, once for digital +signing and once for encryption.

        + +

        The certificates you select here are included with every signed +message you send. These certificates allow your recipients to +verify your digital signature and to encrypt messages that they +send to you.

        + +

         

        + +

        Digital Signing

        + +

        You use the Digital Signing area in the Security panel to specify how you want to +sign your email messages:

        + +
          +
        • Digitally sign messages: Select this checkbox if you +want to digitally sign all the messages you send. (A personal +certificate must be specified below before you can select this +checkbox.)
          • + +
        • Use this certificate to digitally sign messages you +send: If this field is empty or if it displays the wrong +certificate, click Select to choose from the certificates you have +on file.
          • +
        + +

        Regardless of whether the "Digitally sign messages" checkbox is +selected here, you can change your mind before you send an +individual message.

        + +

        To change the digital signature setting for a message you are +writing in the Compose window, click the arrow below the Security +icon near the top of the window and select or deselect "Digital +Sign This Message". For details, see Signing & Encrypting a New +Message.

        + +

         

        + +

        Encryption

        + +

        You use the Encryption area in the Security panel to specify how you +routinely want to use encryption when sending your messages:

        + +
          +
        • Never: Select this option if you never want to use +encryption, or only occasionally.
          • + +
        • Required: Select this option if you always want to use +encryption. If you don't have all the necessary certificates, the +message won't be sent unless you explicitly turn off encryption for +that message only.
          • + +
        • Use this certificate to encrypt & decrypt messages sent +to you: If this field is empty or if it displays the wrong +certificate, click Select to choose from the certificates you have +on file.
          • +
        + +

        Regardless of which encryption option you select, you can change +your mind before you send an individual message.

        + +

        To change the encryption setting for a message you are writing +in the Compose window, click the arrow below the Security icon near +the top of the window and choose the encryption setting you want. +For details, see Signing & +Encrypting a New Message.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local Folders

        + +

        Local Folders is the account where Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups saves any messages that you send while working offline. +Messages you send while working offline are saved in the Unsent +Messages folder under Local Folders. Any folders you create under +the Local Folders account reside on your hard disk, so Local +Folders is a good place to save messages that you want to keep.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Local Folders settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the Local Folders category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Account Name: The name associated with the Local Folders +account.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server +(SMTP)

        + +

        Even if you have multiple mail or news accounts, you generally +need to specify only one outgoing (SMTP) server to handle the +delivery of your outgoing mail.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Outgoing Server (SMTP) +settings, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the Outgoing Server (SMTP) category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server name: Mail & Newsgroups uses the outgoing (SMTP) server +name that you entered using the Account Wizard, or that was specified when +you migrated this account from a previous version. To change the outgoing +(SMTP) server name, type it in Server Name field.
          • + +
        • Port: If necessary, enter the port number for the SMTP +server. If no port number is specified, the default port is +used.
          • + +
        • Use name and password: If your SMTP server requires +authentication to send mail, select this option to be prompted to +enter your user name and authentication password. Then enter your +user name. The first time you send mail, you will be prompted to +enter your authentication password.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): If your outgoing SMTP +server is configured to send encrypted mail, you can choose how +often you want to use SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). If you are not +sure which option to choose, check with your ISP or system +administrator.
          • + + +
        • Advanced: Click this option to set up additional +outgoing SMTP servers or to change the default SMTP server. Keep in +mind that using more than one SMTP server can cause errors in +sending mail.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +
        + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroup Preferences

        + +

        The sections listed below describe the Mail & Newsgroups +preferences that apply to all your mail and newsgroup accounts. To +see these preferences:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. + +

          (Mac OS X) Open the Mozilla menu and choose Preferences.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the +list.
          3. +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Mail & +Newsgroups

        + +

        Message Display

        + +

        Composition

        + +

        Send Format

        + +

        Addressing

        + +

        Labels

        + +

        Return Receipts

        + +

        Offline & Disk Space +Preferences

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & Newsgroups

        + +

        This section describes the main Mail & Newsgroups +preferences. If you are not already viewing the Mail & +Newsgroups main preferences, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Mail & Newsgroups category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
          • + +
        • Select the window layout you prefer for Mail: Choose the +type of three-pane layout to use for the Mail window. If you change +this setting, you must exit and restart Mail & Newsgroups to +have your changes take effect.
          • + +
        • Confirm when moving folders to the Trash: Choose to +allow Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you before deleting +folders.
          • + +
        • Confirm when using keyboard shortcut to send messages: +Choose to allow Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you when you use +the keyboard shortcut to send a message. When you're composing a +message, this may help you avoid accidentally sending the message +if you enter the keyboard shortcut by mistake.
          • + +
          • + +
        • Use Mozilla Mail as the default mail application: +Select Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the default mail +application for Windows and from within other applications such as +Microsoft Word.
          • + +
        • +

          Note: Setting Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the +default mail application may disable another mail application. To +restore the other mail application as the default, deselect this +option.

          +
          • + +
        • +

          Play a sound: Select this if you want Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups to play the default system sound when new messages +arrive. If no Mozilla applications are running, Quick Launch must +be enabled in order to play a sound when new messages arrive.

          + +

          If any Mozilla application is running, then Quick Launch does +not need to be enabled in order to play a sound when new messages +arrive. For information on using Quick Launch, see Using Quick Launch.

          + +

          Once Mozilla Mail has been started, the new messages sound will +continue to work even after you close the Mail window (as long as +another Mozilla application is running).

          + +
          • + +
        • +

          Show an alert: Select this if you want Mozilla Mail +& Newsgroups to display a sliding alert above your system tray +in the lower right corner of your screen when new messages arrive. +The sliding alert only appears once when new messages arrive, and +won't appear again until you bring the Mail & Newsgroups window +to the front.

          + + + + + + + + + + +
           Sliding new mail alert
          + +

          When the alert appears, clicking the link displayed in the alert +will take you to the first folder that has new mail. If no Mozilla +applications are running, Quick Launch must be enabled in order to +display the new message alert.

          + +

          If any Mozilla application is running, then Quick Launch does +not need to be enabled in order to display the new message alert. +For information on using Quick Launch, see Using Quick Launch.

          + +

          Once Mozilla Mail has been started, the new message alert will +continue to work even after you close the Mail window (as long as +another Mozilla application is running).

          +
          • + +
        • +

          When Mail launches, show the Start Page in the message +area: Select this to enable the Start Page. The Start Page +appears in the message area when you first open Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups. This page is the default page, but you can enter a +different web page or URL of your choice. To disable the Start +Page, deselect this option. Click Restore Default to return to the +original page provided by Mozilla.

          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message Display

        + +

        Message Display preferences allow you to choose how messages are +displayed (for example, font style and color) in all accounts. If +you are not already viewing the Message Display settings, follow +these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message +Display. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & +Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • +

          Plain-Text Messages: Select the font you prefer for +viewing plain-text messages: fixed width or variable width. +Choosing a font style, size, and color for quoted plain-text +messages can help you more easily distinguish quoted text (usually +a message that's been forwarded to you or by you).

          +
          • + +
        • Wrap text to fit window width: Select this so +that incoming messages are word-wrapped to fit the width of your +Mail window.
          • + +
        • Display emoticons as graphics: Select this so +that when you receive messages that contain emoticons (also called +smiley faces) Mail & Newsgroups can convert them to graphics, +for example: +


          + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
          This:Converts to:
          :-)
          :)
          :-(
          :(
          ;-)
          ;-p
          +
          • + +
        • +

          Languages: Click the Character Coding drop-down list to +select the language you want Mail & Newsgroups to use as the +default for incoming mail and newsgroup messages. This is +recommended if it's likely you might receive messages in which the +character set is not indicated, such as when reading messages in +international newsgroups.

          +
          • + +
        • Apply default to all messages: Select this to apply the +default character coding to all messages. + +

          Tip: You can later view or change the character set +coding (language) for a specific folder. In the Mail window, select +a folder from the list of Mail folders. Open the View menu, and +choose Character Coding.

          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition

        + +

        Composition preferences affect how you create messages (for +example, forwarding options and address autocompletion) in all +accounts. If you are not already viewing the Composition settings, +follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Forwarding and Replying to Messages: Use the +Forward Messages drop-down list to choose how you want forwarded +message text to appear: as an attachment or inline (in the +body of your message).
          • + +
        • Automatically quote the original message when +replying: Select this to include the original message text +in your reply. Then use the drop-down list to select where you want +to place your reply in the message area.
          • + +
        • Composing Messages: Choose to have Mail & Newsgroups use "quoted +printable" MIME encoding when sending regular messages that use an +8-bit character set (for example, Latin ISO88359).
          • + +
        • Wrap plain text messages at __ characters: +Enter a number to set the right margin for text in the message +area.
          • + +
        • Character Coding: Select the language you want +Mail & Newsgroups to use as the default for outgoing mail and +newsgroup messages.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format

        + +

        Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to +format your outgoing messages. If you are not already viewing the +Send Format settings, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Ask me what to do: This option requires Mail +& Newsgroups to prompt you to choose a format before you send +the message.
          • + +
        • Convert the message to plain text: This option +may cause your message to lose formatting such as bold text.
          • + +
        • Send the message in HTML anyway: If you select +this option, keep in mind that some mail programs may have trouble +displaying the message.
          • + +
        • Send the message in both plain text and HTML: +This option uses more disk space.
          • + +
        • +

          You can always override these preferences for an individual +message by using the Options menu in the Mail Compose window.

          +
          • + +
        • HTML and Plain Text Domains: Use the Add +button to add the domain names that you typically send mail to, if +you know which domains can display HTML-formatted mail messages, +and which domains can only display plain text.
          • +
        + +

        For example, if you typically send mail to multiple recipients +that have the same domain name (for example, your colleagues all +have email addresses that end in "netscape.net"), and you know that +this domain name is capable of displaying HTML messages, then you +can add the netscape.net domain to the list of HTML Domains so that +Mail & Newsgroups will automatically send messages in HTML +format to these recipients.

        + +

        Similarly, if you typically send mail to recipients at a domain +that you know can only receive Plain Text messages, you can add +that domain name to the list of Plain Text domains, so that Mail +& Newsgroups automatically sends messages to that domain in +plain-text format.

        + +

        Note: If you regularly compose HTML (formatted) +mail messages, keep in mind that sometimes not all recipients use +mail programs that can display HTML formatting properly. Send +Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format +messages that go to recipients who cannot display HTML-formatted +mail. You can convert messages to plain text, format them only as +HTML, or format them as both HTML and plain text. These preferences +apply to all your mail accounts, but only to mail messages and not +to newsgroup messages.

        + +

        Whenever you add a person or address card to your address book, +you can specify whether that addressee can receive HTML-formatted +messages. However, when this information is unknown, you can set +Send Format preferences for how Mail & Newsgroups formats these +messages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing

        + +

        Addressing preferences allow you to control the settings for +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups address books (for example, email +address collection and address autocompletion). If you are not +already viewing the Addressing settings, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Email Address Collection: Select how Mail +& Newsgroups will add senders' and recipients' addresses to +your Collected Addresses book (from incoming, outgoing, or +newsgroup messages). + +

          Note: In addition to your Personal Address Book, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups provides you with a Collected Addresses Book that can automatically +store email addresses from your incoming or outgoing messages, or both. By +default, email addresses contained in outgoing messages are stored as soon +as you click Send. If you choose "Incoming Mail Messages," Mail & Newsgroups +stores the sender's address in each message as soon as you open it. Any changes +you make to these settings take effect the next time you start Mozilla. + +

          +
          • + +
        • Address Autocompletion: Address autocompletion allows +you to quickly address mail without having to search for names or +type names completely. Select from which location Mail & +Newsgroups will search for matching addresses: "Local Address +Books" (Personal Address Book, Collected Addresses Book, or any +other local address book) or "Directory Server" (an available LDAP +directory server) or both. + +

          Note: If while addressing mail, multiple email address +matches are found, Mail & Newsgroups displays a list of all +possible choices.

          + +

          If you select Directory Server, choose a directory server from +the list. A directory server lets you look up addresses that are +not stored in one of your local address books. The directory you +select will also be searched for matching certificates when you +attempt to send an encrypted message to one or more recipients for +whom you don't have certificates on file.

          + +

          See Adding and Removing LDAP Directories +for information on setting LDAP directory server settings.

          + +

          Note: Directory server settings you enter from the +Preferences dialog box apply to all your mail accounts. You can +override these settings for individual accounts by specifying +different LDAP directory servers or server settings using the +Addressing settings for an account in the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box. To set different addressing options +for a specific account, open the Edit menu and choose Mail & +Newsgroups Account Settings.

          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Labels

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Labels preferences panel. +You use the Labels preferences to define the label text and colors +for message labels. If you are not currently viewing the panel, +follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Labels. (If no +options are visible, double-click the Mail & Newsgroups +category to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Customize Labels: Specifies the label text and +the color for each label. You can edit or replace the default label +text with your own text (up to 32 characters). To change the label +color, click the color chip next to that label and select a new +color.
          • + +
        • Restore Defaults: Restores the default label +text and colors.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Return Receipts

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Return Receipts +preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the Return +Receipts panel, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Return +Receipts. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & +Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +

        You use the Return Receipts preferences to define return receipt +settings for outgoing messages from all your mail accounts. You +also use the Return Receipt preferences to specify how to manage +requests you receive for return receipts.

        + +
          +
        • When sending messages, always request a return +receipt: Enables automatic return receipt requests for all +outgoing messages in all your mail accounts.
          • + +
        • Leave it in my Inbox: Return receipt +confirmation messages are delivered to your Inbox.
          • + +
        • +

          Tip: Choose this option if you want to use a +filter that automatically moves return receipt confirmation +messages to a folder you specify. For information on creating and +using filters, see Creating Message +Filters.

          +
          • + +
        • Move it to my Sent Mail folder: Incoming +return receipt confirmation messages are moved to your Sent mail +folder.
          • + +
        • Never send a return receipt: Choose this +option if you do not want to send a return receipt in response to +requests for return receipts from others.
          • + +
        • Allow return receipts for some messages: +Choose how you want to respond to requests you receive for return +receipts.
          • +
        + +

        To override these global preferences for individual accounts, +see Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings - Return Receipts.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Offline & Disk Space Preferences

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Offline & Disk Space +preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, +follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Click Offline & Disk Space.
          3. +
        + +

        The Offline & Disk Space preferences allow you to set +preferences for working offline, going online, and disk space.

        + +
          +
        • Offline: Select how you want Mail & +Newsgroups to handle messages when going online or offline.
          • + +
        • Disk Space: Select this to conserve disk space +by automatically compacting message folders when it will save the +amount of disk space you enter.
          • +
        + +

        See Working Offline for +information on working offline.

        + +

        [ Return to +beginning of section ]

        + +
        +

        10 October 2002 +

        + +
        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 The Mozilla Organization.

        + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.xhtml index 3673f3b3a9b..14208187e19 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/mail_help.xhtml @@ -1,2933 +1,5953 @@ - - -Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups Help Contents - - - - - - - -

        Getting Started with Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Using the Mail Account Setup Wizard -

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News Accounts -

        Changing the Settings for an Account -

        -

         

        - - - - - - - - - - -

        Using the Mail Account Setup Wizard

        - -

        The very first time you launch Mail & Newsgroups, if you have not already set up an account, - Mail & Newsgroups displays the Account Wizard so you can create an account. Later, you can - add additional mail and newsgroup accounts - from the File menu of the Mail window by choosing New, then Account. -

        The Wizard asks you to provide required information, such as your user name - and email address. If you do not know a setting, you can exit the Wizard and - ask your Internet service provider (ISP) or help desk. - - - -

        Setting Up Mail Accounts with an ISP or Email Provider

        -

        To set up a mail account with an ISP or email provider, you'll need to provide: -

          -
        • your user name
          • -
        • your email address
          • -
        • the incoming and outgoing mail server names
          • -
        • the incoming server type (IMAP or POP)
          • -
        -

        To set up a newsgroup account, you'll need to provide: -

          -
        • your name -
        • your email address
          • -
        • newsgroup server name
          • -
        • account name -
        -

        To set up a new mail or newsgroup account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Click Add Account to start the Account wizard.
          3. -
        3. Choose the type of account you want to set up, and click Next. The information - the wizard asks you to provide depends on the type of account you are setting - up. The rest of the steps in this section assume you are setting up an account - with an ISP or email provider.
          4. -
        4. In the Identity section, enter your name (as you would like it to appear - in the "From" field of messages you send) and email address, and click Next.
          5. -
        5. In the Server Information section, select the type of incoming mail server - (IMAP or POP). Enter the incoming server name - and the outgoing (SMTP) server name (this is the name of the mail server that - sends your messages, and is also known as your SMTP host). Then click Next.
          6. -

          Note: Only one outgoing mail server (SMTP) needs to be specified, - even if you have several mail accounts. The name of your SMTP host may not - have been reported to you in your ISP information or by your system administrator. - Your SMTP host may be the same as your POP or IMAP host. If in doubt, contact - your ISP or system administrator. -

          -

        6. In the User Name section, enter your user name and click Next.
          7. -
        7. In the Account Name section, assign a name for this account (for example, - "Work" or "Family"), and click Next.
          8. -
        8. Verify that the information you entered is correct. If necessary, verify - the information you entered with your ISP or system administrator. -
        9. Click Finish to set up your account.
          10. -
        -

        You are now ready to retrieve messages from your account.

        - -

        You can add additional mail and newsgroup accounts - from the File menu of the Mail window by choosing New, then Account. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News Accounts

        -

        You use the Account Settings dialog box to add a new account or to change - information for an existing account, including: -

          -
        • mail and newsgroup server settings (for example, message deletion and download - preferences)
          • -
        • storage settings for message copies and folders
          • -
        • your reply-to address, organization name, and signature
          • -
        -

        To add a new account or change settings for an existing account, begin from - the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
            -
          • To set up a new mail or news account using the Account Wizard, click Add - Account. Be sure to type the account exactly as it is given to you. Click - Next or Back to move through the screens. To cancel your account creation, - click Cancel.
            • -
          • To specify an account as your default account, select it and then click - the Set as Default button. Your changes will take affect the next time you - start Mail & Newsgroups. After you restart, your default account appears as the first - account in your list of accounts in the Mail window. -

            The default account - is the one that you want to log into when you first start Mail & Newsgroups. Also, Mozilla - Mail & Newsgroups automatically checks the default account for new messages when you - first start Mail & Newsgroups. (For POP accounts, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't download the new messages - until you click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.)

            • -
          • To remove an account and its settings, click the Remove Account button.
            • -
          • To modify information for the outgoing mail server, click the Outgoing - Server (SMTP) item. See Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) for more information. -
          -
        2. Click OK to save your changes.
          3. -
        -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        - -

         

        - -

        Changing the Settings for an Account

        -

        To view or change information for an existing mail or newsgroup account, begin - from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Click the account name in the left-hand side of the Account Settings dialog - box. You see information about the account, such as your email address and - signature file, in the right side of the dialog box.
          3. -
        3. Click the Server Settings category (beneath the name of your account). You - see the Server Settings section, where you can edit mail or newsgroup server - settings. The settings available depend on the type of server (IMAP, POP, - or newsgroup server). For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings. -

          Important: If you need to change the server type (for example, from POP to IMAP) you must first remove the existing account. Next, you must quit Mozilla - and restart it. You can then reopen the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog - box and recreate the account with the new server type by clicking Add Account. -

          -

          4. -
        4. Click the Copies & Folders category. You see the Copies & Folders - section, where you can specify whether to send automatic (blind carbon copies) - messages and where you want to store copies of outgoing messages, message - drafts, and message templates. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders.
          5. -
        5. Click the Addressing category. You see the Addressing section, where you - can choose addressing settings for this account that override the global directory server settings - specified for all address books in the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing. - -
        6. Click the Offline & Disk Space category (IMAP and News accounts only). You see the Offline & Disk - Space section, where you can specify settings that apply when you are working - offline (disconnected from the Internet) or that save download time and conserve disk space. For more information, see Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP) or Offline and Disk Space Settings (News). -
          7. -
        7. Click the Disk Space category (POP accounts only). You see the Disk - Space section, where you can prevent messages larger than a specified size from being downloaded to your hard disk. For more information, see Disk Space Settings (POP).
          8. - -
        8. Click the Security category. You see the Security section, where you can configure your mail account for signing and encrypting mail messages that you send. Digital Signing settings enable you to identify yourself to others in mail messages that you send. Encryption settings let you ensure that your mail messages remain private while they are in transit. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security. -
          9. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - - -
        -

        Reading Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Getting New Messages -

        Choosing How You View the Mail Window -

        Sorting and Threading Messages -

        Saving and Printing Messages -

        -

         

        - -

        Getting New Messages

        -

        When you start Mail & Newsgroups, if your default account is an IMAP account, Mail & Newsgroups automatically - gets new messages and displays them in the Inbox (the primary message folder). - For a POP account, you must click Get Msgs to retrieve your messages. By default, when you retrieve messages from your POP account, the messages are deleted from the POP server. You can change your POP server settings to store a copy of messages on the server in addition to downloading them to your computer. -

        You can - also set up Mail & Newsgroups to get new messages at startup and to check for new messages - at timed intervals. -

        The Mail & Newsgroups icon on the status bar displays a green arrow to notify you when new - messages have arrived. -

        - - - - - - - - -
          New mail notification
        -

        -

        To set up Mail & Newsgroups to automatically check for new messages, begin from the Mail - window: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. If you have multiple accounts, select an account and click the Server Settings - category for that account.
          3. -
        3. Select from the following options: -
            -
          • In the Server Settings section, select "Check for new mail at startup" - if you want Mail & Newsgroups to check this account automatically for new messages - whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP accounts, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't download new messages - until you click Get Msgs or unless you choose "Automatically download any - new messages".
            • -
          • Select "Check for new messages every ___ minutes" and then specify the number - of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you - can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail - window.
            • -
          -
        4. Click OK. Your settings take affect the next time you start Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups.
          5. -
        -

        You can always retrieve messages manually at any time. To get new messages - for the selected account or newsgroup, do one of the following: -

          -
        • Click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.
          • -
        • Open the File menu (in the Mail window) and choose Get New Messages.
          • -
        -

        To get new messages for all your mail accounts, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button in the Mail toolbar. -
        2. Choose Get All New Messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups retrieves new messages for all - your mail accounts. If you are not currently logged into one of your mail - accounts, Mail & Newsgroups first prompts you to enter your user name and password before - retrieving new messages for that account. (If you have already stored your - user name and password using the Password Manager, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't prompt you - for this information.) -
        -

        -Note: You can also open the File menu (in the Mail window) and choose "Get New Messages for". - -

        To get new messages for a specific mail account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button on the Mail toolbar. -
        2. Choose the account for which you want to retrieve mail. -
        - - - - - - - - -
          Mail & Newsgroups icon
        -

        Note: Mail & Newsgroups prompts you for your password the first time you retrieve messages for an account. -You can choose to have Mail & Newsgroups store your - password in the Password Manager at that time. -

        Password Manager can save all your user names and passwords on your own computer - in a file that's difficult, but not impossible, for an intruder to read. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Choosing How You View the Mail Window

        -

        You can customize the layout of the Mail window (the window you see when you - choose Mail & Newsgroups from the Tasks menu): -

          -
        • Open the View menu and choose Toolbars to show or hide the Mail toolbar - or the status bar.
          • -
        • Open the View menu and uncheck My Sidebar to hide My Sidebar.
          • -
        • Expand and collapse any pane to switch between a three-pane or two-pane - view. Choose a default view in the Mail and - Newsgroup Preferences panel. If you change the default view, you must exit - Mail & Newsgroups and then restart to have your change take effect.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Sorting and Threading Messages

        -

        To sort messages by categories such as subject, sender, date, or priority, - begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        • Click the appropriate column heading in the message list window. - Or, open the View menu, choose Sort, and then select the column you want to - sort by.
          • -
        - -

        To reorder column headings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        • Click and drag a column heading to the left or right to reposition the column.
          • -
        -

        To group messages by threading (subject), so each message is grouped with all - its responses: -

          -
        • Click the thread button to the left of the Subject, Sender, and Date column - headings.
          • -
        -

        -

        - - - - - - - - -
              -
          Thread button
        -

        Tip: To help you identify unread messages in a collapsed thread where you've read - the parent message, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups underlines the parent message. -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Saving and Printing Messages

        -

        To save a mail message as a plain-text or HTML file: -

          -
        1. In the Mail window, select the message.
          2. -
        2. Open the File menu and choose Save As, and then choose File.
          3. -
        3. Choose a file name and location and click Save.
          4. -
        -

        To print a selected message: -

          -
        • Click Print.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -
        -

        Sending Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup Messages -

        Using the Message Composition Window -

        Addressing a Message -

        Selecting Message Sending Options -

        Replying to a Message -

        Forwarding a Message -

        Saving and Editing a Message Draft -

        Creating and Using Templates -

        -

         

        - -

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup Messages

        -

        You can address, compose, reply to, or send a new message by doing one of the - following: -

          -
        • In any Mozilla window, open the File menu and choose New, then Message. -
        • Click Compose on the Mail toolbar. -
        • While displaying a message, click Reply, Forward, or Reply All on the Mail - toolbar.
          • -
        • From the Address Book window, select an address and click Compose on the Address Book.
          • -
        -

        Tip: Use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings command on the Edit menu to - specify the HTML text editor for composing messages. In the Account Settings - dialog box, select the account, and check "Compose messages in HTML format" - to use the HTML text editor for all messages. If you want to use the plain-text - editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the plain-text editor on an as-needed basis. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Using the Message Composition Window

        -

        Use the Compose window to address, compose, and send mail and newsgroup messages. - First specify whether you want to compose messages in plain text or HTML in - the Account Settings Preferences - panel (Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings). -

        To view the Compose window, click on the Compose button on the Mail toolbar.

        -

        The Compose window contains the following: -

          -
        • Compose Toolbar
          • -

          You can click the following buttons:

          -
            -
          • Send: To send a completed message.
            • -
          • Address: To search for names in your address books.
            • -
          • Attach: To attach a file to a message.
            • -
          • Spell: To check the spelling of your message text.
            • -
          • Save: To save the message as a draft.
            • -
          -

          -

        • Attachments field: When you attach files to a message, the file names are - listed in the Attachments field to the right of the Addressing area.
          • -
        -

        If you've chosen to compose messages using the HTML editor, you see an additional - toolbar with text formatting buttons similar to those in Mozilla Composer. -

        For help using the HTML editor, see the Composer - online help. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Addressing a Message

        -

        To address a mail message: -

          -
        1. Type the name in the address field.
          2. -

          If you have address autocompletion enabled (it's - enabled by default), simply type the first few letters of the recipient's - name and wait for Mail & Newsgroups to complete the address. (Or you can type part of the - name and immediately press Enter to have Mail & Newsgroups try to complete the address.) -

        2. If multiple addresses are found, select an address and press Enter.
          3. -

          Note: Use a comma to separate multiple addresses on the same line. - Do not use a comma to separate first or last names. (example: emailaddress1@netscape.com, - emailaddress2@netscape.com, emailaddress3@netscape.com) -

        3. If you want this message to be sent from a different - account, click the "From" field to select the account you want.
          4. -
        4. If necessary, click "To" to choose a different recipient type:
          5. -
            -
          • To: For primary recipients of your message.
            • -
          • Cc: For secondary recipients (carbon copy).
            • -
          • Bcc: For secondary recipients not identified to the other recipients, - including those in the cc list (blind carbon copy).
            • -
          • Reply-To: For recipients to reply to a different email address - other than the one the message is sent from.
            • -
          • Newsgroup: For posting to a newsgroup.
            • -
          • Followup-To: For redirecting a newsgroup posting, so that subsequent - replies go directly to the redirected newsgroup instead of the original - newsgroup.
            • -
          -
        -

        Tip: You can quickly address a message by right-clicking the email - address contained in a message you're reading, and then selecting Send Mail - To from the pop-up menu.

        - -

        Changing the Account From Which a Message is Sent -

        If you have multiple mail accounts, the account listed in the From field is - based on the account (or server) you selected when you choose - to create a new message. However, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also allows you to change the - account a message is sent from while you're composing a message. Click the From - field to view a list of your accounts and then select the account you want. - A copy of the message is saved in the Sent folder of the account where you sent the message. -

        About Address Autocompletion -

        Address autocompletion allows you to address mail easily from the Compose - window without having to search for names or type complete names. Mail & Newsgroups automatically - checks your address books and an LDAP directory server (if available) and completes - the name if it finds a unique match. It also prevents mistakes by showing all - possible choices with additional information if it finds multiple matches. Address - autocompletion is enabled by default. -

        If you don't want to use an address that Mail & Newsgroups provides, simply press Backspace - or Delete to erase the address and then enter an alternate address. -

        To disable address autocompletion: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If no options - are visible in this category, double-click the category to expand the list). -
        3. In the Address Autocompletion section, deselect "Local Address - Books" and "Directory Server." -
        4. Click OK. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Selecting Message Sending Options

        -

        While you're composing a message, you can select these additional message sending - options from the Options menu: -

          -
        • Select Addresses: The Select Addresses option lets you choose the - recipient's email address from your Address Books. Select an address and then - click To:, Cc:, or Bcc: to address your message.
          • -
        • Check Spelling: Checks the spelling of the message text. You can - also click Spell.
          • -
        • Rewrap: If you are composing a message using the plain-text editor, - you can use the Rewrap command to rewrap long lines of quoted text to fit - the Compose window. This command rewraps selected quoted text to the window - width, or rewraps all quoted text if no text is selected. This command is - primarily useful when you are replying to a message where the original message - is quoted in your reply, and the original message contains long lines.
          - You use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings command on the Edit menu to specify - that you want to use the plain-text editor for composing messages. In the - Account Settings dialog box, select the account, and uncheck "Compose messages - in HTML format" to use the plain-text editor for all messages. If you only - want to use the plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift - key while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the plain-text editor - on an as-needed basis.
          • -
        • Format: Send the message as plain text, or HTML (formatted), or both. - If you choose "Auto-Detect," Mail & Newsgroups asks you for the format to use if it's unknown - whether the recipient's mail program can display an HTML message. The format - you choose here overrides the send format you specified using the Preferences - command on the Edit menu.
          • -
        • Priority: Choose a priority to indicate whether the message - has lowest, low, normal, high, or highest priority.
          • -
        • Copy Message To: Choose this if you want to file an additional - copy of the sent message in a different folder than your default Sent folder. - Then select the folder you want.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Replying to a Message

        -

        To reply to a mail message: -

          -
        • Select the message.
          • -
        • Click Reply to respond to the sender alone.
          • -
        • Click Reply All to respond to all addressees in the message.
          • -
        -

        To include the original message each time you reply to any message: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message - Composition.
          3. -
        3. Select "Automatically quote the original message when replying."
          4. -
        4. Click OK.
          5. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Forwarding a Message

        -

        When you forward a message, you can specify how to place new text relative - to the original text: inline (in the body of the message; this - is the default), or as an attachment. -

        To forward a message: -

          -
        1. Select the message and click Forward.
          2. -
        2. Type the name or email address of the recipient.
          3. -
        3. Click Send.
          4. -
        -

        To set the default for forwarding messages: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message - Composition. (If necessary, double-click the Mail & Newsgroups category - to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Click OK.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Saving and Editing a Message Draft

        -

        To save a mail message as a draft so you can complete it later: -

          -
        • In the Compose window, click Save, or open the File menu and choose Save - as Draft. By default, the message is saved in the Drafts folder for the current - account. -

          Note: Your mail message will stay open after you save it as a draft.

          -
          • -
        -

        To edit or send a message draft: -

          -
        1. From the Mail & Newsgroups window, click the Drafts folder for the account where you - created the message draft.
          2. -
        2. Click the message that you want to edit.
          3. -
        3. In the top-right corner of the message, click the Edit Draft button. (Alternatively, - from the Edit menu, choose Edit Draft.)
          4. -
        4. Edit the message as necessary.
          5. -
        5. Click Send to send the message or click Save to save the message so you - can complete it later.
          6. -
        -

        -Tip: You can also double-click the message to open it for editing. - This is especially useful if the message pane is closed.
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Creating and Using Templates

        -

        Templates are useful for formatting messages that you send regularly, such - as weekly status reports. You can save a message as a template from any window - in which it is displayed, including from within a Mail compose window. -

        To save a message as a template: -

          -
        • While displaying a message: open the File menu, choose Save As, then Template. - The template file is stored in the Templates folder.
          • -
        -

        To edit or use a template file: -

          -
        1. In the Mail window, select the Templates folder for the account where you created the message template.
          2. -
        2. Double-click the message you want to edit.
          3. -
        3. Edit the message, then save it or send it.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -
        -

        Creating HTML Mail Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Using HTML in Your Messages -

        Choosing HTML Message Sending Options -

        Specifying Recipients for HTML Messages -

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML Messages -

        Using the HTML Mail Question Dialog Box -

        -

         

        - -

        Using HTML in Your Messages

        -

        HTML messages can include formatted text, links, images, and tables—just like - a web page. However, some recipients may not be able to receive HTML messages. - Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups allows you to compose mail and newsgroup messages using either - the HTML (rich-text) formatting editor or the plain-text editor for each mail - account you have. In addition, you can choose whether your addressees should - receive HTML or plain-text messages by default, and how Mail & Newsgroups should handle messages - when it's not known if an addressee can receive HTML formatted mail. -

        To specify whether to use the HTML editor as the default for composing messages, - begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the mail or newsgroup account you want to use.
          3. -
        3. Select "Compose messages in HTML format." You see the Formatting toolbar - in the Compose window. Leave this box unchecked to use the plain-text editor - for this account.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Choosing HTML Mail Sending Options

        -

        You can choose the default method Mail & Newsgroups uses to handle sending HTML messages - when it's not known whether the recipient's mail program can display formatted messages. -

        To choose HTML sending options for mail messages, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. (If no options are visible in - this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. -

          Note: This preference applies only to mail messages, not to newsgroup - messages. -

          -

          3. -
        3. Select the option you want and then click OK.
          4. -
        -

        If while composing a message you realize that one or more recipients may not - be able to receive HTML-formatted mail, you can easily convert the message to - a different format when you click Send: -

        -

          -
        1. In the Compose window, open the Options menu and choose Format. -
        2. Select the format you want to use for sending the message: -
            -
          • Auto Detect: Mail & Newsgroups chooses the appropriate format. -
          • Plain Text Only: May lose formatting such as bold text. -
          • Rich Text (HTML) Only: Some mail programs may have trouble displaying - the message. -
          • Plain and Rich (HTML) Text: This uses more disk space. -
          -
        3. When you've finished composing the message, click Send. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Specifying Recipients for HTML Messages

        -

        You can save time by indicating whether individuals in your address books prefer - to receive either HTML messages or plain text messages. -

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Address Book.
          2. -
        2. Select the address book on the left and then select the individual's card - on the right.
          3. -
        3. Click Properties to display the "Card for" dialog box.
          4. -
        4. In the Name tab, use the "Prefers to receive messages formatted as" drop-down - list to select HTML if you know this recipient can read HTML-formatted messages - (such as messages that include links, images, or tables). If this - recipient can only read messages sent as plain text (no formatting), then - choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not sure, choose Unknown. If you - choose Unknown, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups determines the sending format based on the Send - Format settings for Mail & Newsgroups in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & Newsgroups still can't - determine the correct format, it will prompt you to choose a sending format - when you send the message.
          5. -
        5. Click OK.
          6. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML Messages

        -

        You can quickly view the HTML and other code that generates an HTML message - you've received: -

          -
        1. Open the message.
          2. -
        2. Open the View menu and choose Message Source.
          3. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Using the HTML Mail Question Dialog Box

        -

        The HTML Mail Question dialog box appears when you try to send a message to - someone who does not want to receive HTML messages or when Mail & Newsgroups cannot determine - whether your recipient can display HTML messages. If you are in doubt, send - a plain-text message. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -
        -

        Using Attachments

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Attaching a File or Web Page -

        Viewing and Opening Attachments -

        Saving Attachments -

        -

         

        - -

        Attaching a File or Web Page

        -

        To attach a file to an outgoing mail message: -

          -
        1. In the Compose window, click Attach or open the File menu and choose Attach - File. You see the "Enter file to attach" dialog box.
          2. -

          Tip: You can also click inside the Attachments area to attach a file. -

        2. Type the name of the file you want to attach, or select a file from your - hard drive that you want to attach.
          3. -
        3. Click Open. The file name appears in the Attachments area.
          4. -
        -

        Tip: You can also drag and drop one or more files from your desktop into the Attachments area in the Compose window. -

        To attach a web page to an outgoing mail message: -

          -
        1. In the Compose window, open the File menu and choose Attach Web Page.
          2. -
        2. In the dialog box, enter the URL of the page and then click OK. The web - page URL appears in the Attachments area.
          3. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Viewing and Opening Attachments

        -

        If you receive a mail attachment that consists of a file type that Mozilla - can display (such as graphic files and HTML files), you see the attachment displayed - inline (in the body of the message). For other file types, Mail & Newsgroups lets - you open the attachment using another application, or you can save the - attachment on your hard disk. -

        To open the attachment, make sure you have a program on your computer that - can open files of the same type as the attachment's file format. For example, - if you want to open a GIF file, make sure you have a program on your computer - that can open GIF files. -

        To open an attachment: -

          -
        1. Double-click the attachment you want (if there is more than one).
          2. -
        2. In the Downloading dialog box, choose what you want Mozilla to do with the attachment:
          3. -
            -
          • If Mozilla finds an application on your hard disk that can open the attachment, you can open the attachment using that application. Click "Choose" to use a different application to open the attachment.
            • -
          • If Mozilla can't find an application on your hard disk that can open the attachment, you can save the attachment. You won't be able to open the attachment, but at least you can save it on your hard disk until you can install an application that can open it.
            • -
          • Click "Advanced" to add a new file type to the list of helper applications. Mozilla uses helper applications to determine how different file types are opened by other applications from within Mozilla. -
          -
        3. Click OK. -
        -

        Note: If you are viewing your mail using an IMAP mail server, all attachments remain on the server. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Saving Attachments

        -

        To save an attachment:

        -
          -
        1. In the right side of the message envelope, select the attachment that you - want to save. -
        2. Right-click (Control + Click on Mac) the attachment and choose Save As from the - pop-up menu. -
        3. Choose a file name and location for the attachment on your hard disk and - then click OK. Mail & Newsgroups downloads the attachment and saves it to the specified - location.
          4. -
        -

        Tip: To save all attachments, right-click the first one in the attachment - list, and choose Save All. You can then specify the location where you want - all the attachments to be saved. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -
        -

        Deleting Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Moving Messages to and from the Trash -

        -

         

        -

        How you delete messages depends on your mail server type: IMAP or POP. Deleted - POP messages are automatically moved to the Trash folder. IMAP users can set - different options for deleting messages. -

        To delete IMAP messages from your Inbox or other folders, begin from the Mail - window: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete. By default, - Mail & Newsgroups moves the selected messages to the Trash folder.
          2. -
        2. To delete messages permanently, open the File menu and choose Empty Trash. -
          3. -
        -

        To set deletion preferences for IMAP messages: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Locate the IMAP account you want, and then click the Server Settings category - under the account name.
          3. -
        3. Select the options you want for deleting messages and click OK.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Moving Messages To and From the Trash

        -

        If you use a POP server to deliver your mail, or if you set up IMAP to use the Trash - folder, follow these steps to delete messages from your Inbox or other folders: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select the messages you want to delete.
          2. -
        2. Click Delete. Mail & Newsgroups moves the messages to the Trash folder.
          3. -
        -

        To recover messages from the Trash: -

          -
        1. Click the Trash folder.
          2. -
        2. Select the messages you want to recover, and drag them to another folder. -
          3. -
        -

        To delete messages permanently: -

          -
        • Open the File menu and choose Empty Trash.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - - - - - -
        -

        Using Address Books

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        About Address Books -

        Adding Entries to Your Address Books -

        Creating a New Address Book -

        Creating a New Address Book Card -

        Creating a Mailing List -

        Editing a Mailing List -

        Searching Address Books and Directories -

        Importing Address Books -

        Exporting Address Books -

        Syncing Entries with Your WebMail or AOL Address Book -

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories - -

        -

         

        - -

        About Address Books

        -

        Address books store email addresses and contact information for people you - typically send mail to, such as colleagues, friends, and family. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups - provides you with two address books: the Personal Address Book and the Collected - Addresses Book—and you can create additional address books as well. The - contents of these address books are stored locally on your hard disk. Your address - book may also list email addresses from an LDAP directory, which is located - on an LDAP directory server. The directory server stores email addresses of - people that are not included in your locally-stored address books. -

        Personal Address Book

        -

        Use the Personal Address Book to add specific names of your choice, or to - import address books from other mail programs and previous versions of Mozilla. - You can create mailing lists, edit individual address entries, and create additional - address books. - -

        Collected Addresses

        -

        The Collected Addresses Book automatically collects the email addresses contained - in incoming and outgoing messages, as well as the screen names for buddy lists - migrated from Mozilla. For incoming mail messages, the Collected - Addresses Book saves the sender's address in each message as soon as you open - it. Addresses from outgoing messages are stored as soon as you click Send. You - can choose which addresses you want to collect (only addresses from mail messages - or addresses from both mail and newsgroup messages) by changing the - preferences for email address collection. -

        LDAP Directory (if available)

        -

        An LDAP directory (also known as an address lookup service) stores email addresses - of recipients who are not in your locally-stored address books. LDAP directories - offer you access to large, centrally maintained databases of email addresses, - which is especially useful with address autocompletion.

        -

        To enable automatic address collection, begin in the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If no options - are visible in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Under Email Address Collection, choose whether you want to:
          4. -
            -
          • Use this feature for incoming or outgoing messages, or both.
            • -
          • Use this feature for newsgroup messages.
            • -
          • Limit the size of the Collected Address book. The default size is 700 cards. - If you add a new card that exceeds the limit, the oldest card is removed and - the new card is added, keeping the total number of cards the same.
            • -
          -
        4. Click OK.
          5. -
        -

        -

        Opening the Address Book Window

        -

        To open the Address Book window: -

          -

          -

        • Open the Tasks menu and choose Address Book, or click the Address Book - icon on the status bar.
          • - - - - - - - - -
          -
            Address Book icon
          -
        -

        -

        Changing the Address Book Window Display

        -

        -

        To customize how the Address Book window and the cards are displayed: -

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu and choose Address Book. You see the Address Book window. -
          2. -
        2. In the Address Book window, open the View menu and choose from the following - display options:
          3. -
            -
          • Choose Show Name As, and then select how you want card names displayed - (first/last, last/first, or Display Name).
            • -
          • Choose Sort, and then select a sort option (sort by Name, Email, Work - Phone, or Organization).
            • -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Adding Entries to Your Address Books

        -

        You can use any of the following ways to add entries to your address books: -

          -
        • Click a name in the From or recipient fields (for example, To or Cc) in - a message you've received, and then select "Add to Address Book" from the - drop-down list.
          • -
        • In the Address Book window, click New Card to create a new address book - card.
          • -
        • Open a message, which automatically adds the sender's address to your Collected - Addresses Book (if enabled).
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a New Address Book

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides a default personal address book, but you can create - additional address books. -

        To create a new address book: -

          -
        1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the Tasks menu and - choose Address Book. You see the Address Book window.
          2. - - - - - - - - -
          -
          Address Book icon
          -

          -

        2. In the Address Book window, open the File menu, choose New, and choose - Address Book. You see the New Address Book dialog box.
          3. -
        3. Type the name of the new address book, and click OK.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a New Address Book Card

        -

        Address book cards can be used to store names, postal addresses, email addresses, - phone numbers, and information such as whether the addressee prefers to receive - plain-text or HTML-formatted messages. -

        To create an address book card for an individual: -

          -
        1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the Tasks menu and - choose Address Book.
          2. -
        2. Click New Card. (If you have multiple address books, select the one to - which you want to add a card.)
          3. -
        3. Each New Card dialog box has four tabs: -

          -
            -
          • Name tab: Enter the following information: -
              -
            • First and Last (first and last name of person as you want it to - appear in the address book). -
            • Display name (the name that appears in the "To" field of the Compose - window). -
            • Nickname (a shortcut or alias for the real name).
              • -
            • Email address (primary and additional address). -
            • Prefers to receive messages formatted as: If you know this recipient - can read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that include links, - images, or tables), choose HTML. If this recipient can only read messages - sent as plain text (no formatting), then choose Plain Text. If you - don't know or are not sure, choose Unknown. If you choose Unknown, - Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups determines the sending format based on the Mail & Newsgroups Send Format settings in the Preferences dialog box. If - Mail & Newsgroups still can't determine the correct format, Mail & Newsgroups will prompt you to - choose a sending format when you send the message.
              • -
            • Phones (enter phone number information for this person) -
            -
          • Address tab: Type additional information such as street address, - phone number, and URL.
            • -

            Tip: If you enter address information, Mozilla displays a Get Map button next to the address when you view this entry's address book card in your address book. Clicking the Get Map button displays a web page that contains a map to the address.

            -
          • Instant Messenger tab: Type the person's screen name and choose - a Buddy List grouping.
            - Note: You must be logged on to Instant Messenger in order to enter - information from this tab.
            • -
          • Other tab: Store any additional information you want.
            • -
          -
        -

        Tip: To quickly add entries to your address book, right-click any mail - address in messages you receive and select Add to Address Book from the drop-down - list. The New Card dialog box appears where you can complete the information. -

         

        - -

        Viewing or Editing Card Properties

        -

        To view or edit the properties for an individual card: -

          -
        • Select the card in the Address List window and click Properties.
          • -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a Mailing List

        -

        If you regularly send messages to a group of recipients, you can quickly address - a message by using a mailing list that contains the names you want. -

        To create a mailing list and add it to your address book: -

          -
        1. In the Address Book window, click New List.
          2. -
        2. Enter the following information in the Mailing List dialog box: -
            -
          • Click the drop-down list at "Add to" to choose an address book in which - to store the list. -
          • List name: When you enter the list name in the "To" field of a message, - everyone on the list receives your message. -
          • List nickname: Alias (or shortcut) for the list name. -
          • Description: Appears after the list name in the address line of the - Compose window. -
          -
        3. Drag entries from the Address Book window into the list, or type in addresses. -
        4. Click OK. -
        5. The list appears in the left and right sides of the Address Book window. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Editing a Mailing List

        -

        Mailing lists are stored in the address book in which you created them. -

        To remove a member from the list, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open Tasks menu and choose Address Book. -
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by clicking the small - triangle beside the address book title. -
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. The list members appear - to the right of the mailing list name. -
        4. Click the entry you wish to delete. -
        5. Click the Delete button. -
        -

        To add members to a mailing list:

        -
          -
        1. Open Tasks menu and choose Address Book. -
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by clicking the small - triangle beside the address book title. -
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. -
        4. Click Properties. -
        5. Add or remove entries as necessary. -
        6. Click OK when you are done. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        Searching Address Books and Directories

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly search an address book or directory by subject or sender, or use a combination - of criteria to perform a thorough search through an address book or directory. - -

        To quickly search an address book or directory by subject or sender, begin from the Address Book window:

        -
          -
        1. In the Address Book window, in the list of address books, select the address - book or directory that you want to search. -
        2. To the right of "Subject or Sender contains:", type the subject text or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part of the subject or sender, or you can type the exact word or name that you want to find.
          3. -

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups displays only those entries where the subject or sender contains the search text you entered.

          -
        3. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all entries.
          4. -
        -

        - -

        Searching for Specific Entries

        -

        You can search address books or directories for specific entries. If you are not already viewing the Advanced Address Book Search dialog box, begin from the - Address Book window: - -

          -
        1. Open the Search menu and choose Search Addresses. You see the - Advanced Address Book Search dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Next to "Search in", choose the address book or directory through which you want - to search.
          3. -
        3. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search for entries either that match all - or at least one of the conditions (criteria) that you choose.
          4. -
        4. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          5. -
        5. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. The search - results appear in lower part of the dialog box. -
        6. To sort the entries in a different order, click the column that you want - to sort by. -
        7. To view the card for an entry, select the entry and click Properties. -
        8. To compose a message to selected recipients, select one or more entries and click Compose.
          9. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        Importing Address Books

        -

        If you have a Mozilla address book from another user profile or -computer, or if you have an address book from a previous version of -Mozilla - or another mail program, you can import its entries into the Address Book window as a new address book. You can import - address book files that are in these formats: Communicator 4.x (pab.na2), Mozilla (.ldif), tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) formats. - When you import an address book, Mail & Newsgroups creates a new address book with the - imported entries.

        -

        You can also import mail messages and settings from Netscape Communicator, Eudora, Outlook, and Outlook Express.

        - -

        To import an address book into Mozilla, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Mozilla Mail Import Wizard.
          -
          2. -
        2. Follow the instructions to import address books.
          3. -

          Tip: Communicator address book files (pab.na2) are stored in your user profile directory (for example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla\Users, where \Users contains the user profiles directories).

          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Exporting Address Books

        -

        You can export a Mozilla address book if you later want to import it into another user profile, move it to another computer, or use it with another program that can import address books. You can export an address book to one of these file formats: Communicator 4.x or Mozilla (.ldif), tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) formats.

        - -

        To export an address book, begin from the Address Book window:

        -
          -
        1. Select the address book that you want to export.
          2. -
        2. Open the File menu, and choose Export.
          3. -
        3. In the Export Address Book dialog box, browse to the location where you want to save the address book file.
          4. -
        4. Choose the file format for the exported address book (.ldif, comma-separated, or tab-delimited).
          5. -
        5. Enter a name for the address book file. Be sure to include the appropriate file extension (.ldif, .csv, .tab, or .txt).
          6. -
        6. Click Save.
          7. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories

        -

        In general, you add or remove directory servers using instructions provided - by your system administrator. Check with your system administrator for the information - you will need in order to add a new directory server. -

        To add a new directory server: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog box, click - Edit Directories. -
        4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, click Add. -
        5. Type the following information in the Directory Server Properties dialog - box General tab: -
            -
          • Name: Enter the name of the directory service (for example, InfoSpace - Directory). -
          • Host Name: Enter the name of the server, such as ldap.infospace.com. -
          • Base DN: This setting is used to set the Base Distinguished Name. - Enter codes to restrict searching to a specific country or organization. - For example, c=JP restricts the search to Japan only. Base DN also specifies - the organization to search on within the directory (for instance, o=Mozilla - Communications Corporation, c=US). -
          -
        6. Click the Advanced tab to configure LDAP directory server settings. -
        7. Type the following information: -
            -
          • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP server. The default - is 389. -
          • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you limit the number - of autocompletion matches returned by the directory server. Enter the - maximum number of email address matches to display for autocompletion. -
          • Scope: Defines the limits of the search. Choose one of the following: -
              -
            • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - and one level below the base DN. -
            • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the least restrictive - search. -
            • Search Filter: Enter the search filter to apply to matching results that are within the specified scope of the search. -
            -
          -
        8. Click OK to close the Directory Server Properties dialog box. -
        9. Click OK to close the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box. -
        -

        To delete a directory server: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog box, click - Edit Directories. -
        4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, select the directory that you - want to delete and click Delete. -
        5. Click OK, then click OK again to close the Preferences dialog box. -
        - -

         

        - - - - - -

        Directory Server Settings

        -

        If you are not already viewing the Directory Server Settings dialog box, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu, and choose Address Book. -
        2. In the list of address books, select a directory. -
        3. Click Properties. -
        - -

        General Tab

        -

        -
          -
        • Name: The name of the directory service (for example, InfoSpace - Directory). -
        • Host Name: The name of the server, such as ldap.infospace.com. -
        • Base DN: The Base Distinguished Name. Codes entered here restrict searching to a specific country or organization. - For example, c=JP restricts the search to Japan only. Base DN also specifies - the organization to search on within the directory (for instance, o=Mozilla - Communications Corporation, c=US). -
        - -

        Advanced Tab

        -

        -
          -
        • Port Number: The port number for the LDAP server. The default - is 389. -
        • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you limit the number - of autocompletion matches returned by the directory server. Specify the - maximum number of email address matches to display for autocompletion. -
        • Scope: Defines the limits of the search: -
            -
          • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - and one level below the base DN. -
          • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the base DN - in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the least restrictive - search. -
          • Search Filter: Specifies the search filter to apply to matching results that are within the specified scope of the search. -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - -
        -

        Organizing Your Messages

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Creating a Folder -

        Renaming a Folder -

        Moving or Copying a Folder -

        Filing Messages in Folders -

        Labeling Messages -

        Marking or Flagging Messages -

        Creating Message Filters -

        Searching Through Messages -

        -

         

        - -

        Creating a Folder

        -

        To create a message folder, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose New, and then Folder. You see the New Folder - dialog box. -
        2. Type the name of the folder.
          3. -
        3. Click the drop-down list and choose a folder location and click OK. Your - new folder appears in your Mail Folders list.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Renaming a Folder

        -

        To rename an existing folder, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select the folder you want to rename.
          2. -
        2. Open the File menu and choose Rename Folder. You see the Rename Folder dialog box.
          3. -
        3. Type the new name and click OK.
          4. -
        -

        Note: If you rename a folder that you've been using to store filtered - messages, the filter will automatically update to use the renamed folder.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Moving or Copying a Folder

        -

        You can copy a folder and its contents to another mail account, or move a folder - within the same mail account. -

        To move or copy a folder, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select the folder you want to move or copy.
          2. -
        2. Do one of the following: -
            -
          • To move the folder under another folder within the same account, drag - the folder over the name of the other folder. The folder you moved becomes - a subfolder of the other folder.
            • -
          • To copy the folder to another account, drag the folder over the name - of another account. -
          • To copy the folder under another folder in another account, drag the - folder over the name of another folder in another account. The folder - you copied becomes a subfolder of the other folder. -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Filing Messages in Folders

        -

        You can move messages from one folder to another by using either of these methods: -

          -
        • Select the message, click the File button on the toolbar, and choose the - destination folder.
          • -
        • Drag and drop messages into the desired folder.
          • -

          Note: If you drag and drop a message from an IMAP or POP mail server - folder to a local folder on your hard drive, the message is moved to the local - folder and removed from the server folder. -

        -

        -

        To copy a message from one folder to another: -

          -
        1. Select the message and right-click to display the pop-up menu.
          2. -
        2. Select "Copy To" and then select the destination account and folder from - the drop-down list.
          3. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Labeling Messages

        -

        You can apply labels to messages to help you organize and prioritize them. You can apply a standard color and text label to messages, or you can customize the label colors or label text to suit your needs.

        -

        One powerful way to use labels is to use a message filter to automatically label incoming messages. For example, you can set up a message filter so that incoming messages from your boss are labeled "Important" and appear in red. See Creating Message Filters for more information.

        - - -

        Applying a Label

        -

        To apply a label to a message, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Select the message you want to label.
          2. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. -
        3. Choose the label you want to apply from the list.
          4. -
        -

        The message header changes to the label color you chose. To see the label text, you must display the Label column in the Mail window.

        - -

        To display the Label column, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        • Click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the list.
          • -
        - -

        Note: Message labels apply on a per-account basis. For example, if you move or copy a labeled message to another mail account, the label is not preserved. Similarly, if you forward a labeled message to another recipient, the label is not preserved. For IMAP mail accounts, if your IMAP server supports user-defined keywords, message labels will persist when you log in to your mail account from a different location. In an AOL mail acount, when a labeled message is automatically moved from New Mail to the Old Mail folder, it loses its label.

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Customizing Labels

        -

        You can customize label colors or text to suit your needs.

        -

        To customize labels, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Labels. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Edit the label text, or replace it with your own label text. The label can be up to 32 characters long.
          4. -
        4. To change the label color, click the color chip next to that label and select a new color.
          5. -
        5. Click OK.
          6. -
        -

        Your changes are immediately applied to all labeled messages in all your mail accounts.

        - -

        Tip: To restore the default label text and colors, follow the steps above to display the label settings, and click Restore Defaults.

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Sorting Messages by Label

        -

        To sort messages by label, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. To display the Label column if it is hidden, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the list.
          2. -
        2. Click the Label column to sort messages by color, and within each color, to sort messages alphabetically by label text.
          3. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Removing Labels

        -

        To remove a message label, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Select one or more labeled messages.
          2. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. -
        3. Choose "None" for the message label.
          4. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Marking or Flagging Messages

        -

        You might want to mark a message you've read as unread if you later want to re-read the message or respond to it.

        -

        To mark a message as unread, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Click in the Read column of each message you want to mark as unread. Messages marked as unread display a symbol in the Read column. Messages marked as read display a symbol in the Read column. If the Read column is not visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Read from the list. -
        -

        - - - - - - - - -
        -
        Read column
        - - -

        You can flag messages that you later want to download for offline use.

        -

        To flag messages, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Click in the Flag column of each message you want to download. A flag appears - where you clicked to indicate that the message has been flagged. If the Flag column is not visible, click the - Show/Hide Columns icon and select Flag from the list. -
        -

        - - - - - - - - -
        -
        Flag column
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Creating Message Filters

        -

        Message filters allow you to manage and organize your messages. You can create - message filters that Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups uses to automatically perform certain actions - on incoming messages based on criteria you specify. For example, you can create - a message filter that automatically moves incoming messages to a particular - folder. Message filters operate on a per-account basis. -

        If you are not already viewing the Message Filters dialog box, begin from the - Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Message Filters. You see the Message Filters - dialog box.
          2. -
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you want to - apply the filter.
          3. -
        3. Click New. You use the Filter Rules dialog box to specify the types of - messages to act on, and the action you want the filter to perform.
          4. -
        4. Type a name for the filter.
          5. -
        5. Select the matching option you want Mail & Newsgroups to use: "all of the following - conditions" (criteria) you choose, or "at least one" of the conditions. -
        6. Use the drop-down lists to choose the search criteria (for example, "Subject," - "Sender," "contains," "doesn't contain") and then type the text or phrase - you want to match.
          7. -

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching entries.

          -
        7. To restrict your filter to messages that only match a certain priority, - choose "Priority" from the drop-down list. -
        8. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          9. -
        9. Use the drop-down list to choose the action you want the filter to perform - on the messages (for example, Move to Folder).
          10. -

          Tip: To automatically label incoming messages, choose "Label the message" from the drop-down list.

          -
        10. Choose a destination folder in which to store the messages, or create a - new folder.
          11. -
        11. Click OK to confirm your settings.
          12. -
        12. Click OK in the Message Filters dialog box. The filter begins filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK.
          13. -
        - -

        To manage your filters, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Message Filters. You see the Message Filters - dialog box.
          2. -
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you want to - apply the filter.
          3. -
        3. Choose from the following:
          4. -
            -
          • To turn a filter on or off: Click the checkbox to the right of the filter - name to enable it, or click it again to turn it off.
            • -
          • To edit a filter: Select the filter name and click Edit (or double-click - the filter name). Use the Filter Rules dialog box to make your changes.
            • -
          • To delete a filter: Select the filter name and click Delete.
            • -
          • To change the order in which filters are applied: In the filter - list, click a filter's name, and click "Move Up" or "Move - Down" to move it.
            • -

            Note: Filters are applied to each incoming message in the order - you choose, until a filter action results in the message being deleted or - moved to a different folder. -

          -
        4. Click OK when you are done managing your filters. If you created a new filter, - it begins filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK. -
        -

        Note: If you delete a folder that you've been using - to store filtered messages, the filter will no longer work. Incoming messages that match the filter criteria will appear in your Inbox. If you rename or move the folder, the filter will automatically update to use the renamed or moved folder. - -

        -

        Tip: Filters don't apply to existing messages. If you have existing - messages that you want to move to another folder, you can search - for those messages and then file them into the - other folder. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - -

        Filtering Messages From a Specific Sender

        -

        Mozilla lets you quickly create a filter for messages from a particular sender. For example, if you want to automatically move all incoming messages from your child's teacher into a folder called "School", Mozilla lets you quickly set up a filter to do this.

        - -

        To create a filter for messages from a specific sender, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Select a message from a specific sender.
          2. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Create Filter. You see the Filter Rules dialog box. Using the sender's email address, Mozilla prefills the filter name, the filter matching criteria, and the filter action (Move to folder).
          3. -
        3. Choose a destination folder in which to store the incoming messages from the specified sender, or create a - new folder.
          4. -
        4. Click OK to confirm your settings. You see the Message Filters dialog box, where you can create, delete, or edit message filters.
          5. -
        5. Click OK. The filter begins filtering incoming messages from the specified sender as soon as you click OK.
          6. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - -

         

        - - -

        Searching Through Messages

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly find text in a single message, search messages by subject or sender, or use a combination - of criteria to perform a thorough search through all messages in a specific - mail folder, newsgroup, or account. -

        To locate text in a single message, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select the message, open the Search menu, and choose Find in This Message. -
        2. Type the text that you want to locate. -
        3. Click Find to locate the first occurrence of the text. -
        4. Continue clicking Find to locate additional occurrences, or click Cancel - when you are done. -
        5. Choose Find Again from the Search menu to continue searching for the text - throughout the rest of the message.
          6. -
        -

        To quickly search for messages by subject or sender, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. To the right of "Subject or Sender contains:", type the subject text or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part of the subject or sender, or you can type the exact word or name that you want to find.
          2. -

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups displays only those messages where the subject or sender contains the search text you entered.

          -
        2. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all messages.
          3. -
        -

        - -

        Searching for Specific Messages

        -

        You can search mail folders or newsgroups for specific messages. If you are not already viewing the Search Messages dialog box, begin from the - Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Search menu and choose Search Messages. You see the - Search Messages dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Next to "Search for messages in", choose the account, newsgroup, or folder through which you want - to search.
          3. -
        3. Click "Search subfolders" to include all subfolders - in the search.
          4. -
        4. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search for messages either that match all - or at least one of the conditions (criteria) that you choose.
          5. - -
        5. Use the drop-down lists to indicate the search criteria (for example, "Subject" and "contains") and then type the text or phrase - that you want to match.
          6. -

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching entries.

          -
        6. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          7. -
        7. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. The search - results appear in lower part of the Search Messages dialog box. To open a - message so you can read it, select the message and click Open, or double-click - the message.
          8. -
        8. To sort the messages in a different order, click the column that you want - to sort by. -
        9. To move or copy a message in the Results area to another folder, select - the message and then choose the destination folder from the File drop-down - list. If the destination folder is within the same account, the message is - moved to that folder. If the destination folder is within a different account, - the message is copied to that folder. -
        10. To delete a message in the Results area, select the message - and then click Delete. -
        11. To open the folder where the message is stored, select the message and click Open Message Folder.
          12. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -
        - -

        Importing Mail from Other Programs

        -

        This section describes how to import mail messages and settings -from Netscape Communicator, Outlook, Outlook Express, and Eudora. To import address books from these programs, see Importing Address Books.

        - -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Importing Mail Messages -

        Importing Mail Settings -

        -

         

        - -

        Importing Mail Messages

        -

        To import mail messages from Netscape Communicator, Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Open the File menu, and choose Import. You see the Mozilla Mail Import Wizard.
          -
          2. -
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail messages.
          3. -
        -

        For Netscape Communicator, the wizard imports all Communicator mail folders included under Local Folders. Imported mail is added as a new folder under Local Folders in the Mozilla Mail window.

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Importing Mail Settings

        -

        To import mail settings from Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the File menu, and choose Import. You see the Mozilla Mail Import Wizard.
          -
          2. -
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail settings.
          3. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -
        - -

        Getting Started With Newsgroups

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Subscribing to Newsgroups -

        Reading Newsgroup Messages -

        Posting Newsgroup Messages -

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions -

        Monitoring Threads -

        Removing a Newsgroup -

        Adding a Newsgroup Server -

        -

         

        - -

        Subscribing to Newsgroups

        -

        If you have set up an account on a newsgroup server, - you can join (subscribe) to newsgroups (also called discussion groups). -

        To subscribe to a newsgroup, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe dialog box.
          2. -
        2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose another newsgroup account.
          3. -
        3. Select a newsgroup. -
        4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the newsgroup. - You see a checkmark next to each newsgroup to which you subscribe. Click - Unsubscribe to cancel a selection. -
        5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed newsgroups appears in the Mail window. -
          6. -
        -

        If you are an IMAP mail user, you can also subscribe to message folders located - on an IMAP server. (Your Inbox is a type of message folder.) Follow the instructions - above for subscribing, but select a mail server from the Server drop-down list. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Reading Newsgroup Messages

        -

        When you open your newsgroup server, you see the list of newsgroups to which - you subscribe. The server downloads the headers of new messages in each - newsgroup.

        -

        To read newsgroup messages, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Double-click a newsgroup server icon to see its newsgroups. (If there are - no newsgroups, you may need to subscribe to one.)
          2. -
        2. Click a newsgroup name to see its messages.
          3. -
        3. Click a message to read it. Click the thread button to display all the - responses below the original message. You can click any header to display - its message. You can start a new thread or post - a message in response.
          4. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Posting Newsgroup Messages

        -

        To start new threads (discussions): -

          -
        1. From the list of your subscribed newsgroups in the Mail window, select a - newsgroup.
          2. -
        2. Click Compose.
          3. -
        3. Compose your message, and click Send - to post it.
          4. -
        4. Click Get Msgs to see your posting on the newsgroup.
          5. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions

        -

        To post a response to the newsgroup: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. -
        2. Click Reply.
          3. -
        3. Compose your message, and click Send - to post it.
          4. -
        -

        To reply to an individual as well as post a response to the group: -

          -
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. -
        2. Click Reply All.
          3. -
        3. Compose your message, and click Send to post it.
          4. -
        -

        To redirect a posting to another newsgroup: -

          -
        • Click Reply and choose "Followup-To" from the "Recipient type" drop-down - list. Subsequent responses will be posted to the newsgroup you specified.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - -

        Monitoring Threads

        -

        To monitor unread messages in threads that are of interest to you: -

          -
        1. Select a message in a thread. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Watch Thread. -
        3. If you want to monitor additional threads, repeat steps 1 and 2 for messages - in additional threads. -
        4. When you're ready to monitor messages in these threads, Open the View menu, - choose Messages, and then choose Watched Threads with Unread. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups - only displays the watched threads that contain unread messages. -
        5. Open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose All to return to viewing - all messages in the newsgroup. -
        -

        To ignore a message thread: -

          -
        1. Select a message in the thread. -
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Ignore Thread. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups marks all messages - in the thread as read, and new replies posted to the thread will appear as - read. -
        3. To view ignored threads, open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose - Ignored Threads. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Removing a Newsgroup

        -

        To remove a newsgroup from your list: -

          -
        • Select the newsgroup icon and press Delete.
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Adding a Newsgroup Server

        -

        If the newsgroup you want to subscribe to is on a different server, you must - first set up access to that server.

        -

        To set up an additional newsgroup server, open the File menu in the Mail window - and choose New, then Account. -

          -
        • Using the Account Wizard, indicate that the new account you want to - set up is a newsgroup account.
          • -
        -

        Once you've set up access to the new server, you can subscribe - to newsgroups on that server. In the Mail window, open the File menu, and choose - Subscribe. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - - -
        -

        Working Offline

        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline -

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline Use -

        Downloading an Individual Folder for Offline - Use -

        Downloading Selected or Flagged Messages for - Offline Use -

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working Offline -

        Selecting Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups - for Offline Viewing -

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages -

        Working Offline and Reconnecting Later -

        -

         

        - -

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' offline feature lets you download your mail and read it offline - (while disconnected from the Internet). If you use a dial-up (modem) connection - to access your mail and you want to reduce the time you are connected, or, - if you need to temporarily disconnect from your company's network while traveling - or switching locations, you can download your mail so that you can read it - offline. The offline feature can automatically download incoming - messages and then later send all your outgoing messages when you reconnect. -

        If you occasionally want to work offline, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you easily: -

          -
        • Download your Inbox for offline use. -
        • Download an individual folder for offline use. -
        • Download only selected or flagged messages for offline use. -
        -

        If you frequently work offline, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also lets you: -

          -
        • Set up one or more of your accounts for offline use. -
        • Set offline and disk space preferences for each account. -
        • Select the items (accounts, folders, and newsgroups) that you want to view - offline. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline Use

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups can automate the offline process for your Inbox messages. You - can tell Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to automatically download your Inbox messages for offline - use. Later, when you go back online, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes - your Inbox messages with the server. -

        To automatically download your Inbox for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. In the left side of the dialog box, choose the account you want to use offline, - and select Offline & Disk Space. (This category is not available for POP accounts.) -
        3. Check the box labeled "Make the messages in my Inbox available when I am - working offline." -
        4. Click OK. -
        5. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -
        6. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all messages in your Inbox so you can - read and respond to them while working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla - Mail & Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your messages.

        -

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online: -

          -
        • Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online. -
        -

        When you go back online, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes your Inbox - messages with the server, by replicating any changes you made while working - offline. -

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you send while working offline - in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose - Send Unsent Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at once. - To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, - use the Preferences command on the Edit menu to change your offline - preferences. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading an Individual Folder for Offline Use

        -

        To download a specific folder for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. In the left side of the Mail window, select the folder that you want to - download for offline use. -
        2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Properties. -
        3. Click the Offline tab. -
        4. Check "Select this folder for offline use". -
        5. Click Download Now if you want to immediately begin downloading the folder's - messages. Alternatively, you can continue working, and when you are ready - to go offline, proceed to the next step. -
        6. From the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -
        7. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all messages in the selected folder so you -can read and respond to them while working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla -Mail & Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your messages. -

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading offline - display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon. -

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online. -
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then "Download/Sync Now," - from the submenu. -
        3. Click OK. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes the offline folders with the server, - by replicating any changes you made while working offline. -

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you sent while working offline - in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose - Send Unsent Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at once. - To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, - use the Preferences command on the Edit menu to change your offline - preferences. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading Selected or Flagged Messages for Offline Use

        -

        To download selected messages for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Select the messages you want to download, as follows: -
            -
          • To select a group of adjacent messages, click the first message, and - then Shift-click to select the last message in the group. -
          • To select messages anywhere in the message list, hold down the Ctrl - key (Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh) and click each - message. -
          -
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Selected Messages - from the submenu. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups downloads the selected messages. -
        4. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline from the - submenu. -
        5. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        To download flagged messages for offline use, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages. -
        2. Click in the flag column of each message you want to download. A flag appears - where you clicked to indicate that the message has been marked. If the flag column is not visible, click the - Show/Hide Columns icon and select Flag from the list. -
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Flagged Messages. - Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups downloads the flagged messages. -
        4. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline from the - submenu. -
        5. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        After you disconnect, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work - with your messages. -

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading offline - display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon. -

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online: -

          -
        • Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online from the - submenu. -
        -

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you sent while working offline - in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose - Send Unsent Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at once. - To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, - use the Preferences command on the Edit menu to change your offline - preferences. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working Offline

        -

        To set up one or more accounts for working offline, you use the Offline and - Disk Space preferences in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. Once set, - you don't need to change these preferences each time you want to work offline. - The offline and disk space preferences you can set for an account depend on - the type of account (IMAP, POP, or Newsgroup). -

        Here's a summary of the steps you will follow to set up your accounts for - offline use: -

          -
        1. For each account that you want to work with while offline, use the Mail & Newsgroups - Account Settings dialog box to set the Offline & Disk Space preferences - for that account. You must select the items (accounts, folders, newsgroups) - that you want to download for offline use. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. -

          Once set, you don't need to change these settings. See the sections below - for information on setting offline and disk space preferences for IMAP, - POP, and Newsgroup - accounts. -

          Tip: To set the Offline & Disk Space preferences for the current - account, open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Offline Settings. -

        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now from - the submenu. -
        3. Select the type of messages (mail or newsgroup or both) that you want to download. -

          Important: You must select at least one category (Mail messages, Newsgroup - messages) in order for the download to work. -

        4. In the Download/Sync Now dialog box, click OK to download the selected items. - See Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages - for more information. -
        5. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -
        6. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download. -
        -

        For subsequent offline sessions, you can skip step 1. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Selecting Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing

        -

        Before you can read mail and newsgroup messages while offline, you must first - select them for downloading. You can set up an entire account for offline use. - You can also choose which folders and newsgroups that you want to use offline. -

        Note: Keep in mind that selecting more items may increase download time - and disk space used. -

        To select accounts, folders, and newsgroups for offline viewing, begin from - the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for the account you want to change. -
        3. Click Select. You see your accounts, mail folders, and subscribed newsgroups. -

          Note: You see only the newsgroups and folders that you've already - subscribed to. -

          -
        4. Select the items (folders, newsgroups) that you want to make available - for offline use. -

          Note: POP accounts and local mail folders don't appear in the list. - Your AOL account is not included in the list because working offline with - your AOL account is not available. -

          -
        5. Click OK. -
        -

        Once set, you don't need to change these settings each time you want to go - offline. However, if you do want to change them, you can easily do so before - going offline, since the same Select button is available when using the Download - and Sync command. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages

        -

        If you have already selected mail folders and newsgroups for offline - use, you are now ready to download and synchronize them. If you haven't yet - selected items to download, you can choose them before you go offline. -

        If you are not already viewing the Download/Sync Now dialog box, follow these - steps: -

        To download and synchronize your messages, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now. -
        2. Select the categories (mail messages or newsgroup messages) that you want - to download. -

          Important: You must select at least one category (Mail messages, - Newsgroup messages) in order for the download to work. If the checkboxes - are disabled, it means that you haven't yet selected items to download. - Use the Select button to select items to download. -

          -
        3. To send messages in your Unsent Messages folder before going offline, check - "Send Unsent Messages". -
        4. To go offline immediately after Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups finishes downloading, select - "Work offline once download and/or sync is complete". -
        5. To set or change the items to download, click Select. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. - You can skip this step if you've already selected items for download. -
        6. Click OK. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups begins downloading the selected items. -
        -

        If you chose to work offline once the download completes, then Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups - immediately switches to offline mode. Otherwise, when you are ready to go offline, - open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - -

        Working Offline and Reconnecting Later

        -

        To work offline and reconnect later, begin from the Mail window. -

        When you are ready to work offline: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Offline. Mail & Newsgroups prompts - you to download messages, if you want, before going offline. -
        2. Click Download to download messages before going offline. If you want to - work offline without downloading messages, click Don't Download. -
        -

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading offline - display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon. -

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' download behavior when going offline, open - the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose the Offline & Disk Space category. You - can choose to have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to download messages when - going offline, to automatically download messages, or to not download any messages. -

        To reconnect and synchronize your messages: -

          -
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Work Online. -
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now. -
        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups synchronizes your messages with the server by replicating any - changes you made while working offline. -

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' behavior when going online, open the Edit - menu, choose Preferences, and then choose the Offline & Disk Space category. You can choose - to have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to send unsent messages, to automatically - send unsent messages, or to not send unsent messages. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -
        - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings

        -

        This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. This dialog box lets you specify settings for each individual account. Unlike the Preferences dialog box, which applies settings to all accounts, the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box lets you specify settings on a per-account basis. If you are not currently viewing the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box, follow these steps:

        - -
          -
        1. Begin from the Mail window.
          2. -
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings.
          3. -
        3. Select the name of the account whose settings you want to view or change.
          4. -
        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account Settings -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Offline & Disk Space - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local Folders - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account Settings

        -

        This section describes how to view or change your Account Settings, such as - your user name, reply-to address, and signature file. If you are not already - viewing the Account Settings, begin from the Mail window: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Select the name of the account to display the Account Settings panel.
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Account Name: The name for this account. -
        • Identity: Stores your name, email address, reply-to address (only if different from your email address), and organization (optional).
          • -
        • Attach this signature: Lets you choose the signature - file you want to attach to your outgoing messages. Click Choose to locate the signature - file (optional).
          • -
        • Compose messages in HTML format: Lets you create formatted - text for mail and newsgroup messages using the built-in HTML editor. Leave this item - unchecked to use the plain-text editor. HTML messages can include formatted - text, links, images, and tables, just like a web page. However, some recipients - may not be able to receive HTML messages.
          • -

          Tip: If you select this option, but you later want to compose a message - or reply to a message using the plain-text editor, hold down the Shift key - and click Compose or Reply in the Mail toolbar to temporarily choose the plain-text - editor. Shift-clicking the Compose button or the Reply button switches to - the other editor.

          - -
        • Advanced: Lets you choose a different outgoing server (SMTP) for outgoing messages from this account. - -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings

        -

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups can work with two types of mail servers: IMAP and POP. If you are not sure which server type your Internet service provider supports, ask your service provider. If your - Internet service provider supports both, the following descriptions may help you choose - which one to use. - -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        About Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) -

        About Internet Post Office Protocol (POP) -

        IMAP Server Settings -

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings -

        POP Server Settings -

        News Server Settings -

        -

         

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        About Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)

        -

        Advantages: Your messages and any changes to them stay on your server, - saving local disk space. Also, you always have access to an updated mailbox, - and you can get your mail from multiple locations. Performance on a modem is - faster, since you initially download message headers only. -

        Disadvantages: Not all ISPs support IMAP. - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        About Post Office Protocol (POP)

        -

        Advantages: Your messages are downloaded to your local computer all - at once, but you can also specify whether to keep copies of the messages on - the server. Most ISPs currently support POP. -

        Disadvantages: You must synchronize your local Inbox with your server's - mailbox. This can result in downloading new messages over and over each time - you connect. If you use more than one computer, messages might reside on one - or the other, but not both. POP doesn't work as well as IMAP over a slow link - connection. Also, you can't access all mail folders from multiple locations. - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        IMAP Server Settings

        - -

        If you are not already viewing the IMAP server settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category name. (If - you chose an IMAP server when you set up this account, you see your IMAP server - settings.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Server Type: The server type (IMAP Mail Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change the server type associated with this account, you must delete the account and then re-create it.
          • -
        • Server Name: The server name that you specified when you created this account. If you are having problems getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider or system administrator that the server name you entered is correct.
          • -
        • User Name: The user name that you specified when you created this account.
          • -
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting unchanged.
          • -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive encrypted mail. If you are unsure, contact your service provider or system administrator.
          • -
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically - check this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups.
          • -
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • -
        • When I delete a message: Choose the behavior you want for deleted messages. "Move it to the Trash folder" is recommended unless you are instructed to use a different setting by your system administrator or service provider. Messages marked as deleted are removed only when you compact folders.
          • -
        • Clean up (Expunge) Inbox on Exit: Removes deleted messages from - the Inbox when you exit Mail & Newsgroups. Choose this if you chose to mark messages - as deleted.
          • -
        • Empty Trash on Exit: empties the Trash folder whenever you quit - Mail & Newsgroups.
          • -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        - -

        -

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings

        -

        In most cases, advanced IMAP server settings are automatically - supplied by the server. If you are unsure about the settings for this dialog - box, contact your ISP or system administrator. -

        If you are not already viewing the advanced IMAP server settings, begin from the Mail window.

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category.
          3. -
        3. If the mail server type is an IMAP server, you can click Advanced to set additional IMAP options, such as: -

          -
            -
          • the IMAP server directory path
            • -
          • showing only "subscribed folders"
            • -
          • support for subfolders
            • -
          • any personal and public (shared folder) namespaces for this directory
            • -
          -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - - -

        POP Server Settings

        -

        If you are not already viewing the POP server settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category name. (If - you chose a POP server when you set up this account, you see your POP server - settings.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Server Type: The server type (POP Mail Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change the server type associated with this account, you must delete the account and then re-create it.
          • -
        • Server Name: The server name that you specified when you created this account. If you are having problems getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider or system administrator that the server name you entered is correct.
          • -
        • User Name: The user name that you specified when you created this account.
          • -
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting unchanged.
          • -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive encrypted mail. If you are unsure, contact your service provider or system administrator.
          • -
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically - check this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP accounts, - Mail & Newsgroups doesn't download the new messages until you click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.
          • -
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          -
          • -
        • Automatically download any new messages: Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to retrieve messages immediately each time it checks the server.
          • -
        • Leave messages on server: Choose this setting to store a copy of messages on the mail server in addition to downloading them to your computer.
          • -
        • Delete messages on server when they are deleted locally: Choose this setting to remove messages from the server once you delete them from your computer.
          • -
        • Empty Trash on Exit: Choose this setting to empty the Trash folder whenever you quit Mail & Newsgroups.
          • -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        - - -

        News Server Settings

        -

        This section describes how to change news server settings. If you are not already viewing news server settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. (If you - chose a newsgroup server when you set up this account, you see your newsgroup - server settings.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Server Type: The server type (IMAP Mail Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change the server type associated with this account, you must delete the account and then re-create it.
          • -
        • Server Name: The server name that you specified when you created this account. If you are having problems getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider or system administrator that the server name you entered is correct.
          • -
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting unchanged.
          • -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive encrypted mail. If you are unsure, contact your service provider or system administrator.
          • -
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • -
        • Ask me before downloading more than ___ messages: Choose this setting to conserve - disk space and download time, by setting a limit for the number of messages - you can retrieve at one time.
          • -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        -
        -

        Note: The path to the newsrc file is displayed for your information. - The newsrc file stores information about the newsgroups to which you are - subscribed, and the messages you have read in each newsgroup.

        -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders

        -

        This section describes the settings for sending automatic copies, and for storing copies of outgoing messages, message drafts, and message templates. -

        By default, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups stores copies of your outgoing messages in the Sent - folder for the current account. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also stores message drafts in - the Drafts folder and message templates in the Templates folder for the current - account. -

        If you are not already viewing the settings for Copies & Folders, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account, and click Copies & Folders. You see the Copies & Folders section.
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Place a copy in: Select where to store copies of your outgoing mail and newsgroup messages. - If you don't want to use the default Sent folder for the current account, - click Other and then choose an account and then choose the folder for storing - copies.
          • -
        • Bcc: Select whether you want to always send a blind carbon copy (bcc) to yourself. -
        • Bcc another address: Select whether you want to always send a blind carbon copy (bcc) to another addressee, and enter the address.
          • -
        • Keep message drafts in: Select where to store message drafts. If you don't want to use the default - Drafts folder for the current account, click Other and then choose another - account and folder for storing drafts.
          • -
        • Keep message templates in: Select where to store message templates. If you don't want to use the - default Templates folder for the current account, click Other and then choose - another account and folder for storing templates.
          • -
        • Show confirmation dialog when messages are saved: Choose this option if you want Mail & Newsgroups to display a confirmation dialog box when you save a - draft message or a template. If checked, a dialog box will appear when you save a draft or - template to remind you where Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups is saving the draft or template. -
          • -
        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing

        -

        You use Addressing settings to override the global LDAP server settings specified - for all address books in the - Preferences dialog box. LDAP server settings affect the behavior of address - autocompletion, and you can change these settings for each account if necessary. Address autocompletion uses your address books to find matching entries when - you type email addresses in the addressing area of the Compose window. - -

        If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the account and click the Addressing category.
          3. -
        - -
          -
        • Use my global LDAP server preferences for this account: This - is the default. Select this if you don't want to override the global LDAP - server preferences for this account. -
        • Use a different LDAP server: Select this option and then choose - another LDAP server from the list if you want to use a different LDAP - directory server for address autocompletion with this account. If necessary, click Edit Directories to edit individual directory server - settings, add a directory server, or delete a directory server. For more information, - see Adding and Removing LDAP Directories. -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Offline & Disk Space

        -

        Offline & Disk Space settings let you conserve disk space or set up an account so that you - can use it while offline (disconnected from the Internet). The settings available - depend on the mail server type (IMAP, POP, or News) associated with the account. - -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP) -

        Disk Space Settings (POP) -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (News) -

        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP)

        -

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space preferences for an - IMAP account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for an IMAP account. -
        -
          - -
        • Make the messages in my Inbox available when I am working offline: Select this option - so that messages in your Inbox will be available when you are working offline. -
        • When I create new folders, select them for offline: Select this option so that - new folders you create are automatically selected for offline use. If - left unchecked, new folders won't be automatically selected for offline use. - You can manually select folders for offline use using the Download/Sync - Now command (available from the File menu, under Offline) or by clicking - the Select button. -
        • Select: Click to select the items (accounts, folders, newsgroups) - that you want to make available for offline use. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. - -
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than _KB: - Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large messages from - being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for downloaded messages. -
        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - -

        Disk Space Settings (POP)

        -

        Messages from POP accounts are always downloaded to your local machine. This - section describes how you can save disk space for a POP account. If you are - not already viewing the Disk Space preferences for a POP account, - follow these steps: -

        Begin from the Mail window. -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Click the Disk Space category for a POP account. -
        -
          -
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than _KB: - Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large messages from - being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for downloaded messages. -
        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (News)

        -

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space settings for a News account, begin from the Mail window: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. -
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for a News account. -
        -
          -
        • Select: Click to select the items (accounts, folders, newsgroups) - that you want to make available for offline use. See Selecting - Accounts, Folders, and Newsgroups for Offline Viewing for more information. - -
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than: - Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large messages from - being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for downloaded messages. -
        • Download only unread message bodies: Select this option to download only the messages - you haven't read. -
        • Download message bodies for messages since _ days ago: Select this option to download only messages - that were posted within the time period you enter. -
        • When it is time to clean up messages: Click one of the three choices - to specify when newsgroup messages should be deleted. Unless you choose - "Keep all messages," enter the number of days to keep messages or the - number of newest messages to keep. -
        • Keep only unread messages: Select this option to delete messages immediately - after you read them. - -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - - - - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security

        - -

        This section describes how to configure the Mail & Newsgroup Account Settings that control message security. Before you do so, however, you must obtain one or more email certificates. For details, see Signing & Encrypting Messages. - -

        If you are not already viewing the Security settings for your mail account, begin from the Mail window: - -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. -
        2. Click Security under the name of the mail account whose security settings you want to configure. -
        - -

          - - - - - -
        -

        In this section:

        -

        About Certificates

        -

        Digital Signing

        -

        Encryption

        - -

          -

        About Certificates

        - -

        The main purpose of the Security panel is to select two certificates: -

          -
        • The email certificate you want to use for signing email messages you send to other people. -
        • The email certificate you want other people to use when they encrypt messages they send to you. -
        - -

        Depending on the policies of the certificate authority (CA) that issues your certificate(s), you can use one certificate for both purposes or two different certificates. Even if you use just one, you must specify it twice, once for digital signing and once for encryption. - -

        The certificates you select here are included with every signed message you send. These certificates allow your recipients to verify your digital signature and to encrypt messages that they send to you. - -

          -

        Digital Signing

        - -

        If you have an email certificate intended for signing messages, you can use it to sign either email messages or newsgroup messages. - -

        You use the Digital Signing area in the Security panel to specify how you want to sign your messages: - -

          -
        • Digitally sign messages: Select this checkbox if you want to digitally sign all the messages you send. (A personal certificate must be specified below before you can select this checkbox.)
          • - -
        • Use the following personal certificate: If this field is empty or if it displays the wrong certificate, click Select to choose from those you have on file. -
        - -

        Regardless of whether the "Digitally sign messages" checkbox is selected here, you can change your mind before you send an individual message. -

          - -

        Encryption

        - -

        You use the Encryption area in the Security panel to specify how you routinely want to use encryption when sending your messages: - -

          -
        • Never: Select this option if you never want to use encryption, or only occasionally. -
        • If possible: Select this option if you want to use encryption whenever you have certificates for all the recipients. If you don't have all the necessary certificates, the message will be sent unencrypted. -
        • Always: Select this option if you always want to use encryption. If you don't have all the necessary certificates, the message won't be sent unless you explicitly turn off encryption for that message only. -
        - -

        Regardless of which encryption option you select, you can change your mind before you send an individual message. - - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local Folders

        -

        Local Folders is the account where Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages that you send while working offline. Messages you send while working offline are saved in the Unsent Messages folder under Local Folders. Any folders you create under the Local Folders account reside on your hard disk, so Local Folders is a good place to save messages that you want to keep.

        - -

        If you are not already viewing the Local Folders settings, begin from the Mail window:

        - -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the Local Folders category.
          3. -
        - -
          -
        • Account Name: The name associated with the Local Folders account. -
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where mail for this account is stored. -
        - -

         

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - - - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP)

        - -

        Even if you have multiple mail or news accounts, you generally need to specify - only one outgoing (SMTP) server to handle the delivery of your outgoing mail. -

        If you are not already viewing the Outgoing Server (SMTP) settings, begin from the Mail window:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
          2. -
        2. Select the Outgoing Server (SMTP) category.
          3. -
        - -
          -
        • Server name: Mail & Newsgroups uses the outgoing (SMTP) server name that you - entered using the Account Wizard. To change the outgoing (SMTP) server - name, type it in Server Name field. -
        • Use name and password: If your SMTP server requires authentication - to send mail, select this option to be prompted to enter your user name - and authentication password. Then enter your - user name. The first time you send mail, you will be prompted to enter your - authentication password. -
        • Use secure connection (SSL): If your outgoing SMTP server is configured - to send encrypted mail, you can choose how often you want to use SSL (Secure - Sockets Layer). If you are not sure which option to choose, check with your - ISP or system administrator. -
        • Advanced: Click this option to set up additional outgoing SMTP - servers. Keep in mind that using more than one SMTP server can cause errors - in sending mail.
          • -
        -

         

        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -
        - - -

        Mail & Newsgroup Preferences

        -

        This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Double-click the Mail & Newsgroups category to expand the list.
          3. -
        -

         

        - - - - -
        In this section: -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & Newsgroups -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message Display -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Labels -

        Offline & Disk Space Preferences -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & Newsgroups

        -

        Mail & Newsgroups preferences allows you - to set general preferences that apply to all accounts. If you are not already - viewing the Mail & Newsgroups preferences, follow these steps: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Click the Mail & Newsgroups category. -
        -

        -
          - -
        • General Settings: Choose the type of three-pane layout to use for the Mail window. Choose to allow Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you before deleting folders. Select Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the default mail application for Windows and from within other applications such as Microsoft Word.
          • -

          Note: Setting Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the default mail application may disable another mail application. To restore it, deselect this option. -

        • Mail Start Page: Select this to set the Start Page. The Start Page appears in your Inbox when you first open Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups. This page is the default page, but you can enter a different web page or - URL of your choice. To disable the Start Page, deselect this option. Click Restore - Default to return to the original page provided by Mozilla. -

        • When a new message arrives: Select this if you want Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to play the default system sound whenever a new message arrives. -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message Display

        -

        Message Display preferences allow you to choose how messages are displayed - (for example, font style and color) in all accounts. If you are not already - viewing the Message Display settings, follow these steps: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message Display. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        -
          -

        • Plain-Text Messages: Select the font you prefer for viewing plain-text messages: fixed width - or variable width. Choosing a font style, size, and color for quoted plain-text messages can help you more easily - distinguish quoted text (usually a message that's been forwarded to you or - by you).

          -
        • Wrap text to fit window width: Select this so that incoming messages are word-wrapped to fit the width of your Mail window.
          • -
        • Display emoticons as graphics: Select this so that when you receive messages - that contain emoticons (also called smiley faces) Mail & Newsgroups can convert them to - graphics, for example: -

          - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
          This:Converts to:
          :-)
          :)
          :-(
          :(
          ;-)
          ;-p
          - -

        • Languages: Click the Character Coding drop-down list to select the language you want Mail & Newsgroups to use - as the default for incoming mail and newsgroup messages. This is recommended - if it's likely you might receive messages in which the character set is not - indicated, such as when reading messages in international newsgroups. -

        • Apply default to all messages: Select this to apply the default character coding to all messages. -

          Tip: You can later view or change the character set coding (language) - for a specific folder. In the Mail window, select a folder from the list of - Mail folders. Open the View menu, and choose Folder Character Coding. - -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition

        -

        Composition preferences affect how you create messages - (for example, forwarding options and address autocompletion) in all accounts. -If you are not already - viewing the Composition settings, follow these steps:: -

        -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Composition. (If - no options are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the - list.) -
        -
          -
        • Forwarding and Replying to Messages: Use the Forward Messages drop-down list to choose how you want forwarded message text to - appear: as an attachment or inline (in the body of your message).
          • -
        • Automatically quote the original message when replying: Select this to include the original message text in your reply. Then use the drop-down list to select - where you want to place your reply in the message area.
          • -
        • Composing Messages: Select to have Mail & Newsgroups always check the spelling - of your messages when you click Send. Choose to have Mail & Newsgroups use "quoted printable" MIME encoding when - sending regular messages that use an 8-bit character set (for example, Latin - ISO88359).
          • -
        • Wrap plain text messages at __ characters: Enter a number - to set the right margin for text in the message area.
          • -
        • Character Coding: Select the language you want - Mail & Newsgroups to use as the default for outgoing mail and newsgroup messages.
          • -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -

         

        - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format

        - -

        Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format your outgoing messages. If you are not already viewing the Send Format settings, follow these steps: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        -
          -
        • Ask me what to do: This option requires Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you to choose a format before you send - the message.
          • -
        • Convert the message to plain text: This option may cause your message to lose formatting such as bold text.
          • -
        • Send the message in HTML anyway: If you select this option, keep in mind that some mail programs may have trouble - displaying the message.
          • -
        • Send the message in both plain text and HTML: This option uses more disk space.
          • - -
          -

          You can always override these preferences for an individual message by using - the Options menu in the Mail Compose window.

          -
        • HTML and Plain Text Domains: Use the Add button to add the domain names that you typically - send mail to, if you know which domains can display HTML-formatted mail messages, - and which domains can only display plain text.

          -
        -

        For example, if you typically send mail to multiple recipients that have - the same domain name (for example, your colleagues all have email addresses - that end in "netscape.net"), and you know that this domain name is capable - of displaying HTML messages, then you can add the netscape.net domain to the - list of HTML Domains so that Mail & Newsgroups will automatically send messages in HTML - format to these recipients. Similarly, if you typically send mail to recipients - at a domain that you know can only receive Plain Text messages, you can add - that domain name to the list of Plain Text domains, so that Mail & Newsgroups automatically - sends messages to that domain in plain-text format.

        - -

        Note: If you regularly compose HTML (formatted) mail messages, keep in mind that - sometimes not all recipients use mail programs that can display HTML formatting - properly. Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format messages that - go to recipients who cannot display HTML-formatted mail. You can convert messages to plain text, format them only as HTML, - or format them as both HTML and plain text. These preferences apply to all your - mail accounts, but only to mail messages and not to newsgroup messages. -

        Whenever you add a person or address card to your address book, you can specify - whether that addressee can receive HTML-formatted messages. However, when this - information is unknown, you can set Send Format preferences for how Mail & Newsgroups formats - these messages. -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

         

        - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing

        -

        Addressing preferences allow you to control the settings for Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups address books - (for example, email address collection and address autocompletion). If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, follow these steps: -

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the Preferences dialog - box. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        -
          -
        • Email Address Collection: Select how Mail & Newsgroups will add senders' and recipients' addresses to your Collected Addresses book (from incoming, outgoing, or newsgroup messages). - -

          Note: If multiple matches are found, Mail & Newsgroups shows you a list of all possible choices. In addition to your Personal Address Book, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides you with - a Collected Addresses Book that can automatically store email addresses from - your incoming or outgoing messages, or both. For incoming mail messages, Mail & Newsgroups - stores the addresses in each message as soon as you open it. Addresses from - outgoing messages are stored as soon as you click Send. Your changes take effect the next time you start Mozilla. - -

        • Address Autocompletion: Address autocompletion allows you to quickly address mail without having to - search for names or type names completely. Select from which location Mail & Newsgroups will search for matching addresses: "Local Address Books" (Personal Address Book, Collected Addresses Book, or any other local address book) or "Directory Server" (an available LDAP directory server). -

          Note: If multiple matches are found, Mail & Newsgroups displays a list of all possible choices. - -

          If you select Directory Server, choose a directory server from the list. A directory server lets you look up addresses that are not stored - in one of your local address books. See Adding and Removing - LDAP Directories for information on setting LDAP directory server settings. -

          Note: Directory server settings you enter from the Preferences dialog - box apply to all your mail accounts. You can override these settings for - individual accounts by specifying different LDAP directory servers or server - settings using the Addressing settings for an account in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - dialog box. - -

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - - - -

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Labels

        -

        This section describes how to use the Labels preferences panel. You use the Labels preferences to define the label text and colors for message labels. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Labels. (If no options - are available in this category, double-click the category to expand the list.) -
        -
          -
        • Customize Labels: Specifies the label text and the color for each label. You can edit or replace the default label text with your own text (up to 32 characters). To change the label color, click the color chip next to that label and select a new color.
          • -
        • Restore Defaults: Restores the default label text and colors.
          • -
        - -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        - - - -

        Offline & Disk Space Preferences

        -

        This section describes how to use the Offline & Disk Space preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow -these steps:

        -
          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Click Offline & Disk Space.
          3. -
        - -

        The Offline & Disk Space preferences allow you to set preferences for startup mode, working offline, -going online, and disk space.

        -
          -
        • Offline: Select whether you want Mail & Newsgroups to remember the state (offline or online) in - which you last exited the program, or if you want to be asked which mode to - start in each time you start the program. Select how you want Mail & Newsgroups to handle messages - when going online or offline. -
        • Disk Space: Select this to conserve - disk space by automatically compacting message folders when it will save the - amount of disk space you enter. - -
        -

        See Working Offline for information on working - offline.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ] -

        -
        -

        - 20 March 2002 -

        - - + + + +Using Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups + + + + + + + + +
        This document is provided by Mozilla for your information +only. It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security +of your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, +address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a recommendation +by Mozilla about what constitutes adequate privacy and security protection +on the Internet.
        +
        +

        Using Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you conveniently manage all +your Internet communications from one place. You can set up and +maintain multiple business and personal mail accounts and Internet +newsgroups, all from one window — the Mail & Newsgroups window. +

        + +

        To start using Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Mail & Newsgroups icon in the lower-left corner +of the Mozilla Navigator window.
          • +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
         Mail & Newsgroups icon
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Getting Started with Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups

        + +

        Reading Messages

        + +

        Sending Messages

        + +

        Creating HTML Mail Messages

        + +

        Using Attachments

        + +

        Deleting Messages

        + +

        Using Address Books

        + +

        Organizing Your Messages

        + +

        Importing Mail from Other +Programs

        + +

        Getting Started with +Newsgroups

        + +

        Working Offline

        + +

        Signing & +Encrypting Messages

        + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings

        + +

        Mail & Newsgroup +Preferences

        +
        + + + +
        + +

        Getting Started with Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Using the Mail Account Setup +Wizard

        + +

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News +Accounts

        + +

        Changing the Settings for an +Account

        + +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Using the Mail Account Setup Wizard

        + + + +

        To set up a mail or newsgroup account, first open the Window +menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups. If you haven't already set +up an account, the Account Wizard appears automatically, enabling +you to set up an account.

        + +

        The Account Wizard guides you through the process of creating a +new account. If you don't know a setting, click Cancel and ask your +Internet service provider (ISP) or help desk.

        + +

        If an account already exists, the Account Wizard doesn't appear +automatically when the Mail window opens. Instead, after opening +the Mail window, open the File menu and choose New, then Account. +For more details, see Setting Up +Additional Mail & News Accounts.

        + +

         

        + +

        Setting Up Mail Accounts with an ISP or Email Provider

        + +

        Before you set up a mail account, your ISP or email provider +should give you the following information:

        + +
          +
        • your user name
          • + +
        • your email address
          • + +
        • the incoming and outgoing mail server names
          • + +
        • the incoming server type (IMAP or POP)
          • +
        + +

        Before you set up a newsgroup account, your ISP or email +provider should give you the following information:

        + +
          +
        • your email address
          • + +
        • newsgroup server name
          • + +
        • account name
          • +
        + +

        To set up a new mail or newsgroup account, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click Add Account to start the Account Wizard. + +

          The information requested by the Account Wizard depends on the +type of new account you specify in its first window. The boldface +headings that follow correspond to the windows you'll see when +you're setting up an ISP or email provider account.

          +
          3. + +
        3. New Account Setup: Choose the type of account you want +to set up, then click Next.
          4. + +
        4. Identity: Enter the name and email address appropriate +for this account, then click Next.
          5. + +
        5. Server Information: Indicate whether you want a POP +account or an IMAP account. Not all service providers can support +both options. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server +Settings. + + +

          You must also provide the name of your incoming mail server and your outgoing +(SMTP) server here. This is the name of the mail server that sends your messages +(also known as the SMTP host). Click Next to continue.

          + + +

          Note: You need to specify only one outgoing mail server +(SMTP), even if you have several mail accounts. The name of your +SMTP host may not have been explicitly listed in the account setup +information provided to you. For example, your SMTP host may be the +same as your POP or IMAP host. If in doubt, contact your ISP or +system administrator.

          +
          6. + +
        6. User Name: Enter the user name provided by your ISP or +email provider, then click Next.
          7. + +
        7. Account Name: Enter whatever name you want to use to +refer to this account, then click Next.
          8. + +
        8. Congratulations! Verify that the information you entered +is correct. If necessary, verify the information you entered with +your ISP or system administrator. When you are sure that it's +correct, click Finish to set up your account.
          9. + +
        9. You see your new account listed in the left side of the Mail +& Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. Click OK to start +using your new account.
          10. +
        + +

        You are now ready to retrieve messages from your account. For +detailed instructions, see Getting New +Messages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Setting Up Additional Mail and News Accounts

        + +

        You use the Account Settings dialog box to add a new account or +to change information for an existing account, including:

        + +
          +
        • mail and newsgroup server settings (for example, message +deletion and download preferences)
          • + +
        • storage settings for message copies and folders
          • + +
        • your reply-to address, organization name, and signature
          • +
        + +

        To add a new account or change settings for an existing account, +begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box. You can perform these tasks:
          2. + +
            +
          • Add Account: Click this button to set up a new mail or +news account. Be sure to type the account information exactly as it +is given to you. Click Next or Back to move through the screens, or +click Cancel to stop account creation.
            • + +
          • Set as Default: Select an account, then click this +button to make the selected account appear at the top of your list +of accounts in the Mail Window. The change takes effect the next +time you open Mail & Newsgroups. + +

            The default account is the one that you want to log into and +(for IMAP accounts only) automatically check for new messages when +you first start Mail & Newsgroups. (For POP accounts, you must +always click the Get Msg button to get new messages.)

            +
            • + + + + +
          • Remove Account: Select an account, then click this +button to remove it completely from your Mail window.
            • + +
          • Outgoing Server (SMTP): Click this (at the bottom +of the list of accounts) to modify information about the outgoing +mail server. See Mail & +Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) for more +information.
            • +
          + + +
        2. Click headings under any account's name and modify the +corresponding settings in the panel on the right.
          3. + +
        3. Click OK to save your changes.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + +

         

        + +

        Changing the Settings for an Account

        + +

        To view or change information for an existing mail or newsgroup +account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the account name in the left-hand side of the Account +Settings dialog box. You see information about the account, such as +your email address and signature file, in the right side of the +dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Click any of these items beneath the name of an account to see +the corresponding settings:
          4. + +
            +
          • Server Settings: The settings available depend on the +type of server (IMAP, POP, or newsgroup server). For more +information, see Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings - Server Settings. + +

            Important: If you need to change the server type (for +example, from POP to IMAP) you must first remove the existing +account. Next, you must exit Mozilla and restart it. You can then +reopen the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box and +recreate an account with the new server type by clicking Add +Account.

            +
            • + +
          • Copies & Folders: These settings determine whether +to send automatic messages (blind carbon copies) and where you want +to store copies of outgoing messages, message drafts, and message +templates. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings - Copies & Folders.
            • + +
          • Addressing: These settings allow you to override the +global directory server settings specified for all address books in +the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - +Addressing.
            • + +
          • Offline & Disk Space (IMAP and News accounts only): +These settings apply when you are working offline (disconnected +from the Internet) or need to save download time and conserve disk +space. For more information, see Offline +and Disk Space Settings (IMAP) or Offline and Disk Space Settings (News).
            • + +
          • Disk Space (POP accounts only): This setting determines +the maximum size of messages that you are willing to download to +your hard disk. For more information, see Disk Space Settings (POP).
            • + +
          • Security: These settings determine which certificates are used to digitally +sign and encrypt mail messages that you send. Digital signatures +allow you to identify yourself reliably to others in mail messages +that you send. Encryption helps ensure that your messages remain +private while they are in transit over the Internet. For more +information, see Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings - Security.
            • +
          + + +
        4. Click OK to save your changes.
          5. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +
        + +

        Reading Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Getting New Messages

        + +

        Keeping Messages As New

        + +

        Choosing How You View the Mail +Window

        + +

        Sorting and Threading Messages

        + +

        Saving and Printing Messages

        + +

        Controlling Images, Scripts, and +Plugins

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Getting New Messages

        + +

        For an IMAP account, you can retrieve new messages automatically +and display them in the Inbox by opening Mail & Newsgroups and +selecting the Inbox for the IMAP account.

        + +

        For a POP account, you must select the Inbox and click Get Msgs +to retrieve your messages. By default, messages from your POP +account are deleted from the POP server when you retrieve them. You +can change your POP server settings to +store a copy of messages on the server in addition to downloading +them to your computer.

        + +

        You can also set up Mail & Newsgroups to get new messages at +startup and to check for new messages at timed intervals.

        + + + + + + + + + + +
         Mail & Newsgroups icon
        + +

        The Mail & Newsgroups icon on the status bar displays a +green arrow to notify you when new messages have arrived.

        + + + + + + + + + + +
         New mail notification
        + +

        To set up a mail account to automatically check for new +messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. If you have multiple accounts, select an account and click the +Server Settings category for that account.
          3. + +
        3. Select one or both of the following options in the Server +Settings section:
          4. + +
            +
          • Check for new mail at startup: Select this +checkbox if you want to check this account automatically for new +messages whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP +accounts, Mail & Newsgroups checks for new mail, but doesn't +download new messages until you click Get Msgs or unless you choose +"Automatically download any new messages".
            • + +
          • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Select this checkbox if you want to specify the number of minutes +between mail checks. You can also check for new messages at any +time by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
            • +
          + + +
        4. Click OK. Your settings take effect the next time you start +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups.
          5. +
        + +

        To set up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to play a sound or +display an alert when new mail arrives, see Mail & Newsgroups Preferences +- Mail & Newsgroups.

        + +

        You can always retrieve messages manually at any time. To get +new messages for the selected account or newsgroup, do one of the +following:

        + +
          +
        • Click Get Msgs on the Mail toolbar.
          • + +
        • Open the File menu (in the Mail window) and choose Get New +Messages.
          • +
        + +

        To get new messages for all your mail accounts, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button in the Mail +toolbar.
          2. + +
        2. Choose Get All New Messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +retrieves new messages for all your mail accounts. + +

          If you are not currently logged into one of your mail accounts, +Mail & Newsgroups first prompts you to enter your user name and +password before retrieving new messages for that account. (If you +have already stored your user name and password using the Password +Manager, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't prompt you for this +information.)

          +
          3. +
        + +

        Note: You can also open the File menu (in the +Mail window) and choose "Get New Messages for".

        + +

        To get new messages for a specific mail account, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button on the Mail +toolbar.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the account for which you want to retrieve mail.
          3. +
        + +

        Note: Mail & Newsgroups prompts you for your password +the first time you retrieve messages for an account. You can choose +to have Mail & Newsgroups store your password in the Password +Manager at that time.

        + +

        Password Manager can save all your user names and passwords on +your own computer and enter them for you automatically. For more +information, see Using the Password +Manager.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Choosing How You View the Mail Window

        + +

        You can customize the layout of the Mail window (the window you +see when you choose Mail & Newsgroups from the Window +menu):

        + +
          +
        • Open the View menu and choose Show/Hide to show or hide the +Mail toolbar, search bar, or the status bar.
          • + +
        • Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then choose My +Sidebar to uncheck (hide) My Sidebar.
          • + +
        • Expand and collapse any pane to switch between a three-pane or +two-pane view. Choose a default view +in the Mail and Newsgroup Preferences panel. If you change the +default view, you must exit Mail & Newsgroups and then restart +Mozilla to have your changes take effect.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Sorting and Threading Messages

        + +

        To sort messages by categories such as subject, sender, date, or +priority, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        • Click the appropriate column heading in the message list +window. Or, open the View menu, choose Sort by, and then select the +column you want to sort by.
          • +
        + +

        To reorder column headings, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        • Click and drag a column heading to the left or right to +reposition the column.
          • +
        + +

        To group messages by threading (subject), so each message is +grouped with all its responses:

        + +
          +
        • Click the thread button to the left of the Subject, Sender, and +Date column headings.
          • +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
             
         Thread button
        + +

        Tip: To help you identify unread messages in a +collapsed thread where you've read the parent message, Mozilla +Mail & Newsgroups underlines the parent message.

        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + +

        Saving and Printing Messages

        + +

        To save a mail message as a plain-text, HTML, or Outlook Express +file:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Mail window, select the message.
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu and choose Save As, and then choose +File.
          3. + +
        3. For "Save as type", choose a file type (HTML, Text, or Mail +file). Choose Mail file if you want to save the message so it can +be opened by Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express.
          4. + +
        4. Change the filename's extension to end in .html, .txt, or .eml, +depending on the file type you chose in step 3.
          5. + +
        5. Choose a destination for the file and click Save.
          6. +
        + +

        To print a selected message:

        + +
          +
        • Click Print.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of section +]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Controlling Images, Scripts, and Plugins

        + +

        By default, you can view remote images in the mail messages you +receive. To avoid downloading images embedded in web pages sent as +message attachments:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Images. (If no +subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to +expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Check "Do not load remote images in Mail & Newsgroup +messages".
          4. + +
        4. Click OK to have your change take affect.
          5. +
        + +

        By default, JavaScript is not enabled and plugins are enabled +for mail messages you receive. To change these settings:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Plugins. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the +list.)
          3. + +
        3. Under "Enable JavaScript for", check "Mail & Newsgroups" to +enable JavaScript for web pages viewed in mail messages.
          4. + +
        4. Under "Enable Plugins for", uncheck "Mail & Newsgroups" to +disable plugins.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK to have your changes take affect.
          6. +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of section +]

        + +

         

        + +
        + + + + +

        Sending Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup +Messages

        + +

        Using the Message Composition +Window

        + +

        Addressing a Message

        + +

        Selecting Message Sending +Options

        + +

        Replying to a Message

        + +

        Forwarding a Message

        + +

        Confirming That Your Message +Was Opened

        + +

        Saving and Editing a Message +Draft

        + +

        Creating and Using Templates

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Composing Mail and Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        You can address, compose, reply to, or send a new message by +doing one of the following:

        + +
          +
        • In any Mozilla window, open the File menu and choose New, then +Message.
          • + +
        • Click Compose on the Mail toolbar.
          • + +
        • While displaying a message, click Reply, Forward, or Reply All +on the Mail toolbar.
          • + +
        • From the Address Book window, select an address and click +Compose on the Address Book.
          • +
        + +

        Tip: Use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings +dialog box to specify the HTML text editor to use for +composing messages sent from this account. (You can specify a +different editor for each of your accounts.) Select the account, and check "Compose +messages in HTML format" to use the HTML text editor for all +messages. See Changing the Settings for an +Account for more information.

        + +

        Composing messages in HTML format allows you to use +different fonts, text styles (such as bold or italic) and text +colors, tables, numbered or bulleted lists, and pictures in your +messages. However, some recipients may only be able to read +messages composed in plain text format. If you want to use the +plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key +while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the +plain-text editor on an as-needed basis.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Using the Message Composition Window

        + +

        Use the Compose window to address, compose, and send mail and +newsgroup messages. First specify whether you want to compose +messages in plain text or HTML in the Account Settings Preferences +panel (open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings).

        + +

        To view the Compose window, click the Compose button on the +Mail toolbar.

        + +

        The Compose window contains the following:

        + +
          +
        • Mail Toolbar
          • + +
        • +

          You can click the following buttons:

          + +
            +
          • Send: To send a completed message.
            • + +
          • Address: To search for names in your address books.
            • + +
          • Attach: To attach a file to a message. See Using Attachments for more +information.
            • + +
          • Security: To display information about whether your +message will be sent encrypted or digitally signed (or both).
            • + +
          • Save: To save the message as a draft.
            • +
          +
          • + +
        • Addressing area: Where you enter the email addresses of +recipients.
          • + +
        • Attachments area: When you attach files to a message (by +clicking in this area or by clicking the Attach button), the +filenames will be listed in the Attachments area to the right of +the Addressing area.
          • + +
        • Message body area: Where you type the contents of your +message.
          • +
        + +

        If you've chosen to compose messages using the HTML editor, you +see an additional toolbar with text formatting buttons similar to +those in Mozilla Composer.

        + +

        For help using the HTML editor, see Formatting Your Web Pages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Addressing a Message

        + +

        To address a mail message:

        + +
          +
        1. Type the name in the addressing area.
          2. + + +

          If you have address autocompletion +enabled (it's enabled by default), type the first few letters of +the recipient's name and wait for Mail & Newsgroups to complete +the address. (Or you can type part of the name and immediately +press Enter to have Mail & Newsgroups try to complete the +address.)

          + + +
        2. If multiple addresses are displayed, select an address and +press Enter.
          3. + + +

          Note: Use a comma to separate multiple addresses on the +same line. Do not use a comma to separate first or last names. +For example, multiple entries might be:

          +

          user1@netscape.net,user2@netscape.net

          + + +
        3. If you want this message to be sent from a different account, +click the "From" field to select the account you want. See Changing the Account From Which a Message is Sent +for more information.
          4. + +
        4. If necessary, click "To" to choose a different recipient +type:
          5. + +
        5. +
            +
          • To: For primary recipients of your message.
            • + +
          • Cc: For secondary recipients (carbon copy).
            • + +
          • Bcc: For secondary recipients not identified to the +other recipients, including those in the cc list (blind carbon +copy).
            • + +
          • Reply-To: For recipients to reply to a different email +address other than the one the message is sent from.
            • + +
          • Newsgroup: For posting to a newsgroup.
            • + +
          • Followup-To: For redirecting a newsgroup posting, so +that subsequent replies go directly to the redirected newsgroup +instead of the original newsgroup.
            • +
          +
          6. +
        + +

        Tip: You can quickly address a message by clicking the +email address contained in a message you're reading, and then +selecting Compose Mail To from the pop-up menu.

        + + + +

        Changing the Account From Which a Message is Sent

        + +

        If you have multiple mail accounts, the account listed in the +From field is based on the account (or server) you selected when +you choose to create a new message. However, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups also allows you to change the account a message is sent +from while you're composing a message. Click the From field to view +a list of your accounts and then select the account you want. A +copy of the message is saved in the Sent folder of the account +where you sent the message from.

        + +

        About Address Autocompletion

        + +

        Address autocompletion allows you to address mail easily from +the Compose window without having to search for names or type +complete names. Mail & Newsgroups automatically checks your +address books and an LDAP +directory server (if available) and completes the name if it finds +a unique match. It also prevents mistakes by showing all possible +choices with additional information if it finds multiple matches. +Address autocompletion is enabled by default.

        + +

        If you don't want to use an address that Mail & Newsgroups +provides, press Backspace or Delete to remove characters and then +enter an alternate address.

        + +

        To disable address autocompletion:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list).
          3. + +
        3. In the Address Autocompletion section, deselect "Local Address +Books" and "Directory Server."
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Selecting Message Sending Options

        + +

        While you're composing a message, you can select these +additional message sending options from the Options menu:

        + +
          +
        • Select Addresses: The Select Addresses option lets you +choose the recipient's email address from your Address Books or a +remote directory. To look up an address in an address book or +directory, enter the first few letters of the recipient's first or +last name to start the search. Select an address and then click +To:, Cc:, or Bcc: to address your message.
          • + +
        • Rewrap: If you are composing a message using the +plain-text editor, you can use the Rewrap command to rewrap long +lines of quoted text to fit the Compose window. This command +rewraps selected quoted text to the number of characters specified +by the Composition +preferences. This command is primarily useful when you are replying +to a message where the original message is quoted in your reply, +and the original message contains long lines. + +

          You use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings command on +the Edit menu to specify that you want to use the plain-text editor +for composing messages. In the Account Settings dialog box, select +the account, and uncheck "Compose messages in HTML format" to use +the plain-text editor for all messages. If you only want to use the +plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key +while clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the +plain-text editor on an as-needed basis.

          +
          • + +
        • Return Receipt: Choose this option to request a +confirmation message when the recipient displays (opens) the +message. Keep in mind that the recipient may choose not to send you +a return receipt. This option lets you enable or disable return +receipt requests on a per-message basis. To automatically request +return receipts for all messages you send, use the return receipts +preferences. See Mail +& Newsgroups Preferences - Return Receipts for more +information.
          • + +
        • Format: Send the message as plain text, or HTML +(formatted), or both. If you choose "Auto-Detect," Mail & +Newsgroups prompts you for the format to use if it's unknown +whether the recipient's mail program can display an HTML message. +The format you choose here overrides the send format you specified +using the Preferences command on the Edit menu.
          • + +
        • Priority: Choose a priority to indicate whether the +message has lowest, low, normal, high, or highest priority.
          • + +
        • Send a Copy To: Choose this if you want to file an +additional copy of the sent message in a different folder than your +default Sent folder. Then select the folder you want.
          • + +
        • Security: Choose this to change the default +security options for this message.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + +

        Replying to a Message

        + +

        To reply to a mail message:

        + +
          +
        • Select the message.
          • + +
        • Click Reply to respond to the sender alone.
          • + +
        • Click Reply All to respond to all addressees in the +message.
          • +
        + +

        To include the original message each time you reply to any +message, and to specify how to place the original message in the +reply:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the +list.)
          3. + +
        3. Select "Automatically quote the original message when +replying."
          4. + +
        4. Specify where in the message to place your reply. "Start my +reply above the quoted text" is the default.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Forwarding a Message

        + +

        When you forward a message, you can specify how to place new +text relative to the original text: inline (in the body of +the message; this is the default), or as an attachment.

        + +

        To forward a message:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message and click Forward.
          2. + +
        2. Type the name or email address of the recipient.
          3. + +
        3. Click Send.
          4. +
        + +

        To set the default for forwarding messages:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the +list.)
          3. + +
        3. For forwarding messages, choose Inline (in the message body) or +As Attachment.
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        Tip: To override the default for forwarding a +message, select the message, open the Message menu, and choose +Forward As, then choose Inline or Attachment.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Confirming That Your Message Was Opened

        + +

        You can use return receipts to notify you when a recipient has +displayed (opened) your message. The recipient must be using a mail +program that supports the Message Disposition Notification (MDN) +standard. Keep in mind that the recipient may choose not to send +you a return receipt, even if you've requested one. Messages you +send to a newsgroup address will not include a return receipt +request, since news servers don't support this feature.

        + +

        To request return receipts for all messages you send, you can +enable the global Return Receipt preferences. You also use the +global Return Receipt preferences to specify how to manage requests you +receive for return receipts. You can override these global +preferences for individual accounts.

        + +

        To request a return receipt on a per-message basis:

        + +
          +
        • From a Mail Compose window, open the Options menu, and choose +Return Receipt.
          • +
        + +

        To automatically request return receipts when sending messages +from each of your mail accounts:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Return Receipts. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to +expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Select "When sending messages, always request a return +receipt."
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        For more information on setting return receipt preferences, see +Mail & Newsgroups +Preferences - Return Receipts.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Saving and Editing a Message Draft

        + +

        To save a mail message as a draft so you can complete it +later:

        + +
          +
        • In the Compose window, click Save, or open the File menu and +choose Save as Draft. By default, the message is saved in the +Drafts folder for the current account. + +

          Note: Your mail message will stay open after you save it +as a draft.

          +
          • +
        + +

        To edit or send a message draft, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Drafts folder +for the account where you created the message draft.
          2. + +
        2. Click the message that you want to edit.
          3. + +
        3. In the top-right corner of the message, click the Edit Draft +button.
          4. + +
        4. Edit the message as necessary.
          5. + +
        5. Click Send to send the message or click Save to save the +message so you can complete it later.
          6. + +
        6. +

          Note: Sending the message removes it from the Drafts +folder.

          +
          7. +
        + +

        Tip: You can also double-click the message to open it for +editing. This is especially useful if the message pane is +closed.
        +

        + +

        To delete one or more unwanted message drafts, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Drafts folder +for the account where you created the message drafts.
          2. + +
        2. Select the message drafts that you want to delete.
          3. + +
        3. Click Delete in the Mail toolbar.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Creating and Using Templates

        + +

        Templates are useful for setting the default format for messages +that you send regularly, such as weekly status reports. You can +save a message as a template from any window in which it is +displayed, including from within a Mail compose window.

        + +

        To save a message to use as a template:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Mail window, click Compose to create a new message and +then set the default font, text size, text color, background color, +and any other default formatting you want.
          2. + +

          Alternatively, open an existing message that already has the +formatting you want.

          + +
        2. While displaying the message, open the File menu, choose Save +As, then choose Template. The message is stored as a template in +the Templates folder for the current mail account.
          3. +
        + +

        To compose a message using a template:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Mail window, select the Templates folder for the account +where you created the message template.
          2. + +
        2. Double-click the message template to open it.
          3. + +
        3. Edit the message, then save it (to put it in the Drafts folder) +or send it.
          4. + +
        4. +

          Note: Sending the message does not remove the template +from the Templates folder. The template is preserved for future +use.

          +
          5. +
        + +

        To delete one or more unwanted message templates, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Templates +folder for the account where you created the message +templates.
          2. + +
        2. Select the message templates that you want to delete.
          3. + +
        3. Click Delete in the Mail toolbar.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of section +]

        + +

         

        + + + + +
        + +

        Creating HTML Mail Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Using HTML in Your Messages

        + +

        Choosing HTML Message Sending +Options

        + +

        Specifying Recipients for HTML +Messages

        + +

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML +Messages

        + +

        Using the HTML Mail Question +Dialog Box

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Using HTML in Your Messages

        + +

        HTML messages can include formatted text, links, images, and +tables—just like a web page. However, some recipients may not +be able to receive HTML messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +allows you to compose mail and newsgroup messages using either the +HTML (rich-text) formatting editor or the plain-text editor for +each mail account you have. In addition, you can choose whether +your addressees should receive HTML or plain-text messages by +default, and how Mail & Newsgroups should handle messages when +it's not known if an addressee can receive HTML-formatted mail.

        + +

        To specify whether to use the HTML editor as the default for +composing messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the mail or newsgroup account you want to use.
          3. + +
        3. Select "Compose messages in HTML format." You see the +Formatting toolbar in the Compose window. Leave this box unchecked +to use the plain-text editor for this account.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Editing or Inserting HTML Elements

        + +

        If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can +edit or insert additional HTML tags, style attributes, and +JavaScript in your mail message. If you are not sure how to work +with HTML source code, it's best not to change it. To work with +HTML code, use one of these methods:

        + +
          +
        • Place the insertion point where you want to insert the HTML +code, then open the Insert menu and choose HTML. In the Insert HTML +dialog box, enter HTML tags and text, and then click Insert to +insert your changes.
          • + +
        • Select the HTML source code that you want to edit, then open +the Insert menu and choose HTML. In the Insert HTML dialog box, +edit HTML tags and text, and then click Insert to insert your +changes.
          • + +
        • Select an element such as a table, named anchor, image, link, +or horizontal line. Double-click the element to open the associated +properties dialog box for that item. Click Advanced Edit to open +the Advanced Property Editor. You can use the Advanced Property +Editor to add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects.
          • +
        + +

        For more information on editing HTML source code, see Using the Advanced Property +Editor.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Choosing HTML Mail Sending Options

        + +

        By default, Mail & Newsgroups prompts you before sending +HTML messages when it's not known whether the recipient's mail +program can display HTML-formatted messages.

        + +

        To choose sending-format options for mail messages, begin from +the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to +expand the list). + +

          Note: This preference applies only to mail messages, not +to newsgroup messages.

          +
          3. + +
        3. Select the option you want and then click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        If while composing a message you realize that one or more +recipients may not be able to receive HTML-formatted mail, you can +easily convert the message to a different format when you click +Send:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Compose window, open the Options menu and choose +Format.
          2. + +
        2. Select the format you want to use for sending the message from the submenu:
          3. + +
            +
          • Auto Detect: Mail & Newsgroups chooses the +appropriate format for the message text. If it can't determine the +format, it asks you to choose a format.
            • + +
          • Plain Text Only: The message may not display +formatting such as bold text, but all mail programs will be able to +display the message.
            • + +
          • Rich Text (HTML) Only: Some mail programs may +have trouble displaying an HTML-formatted message. Choose this +option only if you are sure the recipient's mail program can +display HTML-formatted mail.
            • + +
          • Plain and Rich (HTML) Text: This uses more +disk space, but may be the best choice if you are not sure whether +the recipient's mail program can display HTML-formatted mail.
            • +
          + + +
        3. When you've finished composing the message, click Send.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Specifying Recipients for HTML Messages

        + +

        You can save time by indicating whether individuals in your +address books prefer to receive either HTML messages or plain text +messages.

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Select the address book on the left and then select the +individual's card on the right.
          3. + +
        3. Click Properties to display the "Card for" dialog box.
          4. + +
        4. In the Name tab, use the "Prefers to receive messages formatted +as" drop-down list to select HTML if you know this recipient can +read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that include links, +images, or tables).
          5. + +

          If this recipient can only read messages sent as plain text (no +formatting), then choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not +sure, choose Unknown.

          + +

          If you choose Unknown, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups determines +the sending format based on the Send Format settings for Mail & +Newsgroups in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & Newsgroups +still can't determine the correct format, it will prompt you to +choose a sending format when you send the message.

          + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Viewing the Message Source for HTML Messages

        + +

        You can quickly view the HTML and other code that generates an +HTML message you've received:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list window, open the message.
          2. + +
        2. Open the View menu and choose Message Source.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Using the HTML Mail Question Dialog Box

        + +

        The HTML Mail Question dialog box appears when you try to send a +message to someone whose mail program may not be able to display +HTML messages or when Mail & Newsgroups cannot determine +whether your recipient can display HTML messages. If you are in +doubt, send the message in both HTML and plain-text formats.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +
        + +

        Using Attachments

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Attaching a File or Web Page

        + +

        Viewing and Opening +Attachments

        + +

        Saving Attachments

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Attaching a File or Web Page

        + +

        To attach a file to an outgoing mail message:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Compose window, click Attach or open the File menu and +choose Attach File. You see the "Enter file to attach" dialog +box. + +

          Tip: You can also click inside the Attachments area to +attach a file.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Type the name of the file you want to attach, or select a file +from your hard drive that you want to attach.
          3. + +
        3. Click Open. The filename appears in the Attachments area.
          4. +
        + +

        Tip: You can also drag and drop one or more files from +your desktop into the Attachments area in the Compose window.

        + +

        To attach a web page to an outgoing mail message:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Compose window, open the File menu and choose Attach Web +Page.
          2. + +
        2. In the dialog box, enter the URL of the page and then click OK. +The web page URL appears in the Attachments area.
          3. +
        + +

        Tip: When you are viewing a page in the Navigator +browser, you can send the page to someone by opening the File menu +and choosing Send Page.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Viewing and Opening Attachments

        + +

        If you receive a mail attachment that consists of a file type +that Mozilla can display (such as graphic files and HTML files), +you see the attachment displayed inline (in the body of the +message). For other file types, Mail & Newsgroups lets you open +the attachment using another application, or you can save the +attachment on your hard disk.

        + +

        To open the attachment, make sure you have a program on your +computer that can open files of the same type as the attachment's +file format. For example, if you want to open a .DOC file, make +sure you have a program on your computer that can open .DOC +files.

        + +

        To open an attachment:

        + +
          +
        1. Double-click the attachment you want (if there is more than +one).
          2. + +
        2. In the Downloading dialog box, choose what you want Mozilla to +do with the attachment: +


          +
            +
          • If Mozilla finds an application on your hard disk that can +open the attachment, you can open the attachment using that +application. Click "Choose" to use a different application to open +the attachment.
            • + +
          • If Mozilla can't find an application on your hard disk that +can open the attachment, you can save the attachment. You won't be +able to open the attachment, but at least you can save it on your +hard disk until you can install an application that can open +it.
            • + +
          • Click "Advanced" to add a new file type to the list of helper +applications. Mozilla uses helper applications to determine how +different file types are opened by other applications from within +Mozilla. For more information, see Managing Different File +Types.
            • +
          +
          3. + +
        3. Click OK.
          4. + +
        + +

        Note: If you are viewing your mail using an IMAP mail +server, all attachments remain on the server.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Saving Attachments

        + +

        To save an attachment:

        + +
          +
        1. In the right side of the message envelope, under "Attachments," select the +attachment that you want to save.
          2. + +
        2. Right-click (Control-click on Macintosh) the attachment and +choose Save As from the pop-up menu.
          3. + +
        3. Choose a filename and location for the attachment on your hard +disk and then click OK. Mail & Newsgroups downloads the +attachment and saves it to the specified location.
          4. +
        + +

        Tip: To save all attachments, right-click the first one +in the attachment list, and choose Save All. You can then specify +the location where you want all the attachments to be saved.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +
        + +

        Deleting Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Deleting POP or IMAP Messages

        + +

        Moving Messages to and from the +Trash

        + +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        Deleting POP or IMAP Messages

        + +

        How you delete messages depends on your mail server type: POP or +IMAP. Deleted POP messages are automatically moved to the Trash +folder. IMAP users can set different options for deleting +messages.

        + +

        To delete messages from your Inbox or other folders, begin from +the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete. By +default, Mail & Newsgroups moves the selected messages to the +Trash folder.
          2. + +
        2. To delete messages permanently, open the File menu and choose +Empty Trash.
          3. +
        + +

        To delete messages without opening them, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the View menu and choose Show/Hide, and then uncheck +Message Pane. + +

          Alternatively, click the Message Pane handle (the ridged area +centered at the bottom of the message list) to close the message +pane.

          +
          2. + +
        2. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete.
          3. +
        + +

        To set deletion preferences for IMAP messages:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Locate the IMAP account you want, and then click the Server +Settings category under the account name.
          3. + +
        3. Select the options you want for +deleting messages and click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Moving Messages To and From the Trash

        + +

        If you use a POP server to deliver your mail, or if you set up +IMAP to use the Trash folder, follow these steps to delete messages +from your Inbox or other folders:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select the messages you want to +delete.
          2. + +
        2. Click Delete. Mail & Newsgroups moves the messages to the +Trash folder.
          3. +
        + +

        To recover messages from the Trash:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Trash folder.
          2. + +
        2. Select the messages you want to recover and drag them to +another folder.
          3. +
        + +

        To delete messages permanently:

        + +
          +
        • Open the File menu and choose Empty Trash.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + +

         

        + + + +
        + +

        Using Address Books

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        About Address Books

        + +

        Adding Entries to Your Address +Books

        + +

        Creating a New Address Book

        + +

        Creating a New Address Book +Card

        + +

        Creating a Mailing List

        + +

        Editing a Mailing List

        + +

        Searching Address Books and +Directories

        + +

        Importing Address Books

        + +

        Exporting Address Books

        + +

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories

        +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        About Address Books

        + +

        Address books store email addresses and contact information for +people you typically send mail to, such as colleagues, friends, and +family. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides you with two +address books: the Personal Address Book and the Collected +Addresses Book—and you can create additional address books as +well. You can also import address books from other mail programs +and previous versions of Mozilla. The contents of these address +books are stored locally on your hard disk.

        + +

        Your address book may also list email addresses from an LDAP +directory, which is located on an LDAP directory server. The +directory server stores email addresses of people that are not +included in your locally-stored address books. The Lightweight +Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an industry-standard method for +accessing Internet or intranet directory services such as corporate address +books.

        + +

        Personal Address Book

        + +

        Use the Personal Address Book to add specific names of your +choice. You can create mailing lists and edit individual address +entries.

        + +

        Collected Addresses

        + +

        By default, the Collected Address Book automatically collects the email +addresses contained in outgoing mail messages. Addresses from outgoing messages +are stored in the Collected Address Book as soon as you click Send. The Collected +Address Book can also save the sender's address in each incoming message. +To enable this feature, you must change the preferences for email address +collection. +The preferences also let you choose which types of addresses you want to +collect (only addresses from mail messages or addresses from both mail and +newsgroup messages).

        + +

        LDAP Directory (if available)

        + +

        An LDAP directory (also known as an address lookup service) +stores email addresses of recipients who are not in your +locally-stored address books. LDAP directories offer you access to +large, centrally maintained databases of email addresses, which is +especially useful with address +autocompletion.

        + +

        Automatic address collection is enabled by default. To change automatic address collection settings, begin in the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If +no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Under Email Address Collection, choose whether you want +to: +


          +
            +
          • Use this feature for incoming or outgoing messages, or +both.
            • + +
          • Use this feature for newsgroup messages.
            • + +
          • Limit the size of the Collected Address book. The default size +is 700 cards. If you add a new card that exceeds the limit, the +oldest card is removed and the new card is added, keeping the total +number of cards the same.
            • +
          +
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        +


        +

        Opening the Address Book Window

        + +

        To open the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        • Open the Window menu and choose Address Book, or click the +Address Book icon in the lower-left corner of any Mozilla window.
          • + +
        • + + + + + + + + + +
           Address Book icon
          +
          • +
        +


        +

        Changing the Address Book Window Display

        + +

        To customize how the Address Book window and the cards are +displayed:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book. You see the +Address Book window.
          2. + +
        2. In the Address Book window, open the View menu and choose from +the following display options:
          3. + +
        3. +
            +
          • Choose Show/Hide, and then select the item you wish to uncheck +(hide) or check (show).
            • + +
          • Choose Show Name As, and then select how you want card names +displayed (first/last, last/first, or Display Name).
            • + +
          • Choose Sort by, and then select a sort option.
            • +
          +
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Adding Entries to Your Address Books

        + +

        You can use any of the following ways to add entries to your +address books:

        + +
          +
        • Click a name in the From or recipient fields (for example, To +or Cc) in a message you've received, and then select "Add to +Address Book" from the drop-down list.
          • + +
        • In the Address Book window, click New Card to create a new +address book card.
          • + +
        • Open a message, which automatically adds the sender's address +to your Collected Addresses Book (if enabled).
          • + +
        • In the Address Book window, copy entries to another address +book by selecting the entries and dragging them over the name of +the address book you want to copy them to.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Creating a New Address Book

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups provides a default personal +address book, but you can create additional address books.

        + +

        To create a new address book:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Address Book icon in the lower-left corner of any Mozilla window, +or open the Window menu and choose Address Book. You see the Address Book +window. + + + + + + + + +
          Address Book icon
          +
          2. + +
        2. In the Address Book window, open the File menu, choose New, and +choose Address Book. You see the New Address Book dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Type the name of the new address book, and click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Creating a New Address Book Card

        + +

        Address book cards can be used to store names, postal addresses, +email addresses, phone numbers, and information such as whether the +addressee prefers to receive plain-text or HTML-formatted +messages.

        + +

        To create an address book card for an individual:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the +Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Click New Card. (If you have multiple address books, select the +one to which you want to add a card.)
          3. + +
        3. Each New Card dialog box has four tabs:
          4. + +
        4. +
            +
          • Name: Enter the following information: +


            +
              +
            • First and Last (first and last name of person as you want it to +appear in the address book).
              • + +
            • Display name (the name that appears in the "To" field of the +Compose window).
              • + +
            • Nickname (a shortcut or alias for the real name).
              • + +
            • Email address (primary and additional address).
              • + +
            • Prefers to receive messages formatted as: If you know this +recipient can read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that +include links, images, or tables), choose HTML. If this recipient +can only read messages sent as plain text (no formatting), then +choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not sure, choose +Unknown. If you choose Unknown, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +determines the sending format based on the Mail & Newsgroups +Send Format settings in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & +Newsgroups still can't determine the correct format, Mail & +Newsgroups will prompt you to choose a sending format when you send +the message.
              • + +
            • Phones (enter phone numbers for this person)
              • +
            +
            • + +
          • Address: Type additional information such as street +address, phone number, and URL. + + + + + + +

            Tip: If you enter address information, Mozilla +displays a Get Map button next to the address when you view this +entry's address book card in your address book. Clicking the Get +Map button displays a web page that contains a map to the +address.

            +
            • + +
          • Other: Store any additional information you +want.
            • +
          +
          5. +
        + +

        Tip: To quickly add entries to your address book, click +any email address in messages you receive and select Add to Address +Book from the drop-down list. The New Card dialog box appears where +you can complete the information.

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Viewing or Editing Card Properties

        + +

        To view or edit the properties for an individual card:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the card from the list of entries in the Address Book +window.
          2. + +
        2. Click Properties.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Creating a Mailing List

        + +

        If you regularly send messages to a group of recipients, you can +quickly address a message by using a mailing list that contains the +names you want.

        + +

        To create a mailing list and add it to your address book:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Address Book window, click New List.
          2. + +
        2. Enter the following information in the Mailing List dialog +box: + +
            +
          • Click the drop-down list at "Add to" to choose an address book +in which to store the list.
            • + +
          • List name: When you enter the list name in the "To" field of a +message, everyone on the list receives your message.
            • + +
          • List nickname: Alias (or shortcut) for the list name.
            • + +
          • Description: Appears after the list name in the address line of +the Compose window.
            • +
          +
          3. +
        3. Type email addresses to add them to the mailing list.
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        In the left side of the Address Book window, the mailing list +appears underneath the address book you added it to.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Editing a Mailing List

        + +

        Mailing lists are stored in the address book in which you +created them.

        + +

        To remove a member from the list, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by +clicking the small triangle beside the address book title.
          3. + +
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. The list +members appear to the right of the mailing list name.
          4. + +
        4. Click the entry you wish to delete.
          5. + +
        5. Click the Delete button.
          6. +
        + +

        To add members to a mailing list:

        + +
          +
        1. Open Window menu and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by +clicking the small triangle beside the address book title.
          3. + +
        3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name.
          4. + +
        4. Click Properties.
          5. + +
        5. Add or remove entries as necessary.
          6. + +
        6. Click OK when you are done.
          7. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching Address Books and Directories

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly search an +address book or directory by name or email address, or use a +combination of criteria to perform a more specific search through +an address book or directory.

        + +

        To quickly search an address book or directory for a name or +email address, begin from the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        1. In the Address Book window, in the list of address books, +select the address book or directory that you want to search.
          2. + +
        2. In the "Name or Email contains" field, type the name or +email address that you want to find. You can type only part of the +name or email address, or you can type the exact text that you want +to find. + +

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +displays only those entries where the name or email address +contains the search text you entered.

          +
          3. + +
        3. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all entries.
          4. +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching for Specific Entries

        + +

        You can search address books or directories for specific +entries. If you are not already viewing the Advanced Address Book +Search dialog box, begin from the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Search Addresses. You see the +Advanced Address Book Search dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Next to "Search in", choose the address book or directory +through which you want to search.
          3. + +
        3. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search +for entries either that match all or at least one of the conditions +(criteria) that you choose.
          4. + +
        4. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          5. + +
        5. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. +The search results appear in lower part of the dialog box.
          6. + +
        6. To sort the entries in a different order, click the column that +you want to sort by.
          7. + +
        7. To view the card for an entry, select the entry and click +Properties.
          8. + +
        8. To compose a message to selected recipients, select one or more +entries and click Compose.
          9. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + +

        Importing Address Books

        + +

        If you have a Mozilla 6 address book from another user profile +or computer, or if you have an address book from a previous version +of Mozilla Communicator or another mail program, you can import +its entries into the Address Book window as a new address book. +Keep in mind that when you upgrade a user profile from an earlier +version of Mozilla, your address books are automatically included, +so there's no need to import them.

        + +

        You can import address books from Communicator, Mozilla 6, +Eudora, Outlook, Outlook Express, or text files (LDIF, +tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) +formats). When you import an address book, Mail & Newsgroups +creates a new address book with the imported entries.

        + +

        You can also import mail messages and +settings from Communicator, Eudora, Outlook, and Outlook +Express.

        + +

        To import an address book, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Mail Import +Wizard.
          +
          2. + +
        2. Follow the instructions to import address books.
          3. + +
        3. +

          Tip: Communicator address book files (pab.na2) +are stored in your user profile directory (for example, C:\Program +Files\Mozilla\Users, where \Users contains the user profiles +directories).

          +
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Exporting Address Books

        + +

        You can export a Mozilla address book if you later want to +import it into another user profile, move it to another computer, +or use it with another program that can import address books. You +can export an address book to one of these file formats: Mozilla +(.ldif), tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text +(.txt) formats.

        + +

        To export an address book, begin from the Address Book +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the address book that you want to export.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Tools menu, and choose Export.
          3. + +
        3. In the Export Address Book dialog box, browse to the location +where you want to save the address book file.
          4. + +
        4. Choose the file format for the exported address book (.ldif, +comma-separated, or tab-delimited).
          5. + +
        5. Enter a name for the address book file. Be sure to include the +appropriate file extension (.ldif, .csv, .tab, or .txt).
          6. + +
        6. Click Save.
          7. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Adding and Removing LDAP Directories

        + +

        Adding an LDAP directory to your address book allows you to +search the directory for email addresses and other contact +information. You can also use the directory for address + +autocompletion when addressing mail messages.

        + +

        You typically add or remove LDAP directories using instructions +provided by your system administrator. Check with your system +administrator for the information you will need in order to add a +new directory to your address book.

        + +

        To add a new directory, begin from the Address Book window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu, and choose New, and then choose LDAP +Directory. You see the Directory Server Properties dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Type the following information in the Directory Server +Properties dialog box General tab: +


          +
            +
          • Name: Enter the name of the directory service (for +example, InfoSpace Directory).
            • + +
          • Host Name: Enter the name of the host name server, such +as ldap.infospace.com.
            • + +
          • Base DN: This setting is used to set the Base +distinguished name. Enter codes to restrict searching to a specific +country or organization. For example, c=JP restricts the search to +Japan only. Base DN also specifies the organization to search on +within the directory (for instance, o=Mozilla Communications +Corporation, c=US).
            • + +
          • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP server. +The default is 389.
            • + +
          • Bind DN: The distinguished name that is used to authenticate (log +in) to the LDAP server. If left blank, the LDAP server binds anonymously.
            • + +
          • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your +LDAP server supports secure (encrypted) connections. If you are +unsure, contact your system administrator.
            • +
          +
          3. + +
        3. Click the Advanced tab to configure LDAP directory server +settings.
          4. + +
        4. Type the following information: +


          +
            +
          • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you +limit the number of autocompletion matches returned by the +directory server. Enter the maximum number of email address matches +to display for autocompletion.
            • + +
          • Scope: Defines the limits of the search. Choose one of +the following: +


            +
              +
            • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN and one level below the base DN.
              • + +
            • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the +least restrictive search.
              • +
            +
            • + +
          • Search filter: Enter the search filter to apply to +matching results that are within the specified scope of the +search.
            • +
          + +
        5. Click OK to close the Directory Server Properties dialog +box.
          6. + +
        6. Click OK to close the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box.
          7. + +
        7. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
          8. +
        + +

        The directory you added appears in the list of address books in +the Address Book window.

        + +

        To delete a directory:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog +box, click Edit Directories.
          4. + +
        4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, select the directory +that you want to delete and click Delete.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK, then click OK again to close the Preferences dialog +box.
          6. +
        + +

        For information on downloading or synchronizing a directory for +offline use so that you can search it or use it for address book +autocompletion while working offline, see Downloading Directory Entries for Offline +Use.

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Directory Server Settings

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Directory Server Settings +dialog box, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Window menu, and choose Address Book.
          2. + +
        2. In the list of address books, select a directory.
          3. + +
        3. Click Properties.
          4. +
        + +

        General Tab

        + +
          +
        • Name: The name of the directory service (for example, +InfoSpace Directory).
          • + +
        • Host Name: The name of the host name server, such as +ldap.infospace.com.
          • + +
        • Base DN: The Base Distinguished Name. Codes entered here +restrict searching to a specific country or organization. For +example, c=JP restricts the search to Japan only. Base DN also +specifies the organization to search on within the directory (for +instance, o=Netscape Communications Corporation, c=US).
          • + +
        • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP server. +The default is 389.
          • + +
        • Bind DN: The distinguished name that is used to authenticate (log +in) to the LDAP server. If left blank, the LDAP server binds anonymously.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting if your +LDAP server supports secure (encrypted) connections. If you are +unsure, contact your system administrator.
          • +
        + +

        Advanced Tab

        + +
          +
        • Don't return more than _ results: This setting lets you +limit the number of autocompletion matches returned by the +directory server. Specify the maximum number of email address +matches to display for autocompletion.
          • + +
        • Scope: Defines the limits of the search:
          • + +
        • +
            +
          • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN and one level below the base DN.
            • + +
          • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching the +base DN in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is the +least restrictive search.
            • +
          +
          • + +
        • Search filter: Specifies the search filter to apply to +matching results that are within the specified scope of the +search.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +
        + +

        Organizing Your Messages

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Creating a Folder

        + +

        Renaming a Folder

        + +

        Moving or Copying a Folder

        + +

        Filing Messages in Folders

        + +

        Sharing Folders With Other Users +(IMAP Only)

        + +

        Labeling Messages

        + +

        Marking or Flagging Messages

        + +

        Creating Message Filters

        + +

        Searching Through Messages

        +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        Creating a Folder

        + +

        To create a message folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu, choose New, and then Folder. You see the +New Folder dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Type the name of the folder.
          3. + +
        3. Click the drop-down list and choose a folder location and click +OK. Your new folder appears in your Mail Folders list.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Renaming a Folder

        + +

        To rename an existing folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the folder you want to rename.
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu and choose Rename Folder. You see the Rename +Folder dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Type the new name and click OK.
          4. +
        + +

        Note: If you rename a folder that you've been using to +store filtered messages, the filter +will automatically update to use the renamed folder.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Moving or Copying a Folder

        + +

        You can copy a folder and its contents to another mail account, +or move a folder within the same mail account.

        + +

        To move or copy a folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the folder you want to move or copy.
          2. + +
        2. Do one of the following: +


          +
            +
          • To move the folder under another folder within the same +account, drag the folder over the name of the other folder. The +folder you moved becomes a subfolder of the other folder.
            • + +
          • To copy the folder to another account, drag the folder over the +name of another account.
            • + +
          • To copy the folder under another folder in another account, +drag the folder over the name of another folder in another account. +The folder you copied becomes a subfolder of the other folder.
            • +
          +
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + +

        Filing Messages in Folders

        + +

        You can move messages from one folder to another by using either +of these methods:

        + +
          +
        • Select the message, click the File button on the toolbar, and +choose the destination folder.
          • + +
        • Drag and drop messages into the desired folder.
          • + +
        • +

          Note: If you drag and drop a message from an IMAP or POP +mail server folder to a local folder on your hard drive, the +message is moved to the local folder and removed from the server +folder.

          +
          • +
        + +

        To copy a message from one folder to another:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message and right-click to display the pop-up +menu.
          2. + +
        2. Select "Copy To" and then select the destination account and +folder from the drop-down list.
          3. +
        + +

        Tip: Alternatively, you can copy a message +between folders by holding down the Shift key while dragging the +message from the message list over another folder.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + + +

        Sharing Folders With Other Users (IMAP Only)

        + +

        Users with IMAP mail accounts can share mail folders with other +users on the same network. Sharing folders allows several users to +see and work with the same messages, similar to a newsgroup. To use +shared folders, your IMAP mail server must support Access Control +List (ACL) management. Check with your system administrator or help +desk if you are not sure that shared folders are supported by your +IMAP mail server.

        + +

        To share a mail folder with other users on your network, or to +view sharing information for a folder, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Within an IMAP account, select a folder that you want to share, +or select a folder whose sharing privileges you want to view. + +

          Folders listed under Local Folders, or folders listed under a +POP mail account cannot be shared.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Folder Properties.
          3. + +
        3. Click the Sharing tab.
          4. + +
        4. Click Privileges. You may be prompted to enter your network +user name and password. + +

          The Privileges button is only available if the IMAP mail server +allows you to set folder sharing privileges. If this button is not +available, you can view the folder sharing privileges for this +folder but cannot change them.

          +
          5. + +
        5. Follow the instructions on the screen to add users and to set +their folder access privileges. +


          +
            +
          • Read privileges: Users can read messages and +copy their contents, but they cannot modify or delete messages, or +copy messages into the folder. Users can flag messages as read or +unread. See Marking or Flagging Messages +for instructions on flagging messages.
            • + +
          • Read and Write privileges: In addition to Read +privileges, users can modify and delete messages. Users can also +copy or move messages into the folder.
            • + +
          • Manage privileges: In addition to Read and +Write privileges, users can add and remove users and change their +folder permissions.
            • +
          +
          6. + +
        6. Click OK to confirm your changes.
          7. + +
        7. Click OK to close the Folder Properties dialog box.
          8. +
        + +

        In the list of folders for your mail account, a shared folder +displays a distinctive folder icon to indicate that it is +shared.

        + +

        To send a message that tells others how they can subscribe to +your shared folder, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the shared folder.
          2. + +
        2. Right-click to display a pop-up menu, and choose Copy Folder +Location.
          3. + +
        3. Click Compose to display a Mail compose window.
          4. + +
        4. Click in the message body, open the Edit menu, and choose +Paste.
          5. + +
        5. Address the message, type a subject, and type the message text. +Tell message recipients that they can subscribe to the shared +folder by clicking the link you pasted into the message. + +

          Only message recipients who share the same network will be able +to subscribe to your shared folder.

          +
          6. + +
        6. Click Send.
          7. +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Subscribing to a Shared Folder

        + +

        Subscribing to a shared folder is similar to subscribing to a +newsgroup. To subscribe to a shared folder, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe +dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose +another IMAP mail account.
          3. + +
        3. Select the folder that you want to subscribe to.
          4. + +
        4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the +folder. You see a checkmark next to each folder to which you +subscribe. Click Unsubscribe to cancel a selection.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed folders appears in the +Mail window.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Labeling Messages

        + +

        You can apply labels to messages to help you organize and +prioritize them. You can apply a standard color and text label to +messages, or you can customize the label colors or label text to +suit your needs.

        + +

        One powerful way to use labels is to set up a message filter to +automatically label incoming messages from a specific sender. For +example, you can set up a message filter so that incoming messages +from your boss are labeled "Important" and appear in red. See Creating Message Filters for more +information.

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Applying a Label

        + +

        To apply a label to a message, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message you want to label.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. + +
        3. Choose the label you want to apply from the list.
          4. +
        + +

        The message header changes to the label color you chose. To see +the label text, you must display the Label column in the Mail +window.

        + +

        Tip: To quickly label messages or remove a +label, select one or more messages and press 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 on +your keyboard. Press 0 to remove a label.

        + +

        To display the Label column, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
          • + +
        • Click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the +list.
          • +
        + +

        Note: Message labels apply on a per-account +basis. For example, if you move or copy a labeled message to +another mail account, the label is not preserved. Similarly, if you +forward a labeled message to another recipient, the label is not +preserved. For IMAP mail accounts, if your IMAP server supports +user-defined keywords, message labels will persist when you log in +to your mail account from a different location.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Customizing Labels

        + +

        You can customize label colors or text to suit your needs.

        + +

        To customize labels, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Labels. (If no +subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to +expand the list.)
          3. + +
        3. Edit the label text, or replace it with your own label text. +The label can be up to 32 characters long.
          4. + +
        4. To change the label color, click the color block next to that +label and select a new color.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        Your changes are immediately applied to all labeled messages in +all your mail accounts.

        + +

        Tip: To restore the default label text and +colors, follow the steps above to display the label settings, and +click Restore Defaults.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Sorting Messages by Label

        + +

        To sort messages by label, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. To display the Label column if it is hidden, click the +Show/Hide Columns icon and select Label from the list.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Label column to sort messages by label, and within +each label type, to sort messages by date.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Removing Labels

        + +

        To remove a message label, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select one or more labeled messages.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Label.
          3. + +
        3. Choose "None" for the message label.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Marking or Flagging Messages

        + +

        You might want to mark a message you've read as unread if you +later want to re-read the message or respond to it.

        + +

        To mark a message as unread, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Click in the Read column of each message you want to mark as +unread. Messages marked as unread display a symbol in the Read column. Messages marked as +read display a symbol in the Read +column. If the Read column is not visible, click the Show/Hide +Columns icon and select Read from the list.
          3. +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
        Read column
        + +

        You can flag messages that you later want to download for offline use.

        + +

        To flag messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Click in the Flag column of each message you want to download. +A flag appears where you clicked to +indicate that the message has been flagged. If the Flag column is +not visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and +select Flag from the list.
          3. +
        + + + + + + + + + + +
        Flag column
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Creating Message Filters

        + +

        Message filters allow you to manage and organize your messages. +You can create message filters that Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +uses to automatically perform certain actions on incoming messages +based on criteria you specify. For example, you can create a +message filter that automatically moves incoming messages to a +particular folder. Message filters operate on a per-account +basis.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Message Filters dialog box, +begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Message Filters. You see the +Message Filters dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you +want to apply the filter.
          3. + +
        3. Click New. You use the Filter Rules dialog box to specify the +types of messages to act on, and the action you want the filter to +perform.
          4. + +
        4. Type a name for the filter.
          5. + +
        5. Select the matching option you want Mail to use: "all of +the following conditions" (criteria) you choose, or "at least +one" of the conditions.
          6. + +
        6. Use the drop-down lists to choose the search criteria (for +example, "Subject," "Sender," "contains," "doesn't contain") and +then type the text or phrase you want to match. + +

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a +header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you +want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), +choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the +drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching +entries. Make sure you enter the custom header correctly, since +Mail will only find entries that exactly match what you type.

          +
          7. + +
        7. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          8. + +
        8. Use the drop-down list to choose the action you want the filter +to perform on the messages (for example, Move to Folder). + +

          Tip: To automatically label incoming messages, +choose "Label the message" from the drop-down list.

          +
          9. + +
        9. Choose a destination folder in which to store the messages, or +create a new folder.
          10. + +
        10. Click OK to confirm your settings.
          11. + +
        11. Click OK in the Message Filters dialog box. The filter begins +filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK.
          12. +
        + + + +

        To manage your filters, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Message Filters. You see the +Message Filters dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you +want to apply the filter.
          3. + +
        3. Choose from the following:
          4. + +
            +
          • To turn a filter on or off: Click the checkbox to the +right of the filter name to enable it, or click it again to turn it +off.
            • + +
          • To edit a filter: Select the filter name and click Edit +(or double-click the filter name). Use the Filter Rules dialog box +to make your changes.
            • + +
          • To delete a filter: Select the filter name and click +Delete.
            • + +
          • To change the order in which filters are applied: In the +filter list, click a filter's name, and click "Move Up" or "Move +Down" to move it.
            • + + +

            Note: Filters are applied to each incoming message in the +order you choose, until a filter action results in the message +being deleted or moved to the Inbox folder.

            + +
          + + +
        4. Click OK when you are done managing your filters. If you +created a new filter, it begins filtering incoming messages as soon +as you click OK.
          5. +
        + +

        Note: If you delete a folder that you've been using to +store filtered messages, the filter will no longer work. Incoming +messages that match the filter criteria will appear in your Inbox. +If you rename or move the folder, the filter will automatically +update to use the renamed or moved folder.

        + +

        Tip: Filters don't apply to existing messages. If you +have existing messages that you want to move to another folder, you +can search for those messages and +then file them into the other folder.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Filtering Messages From a Specific Sender

        + +

        You can quickly create a filter for messages from a particular +sender. For example, if you want to automatically move all incoming +messages from your child's teacher into a folder called "School", +you can quickly set up a filter to do this.

        + +

        To create a filter for messages from a specific sender, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a message from a specific sender.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Create Filter From Message. +You see the Filter Rules dialog box. Using the sender's email +address, Mozilla prefills the filter name, the filter matching +criteria, and the filter action (Move to folder).
          3. + +
        3. Choose a destination folder in which to store the incoming +messages from the specified sender, or create a new folder.
          4. + +
        4. Click OK to confirm your settings. You see the Message Filters dialog box, where you can +create, delete, or edit message filters.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK. The filter begins filtering incoming messages from +the specified sender as soon as you click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching Through Messages

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly find text in a +single message, search messages by subject or sender, or use a +combination of criteria to perform a thorough search through all +messages in a specific mail folder, newsgroup, or account.

        + +

        To locate text in a single message, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select the message, open the Edit menu, and choose Find in This +Message.
          2. + +
        2. Type the text that you want to locate in the dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Click Find to locate the first occurrence of the text.
          4. + +
        4. Continue clicking Find to locate additional occurrences, or +click Cancel when you are done.
          5. + +
        5. Choose Find Again from the Edit menu to continue searching for +the text throughout the rest of the message.
          6. +
        + +

        To quickly search for messages in a selected folder by subject +or sender, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. To the right of "Subject or Sender contains:", type the subject +text or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part +of the subject or sender, or you can type the exact word or name +that you want to find. + +

          As soon as you stop typing, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +displays only those messages in the selected folder where the +subject or sender contains the search text you entered.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all messages in +the selected folder.
          3. +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching for Specific Messages

        + +

        You can search mail folders or newsgroups for specific messages. +If you are not already viewing the Search Messages dialog box, +begin from the Mail window:

        +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu and choose Search Messages. You see the +Search Messages dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Next to "Search for messages in", choose the account, +newsgroup, or folder through which you want to search.
          3. + +
        3. Select "Search subfolders" to include all subfolders in the +search.
          4. + +
        4. Select which matching option Mail & Newsgroups will use to search +for messages that match all or at least one of the +conditions (criteria) that you choose.
          5. + +
        5. Use the drop-down lists to indicate the search criteria (for +example, "Subject" and "contains") and then type the text or phrase +that you want to match. + +

          Tip: To search for messages that contain a +header not listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you +want to search for messages that include the header Resent-From), +choose Customize and type the header you want to search for. +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups adds your custom header to the +drop-down list, so you can then choose it to search for matching +entries. Make sure you enter the custom header correctly, since +Mail will only find entries that exactly match what you type.

          +
          6. + +
        6. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
          7. + +
        7. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. +The search results appear in lower part of the Search Messages +dialog box.
          8. + +
            +
          • To open a message so you can read it, select the +message and click Open, or double-click the message.
            • + +
          • To sort the messages in a different order, click the column +that you want to sort by.
            • + +
          • To move or copy a message in the Results area to another +folder, select the message and then choose the destination folder +from the File drop-down list. If the destination folder is within +the same account, the message is moved to that folder. If the +destination folder is within a different account, the message is +copied to that folder.
            • + +
          • To delete a message in the Results area, select the message and +then click Delete.
            • + +
          • To open the folder where the message is stored, select the +message and click Open Message Folder.
            • +
          +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + +
        + + + + + + +

        Importing Mail from Other Programs

        + +

        This section describes how to import mail messages and settings +from Mozilla Communicator, Outlook, Outlook Express, and Eudora. +To import address books from these programs, see Importing Address Books.

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Importing Mail +Messages

        + +

        Importing Mail +Settings

        +
        + +

         

        + + + +

        Importing Mail Messages

        + +

        To import mail messages from Mozilla Communicator, Outlook, +Outlook Express, or Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Import +Wizard.
          2. + +
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail messages.
          3. +
        + +

        For Mozilla Communicator, the wizard imports a copy of all Communicator +mail folders included under Local Folders. Imported mail is added +as a new folder under Local Folders in the Mail window. (The Communicator mail folders still remain in their original location).

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Importing Mail Settings

        + +

        To import mail settings from Outlook, Outlook Express, or +Eudora, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Import +Wizard.
          2. + +
        2. Follow the instructions to import mail settings.
          3. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + +
        + + + +

        Getting Started With Newsgroups

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Subscribing to Newsgroups

        + +

        Reading Newsgroup +Messages

        + +

        Posting Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions

        + +

        Monitoring Threads

        + +

        Removing a Newsgroup

        + +

        Adding a Newsgroup Server

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Subscribing to Newsgroups

        + +

        If you have set up an account on a +newsgroup server, you can join (subscribe) to newsgroups (also +called discussion groups).

        + +

        To subscribe to a newsgroup, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe +dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose +another newsgroup account.
          3. + +
        3. Select a newsgroup. To select more than one newsgroup, +Ctrl+click (Windows and Linux) or Command+click (Macintosh OS) each +additional newsgroup.
          4. + +
        4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the +newsgroup. You see a checkmark next to each newsgroup to which you +subscribe. Click Unsubscribe to cancel a selection.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed newsgroups appears in the +Mail window.
          6. +
        + +

        If you are an IMAP mail user, you can also subscribe to message +folders located on an IMAP server. (Your Inbox is a type of message +folder.) Follow the instructions above for subscribing, but select +an account from the Account drop-down list. For more information +on sharing folders and subscribing to folders, see Sharing Folders With Other Users (IMAP +Only).

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Reading Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        When you open your newsgroup server, you see the list of +newsgroups to which you subscribe. The server downloads the +headers of new messages in each newsgroup.

        + +

        To read newsgroup messages, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Double-click a newsgroup server icon to see its newsgroups. (If +there are no newsgroups, you may need to subscribe to one.)
          2. + +
        2. Click a newsgroup name to see its messages.
          3. + +
        3. Click a message to read it. Click the thread button to display +all the responses below the original message. You can click any +header to display its message. You can start a new thread or post +a message in response.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Posting Newsgroup Messages

        + +

        To start new threads (discussions):

        + +
          +
        1. From the list of your subscribed newsgroups in the Mail window, +select a newsgroup.
          2. + +
        2. Click Compose.
          3. + +
        3. Compose your message, and +click Send to post it.
          4. + +
        4. Click Get Msgs to see your posting on the newsgroup.
          5. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Contributing to Ongoing Discussions

        + +

        To post a response to the newsgroup:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. + +
        2. Click Reply.
          3. + +
        3. Compose your message, and +click Send to post it.
          4. +
        + +

        To reply to an individual as well as post a response to the +group:

        + +
          +
        1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
          2. + +
        2. Click Reply All.
          3. + +
        3. Compose your message, and click Send to post it.
          4. +
        + +

        To redirect a posting to another newsgroup:

        + +
          +
        • Click Reply and choose "Followup-To" from the "Newsgroup" +drop-down list. Subsequent responses will be posted to the +newsgroup you enter.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Monitoring Threads

        + +

        To monitor unread messages in threads that are of interest to +you:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a message in a thread.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Watch Thread.
          3. + +
        3. If you want to monitor additional threads, repeat steps 1 and 2 +for messages in additional threads.
          4. + +
        4. When you're ready to monitor messages in these threads, open +the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose Watched Threads +with Unread. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups only displays the +watched threads that contain unread messages.
          5. + +
        5. Open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose All to +return to viewing all messages in the newsgroup.
          6. +
        + +

        To ignore a message thread:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a message in the thread.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Message menu, and choose Ignore Thread. Mozilla Mail +& Newsgroups marks all messages in the thread as read, and new +replies posted to the thread will appear as read.
          3. + +
        3. To view ignored threads, open the View menu, choose Messages, +and then choose Ignored Threads.
          4. +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Removing a Newsgroup

        + +

        To remove a newsgroup from your list:

        + +
          +
        • Select the newsgroup icon and press Delete.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Adding a Newsgroup Server

        + +

        If the newsgroup you want to subscribe to is on a different +server, you must first set up access to that server.

        + +

        To set up an additional newsgroup server, open the File menu in +the Mail window and choose New, then Account.

        + +
          +
        • Using the Account Wizard, indicate that the new account you +want to set up is a newsgroup account.
          • +
        + +

        Once you've set up access to the new server, you can subscribe to newsgroups on that server. +In the Mail window, open the File menu, and choose Subscribe.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + +
        + +

        Working Offline

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups to Work Offline

        + +

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline +Use

        + +

        Downloading an Individual Folder for +Offline Use

        + +

        Downloading Selected or Flagged +Messages for Offline Use

        + +

        Downloading Directory Entries for +Offline Use

        + +

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working +Offline

        + +

        Selecting Items for Offline +Viewing

        + +

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your +Messages

        + +

        Working Offline and Reconnecting +Later

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Setting Up Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' offline feature lets you +download your mail and read it offline (while disconnected from the +Internet). If you use a dial-up (modem) connection to access your +mail and you want to reduce the time you are connected, or, if you +need to temporarily disconnect from your company's network while +traveling or switching locations, you can download your mail so +that you can read it offline. The offline feature can automatically +download incoming messages and then later send all your outgoing +messages when you reconnect.

        + +

        If you occasionally want to work offline, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups lets you easily:

        + +
          +
        • Download your Inbox for offline use.
          • + +
        • Download an individual folder for offline use.
          • + +
        • Download only selected or flagged messages for offline +use.
          • + +
        • Download directory entries in your address book for offline +use.
          • +
        + +

        If you frequently work offline, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +also lets you:

        + +
          +
        • Set up one or more of your accounts for offline use.
          • + +
        • Set offline and disk space preferences for each account.
          • + +
        • Select the folders and newsgroups that you want to view +offline.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Downloading Your Inbox for Offline Use

        + +

        You can tell Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups to automatically download your Inbox messages for +offline use. Later, when you go back online, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups automatically synchronizes your Inbox messages with the +server.

        + +

        To automatically download your Inbox for offline use, begin from +the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. In the left side of the dialog box, under the name of the +account you want to use offline, select Offline & Disk Space. +(This category is not available for POP accounts.)
          3. + +
        3. Check the box labeled "Make the messages in my Inbox available +when I am working offline."
          4. + +
        4. Click OK.
          5. + +
        5. In the folder pane, under the name of the account you want to +use offline, click any folder other than the Inbox. For example, +click the Sent or the Drafts folder. Then click the Inbox folder to +start downloading its messages.
          6. + +
        6. Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline +indicator in +the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left of the +Cookie icon) to go offline.
          7. +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all +messages in your Inbox so you can read and respond to them while +working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your +messages.

        + +

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right +corner of the Mail window (to the left of the Cookie icon) to go +back online.
          +
          +
          • +
        + +

        When you go back online, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +automatically synchronizes your Inbox messages with the server, by +replicating any changes you made while working offline.

        + +

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages +that you send while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder +under Local Folders. To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the +Preferences command on the Edit menu to change the offline preferences for all +your accounts.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Downloading an Individual Folder for Offline Use

        + +

        To download a specific folder for offline use, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. In the left side of the Mail window, select the folder that you +want to download for offline use.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Folder Properties. You see the Properties dialog box.
          3. + +
        3. Click the Offline tab.
          4. + +
        4. Check "Select this folder for offline use".
          5. + +
        5. Click Download Now if you want to immediately begin downloading +the folder's messages. Alternatively, you can continue working, and +when you are ready to go offline, proceed to the next step.
          6. + +
        6. Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right corner of the Mail window +to go offline.
          7. + +
        7. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download.
          8. +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all +messages in the selected folder so you can read and respond to them +while working offline. After disconnecting, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups remains open so you can continue to work with your +messages.

        + +

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for +reading offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup +icon.

        + +

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right +corner of the Mail window (to the left of the Cookie icon) to go +back online.
          +
          +
          • +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes the +offline folders with the server, by replicating any changes you +made while working offline.

        + +

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages +that you sent while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder +under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose Send Unsent +Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at +once. To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send +your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the Preferences +command on the Edit menu to change your offline preferences.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Downloading Selected or Flagged Messages for Offline Use

        + +

        To download selected messages for offline use, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Select the messages you want to download, as follows: +


          +
            +
          • To select a group of adjacent messages, click the first +message, and then Shift-click to select the last message in the +group.
            • + +
          • To select messages anywhere in the message list, hold down the +Ctrl key (Windows and Linux) or the Command key (Macintosh OS) and +click each message.
            • +
          +
          3. + +
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get +Selected Messages from the submenu. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +downloads the selected messages.
          4. + +
        4. Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline +indicator in the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left +of the Cookie icon) to go offline.
          5. +
        + +

        To download flagged messages for offline use, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
          2. + +
        2. Click in the flag column of each message you want to download. +A flag appears where you clicked to indicate that the message has +been marked. If the flag column is not visible, click the Show/Hide +Columns icon and select Flag from the list.
          3. + +
        3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Flagged +Messages. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups downloads the flagged +messages.
          4. + +
        4. Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline icon in +the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left of the +Cookie icon) to go offline.
          5. +
        + +

        After you disconnect, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups remains +open so you can continue to work with your messages.

        + +

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for +reading offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup +icon.

        + +

        To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

        + +
          +
        • Click the Online/Offline indicator in the lower right +corner of the Mail window to go online.
          • +
        + +

        Tip: Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups saves any messages +that you sent while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder +under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose Send Unsent +Messages from the File menu to send all your saved messages at +once. To have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups automatically send +your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the Preferences +command on the Edit menu to change your offline preferences.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + + +

        Downloading Directory Entries for Offline Use

        + +

        You can download (replicate) the entries in a directory server +to your computer so that they are available when you work offline. +Once you've downloaded directory entries, you can use the same +procedure to update your local copy of the entries with the latest +entries on the directory server.

        + +

        To download or update an address book LDAP directory for offline +use:

        + +
          +
        1. Make sure you're online.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Window menu, and choose Address Book.
          3. + +
        3. In the Address Book window, select the directory that you want +to download (replicate).
          4. + +
        4. Click Properties in the Address Book toolbar. The Directory +Server Properties dialog box appears.
          5. + +
        5. Click the Offline tab.
          6. + +
        6. Click Download Now to start copying the entries to your +computer.
          7. + +
        7. If prompted, enter your network user name and password, and +click OK to start the download.
          8. + +
        8. +

          Depending on the number of directory entries, the download +process may take a while, so please be patient.

          +
          9. +
        + +

        After the download finishes, you can work offline and search the +directory or use it for address autocompletion when composing +messages. After you've been using your local copy of the directory +for a while, you may wish to update it to get the latest entries +from the directory server. To update your local copy, use the +procedure described above.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Setting Up Your Accounts for Working Offline

        + +

        To set up one or more accounts for working offline, you use the +Offline and Disk Space preferences in the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box. Once set, you don't need to change +these preferences each time you want to work offline. The offline +and disk space preferences you can set for an account depend on the +type of account (IMAP, POP, or Newsgroup).

        + +

        Here's a summary of the steps you will follow to set up your +accounts for offline use:

        + +
          +
        1. For each account that you want to work with while offline, use +the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box to set the +Offline & Disk Space preferences for that account. You must +select the items (folders and newsgroups) that you want to download +for offline use. See Selecting Items for +Offline Viewing for more information. + +

          Once set, you don't need to change these settings. See the +sections below for information on setting offline and disk space +preferences for IMAP, POP, and Newsgroup +accounts.

          + +

          Tip: To set the Offline & Disk Space preferences for +the current account, open the File menu, choose Offline, and then +choose Offline Settings.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose +Download/Sync Now from the submenu.
          3. + +
        3. Select the type of messages (mail or newsgroup or both) that +you want to download. + +

          Important: You must select at least one category (mail +messages or newsgroup messages) in order for the download to +work.

          +
          4. + +
        4. Select "Work offline once download and/or sync is +complete."
          5. + +
        5. Click OK to download the selected items and then go offline. +See Downloading and Synchronizing Your +Messages for more information.
          6. +
        + +

        For subsequent offline sessions, you can skip step 1.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Selecting Items for Offline Viewing

        + +

        Before you can read mail and newsgroup messages while offline, +you must first select them for downloading. You can set up an +entire account for offline use. You can also choose which folders +and newsgroups that you want to use offline.

        + +

        Note: Keep in mind that selecting more items may increase +download time and disk space used.

        + +

        To select accounts, folders, and newsgroups for offline viewing, +begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for the account +you want to change.
          3. + +
        3. Click Select. You see your IMAP accounts, mail folders, and +subscribed newsgroups. + +

          Note: You see only the newsgroups and folders that you've +already subscribed to. POP +accounts and local mail folders don't appear in the list.

          +
          4. + +
        4. Select the items (folders, newsgroups) that you want to make +available for offline use.
          5. + +
        5. Click OK.
          6. +
        + +

        Once set, you don't need to change these settings each time you +want to go offline. However, if you do want to change them, you can +easily do so before going offline, since the same Select button is +available when using the Download and +Sync command.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Downloading and Synchronizing Your Messages

        + +

        If you have already selected mail folders and newsgroups for +offline use, you are now ready to download and synchronize them. If +you haven't yet selected items to download, you can choose them +before you go offline.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Download/Sync Now dialog box, +follow these steps:

        + +

        To download and synchronize your messages, begin from the Mail +window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose +Download/Sync Now.
          2. + +
        2. Select the categories (mail messages or newsgroup messages) +that you want to download. + +

          Important: You must select at least one category (Mail +messages, Newsgroup messages) in order for the download to work. If +the checkboxes are disabled, it means that you haven't yet selected +items to download. Use the Select button to select items to +download.

          +
          3. + +
        3. To send messages in your Unsent Messages folder before going +offline, check "Send Unsent Messages".
          4. + +
        4. To go offline immediately after Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups +finishes downloading, select "Work offline once download and/or +sync is complete".
          5. + +
        5. To set or change the items to download, click Select. See Selecting Items for Offline Viewing for +more information. You can skip this step if you've already selected +items for download.
          6. + +
        6. Click OK. Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups begins downloading the +selected items.
          7. +
        + +

        If you chose to work offline once the download completes, then +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups immediately switches to offline +mode. Otherwise, when you are ready to go offline, click the +Online/Offline indicator in the lower right corner of the Mail window to go +offline.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Working Offline and Reconnecting Later

        + +

        To work offline and reconnect later, begin from the Mail +window.

        + +

        When you are ready to work offline:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the online/offline indicator in the lower-right corner of the Mail +window. Mail & Newsgroups prompts you to download messages, if +you want, before going offline.
          2. + +
        2. Click Download to download messages before going offline. If +you want to work offline without downloading messages, click Don't +Download.
          3. +
        + +

        Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for +reading offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup +icon.

        + +

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' download +behavior when going offline, open the Edit menu, choose +Preferences, and then click the Offline & Disk Space category. +You can choose to have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to +download messages when going offline, to automatically download +messages, or to not download any messages.

        + +

        To reconnect and synchronize your messages:

        + +
          +
        1. Click the online/offline indicator in the lower-right +corner of any Mozilla window.
          2. + +
        2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose +Download/Sync Now.
          3. +
        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups synchronizes your messages with +the server by replicating any changes you made while working +offline.

        + +

        Tip: To set Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups' behavior when +going online, open the Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then +choose the Offline & Disk Space category. You can choose to +have Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to send unsent +messages, to automatically send unsent messages, or to not send +unsent messages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +
        + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings

        + +

        This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box. Unlike the Preferences dialog box, +which applies settings to all accounts, the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box lets you specify settings on a +per-account basis.

        + +

        If you are not currently viewing the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Begin from the Mail window.
          2. + +
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings.
          3. + +
        3. Select the name of the account whose settings you want to view +or change.
          4. +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Account +Settings

        + +

        Server Settings

        + +

        Copies & +Folders

        + +

        Addressing

        + +

        Offline & Disk Space

        + +

        Return Receipts

        + +

        Security

        + +

        Local Folders

        + +

        Outgoing Server +(SMTP)

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account Settings

        + +

        This section describes how to view or change your Account +Settings, such as your user name, reply-to address, and signature +file. If you are not already viewing the Account Settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the name of the account to display the Account Settings +panel.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Account Name: The name for this account.
          • + +
        • Identity: Stores your name, email address, +reply-to address (only if different from your email address), and +organization (optional).
          • + +
        • Attach this signature: Lets you choose the +signature file (in text or HTML format) you want to attach to your +outgoing messages. Click Choose to locate the signature file +(optional).
          • + +
        • Compose messages in HTML format: Lets you +create formatted text for mail and newsgroup messages using the +built-in HTML editor. Leave this item unchecked to use the +plain-text editor. HTML messages can include formatted text, links, +images, and tables, just like a web page. However, some recipients +may not be able to receive HTML messages.
          • + +
        • +

          Tip: If you select this option, but you later want to +compose a message or reply to a message using the plain-text +editor, hold down the Shift key and click Compose or Reply in the +Mail toolbar to temporarily choose the plain-text editor. +Shift-clicking the Compose button or the Reply button switches to +the other editor.

          +
          • + +
        • Advanced: Lets you choose a different outgoing +server (SMTP) for outgoing messages from this account.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings

        + +

        Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups can work with two types of mail +servers: IMAP and POP. If you are not sure which server type your +Internet service provider supports, ask your service provider. If +your Internet service provider supports both, the following +descriptions may help you choose which one to use.

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        About Internet Message Access Protocol +(IMAP)

        + +

        About Internet Post Office Protocol +(POP)

        + +

        IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        POP Server Settings

        + +

        News Server +Settings

        +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        About Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)

        + +

        Advantages: Your messages and any changes to them stay on +your server, saving local disk space. Also, you always have access +to an updated mailbox, and you can get your mail from multiple +locations. Performance on a modem is faster, since you initially +download message headers only.

        + +

        Disadvantages: Not all ISPs support IMAP.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        About Post Office Protocol (POP)

        + +

        Advantages: Your messages are downloaded to your local +computer all at once, but you can also specify whether to keep +copies of the messages on the server and delete messages on the +server when they are deleted locally. Most ISPs currently support +POP.

        + +

        Disadvantages: If you use more than one computer, +messages might reside on one or the other, but not both. POP +doesn't work as well as IMAP over a slow link connection. Also, you +can't access all mail folders from multiple locations.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the IMAP server settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. (If you +chose an IMAP server when you set up this account, you see your IMAP server +settings.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server Type: The server type (IMAP Mail +Server) that you specified when you created this account. To change +the server type associated with this account, you must delete the +account and then re-create it.
          • + +
        • Server Name: The server name that you +specified when you created this account. If you are having problems +getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider +or system administrator that the server name you entered is +correct.
          • + +
        • User Name: The user name that you specified +when you created this account.
          • + +
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by +your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting +unchanged.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this +setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive +encrypted messages. If you are unsure, contact your service +provider or system administrator.
          • + +
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this +setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically check +this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & +Newsgroups.
          • + +
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and +then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do +not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time +by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • + +
          • + +
        • When I delete a message: Choose the behavior you want for deleted +messages. "Move it to the Trash folder" is recommended unless you +are instructed to use a different setting by your system +administrator or service provider. Messages marked as deleted are +removed only when you compact folders.
          • + +
        • Clean up (Expunge) Inbox on Exit: Removes +deleted messages from the Inbox when you exit Mail & +Newsgroups. Choose this if you chose to mark messages as +deleted.
          • + +
        • Empty Trash on Exit: Empties the Trash folder +whenever you quit Mail & Newsgroups.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Advanced IMAP Server Settings

        + +

        In most cases, advanced IMAP server settings are automatically +supplied by the server. If you are unsure about the settings for +this dialog box, contact your ISP or system administrator.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the advanced IMAP server +settings, begin from the Mail window.

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings +category.
          3. + +
        3. If the mail server type is an IMAP server, you can click +Advanced to set additional IMAP options, such as: +


          +
            +
          • the IMAP server directory path
            • + +
          • showing only "subscribed folders"
            • + +
          • support for subfolders
            • + +
          • any personal and public (shared folder) namespaces for this +directory
            • + +
          +
          4. +
        + +

        For more information, see Adding and +Removing LDAP Directories.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        POP Server Settings

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the POP server settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category +name. (If you chose a POP server when you set up this account, you +see your POP server settings.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server Type: The server type (POP Mail Server) +that you specified when you created this account. To change the +server type associated with this account, you must delete the +account and then re-create it.
          • + +
        • Server Name: The server name that you +specified when you created this account. If you are having problems +getting mail from this account, verify with your service provider +or system administrator that the server name you entered is +correct.
          • + +
        • User Name: The user name that you specified +when you created this account.
          • + +
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by +your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting +unchanged.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this +setting if your mail server is configured to send and receive +encrypted messages. If you are unsure, contact your service +provider or system administrator.
          • + +
        • Check for new mail at startup: Choose this +setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to automatically check +this account for new messages whenever you start Mail & +Newsgroups. For POP accounts, Mail & Newsgroups doesn't +download the new messages until you click Get Msgs on the Mail +toolbar.
          • + +
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and +then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do +not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time +by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          +
          • + +
        • Automatically download any new messages: +Choose this setting if you want Mail & Newsgroups to retrieve +messages immediately each time it checks the server.
          • + +
        • Leave messages on server: Choose this setting +to store a copy of messages on the mail server in addition to +downloading them to your computer.
          • + +
        • Delete messages on server when they are deleted +locally: Choose this setting to remove messages from the +server once you delete them from your computer.
          • + +
        • Empty Trash on Exit: Choose this setting to +empty the Trash folder whenever you quit Mail & +Newsgroups.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        News Server Settings

        + +

        This section describes how to change news server settings. If +you are not already viewing news server settings, begin from the +Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. +(If you chose a newsgroup server when you set up this account, you +see your newsgroup server settings.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server Type: The server type (NNTP) that you +specified when you created this account.
          • + +
        • Server Name: The server name that you +specified when you created this account. If you are having problems +receiving messages from this account, verify with your service +provider or system administrator that the server name you entered +is correct.
          • + +
        • Port: Unless otherwise instructed to do so by +your service provider or system administrator, leave this setting +unchanged.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this +setting if your news server is configured to send and receive +encrypted messages. If you are unsure, contact your service +provider or system administrator.
          • + +
        • Check for new messages every ___ minutes: +Choose this setting to automatically check for new messages, and +then specify the number of minutes between mail checks. If you do +not select this setting, you can check for new messages at any time +by clicking Get Msgs in the Mail window.
          • + +
        • Ask me before downloading more than ___ +messages: Choose this setting to conserve disk space and +download time, by setting a limit for the number of messages you +can retrieve at one time.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +
        +

        Note: The path to the newsrc file is displayed for your +information. The newsrc file stores information about the +newsgroups to which you are subscribed, and the messages you have +read in each newsgroup.

        +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & +Folders

        + +

        This section describes the settings for sending automatic +copies, and for storing copies of outgoing messages, message +drafts, and message templates.

        + +

        By default, Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups stores copies of your +outgoing messages in the Sent folder for the current account. +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups also stores message drafts in the +Drafts folder and message templates in the Templates folder for the +current account.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the settings for Copies & +Folders, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account, and click Copies & Folders. You see the +Copies & Folders panel.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Place a copy in: Select where to store copies +of your outgoing mail and newsgroup messages. If you don't want to +use the default Sent folder for the current account, click Other +and then choose an account and then choose the folder for storing +copies.
          • + +
        • Bcc: Select whether you want to always send a +blind carbon copy (bcc) to yourself.
          • + +
        • Bcc another address: Select whether you want +to always send a blind carbon copy (bcc) to another addressee, and +enter the address.
          • + +
        • Keep message drafts in: Select where to store +message drafts. If you don't want to use the default Drafts folder +for the current account, click Other and then choose another +account and folder for storing drafts.
          • + +
        • Keep message templates in: Select where to +store message templates. If you don't want to use the default +Templates folder for the current account, click Other and then +choose another account and folder for storing templates.
          • + +
        • Show confirmation dialog when messages are +saved: Choose this option if you want Mail & +Newsgroups to display a confirmation dialog box when you save a +draft message or a template. If checked, a dialog box will appear +when you save a draft or template to remind you where Mozilla Mail +& Newsgroups is saving the draft or template.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Addressing

        + +

        You use Addressing settings to override the global LDAP server +settings specified for all address books in the +Preferences dialog box. LDAP server settings affect the behavior of +address autocompletion, and you can +change these settings for each account if necessary.

        + +

        Address autocompletion uses your address books to find matching +entries when you type email addresses in the addressing area of the +Compose window.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the account and click the Addressing category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Use my global LDAP server preferences for this account: +This is the default. Select this if you don't want to override the +global LDAP server preferences for this account.
          • + +
        • Use a different LDAP server: Select this option and then +choose another LDAP server from the list if you want to use a +different LDAP directory server for address autocompletion with +this account. If necessary, click Edit Directories to edit +individual directory server settings, add a directory server, or +delete a directory server. For more information, see Adding and Removing LDAP Directories.
          • +
        + +

        The directory you select will also be searched for matching +certificates when you attempt to send an encrypted message to one +or more recipients for whom you don't have certificates on +file.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Offline & Disk +Space

        + +

        Offline & Disk Space settings let you conserve disk space or +set up an account so that you can use it while offline +(disconnected from the Internet). The settings available depend on +the mail server type (IMAP, POP, or News) associated with the +account.

        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings +(IMAP)

        + +

        Disk Space Settings (POP)

        + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings +(News)

        +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (IMAP)

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space +preferences for an IMAP account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for an IMAP +account.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Make the messages in my Inbox available when I am working +offline: Select this option so that messages in your Inbox will +be available when you are working offline.
          • + +
        • When I create new folders, select them for offline: +Select this option so that new folders you create are automatically +selected for offline use. If left unchecked, new folders won't be +automatically selected for offline use. You can manually select +folders for offline by choosing the Download/Sync Now command +(available from the File menu, under Offline). Click the Select +button in the Download/Sync Messages dialog box to select the +folders.
          • + +
        • Select: Click to select the items (folders or +newsgroups) that you want to make available for offline use. See Selecting Items for Offline Viewing for +more information.
          • + +
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than +_KB: Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing +large messages from being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for +downloaded messages.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Disk Space Settings (POP)

        + +

        Messages from POP accounts are always downloaded to your local +machine. This section describes how you can save disk space for a +POP account. If you are not already viewing the Disk Space +preferences for a POP account, follow these steps:

        + +

        Begin from the Mail window.

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Disk Space category for a POP account.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than +_KB: Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing +large messages from being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for +downloaded messages.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + +

        Offline and Disk Space Settings (News)

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space +settings for a News account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Choose the Offline & Disk Space category for a News +account.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Select: Click to select the items (accounts, +folders, newsgroups) that you want to make available for offline +use. See Selecting Items for Offline +Viewing for more information.
          • + +
        • Do not download messages locally that are larger than: +Select this option to conserve disk space by preventing large +messages from being downloaded. Enter the maximum size for +downloaded messages.
          • + +
        • Download only unread message bodies: Select this option +to download only the messages you haven't read.
          • + +
        • Download message bodies for messages since _ days ago: +Select this option to download only messages that were posted +within the time period you enter.
          • + +
        • When it is time to clean up messages: Click +one of the three choices to specify when newsgroup messages should +be deleted. Unless you choose "Keep all messages," enter the number +of days to keep messages or the number of newest messages to +keep.
          • + +
        • Keep only unread messages: Select this option to delete +messages immediately after you read them.
          • + +
        • Remove message bodies only older than __ days: Select this option to delete +messages after the number of days you specify.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Return Receipts

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Return Receipts account +settings. If you are not currently viewing the Return Receipts +settings, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Return Receipts category for your mail account.
          3. +
        + +

        You use the Return Receipts settings to define return receipt +settings for outgoing messages from this mail account. You also use +the Return Receipt settings to specify how to manage requests you +receive for return receipts. These settings override global return +receipt preferences you specified using Mail & Newsgroups Preferences +- Return Receipts.

        + +
          +
        • Use my global return receipt preferences for this +account: By default, this account uses the return receipt +preferences specified by Mail & Newsgroups Preferences +- Return Receipts.
          • + +
        • Customize return receipts for this account: +Lets you change the return receipt preferences for this +account.
          • + +
        • +
            +
          • When sending messages, always request a return +receipt: Enables automatic return receipt requests for all +outgoing messages from this mail account.
            • + +
          • Leave it in my Inbox: Return receipt +confirmation messages are delivered to the Inbox for this +account.
            • + +
          • +

            Tip: Choose this option if you want to use a +filter that automatically moves return receipt confirmation +messages to a folder you specify. For information on creating and +using filters, see Creating Message +Filters.

            +
            • + +
          • Move it to my Sent Mail folder: Incoming +return receipt confirmation messages are moved to the Sent mail +folder for this account.
            • + +
          • Never send a return receipt: Choose this +option if you do not want to send a return receipt in response to +requests for return receipts from others.
            • + +
          • Allow return receipts for some messages: +Choose how you want to respond to requests you receive for return +receipts.
            • +
          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security

        + +

        This section describes how to configure the Mail & Newsgroup +Account Settings that control mail message security. Before you do +so, however, you must obtain one or more mail certificates. For +details, see Signing & Encrypting +Messages.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Security settings for your +mail account, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings.
          2. + +
        2. Click Security under the name of the mail account whose +security settings you want to configure.
          3. +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        +

        In this section:

        + +

        About Certificates

        + +

        Digital Signing

        + +

        Encryption

        +
        + +

         

        + +

        About Certificates

        + +

        The main purpose of the Security panel in Mail & Newsgroup +Account Settings is to select two certificates:

        + +
          +
        • The email certificate you want to use for signing mail messages +you send to other people.
          • + +
        • The email certificate you want other people to use when they +encrypt messages they send to you.
          • +
        + +

        Depending on the policies of the certificate authority +(CA) that issues your certificate(s), you can use one +certificate for both purposes or two different certificates. Even +if you use just one, you must specify it twice, once for digital +signing and once for encryption.

        + +

        The certificates you select here are included with every signed +message you send. These certificates allow your recipients to +verify your digital signature and to encrypt messages that they +send to you.

        + +

         

        + +

        Digital Signing

        + +

        You use the Digital Signing area in the Security panel to specify how you want to +sign your email messages:

        + +
          +
        • Digitally sign messages: Select this checkbox if you +want to digitally sign all the messages you send. (A personal +certificate must be specified below before you can select this +checkbox.)
          • + +
        • Use this certificate to digitally sign messages you +send: If this field is empty or if it displays the wrong +certificate, click Select to choose from the certificates you have +on file.
          • +
        + +

        Regardless of whether the "Digitally sign messages" checkbox is +selected here, you can change your mind before you send an +individual message.

        + +

        To change the digital signature setting for a message you are +writing in the Compose window, click the arrow below the Security +icon near the top of the window and select or deselect "Digital +Sign This Message". For details, see Signing & Encrypting a New +Message.

        + +

         

        + +

        Encryption

        + +

        You use the Encryption area in the Security panel to specify how you +routinely want to use encryption when sending your messages:

        + +
          +
        • Never: Select this option if you never want to use +encryption, or only occasionally.
          • + +
        • Required: Select this option if you always want to use +encryption. If you don't have all the necessary certificates, the +message won't be sent unless you explicitly turn off encryption for +that message only.
          • + +
        • Use this certificate to encrypt & decrypt messages sent +to you: If this field is empty or if it displays the wrong +certificate, click Select to choose from the certificates you have +on file.
          • +
        + +

        Regardless of which encryption option you select, you can change +your mind before you send an individual message.

        + +

        To change the encryption setting for a message you are writing +in the Compose window, click the arrow below the Security icon near +the top of the window and choose the encryption setting you want. +For details, see Signing & +Encrypting a New Message.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local Folders

        + +

        Local Folders is the account where Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups saves any messages that you send while working offline. +Messages you send while working offline are saved in the Unsent +Messages folder under Local Folders. Any folders you create under +the Local Folders account reside on your hard disk, so Local +Folders is a good place to save messages that you want to keep.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Local Folders settings, begin +from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the Local Folders category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Account Name: The name associated with the Local Folders +account.
          • + +
        • Local directory: The location on your hard disk where +mail for this account is stored.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server +(SMTP)

        + +

        Even if you have multiple mail or news accounts, you generally +need to specify only one outgoing (SMTP) server to handle the +delivery of your outgoing mail.

        + +

        If you are not already viewing the Outgoing Server (SMTP) +settings, begin from the Mail window:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings. You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog +box.
          2. + +
        2. Select the Outgoing Server (SMTP) category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Server name: Mail & Newsgroups uses the outgoing (SMTP) server +name that you entered using the Account Wizard, or that was specified when +you migrated this account from a previous version. To change the outgoing +(SMTP) server name, type it in Server Name field.
          • + +
        • Port: If necessary, enter the port number for the SMTP +server. If no port number is specified, the default port is +used.
          • + +
        • Use name and password: If your SMTP server requires +authentication to send mail, select this option to be prompted to +enter your user name and authentication password. Then enter your +user name. The first time you send mail, you will be prompted to +enter your authentication password.
          • + +
        • Use secure connection (SSL): If your outgoing SMTP +server is configured to send encrypted mail, you can choose how +often you want to use SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). If you are not +sure which option to choose, check with your ISP or system +administrator.
          • + + +
        • Advanced: Click this option to set up additional +outgoing SMTP servers or to change the default SMTP server. Keep in +mind that using more than one SMTP server can cause errors in +sending mail.
          • +
        + +

         

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + +
        + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroup Preferences

        + +

        The sections listed below describe the Mail & Newsgroups +preferences that apply to all your mail and newsgroup accounts. To +see these preferences:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. + +

          (Mac OS X) Open the Mozilla menu and choose Preferences.

          +
          2. + +
        2. Double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the +list.
          3. +
        + +

         

        + + + + + +
        In this section: + +

        Mail & +Newsgroups

        + +

        Message Display

        + +

        Composition

        + +

        Send Format

        + +

        Addressing

        + +

        Labels

        + +

        Return Receipts

        + +

        Offline & Disk Space +Preferences

        +
        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & Newsgroups

        + +

        This section describes the main Mail & Newsgroups +preferences. If you are not already viewing the Mail & +Newsgroups main preferences, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Click the Mail & Newsgroups category.
          3. +
        + +
          +
          • + +
        • Select the window layout you prefer for Mail: Choose the +type of three-pane layout to use for the Mail window. If you change +this setting, you must exit and restart Mail & Newsgroups to +have your changes take effect.
          • + +
        • Confirm when moving folders to the Trash: Choose to +allow Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you before deleting +folders.
          • + +
        • Confirm when using keyboard shortcut to send messages: +Choose to allow Mail & Newsgroups to prompt you when you use +the keyboard shortcut to send a message. When you're composing a +message, this may help you avoid accidentally sending the message +if you enter the keyboard shortcut by mistake.
          • + +
          • + +
        • Use Mozilla Mail as the default mail application: +Select Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the default mail +application for Windows and from within other applications such as +Microsoft Word.
          • + +
        • +

          Note: Setting Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups as the +default mail application may disable another mail application. To +restore the other mail application as the default, deselect this +option.

          +
          • + +
        • +

          Play a sound: Select this if you want Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups to play the default system sound when new messages +arrive. If no Mozilla applications are running, Quick Launch must +be enabled in order to play a sound when new messages arrive.

          + +

          If any Mozilla application is running, then Quick Launch does +not need to be enabled in order to play a sound when new messages +arrive. For information on using Quick Launch, see Using Quick Launch.

          + +

          Once Mozilla Mail has been started, the new messages sound will +continue to work even after you close the Mail window (as long as +another Mozilla application is running).

          + +
          • + +
        • +

          Show an alert: Select this if you want Mozilla Mail +& Newsgroups to display a sliding alert above your system tray +in the lower right corner of your screen when new messages arrive. +The sliding alert only appears once when new messages arrive, and +won't appear again until you bring the Mail & Newsgroups window +to the front.

          + + + + + + + + + + +
           Sliding new mail alert
          + +

          When the alert appears, clicking the link displayed in the alert +will take you to the first folder that has new mail. If no Mozilla +applications are running, Quick Launch must be enabled in order to +display the new message alert.

          + +

          If any Mozilla application is running, then Quick Launch does +not need to be enabled in order to display the new message alert. +For information on using Quick Launch, see Using Quick Launch.

          + +

          Once Mozilla Mail has been started, the new message alert will +continue to work even after you close the Mail window (as long as +another Mozilla application is running).

          +
          • + +
        • +

          When Mail launches, show the Start Page in the message +area: Select this to enable the Start Page. The Start Page +appears in the message area when you first open Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups. This page is the default page, but you can enter a +different web page or URL of your choice. To disable the Start +Page, deselect this option. Click Restore Default to return to the +original page provided by Mozilla.

          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message Display

        + +

        Message Display preferences allow you to choose how messages are +displayed (for example, font style and color) in all accounts. If +you are not already viewing the Message Display settings, follow +these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message +Display. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & +Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • +

          Plain-Text Messages: Select the font you prefer for +viewing plain-text messages: fixed width or variable width. +Choosing a font style, size, and color for quoted plain-text +messages can help you more easily distinguish quoted text (usually +a message that's been forwarded to you or by you).

          +
          • + +
        • Wrap text to fit window width: Select this so +that incoming messages are word-wrapped to fit the width of your +Mail window.
          • + +
        • Display emoticons as graphics: Select this so +that when you receive messages that contain emoticons (also called +smiley faces) Mail & Newsgroups can convert them to graphics, +for example: +


          + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
          This:Converts to:
          :-)
          :)
          :-(
          :(
          ;-)
          ;-p
          +
          • + +
        • +

          Languages: Click the Character Coding drop-down list to +select the language you want Mail & Newsgroups to use as the +default for incoming mail and newsgroup messages. This is +recommended if it's likely you might receive messages in which the +character set is not indicated, such as when reading messages in +international newsgroups.

          +
          • + +
        • Apply default to all messages: Select this to apply the +default character coding to all messages. + +

          Tip: You can later view or change the character set +coding (language) for a specific folder. In the Mail window, select +a folder from the list of Mail folders. Open the View menu, and +choose Character Coding.

          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition

        + +

        Composition preferences affect how you create messages (for +example, forwarding options and address autocompletion) in all +accounts. If you are not already viewing the Composition settings, +follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Forwarding and Replying to Messages: Use the +Forward Messages drop-down list to choose how you want forwarded +message text to appear: as an attachment or inline (in the +body of your message).
          • + +
        • Automatically quote the original message when +replying: Select this to include the original message text +in your reply. Then use the drop-down list to select where you want +to place your reply in the message area.
          • + +
        • Composing Messages: Choose to have Mail & Newsgroups use "quoted +printable" MIME encoding when sending regular messages that use an +8-bit character set (for example, Latin ISO88359).
          • + +
        • Wrap plain text messages at __ characters: +Enter a number to set the right margin for text in the message +area.
          • + +
        • Character Coding: Select the language you want +Mail & Newsgroups to use as the default for outgoing mail and +newsgroup messages.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format

        + +

        Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to +format your outgoing messages. If you are not already viewing the +Send Format settings, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Ask me what to do: This option requires Mail +& Newsgroups to prompt you to choose a format before you send +the message.
          • + +
        • Convert the message to plain text: This option +may cause your message to lose formatting such as bold text.
          • + +
        • Send the message in HTML anyway: If you select +this option, keep in mind that some mail programs may have trouble +displaying the message.
          • + +
        • Send the message in both plain text and HTML: +This option uses more disk space.
          • + +
        • +

          You can always override these preferences for an individual +message by using the Options menu in the Mail Compose window.

          +
          • + +
        • HTML and Plain Text Domains: Use the Add +button to add the domain names that you typically send mail to, if +you know which domains can display HTML-formatted mail messages, +and which domains can only display plain text.
          • +
        + +

        For example, if you typically send mail to multiple recipients +that have the same domain name (for example, your colleagues all +have email addresses that end in "netscape.net"), and you know that +this domain name is capable of displaying HTML messages, then you +can add the netscape.net domain to the list of HTML Domains so that +Mail & Newsgroups will automatically send messages in HTML +format to these recipients.

        + +

        Similarly, if you typically send mail to recipients at a domain +that you know can only receive Plain Text messages, you can add +that domain name to the list of Plain Text domains, so that Mail +& Newsgroups automatically sends messages to that domain in +plain-text format.

        + +

        Note: If you regularly compose HTML (formatted) +mail messages, keep in mind that sometimes not all recipients use +mail programs that can display HTML formatting properly. Send +Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format +messages that go to recipients who cannot display HTML-formatted +mail. You can convert messages to plain text, format them only as +HTML, or format them as both HTML and plain text. These preferences +apply to all your mail accounts, but only to mail messages and not +to newsgroup messages.

        + +

        Whenever you add a person or address card to your address book, +you can specify whether that addressee can receive HTML-formatted +messages. However, when this information is unknown, you can set +Send Format preferences for how Mail & Newsgroups formats these +messages.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + +

         

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing

        + +

        Addressing preferences allow you to control the settings for +Mozilla Mail & Newsgroups address books (for example, email +address collection and address autocompletion). If you are not +already viewing the Addressing settings, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Preferences. You see the +Preferences dialog box.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. +(If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Email Address Collection: Select how Mail +& Newsgroups will add senders' and recipients' addresses to +your Collected Addresses book (from incoming, outgoing, or +newsgroup messages). + +

          Note: In addition to your Personal Address Book, Mozilla Mail & +Newsgroups provides you with a Collected Addresses Book that can automatically +store email addresses from your incoming or outgoing messages, or both. By +default, email addresses contained in outgoing messages are stored as soon +as you click Send. If you choose "Incoming Mail Messages," Mail & Newsgroups +stores the sender's address in each message as soon as you open it. Any changes +you make to these settings take effect the next time you start Mozilla. + +

          +
          • + +
        • Address Autocompletion: Address autocompletion allows +you to quickly address mail without having to search for names or +type names completely. Select from which location Mail & +Newsgroups will search for matching addresses: "Local Address +Books" (Personal Address Book, Collected Addresses Book, or any +other local address book) or "Directory Server" (an available LDAP +directory server) or both. + +

          Note: If while addressing mail, multiple email address +matches are found, Mail & Newsgroups displays a list of all +possible choices.

          + +

          If you select Directory Server, choose a directory server from +the list. A directory server lets you look up addresses that are +not stored in one of your local address books. The directory you +select will also be searched for matching certificates when you +attempt to send an encrypted message to one or more recipients for +whom you don't have certificates on file.

          + +

          See Adding and Removing LDAP Directories +for information on setting LDAP directory server settings.

          + +

          Note: Directory server settings you enter from the +Preferences dialog box apply to all your mail accounts. You can +override these settings for individual accounts by specifying +different LDAP directory servers or server settings using the +Addressing settings for an account in the Mail & Newsgroups +Account Settings dialog box. To set different addressing options +for a specific account, open the Edit menu and choose Mail & +Newsgroups Account Settings.

          +
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Labels

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Labels preferences panel. +You use the Labels preferences to define the label text and colors +for message labels. If you are not currently viewing the panel, +follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Labels. (If no +options are visible, double-click the Mail & Newsgroups +category to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +
          +
        • Customize Labels: Specifies the label text and +the color for each label. You can edit or replace the default label +text with your own text (up to 32 characters). To change the label +color, click the color chip next to that label and select a new +color.
          • + +
        • Restore Defaults: Restores the default label +text and colors.
          • +
        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Return Receipts

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Return Receipts +preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the Return +Receipts panel, follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Return +Receipts. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & +Newsgroups to expand the list.)
          3. +
        + +

        You use the Return Receipts preferences to define return receipt +settings for outgoing messages from all your mail accounts. You +also use the Return Receipt preferences to specify how to manage +requests you receive for return receipts.

        + +
          +
        • When sending messages, always request a return +receipt: Enables automatic return receipt requests for all +outgoing messages in all your mail accounts.
          • + +
        • Leave it in my Inbox: Return receipt +confirmation messages are delivered to your Inbox.
          • + +
        • +

          Tip: Choose this option if you want to use a +filter that automatically moves return receipt confirmation +messages to a folder you specify. For information on creating and +using filters, see Creating Message +Filters.

          +
          • + +
        • Move it to my Sent Mail folder: Incoming +return receipt confirmation messages are moved to your Sent mail +folder.
          • + +
        • Never send a return receipt: Choose this +option if you do not want to send a return receipt in response to +requests for return receipts from others.
          • + +
        • Allow return receipts for some messages: +Choose how you want to respond to requests you receive for return +receipts.
          • +
        + +

        To override these global preferences for individual accounts, +see Mail & Newsgroups Account +Settings - Return Receipts.

        + +

        [ Return to beginning of +section ]

        + + + + + +

        Offline & Disk Space Preferences

        + +

        This section describes how to use the Offline & Disk Space +preferences panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, +follow these steps:

        + +
          +
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. + +
        2. Click Offline & Disk Space.
          3. +
        + +

        The Offline & Disk Space preferences allow you to set +preferences for working offline, going online, and disk space.

        + +
          +
        • Offline: Select how you want Mail & +Newsgroups to handle messages when going online or offline.
          • + +
        • Disk Space: Select this to conserve disk space +by automatically compacting message folders when it will save the +amount of disk space you enter.
          • +
        + +

        See Working Offline for +information on working offline.

        + +

        [ Return to +beginning of section ]

        + +
        +

        10 October 2002 +

        + +
        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 The Mozilla Organization.

        + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.html index eda7ba435aa..b7792720459 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.html @@ -1,17 +1,42 @@ -Browser Help +Browsing the Web - - + +

        Browsing the Web

        + +

        Welcome to Mozilla! One of the most popular ways people use Mozilla is to +browse the Web. Navigator, the Mozilla component that lets you visit web pages, +offers many ways to visit web pages and search the Web.

        +

        This section introduces you to Navigator, and how you can use it to browse, +search, and save web pages.

        + + + + +
        +

        In this section:

        +

        Navigating Web Pages

        +

        Searching the Web

        +

        Copying, Saving, and Printing Pages

        +

        Using Languages and International Content

        +

        Improving Speed and Efficiency

        +

        Proxies

        +

        Viewing Page Info

        +
        +

         

        + + +
        +

        Navigating Web Pages

         

        - +

        In this section:

        @@ -20,64 +45,56 @@

        Clicking a Link

        Retracing Your Steps

        Stopping and Reloading

        -

        Visiting Bookmarked Pages

        + +

        Visiting Bookmarked Pages

        +

        Using Tabbed Browsing

        Using My Sidebar
        -

         

        Viewing Your Home Page

        -

        When you start Mozilla, you see Navigator, your browser. A -"welcome" page entitled "Getting Involved with Mozilla" -appears automatically in the browser window when you first launch -Mozilla. This page welcomes you to the Mozilla community and tells you -more about Mozilla. It has information on how you can report problems -you find, and how you can participate in improving Mozilla. Suggested -examples of this include contributing documentation, finding bugs, -fixing bugs, and contributing new code. - - -

        Until you specify otherwise, this page is your home page. To choose - your own home page, see Specifying - How Mozilla Starts Up. - -

        When you view web pages in Navigator, some pages are divided into -rectangular areas called frames. Each frame can display other pages. - -

        There are two ways to view more than one webpage -simultaneously. The method most familiar to many people is opening a -new window. To do this, open the File menu and choose New Navigator -Window. At first the new window displays a copy of your home page, but -you can use it to view a different page. The second way to accomplish -this is to use a new feature available in Mozilla called "Tabbed -Browsing." You are now able to open sub-windows or "tabs" within a -single window. To open a new tab, press Control T or open the File -menu and choose New | Navigator Tab. You will now see a second "tab" -next to the original window you had open. Type in an address, such as -www.mozilla.org in the location bar above the tab, to have the website -corresponding with that website open in the open tab. The number of -tabs you can open is only limited by the system resources available to -you. - +

         

        + + +

        Viewing Your Home Page

        +

        When you start Mozilla, you see Navigator, your browser. A "What's + New" page appears automatically in the browser window when you first launch + Mozilla.

        +

        After the first launch, you will normally see your home page when you launch +Mozilla. Unless you choose a home page yourself, your home page is chosen by +your network or Internet service provider, or you see Mozilla's home page.

        +

        To choose your own home page, see Specifying +How Mozilla Starts Up.

        + +

        Tips:

        +
          +
        • To streamline the Mozilla interface, you can use Full Screen mode to display +web pages using almost all of your screen. In Navigator, open the View menu and +choose Full Screen. You can also press F11.
          • +
        • To go to your home page quickly, press Alt+Home (Cmd+Home on Mac OS).
          • +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        + + + +

        Moving to Another Page

        -

        You move to a new page by typing its URL—its location (address) on the Web. - URLs normally begin with the abbreviation "http://," followed by one or more - names that identify the address. For instance, "http://netscape.com"

        +

        You move to a new page by typing its URL—its location (address) on the +Web. URLs normally begin with "http://," followed by one or more names that identify +the address. For instance, "http:/mozilla.org".

          -
        1. Click the Location Bar to select the URL that is already there. -
        2. Type the URL of the page you want to visit. The URL you type replaces any - text already in the Location Bar. - +text already in the Location Bar.
        3. Press Enter.
        +

        Using the lock icon near the lower-right corner of the window, you can check +a web page's security status at any time. For details, see Checking +Security for a Web Page.

        Tip: To quickly select the URL in the Location Bar, press Ctrl+L.

         

        - +
        @@ -97,6 +114,8 @@ you. or you can type a general word, such as "gifts" or "flowers." Navigator guesses what page you want to view, or displays a page with a choice of links related to the word you typed.

        +

        If you are new to the Internet, see the New +to the Net Tutorial.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -112,6 +131,8 @@ you.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        + +

        Retracing Your Steps

        There are several ways to re-visit pages:

        @@ -126,7 +147,7 @@ you.

         

        -
        +
        @@ -149,7 +170,7 @@ you. the list.

         

        -
        +
        @@ -168,20 +189,23 @@ you. Go menu and use the list in the bottom section of the menu.
      6. To choose from pages you've visited during the past several sessions, open - the Tasks menu, choose Tools, then History. You see the history list. The - history list displays a list of folders. Double clicking the folders displays - subfolders or bookmarks to web pages. You can double-click the URL next to - the Bookmark icon to view that page. +the Go menu and choose History. You see the history list. The history list displays +a list of folders. Double clicking the folders displays subfolders or bookmarks +to web pages. You can double-click the URL next to the Bookmark icon to view +that page.

        Tip: The My Sidebar History tab also allows you to choose from pages - you've visited during the past several sessions. For information see adding - My Sidebar tabs in "Customizing Mozilla". (Open the Help menu, choose - Help and Support Center, and click Customizing Mozilla.)

        +you've visited during the past several sessions. For information, see Adding +My Sidebar Tabs.

        +

         

        +

        About History Lists

        -

        The history list contains links to recently visited pages.The Location Bar list contains links to pages you've typed into the Location Bar and then visited.

        -

        To access the history list from Navigator. Open the Task menu, choose Tools, then History. To access the Location Bar list, click the - arrow at the right end of the Location Bar.

        +

        The history list contains links to recently visited pages. The Location Bar +list contains links to pages you've typed into the Location Bar and then visited.

        +

        To access the history list from Navigator, open the Go menu and choose History. +To access the Location Bar list, click the arrow at the right end of the Location +Bar.

        Tip: To quickly open the history list, press Ctrl+H.

        If you don't want the Location Bar or history list to display the pages you've been visiting, you can clear the history list and Location Bar history entirely or selectively.

        @@ -190,8 +214,8 @@ you.
      7. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      8. Under the Navigator category, click History. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
      9. Under the Navigator category, click History. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Navigator to expand the list.)
      10. Click Clear History and Clear Location Bar to remove all previously visited web pages from the lists. @@ -200,20 +224,31 @@ you.

        To selectively delete pages from the history list, do any of the following:

          -
        • To delete all pages from a domain, select a page within that domain (folder) in the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete entire domain [domain name]." For example, use this command if you want to delete all pages that end in "netscape.com."
          • -
        • To delete pages from a subdomain, select a page within that subdomain in the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete all from [subdomain]." For example, use this command if you want to delete all pages from "health.netscape.com" but not "netscape.com."
          • +
        • To delete all pages from a domain, select a page within that domain (folder) +in the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete entire domain +[domain name]." For example, use this command if you want to delete +all pages that end in "mozilla.org."
          • +
        • To delete pages from a subdomain, select a page within that subdomain in +the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete all from [subdomain]." +For example, use this command if you want to delete all pages from "bugzilla.mozilla.org" +but not "mozilla.org."
        • To delete a single page, select a page in the history list and press Delete.

        Tip: To sort the history list, click one of the categories (Title, Location, or Last Visited). Click the title again to reverse the order.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + + + +

        Stopping and Reloading

        -

        If a page is taking too long to appear, or you change your mind and don't want - to view a page, click the Stop button.

        -

        To refresh the current page, or get the most up-to-date version, click Reload.

        -
        11. +

        If a page is taking too long to appear, or you change your mind and don't +want to view it, click the Stop button.

        +

        To refresh the current page, or get the most up-to-date version, click the +Reload button, or press Ctrl+Shift+R (Cmd+Shift+R on Mac OS).

        +
        @@ -235,7 +270,9 @@ you.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + +

        Visiting Bookmarked Pages

        The addresses, or URLs, of web pages can be quite long and difficult to remember. Fortunately, it's not necessary to memorize URLs in order to browse the Web. @@ -254,39 +291,61 @@ you. to other interesting places on the Web. See Creating New Bookmarks for more information.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        - + + + +

        Using Tabbed Browsing

        +

        When you visit more then one web page at a time, you can use Tabbed Browsing +to navigate the Web faster and easier.

        +

        Tabbed Browsing lets you open tabs, each displaying a web page, within a single +Navigator window. You don't have to have several windows open to visit several +different web pages. This frees up space on your desktop. You can open, close, +and reload web pages conveniently in one place without having to switch to another +window.

        +

        You can manage your navigation tabs easily and control when tabs are opened +automatically. For more information about setting Tabbed Browsing preferences, +see Navigator Preferences - Tabbed +Browsing.

        +

        To learn more about using Tabbed Browsing, see Tabbed +Browsing.

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        + +

        Using My Sidebar

        In addition to navigating the Web with Navigator, you can let the Web come to you by using My Sidebar.

        My Sidebar is a customizable frame in your browser where you can keep items - that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address - book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other options you can - choose. My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that it continually updates.

        +that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address +book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other available options. +My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that it continually updates.

        Mozilla comes with some My Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can customize My Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs. For details, see My Sidebar.

        To view an item in My Sidebar, click its tab.

        - - +
        - - + +
        Closed My Sidebar - y Sidebar Handle + +

        My Sidebar Handle

        +        		 - -

        If you don't see My Sidebar, it may be closed. Open it by clicking its - handle. If the handle is missing, select View and then My Sidebar.

        +

        If it is not already open, open My Sidebar by clicking its handle. If the +handle is missing, open the View menu in Navigator, choose Show/Hide, and then +My Sidebar from the submenu.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - -
        + +

        Searching the Web

         

        - +
        @@ -295,10 +354,8 @@ you.

        In this section:

        Fast Searches

        Advanced Search Mode

        -

        Bookmarking Search Results

        Setting Search Preferences

        Using Internet Keywords

        -

        Finding Related Pages

        Searching Within a Page

        Searching the Bookmarks or History List

        @@ -308,37 +365,38 @@ you.

        Fast Searches

        There are three ways to search quickly: from the Location Bar, from My Sidebar, - and from the Net Search page. -

        Searching From the Location Bar

        + and from the Net Search page. +

         

        + + +

        Searching from the Location Bar

        Searching for web pages on a particular topic is as easy as typing a question, or just a word or two, into the browser's Location Bar, as pictured below.

        Location Bar with Search Term

        For example, if you want to find information about baby dolls:

          -
        1. Double-click in the Location Bar to select the current text. -
        2. Type the word "baby doll". Your typing replaces the current text. +
        3. Perform one of these steps:
        -

        Perform one of these steps:

          -
        • Click the Search button.
          • -
        • Click "Search Netscape Search for "baby doll" at the bottom - of the drop-down list in the Location Bar. (You default search engine may - be different.)
          - The default search engine you choose in Preferences - is used. Search results for "baby doll" appear in both the browser window - and in My Sidebar. Click the links to visit web pages about baby dolls.
          • +
        • Click "Search Mozilla Search for "baby doll" at the bottom +of the drop-down list in the Location Bar. (You default search engine may be +different.)
          +The default search engine you choose in Preferences is used. +Search results for "baby doll" appear in both the browser window and in My Sidebar. +Click the links to visit web pages about baby dolls.

        After you perform a search, the results are saved in My Sidebar's Search tab - until you do a new search. You don't have to click the Back button to retrieve - the search results.

        -

        To save the results of a search, click "Bookmark this Search" in My Sidebar. To return to the - list later, open the Bookmarks menu. You'll find the search results in a folder - at the bottom of the Bookmarks menu. -

        Note: You can also use Internet Keywords to search from the Location Bar. -

        Searching From My Sidebar

        +until you do a new search. You don't have to click the Back button to retrieve +the search results.

        +

        Note: You can also use Internet Keywords to search from the Location Bar.

        + +

         

        + + +

        Searching from My Sidebar

        The My Sidebar Search tab lets you quickly search and bookmark your search results. For example, if you want to find information about toy cars:

          @@ -354,23 +412,40 @@ you.
        1. Click Search. Search results for 'toy car' appear in both the browser window and in My Sidebar. Click the links to visit web pages about toy cars.
        -

        Note: If the My Sidebar Search tab contains a list of search engines from which to - choose, then it is set to search in Advanced mode and you will have to choose one or more search engines before clicking Search. You can keep it that way - or change to a basic setting in Preferences. -

        To save the results of a search from My Sidebar, click the Bookmark this Search - button. To return to the list later, open the Bookmarks menu. Your search results - appear in one of the folders in your list of bookmarks. -

        Searching From the Net Search page

        +

        Note: If the My Sidebar Search tab contains a list of search engines +from which to choose, then it is set to search in Advanced mode and you will +have to choose one or more search engines before clicking Search. You can keep +it that way or change to a basic setting in Preferences. +

        Tip: To display the next or previous page of search results quickly, +click the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the My Sidebar Search tab. +

         

        + +

        Searching from the Net Search page

        The Net Search page lets you type in a Search term or phrase, or explore several - categories (such as Arts & Entertainment, Business, and many more) that may - interest you. To visit the Net Search page, perform one of these steps:

        +categories (such as Arts & Entertainment, Business, and many more) that may +interest you. To visit the Net Search page, perform one of these steps:

          - -
        • Click on the Search button - on the Personal Toolbar. - -
        • Open the Search menu and choose Search the Web. -
        +
      11. Click on the Search button search button +on the Personal Toolbar. +
      12. Open the Tools menu and choose Search the Web. +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching on Selected Words +in a Web Page

        +

        Mozilla allows you to search for words you select within a web page:

        +
          +
        1. Select (highlight) any words in a web page.
          2. +
        2. Right-click and choose "Web Search for [your selected words]" for +the menu. (To right-click on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse button.) +
          3. +
        +

        Mozilla opens a new window and uses your default search engine to search +for your selected words. To learn how to change the search engine used to search +for your selected words, see Navigator +Preferences - Internet Search.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -381,26 +456,22 @@ you.
      13. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      14. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
      15. Under My Sidebar Search Preferences, click Advanced, and then OK. - +
      16. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.) +
      17. Under Sidebar Search Tab Preferences, click Advanced, and then OK.
      18. If it is not already open, open My Sidebar by clicking its handle.
      19. Click the Search tab in My Sidebar. -
      20. Open the "within" drop-down list, and choose a category (such as music or - shopping).
        21. -
      21. Choose one or more search engines for the selected category. - +
      22. Open the "within" drop-down list, and choose a category.
        23. +
      23. Choose one or more search engines for the selected category (if available).
      24. In the search field, type the word for which you want to search.
      25. Click Search.
        26. -

          My Side Bar Search on Madonna +

          My Side Bar Search

        -

        To save the results of a search, click the "Bookmark this Search" - button. To return to the list later, Open the Bookmarks menu. Your search results - appear in one of the folders in your list of bookmarks. +

         

        +

        Customizing Search Categories

        You can specify which search engines should be used for different categories of searches. For example, you can select one set of search engines to search @@ -419,9 +490,8 @@ you.

      26. From the Categories drop-down list, choose the category you want to customize.
        Or
        - To create a new category, click New and type a name for the category. The - drop-down list displays the name of the selected category. - +To create a new category, click New and type a name for the category in the dialog +box. The drop-down list now displays the name of the selected category.
      27. Do one of the following:
          28. @@ -436,47 +506,27 @@ you.
        • Click OK when you are finished customizing.

          • [ Return to beginning of section ]

          -

           

          - -

          Bookmarking Search Results

          -

          To save your search results as bookmarks, begin from the Navigator window: -

            - -
          1. Perform a search from the Location Bar or from - the My Sidebar Search tab. - -
          2. After the search results are displayed in My Sidebar, click "Bookmark - this Search" in the My Sidebar Search tab. - -
          3. Open the Bookmarks menu. Your search results appear in one of the folders - in your list of bookmarks. For instance, if you searched for "toy car," your - bookmark list contains a folder labeled "Search: 'toy car'" containing bookmarks - for web pages about toy cars. -
          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +

           

          Setting Search Preferences

          -

          By default, when you click Search, the Netscape - Search search engine is used. You can choose a different search engine as - the default. You can also specify how you want search results displayed in My - Sidebar.

          +

          You can choose a different search engine as the default. You can also specify +how you want search results displayed in My Sidebar.

          1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
          2. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
          3. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click the Navigator to expand the list.)
          4. Under Default Search Engine, choose a search engine you want to use for web searching. -
          5. Under Search Results, select "Open the Search tab in My Sidebar when - search results are available" if you want the My Sidebar search tab to - open and show your search results. - -
          6. Under My Sidebar Search Tab Preference, select Basic if you want to search - using a single search engine, or select Advanced to be able to search using - multiple search engines. +
          7. Under Search Results, select "Open the Search tab in the Sidebar when +search results are available" if you want the My Sidebar search tab to open +and show your search results. +
          8. Under Sidebar Search Tab Preference, select Basic if you want to search using +a single search engine, or select Advanced to be able to search using multiple +search engines.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          @@ -515,6 +565,7 @@ you.

          If typing Internet Keywords into the Location Bar is not working for you, check your Smart Browsing preferences to be sure the Internet Keywords feature is enabled.

          +

           

          Quick Stock Quotes

          To see a recent stock quote for a company, type "quote" followed by the company's stock ticker symbol, and press Enter.

          @@ -523,65 +574,17 @@ you. the one for which you want a quote.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - -

          Finding Related Pages

          -

          Whenever you visit a web page, your browser generates a list of related pages - for you to consider. The What's Related list is displayed in My Sidebar.

          -
        - - - - - - -
        Closed My Sidebar - - -

        If it is not already open, open My Sidebar by clicking its handle. If - the handle is missing, select View and then My Sidebar.

        -
        -

        Note: The What's Related list may be closed, so that only its tab is showing. - To open it, click its tab. If the What's Related tab is not visible, you - must add it to My Sidebar.

        -

        To visit one of the web pages in the What's Related list, double-click its - link.

        -

         

        - -

        Smart Browsing Preferences

        -

        If you prefer not to use What's Related or Internet Keywords, you can turn - these features off.

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under the Navigator category, click Smart Browsing. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
        3. Under "What's Related Sidebar Tab," list any domains for which you do - not want What's Related information, and then click Add. Domain names are - the part of a URL that contains the name of an organization, business, or - school—such as netscape.com or un.org. - -
        4. Under Internet Keywords, deselect "Enable Internet Keywords." -
        -

        What's Related works by gathering information on the browsing habits of a huge - number of Internet users. If you do not wish What's Related information to be - gathered in conjunction with your browsing, you can disable What's Related by - turning off or removing the What's Related tab from My Sidebar. See Removing - My Sidebar Tabs.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        Searching Within a Page

        To find text within the page you are currently viewing in Navigator:

          -
        1. Open the Search menu and choose "Find in This Page". If the page - you are viewing contains frames, you may need to click within a frame before - you begin your search. You see the "Find in this Page" dialog box. +
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose "Find in This Page". If the page +you are viewing contains frames, you may need to click within a frame before +you begin your search. You see the "Find in this Page" dialog box.
          3. +
        3. Type the text you want to find.
          4. -
        4. Type the text you want to find. - -
        5. Choose from the following search options: +
        6. Choose from the following search options:
            7. @@ -589,21 +592,19 @@ you. that matches the word you typed exactly (including uppercase and lowercase letters). -
          • Wrap around: Choose this to allow the browser to search from - the cursors's insertion point to the bottom of the page and then continue searching from the - top of the page. Note: Normally, the page is searched from the place where - you last clicked your mouse to the bottom of the page. - +
          • Wrap around: Choose this to allow the browser to search from the where +the cursor is to the bottom of the page and then continue searching from the +top of the page. Note: Normally, the page is searched from the place where you +last clicked your mouse to the bottom of the page.
          • Search backwards: Choose this to search from the insertion point - backwards to the top of the page. - + backwards to the top of the page.
        7. Click Find to begin the search.

        To find the same word or phrase again:

          -
        • Open the Search menu and choose Find Again. +
        • Open the Edit menu and choose Find Again.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -612,12 +613,10 @@ you.

        To search the bookmarks list, begin from the Navigator window:

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. You see your Manage - Bookmarks window. - -
        2. In the Bookmarks window, open the Edit menu and choose Find Bookmarks. You - see the Find Bookmarks dialog box. - +
        3. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. You see your Bookmarks +window. +
        4. In the Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Search Bookmarks. +You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
        5. Use the drop-down lists to select options to define your search. @@ -626,32 +625,28 @@ you.
        6. Click Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed in the Search Results-Bookmarks window.
        -

        Tip: To quickly open your Bookmarks menu, press Ctrl key and B at the - same time.

        +

        Tip: To quickly open your Bookmarks menu, press Ctrl+B.

        To search the History list:

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu, choose Tools, and then choose History. You see the - History list. - -
        2. In the History list, open the Edit menu and choose Search History. You - see the Find in History dialog box.
          3. +
        3. Open the Go menu and choose History. You see the history list. +
        4. In the History list, open the Tools menu and choose Search History. You see +the Find in History dialog box.
        5. Use the drop-down lists to select options to define your search.
        6. Choose from the following search options:
          -
        • Choose either "title," "location," "name," "description," or "keyword" to choose where you would like to search. (History list allows searching for title and location only.) +
        • Choose "title" or "location" to choose where you would +like to search. (The bookmarks window allows searching "name," "description," +and "keyword".)
        • Choose "contains," "starts with," or "ends with" if you know only part of - the word or phrase for which you're searching. - -
          • +the word or phrase for which you're searching.
        • Choose "is" if you know exactly what you're searching for. -
        • Choose "is not" or "doesn't contain" to exclude pages.
          • -
        • Click in the field and type all or part of name or URL (web address) for - the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude.
          • +
        • Click in the field and type all or part of word or URL (web address) for +the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude.
        1. Click Find. History listings that match your search criteria are displayed @@ -664,19 +659,23 @@ you.

          Tips:

            -
          • To quickly open the History list, press Ctrl+H.
            • -
          • If the list is hard to read, try expanding the Search Bookmarks/History list. -
            • +
          • To open the History list quickly, press Ctrl+H.
            • +
          • If the list is hard to read, try expanding the Search Results window.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - - - +
          + + + + + + +

          Copying, Saving, and Printing Pages

           

          - +
          @@ -701,14 +700,13 @@ you.
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose Copy.

          You can paste the text into other programs.

          -

          To copy a link (URL) or an image from a page:

          +

          To copy a link (URL) or an image link from a page:

          1. Position the pointer over the link or image.
          2. Right-click the link or image to display a pop-up menu. (On Mac OS, press - the Ctrl and click the mouse button.) - +Ctrl and click the mouse button.)
          3. Choose Copy Link Location or Copy Image Location. If an image is also a link, you are offered both options.
          @@ -716,20 +714,33 @@ you.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          + +

          Saving All or Part of a Page

          To save an entire page, begin from the Navigator window:

            - -
          1. Open the File menu and choose Save As. You see the Save File dialog box. - +
          2. Open the File menu and choose Save Page As. You see the Save As dialog box.
          3. Choose a folder in which to save this file. - -
          4. Type a name for the page and click Save. +
          5. Choose a format for the page you want to save:
            6. +
              +
            • Web Page, Complete: Save the whole web page, along with pictures. +This option allows you to view it as originally shown with pictures, but may +not keep the HTML link structure of the original page. Mozilla creates a new +directory (where the page is saved) to save pictures and other files necessary +to show the whole web page.
              • +
            • Web Page, HTML Only: Save the original page without pictures. This +options preserves the original HTML link structure in one file.
              • +
            • Text file: Save the original page as a text file. This option will +not preserve the original HTML link structure, but will allow you to see a text +version of the web page in any text editor.
              +
              • +
            +
          6. Type a file name for the page and click Save.
          -

          When you view a page containing frames and a frame is currently selected, the - Save Frame As option is offered in the drop-down list in addition to "Save - Page As". This lets you save only the page within the selected frame.

          +

          When you view a page containing frames and a frame is currently selected, +the Save Frame As option is offered in the drop-down list in addition to Save +Page As. This lets you save only the page within the selected frame.

          Saving a file onto your hard drive lets you view the page (or its HTML code) when you're not connected to the Internet.

          To save an image from a page:

          @@ -737,14 +748,13 @@ you.
        3. Position the mouse pointer over the image. -
        4. Right-click the image (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse - button) to display a drop-down list. - +
        5. Right-click the image (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse button) +to display a pop-up menu.
        6. Choose Save Image As. You see the Save File dialog box.
        7. Choose a folder in which to save this image. -
        8. Type a name for the image and click Save. +
        9. Type a file name for the image and click Save.

          To save a page without displaying it (which is useful for retrieving a nonformatted page, like a data file, that's not intended for viewing):

          @@ -752,20 +762,23 @@ you.
        10. Position the mouse pointer over the page's link. -
        11. Right-click the hyperlink on the page (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the - mouse button) to display a drop-down list. - -
        12. Choose Save Link As. You see the Save File dialog box. - +
        13. Right-click the hyperlink on the page (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the +mouse button) to display a pop-up menu. +
        14. Choose Save Link Target As. You see the Save File dialog box.
        15. Choose a folder in which to save this file. -
        16. Type a name for the page and click Save. +
        17. Type a file name for the page and click Save.

          Important: Some links automatically download and save files to your - hard drive after you click them. The URLs for these links often begin with "ftp" - or end with a file-type extension such as "au" or "mpeg." These links might - transmit software, sound, or movie files, and can launch helper applications - that support the files.

          +hard drive after you click them. The URLs for these links often begin with "ftp" +or end with a file-type extension such as "au" or "mpeg." These links might transmit +software, sound, or movie files, and can launch helper applications that support +the files.

          + + + +

          Tip: To set an image as your desktop wallpaper on Windows, right-click +on an image and choose Set As Wallpaper from the pop-up menu.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          @@ -773,19 +786,143 @@ you.

          Printing a Page

          To print the current page, begin from the Navigator window:

            -
          • Open the File menu and choose Print.
          -

          The size of the printed page, not the size of the on-screen window, determines - placement of content on the printed page. Text is wrapped and graphics are repositioned - to accommodate paper size.

          +

          To print selected text, begin from the Navigator window:

          +
            +
          • Select the text in the current page.
            • +
          • Open the File menu and choose Print. The print dialog box appears.
            • +
          • Under Print Range, click Selection.
            • +
          +

          The size of the printed page, not the size of the onscreen window, determines +placement of content on the printed page. Text is wrapped and graphics are repositioned +to accommodate paper size.

          +

           

          + + +

          Using Print Preview

          +

          To have an early look at how a page will look before it is printed, you can +use Print Preview. Begin from the Navigator window:

          +
            +
          • +

            From Navigator, open the File menu and choose Print Preview.

            +
          +

          In Print Preview, you can do the following with pages you want to print:

          +
            +
          • View a preview of each page: Click the Next next button, +Previous previous button, +First first button, +or Last last buttonbutton +to move between pages.
            • +
          • Change the scale (size) of pages: In the Scale field, type in a percentage +of the original size and Press Enter (Return on Mac OS). For example, type "50" +and press Enter to make each page half the size of the original page. Click the +Up up button +or Down down button +button to resize up or down by an increment of one, respectively.
            • +
          • Change the direction of the page: Choose Portrait portrait button to position the page normally, with the shorter +side facing up. Choose Landscape landscape button to position the page sideways, with the longer +side facing up.
            • +
          • Go to Page Setup: Click Page Setup to further customize pages you +want to print.
            • +
          • Go to Print: Click Print to print pages.
            • +
          +

          Note: Some Print Preview functions are different or unavailable on +Mac OS and Linux.

          +

           

          + +

          Using Page Setup

          +

          Note: Some Page Setup functions are different or unavailable on Mac OS +and Linux.

          +

          To customize how pages are printed in Mozilla, you can use Page Setup:

          +
            +
          • +

            From Navigator, open the File menu and choose Page Setup.

            +
            • +
          +

          In Page Setup, you can change the following settings for pages you want to +print:

          +
            +
          • Format & Options: Choose the orientation, scale, and other options: +
            • +
              +
            • Orientation: +
                +
              • Portrait: Choose this portrait button to position the page normally, with the shorter +side facing up.
                • +
              • Landscape: Choose this landscape button to position the page sideways, with the longer +side facing up.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • Scale: Type in a percentage of the original size. For example, type +"50" and to make each page half the size of the original page. +
                +
              • Shrink To Fit Page Width: Select this to automatically resize the +page to the width of the paper.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • Options: +
                +
              • Print Background (colors and images): Select this to print background +images and colors. If unselected, only pictures and color in the foreground (in +front) are printed.
                • +
              +
              • +
            +
          • Margins & Header/Footer: Click this tab to set up margins, headers, +and footers:
            • +
              +
            • Margins: +
                +
              • Top, Bottom, Left, Right: Type a margin in inches for the top, bottom, +left, and right margin.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • Headers & Footers: Each drop-down list represents either a header +or a footer area. The top row of drop-down lists are for the left, center, and +right header areas. The bottom row are for the left, center, and right footer +areas. In each drop-dop list, choose one of the following options:
              • +
                +
              • --blank--: Show nothing in this area.
                • +
              • Title: Show the web page title.
                • +
              • URL: Show the web page URL (URL's usually start with "http://").
                • +
              • Date/Time: Show the date and time when the web page is printed.
                • +
              • Page #: Show the page number of each page. For example,
                • +
              • Page # of #: Show the page number along with the total number of +pages. For example, if you print a five page web page, "3 of 5" would +be shown on the third page.
                • +
              • Custom: Type your own text. You can include any of the following +codes to print specific information: +
                  +
                • &PT: Page Number with Total (Example: "3 of 5")
                  +
                  • +
                • &P: Page Number
                  +
                  • +
                • &D: Date
                  +
                  • +
                • &U: URL
                  +
                  • +
                • &T: Page Title
                  • +
                +
                • +
              +
            +
          +

          Tip: To see a preview of changes made to Page Setup, use Print +Preview.

          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ] +

           

          - -
          + +

          Using Languages and International Content

           

          -
          18. +
          @@ -804,23 +941,24 @@ you.

          If you browse, compose, or send and receive email in more than one language, you need to select the appropriate character codings and fonts.

          A character coding method is the way a document or message has been converted - to data to be used by your computer. All web documents and mail and news messages - use a character coding method (also known as a character encoding or character - set).

          +to data to be used by your computer. All web documents and mail and news messages +use a character-coding method (also known as a character encoding or character +set).

          The character coding method for a document depends on its language. Some languages—such as most of the Western languages—share the same coding method. Others, such as Chinese, Japanese, and Russian, use different methods.

          Your version of Mozilla is set to a default character coding appropriate - for your region. However, if you use more than one language you may need to - select appropriate character coding methods and designate the fonts you wish - to use for your coding method.

          +for your region. However, if you use more than one language, you may need to +select appropriate character-coding methods and designate the fonts you wish +to use for your coding method.

          To select character codings, begin from the Navigator window:

          1. Open the View menu, choose Character Coding, and then choose More.
          2. Choose a region from the top section of the submenu.
            3. -
          3. Choose a character coding within the region submenu. Repeat steps 1-3 for each character coding method you want.
            4. +
          4. Choose a character coding within the region submenu. Repeat steps 1-3 for +each character-coding method you want.

          The character coding methods you select are added to the Character Coding menu. If you have more than one coding method selected, the active one has a bullet @@ -831,8 +969,7 @@ you.

        18. Open the View menu, choose Character Coding, and then choose Auto-Detect. -
        19. Choose one of the Auto-Detect options, or choose Auto-Detect Off from the - submenu. +
        20. Choose one of the Auto-Detect options, or choose Off from the submenu.

          To make changes to your list of active character sets:

            @@ -840,7 +977,7 @@ you.
          1. Open the View menu, choose Character Coding, and then choose Customize. You can see the Customize Coding dialog box. -
          2. Choose from the following procedures: +
          3. Choose from the following procedures:
              4. @@ -861,15 +998,14 @@ you.
            • Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
            • Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
            • Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
            • From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a character coding method. For instance, to set default fonts for the Western character set, choose "Western." -
            • Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or sansserif - (like Arial). You can also specify what font size you want for proportional - text. Proportional text varies in width. - +
            • Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or sans +serif (like Arial). You can also specify what font size you want for proportional +text. Proportional text varies in width.
            • (If available) Select a font for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, and Fantasy.
            • Select the monospace font (like Courier) that you want to use for web pages. @@ -885,6 +1021,7 @@ you.

              [ Return to beginning of section ]

               

              +

              Setting Language Preferences

              The language you use for Mozilla affects the text of buttons, dialog boxes, @@ -892,18 +1029,12 @@ you. same.

              To set your preferred language:

                -
              1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
              2. Click on the Appearance category. - -
              3. Use the "Choose your preferred language for Mozilla" drop-down - list to select the language that you want to use in Mozilla. - +
              4. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.) +
              5. Under "Installed languages packs" select a language pack.
              6. Click OK. - -

                Note: You must restart Mozilla after you change your preferred - language.

                +

                Note: You must restart Mozilla after you change your preferred language.

              The content pack you use affects the home page, bookmarks, toolbar contents, My Sidebar, and other items.

              @@ -911,52 +1042,51 @@ you.
              1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
                2. -
              2. Under the Appearance category, click Content Packs. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)
                3. -
              3. Under "Installed Content Packs" select a content pack.
                4. +
              4. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
                5. +
              5. Under "Installed content packs" select a content pack.
              6. Click OK. -

                Note: You will have to need to restart Mozilla after you change - to another content pack. To download more content packs for Mozilla, click "Download - More".

                +

                Note: You will have to need to restart Mozilla after you change to +another content pack.

              +

              Tip: To download more language packs or content packs, click Download +More.

              Web pages are sometimes available in several languages. Mozilla presents - pages in the language you prefer, if it is available. You can specify the languages - you wish to see, in order of preference.

              +pages in the language you prefer, if it is available. You can specify the languages +you wish to see, in order of preference.

              To set language preferences:

                -
              1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
              2. Under the Navigator category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
              3. Click Add. You see the Add Language dialog box. - +
              4. Under the Navigator category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Navigator to expand the list.) +
              5. Click Add. You see the Add Languages dialog box.
              6. Select a language and its code. If you wish to add a code not on the list, - type the language and its code in the Others field (see note, below). If you - want to reorder the languages in the list, select a language and click Move - Up or Move Down. - +type the language and its code in the Others field (see note below). If you want +to reorder the languages in the list, select a language and click Move Up or +Move Down.
              7. Click OK.

              Note: Two-letter codes enclosed in brackets appear next to each language - in the list. These are standard abbreviations for languages. For a complete - list, go to this web page:

              -

              -http://www.ics.uci.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639.txt

              +in the list. These are standard abbreviations for languages. For a complete list, +see the online document, Codes +for the Representation of Names of Languages.

              [ Return to beginning of section ]

               

              Finding International Web Content

              -

              For information about Mozilla in multiple languages, see International +

              For information about Mozilla in multiple languages, see the online document +International Users Page.

              [ Return to beginning of section ]

               

              - +
              +

              Improving Speed and Efficiency

               

              -
          21. +
          @@ -976,127 +1106,225 @@ Users Page.

           

          + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

          Managing Different File Types

          Navigator can handle many types of files. However, for some files, such as - movies, Navigator launches a "helper" application that can handle the file, - or it saves the file for you to view later.

          +movies or music, Navigator needs plug-ins or "helper" applications that can handle +those files. If Mozilla doesn't have the needed helper application or plug-in, +it can still save the file to your hard disk. When saving files, you can keep +track of them using Download Manager.

          +

           

          +

          Plug-ins

          +

          Plug-ins are helper applications that extend the functionality within Navigator +and run within Mozilla. Plug-ins like Sun Java, Macromedia Flash, and RealNetworks +RealPlayer allow Mozilla to show multimedia files and run small applications, +such as movies, animations, and games.

          +

          When you installed Mozilla, you had the option of adding some of these most +popular plug-ins. You don't have to install them separately. However, you can +also install plug-ins after you install Mozilla. To see the plug-ins for Mozilla +that are currently installed, see the online web page, Netscape +Plug-in Manager.

          +

          To see a full list of Mozilla plug-ins you can install, see the Browser +Plug-ins page at Netscape.

          +

           

          +

          Helper Applications

          +

          When files can not be used within Mozilla, you have to option to launch +helper applications that open outside of Mozilla. For example, to play MP3 files, +programs like Winamp can be opened outside of Mozilla.

          The settings in the Helper Applications preferences panel tell Navigator which - helper applications to use on your computer. You probably don't need to change - them because they come preconfigured. Also, if Navigator doesn't know which - helper application to use, it allows you to find helper applications within - the download dialog box.

          +helper applications to use on your computer. Usually, these preferences don't +need to be changed since they are preconfigured. Also, if Navigator doesn't know +which helper application to use, it allows you to find helper applications within +the download dialog box.

          The download dialog box has these options:

            - -
          • Open using: Mozilla opens the file using the default program in - your system settings.
            • +
          • Open using: Mozilla opens the file using the default program in your +system settings.
          • Choose: Mozilla allows you to open the file using an application - you choose.
            • -
          • Save this file to Disk: Mozilla allows you to select a location - to save the file.
            • +you choose. +
          • Save this file to disk: Mozilla allows you to select a location to +save the file.
          • Always ask before opening this type of file: When this is selected, - Mozilla opens the download dialog box when downloading a particular file - type. You can reset these choices afterwards in preferences for Helper Applications.
            • +Mozilla opens the download dialog box when downloading a particular file type. +You can reset these choices afterwards in preferences +for Helper Applications.
          • Advanced: Mozilla allows you to fine-tune how files are handled. - See "To add a new helper application to the list" - for details. -

            -
            • +See "To add a new helper application to the list" +for details.
          +

          Tip: You can clear your saved options for "Always ask before opening +this type of file" in preference. For more information, see Navigator +Preferences - Helper Applications.

          For experienced users to fine-tune the Helper Applications preferences:

            -
          1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
          2. Under the Navigator category, click Helper Applications. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
          3. Under the Navigator category, click Helper Applications. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click the Navigator to expand the list.)
          4. Perform any of the following procedures: -

            To add a new helper application to the list:

              -
            1. Click New Type. You see the New type dialog box.
              2. -
            2. Type a description of the type of files the application works with; - for instance, "movies" or "sound files."
              3. -
            3. Type the file extension (suffix) used by this file type. If this type - of file uses more than one extension, type them all, separated by spaces. -
              4. +
            4. Type a description of the type of files the application works with; for instance, +"movies" or "sound files."
              5. +
            5. Type the file extension (suffix) used by this file type. If this type of +file uses more than one extension, type them all, separated by spaces.
            6. Type the MIME type. MIME types consist of two words separated by a slash. - For instance, a TIFF image file's MIME type is "image/tiff".
              - Note: When you download a file, Mozilla will show you the MIME - type on the download dialog box.
              7. -
            7. Click Choose, then select an application that handles files of this - type.
              8. +For instance, a TIFF image file's MIME type is "image/tiff".
              +Note: When you download a file, Mozilla will show you the MIME type on +the download dialog box. +
            8. Click Choose, then select an application that handles files of this type. +
            9. Click OK.

            To specify how Navigator should handle downloaded files:

              -
            1. Select a file type from the list and click Edit.
              2. -
            2. Choose a "Handled By" option to have downloaded files saved on your - hard disk or opened in an application that you specify. Click Choose to - specify the application.
              3. -
            3. Select "Ask me before opening downloaded files of this type" if you - want to be notified before downloading files that are handled by applications - other than Navigator.
              4. +
            4. Type in the MIME type you want this file to use.
              5. +
            5. Choose a "Handled By" option to have downloaded files saved on your hard +disk or opened in an application that you specify. Click Choose to specify the +application.
            6. Click OK.

            To remove an item from the list:

              -
            1. Select a file type from the list and click Remove.
            2. Click OK.
          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +

          To learn more about Helper Application preferences, see Navigator +Preferences - Helper Applications.

           

          - - + +

          Download Manager

          +

          You can use Download Manager to keep track of files you download. Download +Manager shows the following information:

          +
            +
          • filename
            • +
          • time remaining before download is complete
            • +
          • transfer speed
            • +
          • percent complete
            • +
          • time elapsed
            • +
          • web location (source)
            • +
          +

          To open Download Manager, do the following:

          +
            +
          • Open the Tools menu and choose Download Manager.
            • +
          +

          The following menu options are available in Download Manager:

          +
            +
          • Properties: Select a file being downloaded and click Properties to +show the progress dialog box.
            • +
          • Cancel: Select a file being downloaded and click Cancel to stop the +download.
            • +
          • Remove from List: Select a file and click Remove from List to remove +a canceled or finished download. This will not delete the file from your hard +disk.
            • +
          • Launch File: Click this to open a selected file.
            • +
          • Show in Explorer: Click this to show the location of a selected file.
            +Note: Show in Explorer appears as Show in Browser on Linux, and Show in +Finder on Mac OS.
            • +
          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +

           

          + +

          Making Mozilla Your Default Browser

          -

          [new content to be added]

          +

          Note: This section discusses settings and features present only on +Windows.

          +

          Mozilla is best known for displaying web pages, both on the Internet and +on your computer. To easily open web pages, you can make Mozilla your default +browser.

          +

           

          +

          Common Internet Files and Protocols

          +

          Making Mozilla your default browser allows it to automatically open common +file formats and protocols used on the Internet. Common Internet file formats +and protocols include the following:

          +
            +
          • +

            Image Files:

            +
              +
            • +

              JPEG, GIF, PNG, and MNG

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          • +

            Internet Document and Language Files:

            +
              +
            • +

              HTML, XML, XHTML, +and XUL

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          • +

            Internet Protocols:

            +
              +
            • +

              HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, +Chrome, Gopher
              +

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          +

           

          +

          Changing Default Browser Settings Automatically

          +

          After installation is finished, Mozilla checks to see if it is the default +browser for any of the common Internet file formats or protocols. If it isn't, +you are asked, "Mozilla is not currently set as your default browser. Would +you like to make it your default browser?"

          +

          Click Yes to make Mozilla the default browser. If you click No, you will +be prompted with this question each time Mozilla starts, unless you deselect +the checkbox "Check at startup next time, too."

          +

          If you deselect the checkbox, "Check at startup next time, too," +you can still make Mozilla the default browser by changing your settings in +Preferences. To learn how to set Mozilla as the default browser through Mozilla +preferences, see Navigator +Preferences - Navigator.

          +

          Customizing Default Browser Settings

          +

          You can manually customize how Mozilla handles various file formats and protocols. +For more information, see Advanced +Preferences - System.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          -

          + + +

          Automatic Loading

          -

          [Section needs revision]

          When you bring a web page to your screen, Mozilla automatically loads (starts - up) several features that help interpret web pages. These features can make - web pages more lively, but they take time to load.

          -

          To turn off automatic loading:

          -
            - -
          1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
          2. Click the Advanced category. - -
          3. To load pages faster, deselect one or all: - -
              - -
            • Enable Java: Allows Java applets (small programs that add functionality - to pages) to run automatically. - -
            • Enable JavaScript for Navigator: Allows JavaScript (commands - that add functionality to pages) to run automatically. - -
            • Enable JavaScript for Mail & Newsgroups: Allows JavaScript to run - automatically for Mail & Newsgroups. - -
            -
          -

          To save time typing your password when you use "anonymous" as your user ID - for an FTP site, choose "Send this email address as anonymous FTP password." Choosing - this option transmits your email address automatically when you log on to a - public FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site. FTP sites are used for transferring - files.

          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +up) several features that help interpret web pages. These features, Java and +JavaScript, can make web pages more lively, but they take time to load.

          +

          To learn how to turn off Java, see Advanced +Preferences - Advanced.

          +

          To learn how to turn off JavaScript, see Advanced +Preferences - Scripts & Windows.

          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - + + + +

          Changing Cache Settings

          Your computer stores copies of frequently accessed pages in the memory cache or disk cache. This way, the computer doesn't have to retrieve the page from @@ -1106,8 +1334,8 @@ Users Page.

        21. Open the Edit menu and click Preferences. -
        22. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
        23. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
        24. Enter a number in the Memory Cache field to specify the size of the memory cache. 1024K to 2000K is a good size. To clear the memory cache immediately, click Clear Memory Cache. @@ -1119,8 +1347,8 @@ Users Page.

        25. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        26. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
        27. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
        28. Enter a number in the Disk Cache field to specify the size of the disk cache. 8000K on Windows is sufficient (5000K on Unix). To clear the disk cache immediately, click Clear Disk Cache. @@ -1135,111 +1363,104 @@ Users Page.

        29. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        30. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
        31. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
        32. Choose from the following options:
          -
        • Every time I view the page: Select this if you want Mozilla - to compare a web page to the cache every time you view it.
          • -
        • Automatically: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare a - web page to the cache when the page is determined by the server to have expired.
          • -
        • Once per session: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare - a web page to the cache once for each time you start Mozilla.
          • -
        • Never: Select this if you do not want Mozilla to compare cached - information to the network.
          • +
        • Every time I view the page: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare +a web page to the cache every time you view it.
          +
          • +
        • When the page is out of date: Select this if you want Mozilla to +compare a web page to the cache when the page is determined by the server to +have expired.
          +
          • +
        • Once per session: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare a web +page to the cache once for each time you start Mozilla.
          +
          • +
        • Never: Select this if you do not want Mozilla to compare cached information +to the network.
          +

        If pages that should be in the cache are taking longer to appear than they should, make sure the preference is not set to "Every time I view the page," because the verification requires a network connection that takes time.

        To refresh a page at any time:

          - -
        • Click the Reload button in the browser's navigation toolbar. The computer - checks the network to make sure you have the latest version of the page. -
        -

        To retrieve a fresh copy of a page regardless of what's in the cache:

        -
          - -
        • Hold down the Shift key (Option key on Mac OS) and click Reload. +
        • Click the Reload button in the browser's Navigation Toolbar. The computer +checks the network to make sure you have the latest version of the page.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        +

        Getting the Latest Software Automatically

        Mozilla can notify you when updates for your software are available, and - it can install the updates automatically.

        -

        You can specify how you want Mozilla to handle automatic software installation:

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Select "Enable software installation" if you want Mozilla - 6 to prompt you automatically when you need new software installed.
          4. -
        +it can install the updates automatically. Mozilla can also inform you when a +new version of Mozilla is available.

        +

        To learn about setting up automatic software installation, see Advanced +Preferences - Software Installation.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        Using a Mouse Wheel

        -

        If you use a mouse wheel, you can control how the mouse wheel's button functions.

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
        3. Use the drop-down list to choose a key that you want to press when using - the mouse wheel. - -
        4. Select one of the radio buttons in order to choose to the behavior of the - mouse wheel (for scrolling and text). -
        +

        If your mouse has a mouse wheel, you can control how the mouse wheel functions +in Mozilla.

        +

        To learn more about setting up a mouse wheel, see Advanced +Preferences - Mouse Wheel.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        -

        Using Quick Launch

        -

        Note: Quick Launch is available only on Windows installations - of Mozilla.

        +

        Note: Quick Launch is available only on Windows versions of Mozilla.

        Quick Launch shortens the time it takes for Mozilla to start. When Mozilla - uses Quick Launch, the Mozilla logo icon is present in the taskbar (near - the time). Double-clicking on this icon will quickly start Mozilla (if it isn't - started already).

        -

        Tip: To quickly start components (such as Composer, Mail & Newsgroups, and the Address Book window), right-click the Mozilla logo icon and select the component in the pop-up menu.

        -

        When you installed Mozilla, you were given the option of enabling or disabling Quick Launch. If your computer is low in memory, or if you are have more then one profile, you can temporarily or permanently disable - Quick Launch to conserve memory. If enabled, Quick Launch will start when the user starts Windows.

        -

        -

        To temporarily disable Quick Launch until you start Mozilla again:

        -
          - -
        1. Close all open Mozilla windows, including Navigator, Mail & Newsgroups, and Composer. - If you have unsaved information, you are asked if you want to save it.
          2. -
        2. Right-click on the Mozilla logo icon in the taskbar (near the time) and select "Exit Mozilla" from the pop-up menu.
          3. -
        -

        +uses Quick Launch, the Mozilla logo icon is present in the taskbar (near the +time).

        + + + + + + + +
        +
        Quick Launch Icon
        +
        +
        Mozilla Quick Launch Icon
        +
        +

        Tip: To quickly start components (such as Composer, Mail & Newsgroups, +and the Address Book window), right-click the Mozilla logo icon and select the +component in the pop-up menu.

        +

        When you installed Mozilla, you were given the option of enabling or disabling +Quick Launch. If enabled, Quick Launch loads part of Mozilla into memory when +Windows first starts (and each time Mozilla first starts up). Quick Launch allows +Mozilla to stay in memory after you close all Mozilla windows. This lets Mozilla +quickly start up when you need it, without having to load all of Mozilla. If +your computer is low in memory, you can disable Quick Launch to conserve memory.

        +


        To enable or disable Quick Launch in Mozilla:

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Click the Advanced category. - -
        3. Select "Quick Launch" to enable Quick Launch, or deselect - it to disable Quick Launch. - +
        4. Select "Keep Mozilla in memory to improve startup performance" +to enable Quick Launch, or deselect it to disable Quick Launch.
        5. Click OK. - -

          Tip: To easily disable Quick Launch, right-click on the Mozilla logo in the taskbar (near the time) and select "Disable Quick Launch" in the pop-up menu.

          +

          Tip: To easily disable Quick Launch, right-click on the Mozilla logo +in the system tray (near the time) and select "Disable Quick Launch" +in the pop-up menu.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - +
        + +

        Proxies

         

        - +
        @@ -1271,39 +1492,50 @@ Users Page.

        To set the browser to work with the proxy:

          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
        3. Select one of the following: - +
        4. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          5. +
        5. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click the Navigator to expand the list.)
          6. +
        6. Select one of the following:
            7. - -
          • Direct connection to the Internet: Choose this if you don't have - to go through a proxy. - -
          • Manual proxy configuration: Choose this if you don't have a proxy - configuration file. Type the name or numeric IP address of the proxy server - for HTTP and FTP. Type each proxy server's port number in the Port field.
            • -
          • Automatic proxy configuration URL: Choose this if you have a - proxy configuration file. Type the file's URL in the field and click Reload. - +
          • Direct connection to the Internet: Choose this if you don't want to +use a proxy.
            • +
          • Manual proxy configuration: Choose this if you don't have a proxy +location (URL).
            • +
              +
            • HTTP Proxy, SSL Proxy, FTP Proxy, Gopher Proxy: Type +the name or numeric IP address of the proxy server. Type the port in the Ports +field.
              • +
            • SOCKS Host: Type the name or numeric IP address of the proxy server. +Type the port in the Ports field.
              • +
                +
              • SOCKS v4, SOCKS v5: When entering a SOCK Host, select "SOCKS +v4" or "SOCKS v5," depending on what version of SOCKS is used +for the proxy.
                • +
              +
            +
              +
            • No Proxy for: Type the domains that you do not want to use a proxy +for. Separate each domain with a comma. (Example: .yourcompany.com, .yourcompany.co.nz)
              • +
            +
          • Automatic proxy configuration URL: Choose this if you have a proxy +configuration file or URL, then type the configuration URL.
            +
        -

        (If you select Manual proxy configuration) In the "No Proxy for" field, type - the names of any domains that you can connect to directly, bypassing the proxy. - For example, if you type "netscape.com", then the proxy is bypassed each time - you view a web page from netscape.com.

        +

        Domain names are the part of a URL that contains the name of an organization, - business, or school—such as netscape.com or washington.org. If you use local - host names without the domain name, list them the same way. Use commas to separate - multiple host names. The wildcard character [*] cannot be used.

        +business, or school—such as netscape.com or washington.org. If you use local +host names without the domain name, list them the same way. Use commas to separate +multiple host names. The wildcard character [*] cannot be used.

        +

        For more information on using the Proxy preferences panel, see Advanced +Preferences - Proxies.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        -

        +


        -

        1 March 2002

        +

        19 June 2002

        +
        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

        diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.xhtml index eda7ba435aa..b7792720459 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/nav_help.xhtml @@ -1,17 +1,42 @@ -Browser Help +Browsing the Web - - + +

        Browsing the Web

        + +

        Welcome to Mozilla! One of the most popular ways people use Mozilla is to +browse the Web. Navigator, the Mozilla component that lets you visit web pages, +offers many ways to visit web pages and search the Web.

        +

        This section introduces you to Navigator, and how you can use it to browse, +search, and save web pages.

        +
        + + + +
        +

        In this section:

        +

        Navigating Web Pages

        +

        Searching the Web

        +

        Copying, Saving, and Printing Pages

        +

        Using Languages and International Content

        +

        Improving Speed and Efficiency

        +

        Proxies

        +

        Viewing Page Info

        +
        +

         

        + + +
        +

        Navigating Web Pages

         

        - +

        In this section:

        @@ -20,64 +45,56 @@

        Clicking a Link

        Retracing Your Steps

        Stopping and Reloading

        -

        Visiting Bookmarked Pages

        + +

        Visiting Bookmarked Pages

        +

        Using Tabbed Browsing

        Using My Sidebar
        -

         

        Viewing Your Home Page

        -

        When you start Mozilla, you see Navigator, your browser. A -"welcome" page entitled "Getting Involved with Mozilla" -appears automatically in the browser window when you first launch -Mozilla. This page welcomes you to the Mozilla community and tells you -more about Mozilla. It has information on how you can report problems -you find, and how you can participate in improving Mozilla. Suggested -examples of this include contributing documentation, finding bugs, -fixing bugs, and contributing new code. - - -

        Until you specify otherwise, this page is your home page. To choose - your own home page, see Specifying - How Mozilla Starts Up. - -

        When you view web pages in Navigator, some pages are divided into -rectangular areas called frames. Each frame can display other pages. - -

        There are two ways to view more than one webpage -simultaneously. The method most familiar to many people is opening a -new window. To do this, open the File menu and choose New Navigator -Window. At first the new window displays a copy of your home page, but -you can use it to view a different page. The second way to accomplish -this is to use a new feature available in Mozilla called "Tabbed -Browsing." You are now able to open sub-windows or "tabs" within a -single window. To open a new tab, press Control T or open the File -menu and choose New | Navigator Tab. You will now see a second "tab" -next to the original window you had open. Type in an address, such as -www.mozilla.org in the location bar above the tab, to have the website -corresponding with that website open in the open tab. The number of -tabs you can open is only limited by the system resources available to -you. - +

         

        + + +

        Viewing Your Home Page

        +

        When you start Mozilla, you see Navigator, your browser. A "What's + New" page appears automatically in the browser window when you first launch + Mozilla.

        +

        After the first launch, you will normally see your home page when you launch +Mozilla. Unless you choose a home page yourself, your home page is chosen by +your network or Internet service provider, or you see Mozilla's home page.

        +

        To choose your own home page, see Specifying +How Mozilla Starts Up.

        + +

        Tips:

        +
          +
        • To streamline the Mozilla interface, you can use Full Screen mode to display +web pages using almost all of your screen. In Navigator, open the View menu and +choose Full Screen. You can also press F11.
          • +
        • To go to your home page quickly, press Alt+Home (Cmd+Home on Mac OS).
          • +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        + + + +

        Moving to Another Page

        -

        You move to a new page by typing its URL—its location (address) on the Web. - URLs normally begin with the abbreviation "http://," followed by one or more - names that identify the address. For instance, "http://netscape.com"

        +

        You move to a new page by typing its URL—its location (address) on the +Web. URLs normally begin with "http://," followed by one or more names that identify +the address. For instance, "http:/mozilla.org".

          -
        1. Click the Location Bar to select the URL that is already there. -
        2. Type the URL of the page you want to visit. The URL you type replaces any - text already in the Location Bar. - +text already in the Location Bar.
        3. Press Enter.
        +

        Using the lock icon near the lower-right corner of the window, you can check +a web page's security status at any time. For details, see Checking +Security for a Web Page.

        Tip: To quickly select the URL in the Location Bar, press Ctrl+L.

         

        - +
        @@ -97,6 +114,8 @@ you. or you can type a general word, such as "gifts" or "flowers." Navigator guesses what page you want to view, or displays a page with a choice of links related to the word you typed.

        +

        If you are new to the Internet, see the New +to the Net Tutorial.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -112,6 +131,8 @@ you.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        + +

        Retracing Your Steps

        There are several ways to re-visit pages:

        @@ -126,7 +147,7 @@ you.

         

        -
        +
        @@ -149,7 +170,7 @@ you. the list.

         

        -
        +
        @@ -168,20 +189,23 @@ you. Go menu and use the list in the bottom section of the menu.
      28. To choose from pages you've visited during the past several sessions, open - the Tasks menu, choose Tools, then History. You see the history list. The - history list displays a list of folders. Double clicking the folders displays - subfolders or bookmarks to web pages. You can double-click the URL next to - the Bookmark icon to view that page. +the Go menu and choose History. You see the history list. The history list displays +a list of folders. Double clicking the folders displays subfolders or bookmarks +to web pages. You can double-click the URL next to the Bookmark icon to view +that page.

        Tip: The My Sidebar History tab also allows you to choose from pages - you've visited during the past several sessions. For information see adding - My Sidebar tabs in "Customizing Mozilla". (Open the Help menu, choose - Help and Support Center, and click Customizing Mozilla.)

        +you've visited during the past several sessions. For information, see Adding +My Sidebar Tabs.

        +

         

        +

        About History Lists

        -

        The history list contains links to recently visited pages.The Location Bar list contains links to pages you've typed into the Location Bar and then visited.

        -

        To access the history list from Navigator. Open the Task menu, choose Tools, then History. To access the Location Bar list, click the - arrow at the right end of the Location Bar.

        +

        The history list contains links to recently visited pages. The Location Bar +list contains links to pages you've typed into the Location Bar and then visited.

        +

        To access the history list from Navigator, open the Go menu and choose History. +To access the Location Bar list, click the arrow at the right end of the Location +Bar.

        Tip: To quickly open the history list, press Ctrl+H.

        If you don't want the Location Bar or history list to display the pages you've been visiting, you can clear the history list and Location Bar history entirely or selectively.

        @@ -190,8 +214,8 @@ you.
      29. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      30. Under the Navigator category, click History. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
      31. Under the Navigator category, click History. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Navigator to expand the list.)
      32. Click Clear History and Clear Location Bar to remove all previously visited web pages from the lists. @@ -200,20 +224,31 @@ you.

        To selectively delete pages from the history list, do any of the following:

          -
        • To delete all pages from a domain, select a page within that domain (folder) in the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete entire domain [domain name]." For example, use this command if you want to delete all pages that end in "netscape.com."
          • -
        • To delete pages from a subdomain, select a page within that subdomain in the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete all from [subdomain]." For example, use this command if you want to delete all pages from "health.netscape.com" but not "netscape.com."
          • +
        • To delete all pages from a domain, select a page within that domain (folder) +in the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete entire domain +[domain name]." For example, use this command if you want to delete +all pages that end in "mozilla.org."
          • +
        • To delete pages from a subdomain, select a page within that subdomain in +the History list, open the Edit menu, and select "Delete all from [subdomain]." +For example, use this command if you want to delete all pages from "bugzilla.mozilla.org" +but not "mozilla.org."
        • To delete a single page, select a page in the history list and press Delete.

        Tip: To sort the history list, click one of the categories (Title, Location, or Last Visited). Click the title again to reverse the order.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + + + +

        Stopping and Reloading

        -

        If a page is taking too long to appear, or you change your mind and don't want - to view a page, click the Stop button.

        -

        To refresh the current page, or get the most up-to-date version, click Reload.

        -
        33. +

        If a page is taking too long to appear, or you change your mind and don't +want to view it, click the Stop button.

        +

        To refresh the current page, or get the most up-to-date version, click the +Reload button, or press Ctrl+Shift+R (Cmd+Shift+R on Mac OS).

        +
        @@ -235,7 +270,9 @@ you.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - + + +

        Visiting Bookmarked Pages

        The addresses, or URLs, of web pages can be quite long and difficult to remember. Fortunately, it's not necessary to memorize URLs in order to browse the Web. @@ -254,39 +291,61 @@ you. to other interesting places on the Web. See Creating New Bookmarks for more information.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        - + + + +

        Using Tabbed Browsing

        +

        When you visit more then one web page at a time, you can use Tabbed Browsing +to navigate the Web faster and easier.

        +

        Tabbed Browsing lets you open tabs, each displaying a web page, within a single +Navigator window. You don't have to have several windows open to visit several +different web pages. This frees up space on your desktop. You can open, close, +and reload web pages conveniently in one place without having to switch to another +window.

        +

        You can manage your navigation tabs easily and control when tabs are opened +automatically. For more information about setting Tabbed Browsing preferences, +see Navigator Preferences - Tabbed +Browsing.

        +

        To learn more about using Tabbed Browsing, see Tabbed +Browsing.

        +

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        +

         

        + +

        Using My Sidebar

        In addition to navigating the Web with Navigator, you can let the Web come to you by using My Sidebar.

        My Sidebar is a customizable frame in your browser where you can keep items - that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address - book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other options you can - choose. My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that it continually updates.

        +that you need to use all the time—the latest news and weather, your address +book or Buddy List, stock quotes, a calendar—and many other available options. +My Sidebar presents these items to you in tabs that it continually updates.

        Mozilla comes with some My Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can customize My Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs. For details, see My Sidebar.

        To view an item in My Sidebar, click its tab.

        - - +
        - - + +
        Closed My Sidebar - y Sidebar Handle + +

        My Sidebar Handle

        +        		 - -

        If you don't see My Sidebar, it may be closed. Open it by clicking its - handle. If the handle is missing, select View and then My Sidebar.

        +

        If it is not already open, open My Sidebar by clicking its handle. If the +handle is missing, open the View menu in Navigator, choose Show/Hide, and then +My Sidebar from the submenu.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - -
        + +

        Searching the Web

         

        - +
        @@ -295,10 +354,8 @@ you.

        In this section:

        Fast Searches

        Advanced Search Mode

        -

        Bookmarking Search Results

        Setting Search Preferences

        Using Internet Keywords

        -

        Finding Related Pages

        Searching Within a Page

        Searching the Bookmarks or History List

        @@ -308,37 +365,38 @@ you.

        Fast Searches

        There are three ways to search quickly: from the Location Bar, from My Sidebar, - and from the Net Search page. -

        Searching From the Location Bar

        + and from the Net Search page. +

         

        + + +

        Searching from the Location Bar

        Searching for web pages on a particular topic is as easy as typing a question, or just a word or two, into the browser's Location Bar, as pictured below.

        Location Bar with Search Term

        For example, if you want to find information about baby dolls:

          -
        1. Double-click in the Location Bar to select the current text. -
        2. Type the word "baby doll". Your typing replaces the current text. +
        3. Perform one of these steps:
        -

        Perform one of these steps:

          -
        • Click the Search button.
          • -
        • Click "Search Netscape Search for "baby doll" at the bottom - of the drop-down list in the Location Bar. (You default search engine may - be different.)
          - The default search engine you choose in Preferences - is used. Search results for "baby doll" appear in both the browser window - and in My Sidebar. Click the links to visit web pages about baby dolls.
          • +
        • Click "Search Mozilla Search for "baby doll" at the bottom +of the drop-down list in the Location Bar. (You default search engine may be +different.)
          +The default search engine you choose in Preferences is used. +Search results for "baby doll" appear in both the browser window and in My Sidebar. +Click the links to visit web pages about baby dolls.

        After you perform a search, the results are saved in My Sidebar's Search tab - until you do a new search. You don't have to click the Back button to retrieve - the search results.

        -

        To save the results of a search, click "Bookmark this Search" in My Sidebar. To return to the - list later, open the Bookmarks menu. You'll find the search results in a folder - at the bottom of the Bookmarks menu. -

        Note: You can also use Internet Keywords to search from the Location Bar. -

        Searching From My Sidebar

        +until you do a new search. You don't have to click the Back button to retrieve +the search results.

        +

        Note: You can also use Internet Keywords to search from the Location Bar.

        + +

         

        + + +

        Searching from My Sidebar

        The My Sidebar Search tab lets you quickly search and bookmark your search results. For example, if you want to find information about toy cars:

          @@ -354,23 +412,40 @@ you.
        1. Click Search. Search results for 'toy car' appear in both the browser window and in My Sidebar. Click the links to visit web pages about toy cars.
        -

        Note: If the My Sidebar Search tab contains a list of search engines from which to - choose, then it is set to search in Advanced mode and you will have to choose one or more search engines before clicking Search. You can keep it that way - or change to a basic setting in Preferences. -

        To save the results of a search from My Sidebar, click the Bookmark this Search - button. To return to the list later, open the Bookmarks menu. Your search results - appear in one of the folders in your list of bookmarks. -

        Searching From the Net Search page

        +

        Note: If the My Sidebar Search tab contains a list of search engines +from which to choose, then it is set to search in Advanced mode and you will +have to choose one or more search engines before clicking Search. You can keep +it that way or change to a basic setting in Preferences. +

        Tip: To display the next or previous page of search results quickly, +click the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the My Sidebar Search tab. +

         

        + +

        Searching from the Net Search page

        The Net Search page lets you type in a Search term or phrase, or explore several - categories (such as Arts & Entertainment, Business, and many more) that may - interest you. To visit the Net Search page, perform one of these steps:

        +categories (such as Arts & Entertainment, Business, and many more) that may +interest you. To visit the Net Search page, perform one of these steps:

          - -
        • Click on the Search button - on the Personal Toolbar. - -
        • Open the Search menu and choose Search the Web. -
        +
      33. Click on the Search button search button +on the Personal Toolbar. +
      34. Open the Tools menu and choose Search the Web. +

         

        + + + + +

        Searching on Selected Words +in a Web Page

        +

        Mozilla allows you to search for words you select within a web page:

        +
          +
        1. Select (highlight) any words in a web page.
          2. +
        2. Right-click and choose "Web Search for [your selected words]" for +the menu. (To right-click on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse button.) +
          3. +
        +

        Mozilla opens a new window and uses your default search engine to search +for your selected words. To learn how to change the search engine used to search +for your selected words, see Navigator +Preferences - Internet Search.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -381,26 +456,22 @@ you.
      35. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
      36. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
      37. Under My Sidebar Search Preferences, click Advanced, and then OK. - +
      38. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Navigator to expand the list.) +
      39. Under Sidebar Search Tab Preferences, click Advanced, and then OK.
      40. If it is not already open, open My Sidebar by clicking its handle.
      41. Click the Search tab in My Sidebar. -
      42. Open the "within" drop-down list, and choose a category (such as music or - shopping).
        43. -
      43. Choose one or more search engines for the selected category. - +
      44. Open the "within" drop-down list, and choose a category.
        45. +
      45. Choose one or more search engines for the selected category (if available).
      46. In the search field, type the word for which you want to search.
      47. Click Search.
        48. -

          My Side Bar Search on Madonna +

          My Side Bar Search

        -

        To save the results of a search, click the "Bookmark this Search" - button. To return to the list later, Open the Bookmarks menu. Your search results - appear in one of the folders in your list of bookmarks. +

         

        +

        Customizing Search Categories

        You can specify which search engines should be used for different categories of searches. For example, you can select one set of search engines to search @@ -419,9 +490,8 @@ you.

      48. From the Categories drop-down list, choose the category you want to customize.
        Or
        - To create a new category, click New and type a name for the category. The - drop-down list displays the name of the selected category. - +To create a new category, click New and type a name for the category in the dialog +box. The drop-down list now displays the name of the selected category.
      49. Do one of the following:
          50. @@ -436,47 +506,27 @@ you.
        • Click OK when you are finished customizing.

          • [ Return to beginning of section ]

          -

           

          - -

          Bookmarking Search Results

          -

          To save your search results as bookmarks, begin from the Navigator window: -

            - -
          1. Perform a search from the Location Bar or from - the My Sidebar Search tab. - -
          2. After the search results are displayed in My Sidebar, click "Bookmark - this Search" in the My Sidebar Search tab. - -
          3. Open the Bookmarks menu. Your search results appear in one of the folders - in your list of bookmarks. For instance, if you searched for "toy car," your - bookmark list contains a folder labeled "Search: 'toy car'" containing bookmarks - for web pages about toy cars. -
          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +

           

          Setting Search Preferences

          -

          By default, when you click Search, the Netscape - Search search engine is used. You can choose a different search engine as - the default. You can also specify how you want search results displayed in My - Sidebar.

          +

          You can choose a different search engine as the default. You can also specify +how you want search results displayed in My Sidebar.

          1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
          2. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
          3. Under the Navigator category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click the Navigator to expand the list.)
          4. Under Default Search Engine, choose a search engine you want to use for web searching. -
          5. Under Search Results, select "Open the Search tab in My Sidebar when - search results are available" if you want the My Sidebar search tab to - open and show your search results. - -
          6. Under My Sidebar Search Tab Preference, select Basic if you want to search - using a single search engine, or select Advanced to be able to search using - multiple search engines. +
          7. Under Search Results, select "Open the Search tab in the Sidebar when +search results are available" if you want the My Sidebar search tab to open +and show your search results. +
          8. Under Sidebar Search Tab Preference, select Basic if you want to search using +a single search engine, or select Advanced to be able to search using multiple +search engines.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          @@ -515,6 +565,7 @@ you.

          If typing Internet Keywords into the Location Bar is not working for you, check your Smart Browsing preferences to be sure the Internet Keywords feature is enabled.

          +

           

          Quick Stock Quotes

          To see a recent stock quote for a company, type "quote" followed by the company's stock ticker symbol, and press Enter.

          @@ -523,65 +574,17 @@ you. the one for which you want a quote.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - -

          Finding Related Pages

          -

          Whenever you visit a web page, your browser generates a list of related pages - for you to consider. The What's Related list is displayed in My Sidebar.

          -
        - - - - - - -
        Closed My Sidebar - - -

        If it is not already open, open My Sidebar by clicking its handle. If - the handle is missing, select View and then My Sidebar.

        -
        -

        Note: The What's Related list may be closed, so that only its tab is showing. - To open it, click its tab. If the What's Related tab is not visible, you - must add it to My Sidebar.

        -

        To visit one of the web pages in the What's Related list, double-click its - link.

        -

         

        - -

        Smart Browsing Preferences

        -

        If you prefer not to use What's Related or Internet Keywords, you can turn - these features off.

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under the Navigator category, click Smart Browsing. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
        3. Under "What's Related Sidebar Tab," list any domains for which you do - not want What's Related information, and then click Add. Domain names are - the part of a URL that contains the name of an organization, business, or - school—such as netscape.com or un.org. - -
        4. Under Internet Keywords, deselect "Enable Internet Keywords." -
        -

        What's Related works by gathering information on the browsing habits of a huge - number of Internet users. If you do not wish What's Related information to be - gathered in conjunction with your browsing, you can disable What's Related by - turning off or removing the What's Related tab from My Sidebar. See Removing - My Sidebar Tabs.

        -

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

        -

         

        Searching Within a Page

        To find text within the page you are currently viewing in Navigator:

          -
        1. Open the Search menu and choose "Find in This Page". If the page - you are viewing contains frames, you may need to click within a frame before - you begin your search. You see the "Find in this Page" dialog box. +
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose "Find in This Page". If the page +you are viewing contains frames, you may need to click within a frame before +you begin your search. You see the "Find in this Page" dialog box.
          3. +
        3. Type the text you want to find.
          4. -
        4. Type the text you want to find. - -
        5. Choose from the following search options: +
        6. Choose from the following search options:
            7. @@ -589,21 +592,19 @@ you. that matches the word you typed exactly (including uppercase and lowercase letters). -
          • Wrap around: Choose this to allow the browser to search from - the cursors's insertion point to the bottom of the page and then continue searching from the - top of the page. Note: Normally, the page is searched from the place where - you last clicked your mouse to the bottom of the page. - +
          • Wrap around: Choose this to allow the browser to search from the where +the cursor is to the bottom of the page and then continue searching from the +top of the page. Note: Normally, the page is searched from the place where you +last clicked your mouse to the bottom of the page.
          • Search backwards: Choose this to search from the insertion point - backwards to the top of the page. - + backwards to the top of the page.
        7. Click Find to begin the search.

        To find the same word or phrase again:

          -
        • Open the Search menu and choose Find Again. +
        • Open the Edit menu and choose Find Again.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        @@ -612,12 +613,10 @@ you.

        To search the bookmarks list, begin from the Navigator window:

          -
        1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. You see your Manage - Bookmarks window. - -
        2. In the Bookmarks window, open the Edit menu and choose Find Bookmarks. You - see the Find Bookmarks dialog box. - +
        3. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. You see your Bookmarks +window. +
        4. In the Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Search Bookmarks. +You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
        5. Use the drop-down lists to select options to define your search. @@ -626,32 +625,28 @@ you.
        6. Click Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed in the Search Results-Bookmarks window.
        -

        Tip: To quickly open your Bookmarks menu, press Ctrl key and B at the - same time.

        +

        Tip: To quickly open your Bookmarks menu, press Ctrl+B.

        To search the History list:

          -
        1. Open the Tasks menu, choose Tools, and then choose History. You see the - History list. - -
        2. In the History list, open the Edit menu and choose Search History. You - see the Find in History dialog box.
          3. +
        3. Open the Go menu and choose History. You see the history list. +
        4. In the History list, open the Tools menu and choose Search History. You see +the Find in History dialog box.
        5. Use the drop-down lists to select options to define your search.
        6. Choose from the following search options:
          -
        • Choose either "title," "location," "name," "description," or "keyword" to choose where you would like to search. (History list allows searching for title and location only.) +
        • Choose "title" or "location" to choose where you would +like to search. (The bookmarks window allows searching "name," "description," +and "keyword".)
        • Choose "contains," "starts with," or "ends with" if you know only part of - the word or phrase for which you're searching. - -
          • +the word or phrase for which you're searching.
        • Choose "is" if you know exactly what you're searching for. -
        • Choose "is not" or "doesn't contain" to exclude pages.
          • -
        • Click in the field and type all or part of name or URL (web address) for - the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude.
          • +
        • Click in the field and type all or part of word or URL (web address) for +the bookmarks or history listings that you want to find or exclude.
        1. Click Find. History listings that match your search criteria are displayed @@ -664,19 +659,23 @@ you.

          Tips:

            -
          • To quickly open the History list, press Ctrl+H.
            • -
          • If the list is hard to read, try expanding the Search Bookmarks/History list. -
            • +
          • To open the History list quickly, press Ctrl+H.
            • +
          • If the list is hard to read, try expanding the Search Results window.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - - - +
          + + + + + + +

          Copying, Saving, and Printing Pages

           

          - +
          @@ -701,14 +700,13 @@ you.
        2. Open the Edit menu and choose Copy.

          You can paste the text into other programs.

          -

          To copy a link (URL) or an image from a page:

          +

          To copy a link (URL) or an image link from a page:

          1. Position the pointer over the link or image.
          2. Right-click the link or image to display a pop-up menu. (On Mac OS, press - the Ctrl and click the mouse button.) - +Ctrl and click the mouse button.)
          3. Choose Copy Link Location or Copy Image Location. If an image is also a link, you are offered both options.
          @@ -716,20 +714,33 @@ you.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          + +

          Saving All or Part of a Page

          To save an entire page, begin from the Navigator window:

            - -
          1. Open the File menu and choose Save As. You see the Save File dialog box. - +
          2. Open the File menu and choose Save Page As. You see the Save As dialog box.
          3. Choose a folder in which to save this file. - -
          4. Type a name for the page and click Save. +
          5. Choose a format for the page you want to save:
            6. +
              +
            • Web Page, Complete: Save the whole web page, along with pictures. +This option allows you to view it as originally shown with pictures, but may +not keep the HTML link structure of the original page. Mozilla creates a new +directory (where the page is saved) to save pictures and other files necessary +to show the whole web page.
              • +
            • Web Page, HTML Only: Save the original page without pictures. This +options preserves the original HTML link structure in one file.
              • +
            • Text file: Save the original page as a text file. This option will +not preserve the original HTML link structure, but will allow you to see a text +version of the web page in any text editor.
              +
              • +
            +
          6. Type a file name for the page and click Save.
          -

          When you view a page containing frames and a frame is currently selected, the - Save Frame As option is offered in the drop-down list in addition to "Save - Page As". This lets you save only the page within the selected frame.

          +

          When you view a page containing frames and a frame is currently selected, +the Save Frame As option is offered in the drop-down list in addition to Save +Page As. This lets you save only the page within the selected frame.

          Saving a file onto your hard drive lets you view the page (or its HTML code) when you're not connected to the Internet.

          To save an image from a page:

          @@ -737,14 +748,13 @@ you.
        3. Position the mouse pointer over the image. -
        4. Right-click the image (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse - button) to display a drop-down list. - +
        5. Right-click the image (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the mouse button) +to display a pop-up menu.
        6. Choose Save Image As. You see the Save File dialog box.
        7. Choose a folder in which to save this image. -
        8. Type a name for the image and click Save. +
        9. Type a file name for the image and click Save.

          To save a page without displaying it (which is useful for retrieving a nonformatted page, like a data file, that's not intended for viewing):

          @@ -752,20 +762,23 @@ you.
        10. Position the mouse pointer over the page's link. -
        11. Right-click the hyperlink on the page (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the - mouse button) to display a drop-down list. - -
        12. Choose Save Link As. You see the Save File dialog box. - +
        13. Right-click the hyperlink on the page (on Mac OS, press Ctrl and click the +mouse button) to display a pop-up menu. +
        14. Choose Save Link Target As. You see the Save File dialog box.
        15. Choose a folder in which to save this file. -
        16. Type a name for the page and click Save. +
        17. Type a file name for the page and click Save.

          Important: Some links automatically download and save files to your - hard drive after you click them. The URLs for these links often begin with "ftp" - or end with a file-type extension such as "au" or "mpeg." These links might - transmit software, sound, or movie files, and can launch helper applications - that support the files.

          +hard drive after you click them. The URLs for these links often begin with "ftp" +or end with a file-type extension such as "au" or "mpeg." These links might transmit +software, sound, or movie files, and can launch helper applications that support +the files.

          + + + +

          Tip: To set an image as your desktop wallpaper on Windows, right-click +on an image and choose Set As Wallpaper from the pop-up menu.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          @@ -773,19 +786,143 @@ you.

          Printing a Page

          To print the current page, begin from the Navigator window:

            -
          • Open the File menu and choose Print.
          -

          The size of the printed page, not the size of the on-screen window, determines - placement of content on the printed page. Text is wrapped and graphics are repositioned - to accommodate paper size.

          +

          To print selected text, begin from the Navigator window:

          +
            +
          • Select the text in the current page.
            • +
          • Open the File menu and choose Print. The print dialog box appears.
            • +
          • Under Print Range, click Selection.
            • +
          +

          The size of the printed page, not the size of the onscreen window, determines +placement of content on the printed page. Text is wrapped and graphics are repositioned +to accommodate paper size.

          +

           

          + + +

          Using Print Preview

          +

          To have an early look at how a page will look before it is printed, you can +use Print Preview. Begin from the Navigator window:

          +
            +
          • +

            From Navigator, open the File menu and choose Print Preview.

            +
          +

          In Print Preview, you can do the following with pages you want to print:

          +
            +
          • View a preview of each page: Click the Next next button, +Previous previous button, +First first button, +or Last last buttonbutton +to move between pages.
            • +
          • Change the scale (size) of pages: In the Scale field, type in a percentage +of the original size and Press Enter (Return on Mac OS). For example, type "50" +and press Enter to make each page half the size of the original page. Click the +Up up button +or Down down button +button to resize up or down by an increment of one, respectively.
            • +
          • Change the direction of the page: Choose Portrait portrait button to position the page normally, with the shorter +side facing up. Choose Landscape landscape button to position the page sideways, with the longer +side facing up.
            • +
          • Go to Page Setup: Click Page Setup to further customize pages you +want to print.
            • +
          • Go to Print: Click Print to print pages.
            • +
          +

          Note: Some Print Preview functions are different or unavailable on +Mac OS and Linux.

          +

           

          + +

          Using Page Setup

          +

          Note: Some Page Setup functions are different or unavailable on Mac OS +and Linux.

          +

          To customize how pages are printed in Mozilla, you can use Page Setup:

          +
            +
          • +

            From Navigator, open the File menu and choose Page Setup.

            +
            • +
          +

          In Page Setup, you can change the following settings for pages you want to +print:

          +
            +
          • Format & Options: Choose the orientation, scale, and other options: +
            • +
              +
            • Orientation: +
                +
              • Portrait: Choose this portrait button to position the page normally, with the shorter +side facing up.
                • +
              • Landscape: Choose this landscape button to position the page sideways, with the longer +side facing up.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • Scale: Type in a percentage of the original size. For example, type +"50" and to make each page half the size of the original page. +
                +
              • Shrink To Fit Page Width: Select this to automatically resize the +page to the width of the paper.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • Options: +
                +
              • Print Background (colors and images): Select this to print background +images and colors. If unselected, only pictures and color in the foreground (in +front) are printed.
                • +
              +
              • +
            +
          • Margins & Header/Footer: Click this tab to set up margins, headers, +and footers:
            • +
              +
            • Margins: +
                +
              • Top, Bottom, Left, Right: Type a margin in inches for the top, bottom, +left, and right margin.
                • +
              +
              • +
            • Headers & Footers: Each drop-down list represents either a header +or a footer area. The top row of drop-down lists are for the left, center, and +right header areas. The bottom row are for the left, center, and right footer +areas. In each drop-dop list, choose one of the following options:
              • +
                +
              • --blank--: Show nothing in this area.
                • +
              • Title: Show the web page title.
                • +
              • URL: Show the web page URL (URL's usually start with "http://").
                • +
              • Date/Time: Show the date and time when the web page is printed.
                • +
              • Page #: Show the page number of each page. For example,
                • +
              • Page # of #: Show the page number along with the total number of +pages. For example, if you print a five page web page, "3 of 5" would +be shown on the third page.
                • +
              • Custom: Type your own text. You can include any of the following +codes to print specific information: +
                  +
                • &PT: Page Number with Total (Example: "3 of 5")
                  +
                  • +
                • &P: Page Number
                  +
                  • +
                • &D: Date
                  +
                  • +
                • &U: URL
                  +
                  • +
                • &T: Page Title
                  • +
                +
                • +
              +
            +
          +

          Tip: To see a preview of changes made to Page Setup, use Print +Preview.

          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ] +

           

          - -
          + +

          Using Languages and International Content

           

          -
          18. +
          @@ -804,23 +941,24 @@ you.

          If you browse, compose, or send and receive email in more than one language, you need to select the appropriate character codings and fonts.

          A character coding method is the way a document or message has been converted - to data to be used by your computer. All web documents and mail and news messages - use a character coding method (also known as a character encoding or character - set).

          +to data to be used by your computer. All web documents and mail and news messages +use a character-coding method (also known as a character encoding or character +set).

          The character coding method for a document depends on its language. Some languages—such as most of the Western languages—share the same coding method. Others, such as Chinese, Japanese, and Russian, use different methods.

          Your version of Mozilla is set to a default character coding appropriate - for your region. However, if you use more than one language you may need to - select appropriate character coding methods and designate the fonts you wish - to use for your coding method.

          +for your region. However, if you use more than one language, you may need to +select appropriate character-coding methods and designate the fonts you wish +to use for your coding method.

          To select character codings, begin from the Navigator window:

          1. Open the View menu, choose Character Coding, and then choose More.
          2. Choose a region from the top section of the submenu.
            3. -
          3. Choose a character coding within the region submenu. Repeat steps 1-3 for each character coding method you want.
            4. +
          4. Choose a character coding within the region submenu. Repeat steps 1-3 for +each character-coding method you want.

          The character coding methods you select are added to the Character Coding menu. If you have more than one coding method selected, the active one has a bullet @@ -831,8 +969,7 @@ you.

        18. Open the View menu, choose Character Coding, and then choose Auto-Detect. -
        19. Choose one of the Auto-Detect options, or choose Auto-Detect Off from the - submenu. +
        20. Choose one of the Auto-Detect options, or choose Off from the submenu.

          To make changes to your list of active character sets:

            @@ -840,7 +977,7 @@ you.
          1. Open the View menu, choose Character Coding, and then choose Customize. You can see the Customize Coding dialog box. -
          2. Choose from the following procedures: +
          3. Choose from the following procedures:
              4. @@ -861,15 +998,14 @@ you.
            • Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
            • Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
            • Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
            • From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a character coding method. For instance, to set default fonts for the Western character set, choose "Western." -
            • Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or sansserif - (like Arial). You can also specify what font size you want for proportional - text. Proportional text varies in width. - +
            • Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or sans +serif (like Arial). You can also specify what font size you want for proportional +text. Proportional text varies in width.
            • (If available) Select a font for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, and Fantasy.
            • Select the monospace font (like Courier) that you want to use for web pages. @@ -885,6 +1021,7 @@ you.

              [ Return to beginning of section ]

               

              +

              Setting Language Preferences

              The language you use for Mozilla affects the text of buttons, dialog boxes, @@ -892,18 +1029,12 @@ you. same.

              To set your preferred language:

                -
              1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
              2. Click on the Appearance category. - -
              3. Use the "Choose your preferred language for Mozilla" drop-down - list to select the language that you want to use in Mozilla. - +
              4. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.) +
              5. Under "Installed languages packs" select a language pack.
              6. Click OK. - -

                Note: You must restart Mozilla after you change your preferred - language.

                +

                Note: You must restart Mozilla after you change your preferred language.

              The content pack you use affects the home page, bookmarks, toolbar contents, My Sidebar, and other items.

              @@ -911,52 +1042,51 @@ you.
              1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
                2. -
              2. Under the Appearance category, click Content Packs. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)
                3. -
              3. Under "Installed Content Packs" select a content pack.
                4. +
              4. Under the Appearance category, click Languages/Content. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
                5. +
              5. Under "Installed content packs" select a content pack.
              6. Click OK. -

                Note: You will have to need to restart Mozilla after you change - to another content pack. To download more content packs for Mozilla, click "Download - More".

                +

                Note: You will have to need to restart Mozilla after you change to +another content pack.

              +

              Tip: To download more language packs or content packs, click Download +More.

              Web pages are sometimes available in several languages. Mozilla presents - pages in the language you prefer, if it is available. You can specify the languages - you wish to see, in order of preference.

              +pages in the language you prefer, if it is available. You can specify the languages +you wish to see, in order of preference.

              To set language preferences:

                -
              1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
              2. Under the Navigator category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
              3. Click Add. You see the Add Language dialog box. - +
              4. Under the Navigator category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Navigator to expand the list.) +
              5. Click Add. You see the Add Languages dialog box.
              6. Select a language and its code. If you wish to add a code not on the list, - type the language and its code in the Others field (see note, below). If you - want to reorder the languages in the list, select a language and click Move - Up or Move Down. - +type the language and its code in the Others field (see note below). If you want +to reorder the languages in the list, select a language and click Move Up or +Move Down.
              7. Click OK.

              Note: Two-letter codes enclosed in brackets appear next to each language - in the list. These are standard abbreviations for languages. For a complete - list, go to this web page:

              -

              -http://www.ics.uci.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639.txt

              +in the list. These are standard abbreviations for languages. For a complete list, +see the online document, Codes +for the Representation of Names of Languages.

              [ Return to beginning of section ]

               

              Finding International Web Content

              -

              For information about Mozilla in multiple languages, see International +

              For information about Mozilla in multiple languages, see the online document +International Users Page.

              [ Return to beginning of section ]

               

              - +
              +

              Improving Speed and Efficiency

               

              -
          21. +
          @@ -976,127 +1106,225 @@ Users Page.

           

          + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

          Managing Different File Types

          Navigator can handle many types of files. However, for some files, such as - movies, Navigator launches a "helper" application that can handle the file, - or it saves the file for you to view later.

          +movies or music, Navigator needs plug-ins or "helper" applications that can handle +those files. If Mozilla doesn't have the needed helper application or plug-in, +it can still save the file to your hard disk. When saving files, you can keep +track of them using Download Manager.

          +

           

          +

          Plug-ins

          +

          Plug-ins are helper applications that extend the functionality within Navigator +and run within Mozilla. Plug-ins like Sun Java, Macromedia Flash, and RealNetworks +RealPlayer allow Mozilla to show multimedia files and run small applications, +such as movies, animations, and games.

          +

          When you installed Mozilla, you had the option of adding some of these most +popular plug-ins. You don't have to install them separately. However, you can +also install plug-ins after you install Mozilla. To see the plug-ins for Mozilla +that are currently installed, see the online web page, Netscape +Plug-in Manager.

          +

          To see a full list of Mozilla plug-ins you can install, see the Browser +Plug-ins page at Netscape.

          +

           

          +

          Helper Applications

          +

          When files can not be used within Mozilla, you have to option to launch +helper applications that open outside of Mozilla. For example, to play MP3 files, +programs like Winamp can be opened outside of Mozilla.

          The settings in the Helper Applications preferences panel tell Navigator which - helper applications to use on your computer. You probably don't need to change - them because they come preconfigured. Also, if Navigator doesn't know which - helper application to use, it allows you to find helper applications within - the download dialog box.

          +helper applications to use on your computer. Usually, these preferences don't +need to be changed since they are preconfigured. Also, if Navigator doesn't know +which helper application to use, it allows you to find helper applications within +the download dialog box.

          The download dialog box has these options:

            - -
          • Open using: Mozilla opens the file using the default program in - your system settings.
            • +
          • Open using: Mozilla opens the file using the default program in your +system settings.
          • Choose: Mozilla allows you to open the file using an application - you choose.
            • -
          • Save this file to Disk: Mozilla allows you to select a location - to save the file.
            • +you choose. +
          • Save this file to disk: Mozilla allows you to select a location to +save the file.
          • Always ask before opening this type of file: When this is selected, - Mozilla opens the download dialog box when downloading a particular file - type. You can reset these choices afterwards in preferences for Helper Applications.
            • +Mozilla opens the download dialog box when downloading a particular file type. +You can reset these choices afterwards in preferences +for Helper Applications.
          • Advanced: Mozilla allows you to fine-tune how files are handled. - See "To add a new helper application to the list" - for details. -

            -
            • +See "To add a new helper application to the list" +for details.
          +

          Tip: You can clear your saved options for "Always ask before opening +this type of file" in preference. For more information, see Navigator +Preferences - Helper Applications.

          For experienced users to fine-tune the Helper Applications preferences:

            -
          1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
          2. Under the Navigator category, click Helper Applications. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
          3. Under the Navigator category, click Helper Applications. (If no subcategories +are visible, double-click the Navigator to expand the list.)
          4. Perform any of the following procedures: -

            To add a new helper application to the list:

              -
            1. Click New Type. You see the New type dialog box.
              2. -
            2. Type a description of the type of files the application works with; - for instance, "movies" or "sound files."
              3. -
            3. Type the file extension (suffix) used by this file type. If this type - of file uses more than one extension, type them all, separated by spaces. -
              4. +
            4. Type a description of the type of files the application works with; for instance, +"movies" or "sound files."
              5. +
            5. Type the file extension (suffix) used by this file type. If this type of +file uses more than one extension, type them all, separated by spaces.
            6. Type the MIME type. MIME types consist of two words separated by a slash. - For instance, a TIFF image file's MIME type is "image/tiff".
              - Note: When you download a file, Mozilla will show you the MIME - type on the download dialog box.
              7. -
            7. Click Choose, then select an application that handles files of this - type.
              8. +For instance, a TIFF image file's MIME type is "image/tiff".
              +Note: When you download a file, Mozilla will show you the MIME type on +the download dialog box. +
            8. Click Choose, then select an application that handles files of this type. +
            9. Click OK.

            To specify how Navigator should handle downloaded files:

              -
            1. Select a file type from the list and click Edit.
              2. -
            2. Choose a "Handled By" option to have downloaded files saved on your - hard disk or opened in an application that you specify. Click Choose to - specify the application.
              3. -
            3. Select "Ask me before opening downloaded files of this type" if you - want to be notified before downloading files that are handled by applications - other than Navigator.
              4. +
            4. Type in the MIME type you want this file to use.
              5. +
            5. Choose a "Handled By" option to have downloaded files saved on your hard +disk or opened in an application that you specify. Click Choose to specify the +application.
            6. Click OK.

            To remove an item from the list:

              -
            1. Select a file type from the list and click Remove.
            2. Click OK.
          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +

          To learn more about Helper Application preferences, see Navigator +Preferences - Helper Applications.

           

          - - + +

          Download Manager

          +

          You can use Download Manager to keep track of files you download. Download +Manager shows the following information:

          +
            +
          • filename
            • +
          • time remaining before download is complete
            • +
          • transfer speed
            • +
          • percent complete
            • +
          • time elapsed
            • +
          • web location (source)
            • +
          +

          To open Download Manager, do the following:

          +
            +
          • Open the Tools menu and choose Download Manager.
            • +
          +

          The following menu options are available in Download Manager:

          +
            +
          • Properties: Select a file being downloaded and click Properties to +show the progress dialog box.
            • +
          • Cancel: Select a file being downloaded and click Cancel to stop the +download.
            • +
          • Remove from List: Select a file and click Remove from List to remove +a canceled or finished download. This will not delete the file from your hard +disk.
            • +
          • Launch File: Click this to open a selected file.
            • +
          • Show in Explorer: Click this to show the location of a selected file.
            +Note: Show in Explorer appears as Show in Browser on Linux, and Show in +Finder on Mac OS.
            • +
          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +

           

          + +

          Making Mozilla Your Default Browser

          -

          [new content to be added]

          +

          Note: This section discusses settings and features present only on +Windows.

          +

          Mozilla is best known for displaying web pages, both on the Internet and +on your computer. To easily open web pages, you can make Mozilla your default +browser.

          +

           

          +

          Common Internet Files and Protocols

          +

          Making Mozilla your default browser allows it to automatically open common +file formats and protocols used on the Internet. Common Internet file formats +and protocols include the following:

          +
            +
          • +

            Image Files:

            +
              +
            • +

              JPEG, GIF, PNG, and MNG

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          • +

            Internet Document and Language Files:

            +
              +
            • +

              HTML, XML, XHTML, +and XUL

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          • +

            Internet Protocols:

            +
              +
            • +

              HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, +Chrome, Gopher
              +

              +
              • +
            +
            • +
          +

           

          +

          Changing Default Browser Settings Automatically

          +

          After installation is finished, Mozilla checks to see if it is the default +browser for any of the common Internet file formats or protocols. If it isn't, +you are asked, "Mozilla is not currently set as your default browser. Would +you like to make it your default browser?"

          +

          Click Yes to make Mozilla the default browser. If you click No, you will +be prompted with this question each time Mozilla starts, unless you deselect +the checkbox "Check at startup next time, too."

          +

          If you deselect the checkbox, "Check at startup next time, too," +you can still make Mozilla the default browser by changing your settings in +Preferences. To learn how to set Mozilla as the default browser through Mozilla +preferences, see Navigator +Preferences - Navigator.

          +

          Customizing Default Browser Settings

          +

          You can manually customize how Mozilla handles various file formats and protocols. +For more information, see Advanced +Preferences - System.

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          -

          + + +

          Automatic Loading

          -

          [Section needs revision]

          When you bring a web page to your screen, Mozilla automatically loads (starts - up) several features that help interpret web pages. These features can make - web pages more lively, but they take time to load.

          -

          To turn off automatic loading:

          -
            - -
          1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
          2. Click the Advanced category. - -
          3. To load pages faster, deselect one or all: - -
              - -
            • Enable Java: Allows Java applets (small programs that add functionality - to pages) to run automatically. - -
            • Enable JavaScript for Navigator: Allows JavaScript (commands - that add functionality to pages) to run automatically. - -
            • Enable JavaScript for Mail & Newsgroups: Allows JavaScript to run - automatically for Mail & Newsgroups. - -
            -
          -

          To save time typing your password when you use "anonymous" as your user ID - for an FTP site, choose "Send this email address as anonymous FTP password." Choosing - this option transmits your email address automatically when you log on to a - public FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site. FTP sites are used for transferring - files.

          -

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

          +up) several features that help interpret web pages. These features, Java and +JavaScript, can make web pages more lively, but they take time to load.

          +

          To learn how to turn off Java, see Advanced +Preferences - Advanced.

          +

          To learn how to turn off JavaScript, see Advanced +Preferences - Scripts & Windows.

          +

          [ Return to beginning of section ]

           

          - + + + +

          Changing Cache Settings

          Your computer stores copies of frequently accessed pages in the memory cache or disk cache. This way, the computer doesn't have to retrieve the page from @@ -1106,8 +1334,8 @@ Users Page.

        21. Open the Edit menu and click Preferences. -
        22. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
        23. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
        24. Enter a number in the Memory Cache field to specify the size of the memory cache. 1024K to 2000K is a good size. To clear the memory cache immediately, click Clear Memory Cache. @@ -1119,8 +1347,8 @@ Users Page.

        25. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        26. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
        27. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
        28. Enter a number in the Disk Cache field to specify the size of the disk cache. 8000K on Windows is sufficient (5000K on Unix). To clear the disk cache immediately, click Clear Disk Cache. @@ -1135,111 +1363,104 @@ Users Page.

        29. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        30. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - +
        31. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
        32. Choose from the following options:
          -
        • Every time I view the page: Select this if you want Mozilla - to compare a web page to the cache every time you view it.
          • -
        • Automatically: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare a - web page to the cache when the page is determined by the server to have expired.
          • -
        • Once per session: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare - a web page to the cache once for each time you start Mozilla.
          • -
        • Never: Select this if you do not want Mozilla to compare cached - information to the network.
          • +
        • Every time I view the page: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare +a web page to the cache every time you view it.
          +
          • +
        • When the page is out of date: Select this if you want Mozilla to +compare a web page to the cache when the page is determined by the server to +have expired.
          +
          • +
        • Once per session: Select this if you want Mozilla to compare a web +page to the cache once for each time you start Mozilla.
          +
          • +
        • Never: Select this if you do not want Mozilla to compare cached information +to the network.
          +

        If pages that should be in the cache are taking longer to appear than they should, make sure the preference is not set to "Every time I view the page," because the verification requires a network connection that takes time.

        To refresh a page at any time:

          - -
        • Click the Reload button in the browser's navigation toolbar. The computer - checks the network to make sure you have the latest version of the page. -
        -

        To retrieve a fresh copy of a page regardless of what's in the cache:

        -
          - -
        • Hold down the Shift key (Option key on Mac OS) and click Reload. +
        • Click the Reload button in the browser's Navigation Toolbar. The computer +checks the network to make sure you have the latest version of the page.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        +

        Getting the Latest Software Automatically

        Mozilla can notify you when updates for your software are available, and - it can install the updates automatically.

        -

        You can specify how you want Mozilla to handle automatic software installation:

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          2. -
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.)
          3. -
        3. Select "Enable software installation" if you want Mozilla - 6 to prompt you automatically when you need new software installed.
          4. -
        +it can install the updates automatically. Mozilla can also inform you when a +new version of Mozilla is available.

        +

        To learn about setting up automatic software installation, see Advanced +Preferences - Software Installation.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        Using a Mouse Wheel

        -

        If you use a mouse wheel, you can control how the mouse wheel's button functions.

        -
          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
        3. Use the drop-down list to choose a key that you want to press when using - the mouse wheel. - -
        4. Select one of the radio buttons in order to choose to the behavior of the - mouse wheel (for scrolling and text). -
        +

        If your mouse has a mouse wheel, you can control how the mouse wheel functions +in Mozilla.

        +

        To learn more about setting up a mouse wheel, see Advanced +Preferences - Mouse Wheel.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        -

        Using Quick Launch

        -

        Note: Quick Launch is available only on Windows installations - of Mozilla.

        +

        Note: Quick Launch is available only on Windows versions of Mozilla.

        Quick Launch shortens the time it takes for Mozilla to start. When Mozilla - uses Quick Launch, the Mozilla logo icon is present in the taskbar (near - the time). Double-clicking on this icon will quickly start Mozilla (if it isn't - started already).

        -

        Tip: To quickly start components (such as Composer, Mail & Newsgroups, and the Address Book window), right-click the Mozilla logo icon and select the component in the pop-up menu.

        -

        When you installed Mozilla, you were given the option of enabling or disabling Quick Launch. If your computer is low in memory, or if you are have more then one profile, you can temporarily or permanently disable - Quick Launch to conserve memory. If enabled, Quick Launch will start when the user starts Windows.

        -

        -

        To temporarily disable Quick Launch until you start Mozilla again:

        -
          - -
        1. Close all open Mozilla windows, including Navigator, Mail & Newsgroups, and Composer. - If you have unsaved information, you are asked if you want to save it.
          2. -
        2. Right-click on the Mozilla logo icon in the taskbar (near the time) and select "Exit Mozilla" from the pop-up menu.
          3. -
        -

        +uses Quick Launch, the Mozilla logo icon is present in the taskbar (near the +time).

        + + + + + + + +
        +
        Quick Launch Icon
        +
        +
        Mozilla Quick Launch Icon
        +
        +

        Tip: To quickly start components (such as Composer, Mail & Newsgroups, +and the Address Book window), right-click the Mozilla logo icon and select the +component in the pop-up menu.

        +

        When you installed Mozilla, you were given the option of enabling or disabling +Quick Launch. If enabled, Quick Launch loads part of Mozilla into memory when +Windows first starts (and each time Mozilla first starts up). Quick Launch allows +Mozilla to stay in memory after you close all Mozilla windows. This lets Mozilla +quickly start up when you need it, without having to load all of Mozilla. If +your computer is low in memory, you can disable Quick Launch to conserve memory.

        +


        To enable or disable Quick Launch in Mozilla:

          -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. -
        2. Click the Advanced category. - -
        3. Select "Quick Launch" to enable Quick Launch, or deselect - it to disable Quick Launch. - +
        4. Select "Keep Mozilla in memory to improve startup performance" +to enable Quick Launch, or deselect it to disable Quick Launch.
        5. Click OK. - -

          Tip: To easily disable Quick Launch, right-click on the Mozilla logo in the taskbar (near the time) and select "Disable Quick Launch" in the pop-up menu.

          +

          Tip: To easily disable Quick Launch, right-click on the Mozilla logo +in the system tray (near the time) and select "Disable Quick Launch" +in the pop-up menu.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        - +
        + +

        Proxies

         

        - +
        @@ -1271,39 +1492,50 @@ Users Page.

        To set the browser to work with the proxy:

          - -
        1. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences. - -
        2. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click the category to expand the list.) - -
        3. Select one of the following: - +
        4. Open the Edit menu and choose Preferences.
          5. +
        5. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are visible, +double-click the Navigator to expand the list.)
          6. +
        6. Select one of the following:
            7. - -
          • Direct connection to the Internet: Choose this if you don't have - to go through a proxy. - -
          • Manual proxy configuration: Choose this if you don't have a proxy - configuration file. Type the name or numeric IP address of the proxy server - for HTTP and FTP. Type each proxy server's port number in the Port field.
            • -
          • Automatic proxy configuration URL: Choose this if you have a - proxy configuration file. Type the file's URL in the field and click Reload. - +
          • Direct connection to the Internet: Choose this if you don't want to +use a proxy.
            • +
          • Manual proxy configuration: Choose this if you don't have a proxy +location (URL).
            • +
              +
            • HTTP Proxy, SSL Proxy, FTP Proxy, Gopher Proxy: Type +the name or numeric IP address of the proxy server. Type the port in the Ports +field.
              • +
            • SOCKS Host: Type the name or numeric IP address of the proxy server. +Type the port in the Ports field.
              • +
                +
              • SOCKS v4, SOCKS v5: When entering a SOCK Host, select "SOCKS +v4" or "SOCKS v5," depending on what version of SOCKS is used +for the proxy.
                • +
              +
            +
              +
            • No Proxy for: Type the domains that you do not want to use a proxy +for. Separate each domain with a comma. (Example: .yourcompany.com, .yourcompany.co.nz)
              • +
            +
          • Automatic proxy configuration URL: Choose this if you have a proxy +configuration file or URL, then type the configuration URL.
            +
        -

        (If you select Manual proxy configuration) In the "No Proxy for" field, type - the names of any domains that you can connect to directly, bypassing the proxy. - For example, if you type "netscape.com", then the proxy is bypassed each time - you view a web page from netscape.com.

        +

        Domain names are the part of a URL that contains the name of an organization, - business, or school—such as netscape.com or washington.org. If you use local - host names without the domain name, list them the same way. Use commas to separate - multiple host names. The wildcard character [*] cannot be used.

        +business, or school—such as netscape.com or washington.org. If you use local +host names without the domain name, list them the same way. Use commas to separate +multiple host names. The wildcard character [*] cannot be used.

        +

        For more information on using the Proxy preferences panel, see Advanced +Preferences - Proxies.

        [ Return to beginning of section ]

         

        -

        +


        -

        1 March 2002

        +

        19 June 2002

        +
        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

        diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.html b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.html index 2d8582e5959..046bff447b8 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.html +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.html @@ -1,92 +1,87 @@ - - - -Managing Profiles - - - - - - - - - - -

        Managing Profiles

        - -

        If you use the Internet at home and at work, you may want to have access to a different set of bookmarks, preferences, address books, email accounts, My Sidebar setup, and so on. Similarly, family members may want to share a copy of the same browser software but keep their Internet identities separate. - -

        The Profile Manager lets you create different profiles, each with its own bookmarks, preferences, email settings, and so on. You automatically create a default profile when you first install your browser software. After you create one or more additional profiles, you will be asked which you want to use each time you launch the browser.

        - -
        - - - -
        -

        In this section:

        -

        Creating a New Profile

        -

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        -
        - - -

         

        - - -

        Creating a New Profile

        - -

        To create a profile: - -

          -
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create a new profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. -
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. -
            -
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Netscape 7.0, then Profile Manager. -
          • On Mac OS, open the Netscape folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. -
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./netscape -profilemanager -
          -
        3. Click Create Profile, read the Profile description, and then click Next. -
        4. Enter a profile name. This can be anything you like, such as your real name or a name that's related to what you use the profile for, such as "School." -
        5. Accept the default location for the new profile, or click the Choose Folder button and navigate to the location you want. -
        6. If you have Language Packs or Regional Content Packs installed, click Region Selection and choose the Language/Content set you want. -
        7. Click Finish. -
        - -

        The opening screen of the Profile Manager reappears, with the new profile listed and highlighted. - -

        To set up your browser for the new profile, click Start Netscape 7.0. You'll be asked to register a screen name (if you already have one) for use with Netscape Webmail, Netscape Instant Messenger, and custom My Netscape page. If you don't have a screen name, click Register Now to get one. - -

        If you don't want to register a screen name at this time, click Cancel, and the program will open. To register a screen name while Netscape is running, open the Help menu and choose Register Netscape. - -

        As you begin using the new profile, you will be asked for additional information as you perform tasks that require it—for example, checking your email. - - -

         

        - - - -

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        - -

        You may want to delete profiles that you don't normally use. To delete or rename an existing profile: - -

          -
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create, delete, or rename a profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. - -
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. -
            -
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Netscape 7.0, then Profile Manager. -
          • On Mac OS, open the Netscape folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. -
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./netscape -profile -
          -
        3. To delete a profile, select its name and click Delete Profile. -
        4. To rename a profile, select its name, click Rename Profile, and follow the instructions. -
        - -
        - -

        18 June 2002

        - -
        -

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Netscape Communications Corporation.

        - - - + + + +Managing Profiles + + + + + + + + + + +

        Managing Profiles

        + +

        If you use the Internet at home and at work, you may want to have access to a different set of bookmarks, preferences, address books, email accounts, My Sidebar setup, and so on. Similarly, family members may want to share a copy of the same browser software but keep their Internet identities separate. + +

        The Profile Manager lets you create different profiles, each with its own bookmarks, preferences, email settings, and so on. You automatically create a default profile when you first install your browser software. After you create one or more additional profiles, you will be asked which you want to use each time you launch the browser.

        + + + + + +
        +

        In this section:

        +

        Creating a New Profile

        +

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        +
        + + +

         

        + + +

        Creating a New Profile

        + +

        To create a profile: + +

          +
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create a new profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. +
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. +
            +
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Mozilla, then Profile Manager. +
          • On Mac OS, open the Mozilla folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. +
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./mozilla -profilemanager +
          +
        3. Click Create Profile, read the Profile description, and then click Next. +
        4. Enter a profile name. This can be anything you like, such as your real name or a name that's related to what you use the profile for, such as "School." +
        5. Accept the default location for the new profile, or click the Choose Folder button and navigate to the location you want. +
        6. If you have Language Packs or Regional Content Packs installed, click Region Selection and choose the Language/Content set you want. +
        7. Click Finish. +
        + +

        The opening screen of the Profile Manager reappears, with the new profile listed and highlighted. + + + +

         

        + + + +

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        + +

        You may want to delete profiles that you don't normally use. To delete or rename an existing profile: + +

          +
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create, delete, or rename a profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. + +
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. +
            +
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Mozilla, then Profile Manager. +
          • On Mac OS, open the Mozilla folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. +
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./mozilla -profile +
          +
        3. To delete a profile, select its name and click Delete Profile. +
        4. To rename a profile, select its name, click Rename Profile, and follow the instructions. +
        + +
        + +

        18 June 2002

        + +
        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

        + + + diff --git a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.xhtml b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.xhtml index 2d8582e5959..046bff447b8 100644 --- a/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.xhtml +++ b/mozilla/extensions/help/resources/locale/en-US/profiles_help.xhtml @@ -1,92 +1,87 @@ - - - -Managing Profiles - - - - - - - - - - -

        Managing Profiles

        - -

        If you use the Internet at home and at work, you may want to have access to a different set of bookmarks, preferences, address books, email accounts, My Sidebar setup, and so on. Similarly, family members may want to share a copy of the same browser software but keep their Internet identities separate. - -

        The Profile Manager lets you create different profiles, each with its own bookmarks, preferences, email settings, and so on. You automatically create a default profile when you first install your browser software. After you create one or more additional profiles, you will be asked which you want to use each time you launch the browser.

        - - - - - -
        -

        In this section:

        -

        Creating a New Profile

        -

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        -
        - - -

         

        - - -

        Creating a New Profile

        - -

        To create a profile: - -

          -
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create a new profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. -
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. -
            -
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Netscape 7.0, then Profile Manager. -
          • On Mac OS, open the Netscape folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. -
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./netscape -profilemanager -
          -
        3. Click Create Profile, read the Profile description, and then click Next. -
        4. Enter a profile name. This can be anything you like, such as your real name or a name that's related to what you use the profile for, such as "School." -
        5. Accept the default location for the new profile, or click the Choose Folder button and navigate to the location you want. -
        6. If you have Language Packs or Regional Content Packs installed, click Region Selection and choose the Language/Content set you want. -
        7. Click Finish. -
        - -

        The opening screen of the Profile Manager reappears, with the new profile listed and highlighted. - -

        To set up your browser for the new profile, click Start Netscape 7.0. You'll be asked to register a screen name (if you already have one) for use with Netscape Webmail, Netscape Instant Messenger, and custom My Netscape page. If you don't have a screen name, click Register Now to get one. - -

        If you don't want to register a screen name at this time, click Cancel, and the program will open. To register a screen name while Netscape is running, open the Help menu and choose Register Netscape. - -

        As you begin using the new profile, you will be asked for additional information as you perform tasks that require it—for example, checking your email. - - -

         

        - - - -

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        - -

        You may want to delete profiles that you don't normally use. To delete or rename an existing profile: - -

          -
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create, delete, or rename a profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. - -
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. -
            -
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Netscape 7.0, then Profile Manager. -
          • On Mac OS, open the Netscape folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. -
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./netscape -profile -
          -
        3. To delete a profile, select its name and click Delete Profile. -
        4. To rename a profile, select its name, click Rename Profile, and follow the instructions. -
        - -
        - -

        18 June 2002

        - -
        -

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Netscape Communications Corporation.

        - - - + + + +Managing Profiles + + + + + + + + + + +

        Managing Profiles

        + +

        If you use the Internet at home and at work, you may want to have access to a different set of bookmarks, preferences, address books, email accounts, My Sidebar setup, and so on. Similarly, family members may want to share a copy of the same browser software but keep their Internet identities separate. + +

        The Profile Manager lets you create different profiles, each with its own bookmarks, preferences, email settings, and so on. You automatically create a default profile when you first install your browser software. After you create one or more additional profiles, you will be asked which you want to use each time you launch the browser.

        + + + + + +
        +

        In this section:

        +

        Creating a New Profile

        +

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        +
        + + +

         

        + + +

        Creating a New Profile

        + +

        To create a profile: + +

          +
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create a new profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. +
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. +
            +
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Mozilla, then Profile Manager. +
          • On Mac OS, open the Mozilla folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. +
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./mozilla -profilemanager +
          +
        3. Click Create Profile, read the Profile description, and then click Next. +
        4. Enter a profile name. This can be anything you like, such as your real name or a name that's related to what you use the profile for, such as "School." +
        5. Accept the default location for the new profile, or click the Choose Folder button and navigate to the location you want. +
        6. If you have Language Packs or Regional Content Packs installed, click Region Selection and choose the Language/Content set you want. +
        7. Click Finish. +
        + +

        The opening screen of the Profile Manager reappears, with the new profile listed and highlighted. + + + +

         

        + + + +

        Deleting or Renaming a Profile

        + +

        You may want to delete profiles that you don't normally use. To delete or rename an existing profile: + +

          +
        1. Exit the browser. It is not possible to create, delete, or rename a profile while the Navigator, Mail, or any other component of your browser software is running. + +
        2. Open the Profile Manager:
          3. +
            +
          • On Windows, open the Start menu and choose Programs, then Mozilla, then Profile Manager. +
          • On Mac OS, open the Mozilla folder and then double-click the Profile Manager. +
          • On Linux, type the following at the command line: ./mozilla -profile +
          +
        3. To delete a profile, select its name and click Delete Profile. +
        4. To rename a profile, select its name, click Rename Profile, and follow the instructions. +
        + +
        + +

        18 June 2002

        + +
        +

        Copyright © 1994-2002 Mozilla Organization.

        + + +